SILABS C8051F060 Mixed signal isp flash mcu family Datasheet

C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Mixed Signal ISP Flash MCU Family
High Speed 8051 µC Core
- Pipelined instruction architecture; executes 70% of
Analog Peripherals
- Two 16-Bit SAR ADCs
• 16-bit resolution
• ±0.75 LSB INL, guaranteed no missing codes
• Programmable throughput up to 1 Msps
• Operate as two single-ended or one differential con-
-
•
10-bit SAR ADC (C8051F060/1/2/3)
-
•
•
•
Programmable throughput up to 200 ksps
8 external inputs, single-ended or differential
Built-in temperature sensor
•
Can synchronize outputs to timers for jitter-free waveform generation
Two 12-bit DACs (C8051F060/1/2/3)
Three Analog Comparators
• Programmable hysteresis/response time
- Voltage Reference
- Precision VDD Monitor/Brown-Out Detector
On-Chip JTAG Debug & Boundary Scan
- On-chip debug circuitry facilitates full-speed, non-
Digital Peripherals
- 59 general purpose I/O pins (C8051F060/2/4/6)
- 24 general purpose I/O pins (C8051F061/3/5/7)
- Bosch Controller Area Network (CAN 2.0B -
ANALOGPERIPHERALS
DIGITAL I/O
Port 0
CAN 2.0B
DMA
Interface
16-bit
1 Msps
ADC
+
+ +
-
VREF
AMUX
C8051F060/1/2/3)
Hardware SMBus™ (I2C™ Compatible), SPI™, and
two UART serial ports available concurrently
Programmable 16-bit counter/timer array with
6 capture/compare modules
5 general purpose 16-bit counter/timers
Dedicated watchdog timer; bi-directional reset pin
Clock Sources
- Internal calibrated precision oscillator: 24.5 MHz
- External oscillator: Crystal, RC, C, or clock
Supply Voltage .......................... 2.7 to 3.6 V
- Multiple power saving sleep and shutdown modes
100-Pin and 64-Pin TQFP Packages Available
Temperature Range: -40 to +85 °C
intrusive in-circuit/in-system debugging
Provides breakpoints, single-stepping, watchpoints,
stack monitor; inspect/modify memory and registers
Superior performance to emulation systems using
ICE-chips, target pods, and sockets
IEEE1149.1 compliant boundary scan
Complete development kit
16-bit
1 Msps
ADC
Flash; In-system programmable in 512-byte sectors
External 64 kB data memory interface with multiplexed and non-multiplexed modes (C8051F060/2/
4/6)
10-bit
200ksps
ADC
-
-
VOLTAGE
COMPARATOR
S
TEMP
SENSOR
C8051F060/1/2/3Only
C8051F060/1/2/3
UART0
UART1
CROSSBAR
-
verter
Direct memory access; data stored in RAM without
software overhead
Data-dependent windowed interrupt generator
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
SMBus
SPI Bus
PCA
Timer 0
12-Bit
DAC
Timer 1
12-Bit
DAC
Timer 3
Timer 2
Timer 4
External Memory
Interface
•
instruction set in 1 or 2 system clocks
- Up to 25 MIPS throughput with 25 MHz clock
- Flexible Interrupt sources
Memory
- 4352 Bytes internal data RAM (4 k + 256)
- 64 kB (C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5), 32 kB (C8051F066/7)
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
100 pin Only
HIGH-SPEED CONTROLLER CORE
8051 CPU
(25MIPS)
22
INTERRUPTS
Preliminary Rev. 1.2 7/04
64/32 kB
ISP FLASH
DEBUG
CIRCUITRY
4352 B
JTAG
SRAM
CLOCK
SANITY
CIRCUIT
CONTROL
Copyright © 2004 by Silicon Laboratories
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
This information applies to a product under development. Its characteristics and specifications are subject to change without notice.
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
2
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table of Contents
1. System Overview.................................................................................................... 19
1.1. CIP-51™ Microcontroller Core.......................................................................... 25
1.1.1. Fully 8051 Compatible.............................................................................. 25
1.1.2. Improved Throughput ............................................................................... 25
1.1.3. Additional Features .................................................................................. 26
1.2. On-Chip Memory............................................................................................... 27
1.3. JTAG Debug and Boundary Scan..................................................................... 28
1.4. Programmable Digital I/O and Crossbar ........................................................... 29
1.5. Programmable Counter Array ........................................................................... 30
1.6. Controller Area Network.................................................................................... 31
1.7. Serial Ports ....................................................................................................... 32
1.8. 16-Bit Analog to Digital Converters................................................................... 33
1.9. 10-Bit Analog to Digital Converter..................................................................... 34
1.10.12-bit Digital to Analog Converters................................................................... 35
1.11.Analog Comparators......................................................................................... 36
2. Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................................. 37
3. Global DC Electrical Characteristics .................................................................... 38
4. Pinout and Package Definitions............................................................................ 39
5. 16-Bit ADCs (ADC0 and ADC1) ............................................................................. 51
5.1. Single-Ended or Differential Operation ............................................................. 52
5.1.1. Pseudo-Differential Inputs ........................................................................ 52
5.2. Voltage Reference ............................................................................................ 53
5.3. ADC Modes of Operation.................................................................................. 54
5.3.1. Starting a Conversion............................................................................... 54
5.3.2. Tracking Modes........................................................................................ 54
5.3.3. Settling Time Requirements ..................................................................... 56
5.4. Calibration......................................................................................................... 66
5.5. ADC0 Programmable Window Detector ........................................................... 69
6. Direct Memory Access Interface (DMA0) ............................................................. 75
6.1. Writing to the Instruction Buffer......................................................................... 75
6.2. DMA0 Instruction Format .................................................................................. 76
6.3. XRAM Addressing and Setup ........................................................................... 76
6.4. Instruction Execution in Mode 0........................................................................ 77
6.5. Instruction Execution in Mode 1........................................................................ 78
6.6. Interrupt Sources .............................................................................................. 79
6.7. Data Buffer Overflow Warnings and Errors....................................................... 79
7. 10-Bit ADC (ADC2, C8051F060/1/2/3).................................................................... 87
7.1. Analog Multiplexer ............................................................................................ 88
7.2. Modes of Operation .......................................................................................... 89
7.2.1. Starting a Conversion............................................................................... 89
7.2.2. Tracking Modes........................................................................................ 90
7.2.3. Settling Time Requirements ..................................................................... 91
Rev. 1.2
3
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
7.3. Programmable Window Detector ...................................................................... 97
7.3.1. Window Detector In Single-Ended Mode ................................................. 99
7.3.2. Window Detector In Differential Mode.................................................... 100
8. DACs, 12-Bit Voltage Mode (DAC0 and DAC1, C8051F060/1/2/3) .................... 103
8.1. DAC Output Scheduling.................................................................................. 104
8.1.1. Update Output On-Demand ................................................................... 104
8.1.2. Update Output Based on Timer Overflow .............................................. 104
8.2. DAC Output Scaling/Justification .................................................................... 104
9. Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F060/2) .................................................................... 111
10. Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F061/3) ................................................................... 113
11. Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F064/5/6/7) .............................................................. 115
12. Comparators ......................................................................................................... 117
12.1.Comparator Inputs.......................................................................................... 119
13. CIP-51 Microcontroller ......................................................................................... 123
13.1.Instruction Set................................................................................................. 125
13.1.1.Instruction and CPU Timing ................................................................... 125
13.1.2.MOVX Instruction and Program Memory ............................................... 125
13.2.Memory Organization ..................................................................................... 130
13.2.1.Program Memory ................................................................................... 130
13.2.2.Data Memory.......................................................................................... 131
13.2.3.General Purpose Registers.................................................................... 131
13.2.4.Bit Addressable Locations...................................................................... 131
13.2.5.Stack ..................................................................................................... 131
13.2.6.Special Function Registers .................................................................... 132
13.2.6.1.SFR Paging ................................................................................... 132
13.2.6.2.Interrupts and SFR Paging ............................................................ 132
13.2.6.3.SFR Page Stack Example ............................................................. 134
13.2.7.Register Descriptions ............................................................................. 148
13.3.Interrupt Handler............................................................................................. 151
13.3.1.MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors ...................................................... 151
13.3.2.External Interrupts.................................................................................. 151
13.3.3.Interrupt Priorities................................................................................... 153
13.3.4.Interrupt Latency .................................................................................... 153
13.3.5.Interrupt Register Descriptions............................................................... 154
13.4.Power Management Modes............................................................................ 160
13.4.1.Idle Mode ............................................................................................... 160
13.4.2.Stop Mode.............................................................................................. 161
14. Reset Sources....................................................................................................... 163
14.1.Power-on Reset.............................................................................................. 164
14.2.Power-fail Reset ............................................................................................. 164
14.3.External Reset ................................................................................................ 164
14.4.Missing Clock Detector Reset ........................................................................ 165
14.5.Comparator0 Reset ........................................................................................ 165
14.6.External CNVSTR2 Pin Reset ........................................................................ 165
14.7.Watchdog Timer Reset................................................................................... 165
4
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
14.7.1.Enable/Reset WDT ................................................................................ 166
14.7.2.Disable WDT .......................................................................................... 166
14.7.3.Disable WDT Lockout ............................................................................ 166
14.7.4.Setting WDT Interval .............................................................................. 166
15. Oscillators ............................................................................................................. 171
15.1.Programmable Internal Oscillator ................................................................... 171
15.2.External Oscillator Drive Circuit...................................................................... 173
15.3.System Clock Selection.................................................................................. 173
15.4.External Crystal Example ............................................................................... 175
15.5.External RC Example ..................................................................................... 175
15.6.External Capacitor Example ........................................................................... 175
16. Flash Memory ....................................................................................................... 177
16.1.Programming The Flash Memory ................................................................... 177
16.2.Non-volatile Data Storage .............................................................................. 178
16.3.Security Options ............................................................................................. 179
16.3.1.Summary of Flash Security Options....................................................... 183
17. External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM........................................ 187
17.1.Accessing XRAM............................................................................................ 187
17.1.1.16-Bit MOVX Example ........................................................................... 187
17.1.2.8-Bit MOVX Example ............................................................................. 187
17.2.Configuring the External Memory Interface .................................................... 188
17.3.Port Selection and Configuration.................................................................... 188
17.4.Multiplexed and Non-multiplexed Selection.................................................... 190
17.4.1.Multiplexed Configuration....................................................................... 190
17.4.2.Non-multiplexed Configuration............................................................... 191
17.5.Memory Mode Selection................................................................................. 192
17.5.1.Internal XRAM Only ............................................................................... 192
17.5.2.Split Mode without Bank Select.............................................................. 192
17.5.3.Split Mode with Bank Select................................................................... 193
17.5.4.External Only.......................................................................................... 193
17.6.Timing .......................................................................................................... 194
17.6.1.Non-multiplexed Mode ........................................................................... 196
17.6.1.1.16-bit MOVX: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘101’, ‘110’, or ‘111’......................... 196
17.6.1.2.8-bit MOVX without Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘101’ or ‘111’..... 197
17.6.1.3.8-bit MOVX with Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘110’....................... 198
17.6.2.Multiplexed Mode ................................................................................... 199
17.6.2.1.16-bit MOVX: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘001’, ‘010’, or ‘011’......................... 199
17.6.2.2.8-bit MOVX without Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘001’ or ‘011’..... 200
17.6.2.3.8-bit MOVX with Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘010’....................... 201
18. Port Input/Output.................................................................................................. 203
18.1.Ports 0 through 3 and the Priority Crossbar Decoder..................................... 205
18.1.1.Crossbar Pin Assignment and Allocation ............................................... 205
18.1.2.Configuring the Output Modes of the Port Pins...................................... 206
18.1.3.Configuring Port Pins as Digital Inputs................................................... 207
18.1.4.Weak Pull-ups ........................................................................................ 207
Rev. 1.2
5
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
18.1.5.Configuring Port 1 and 2 pins as Analog Inputs..................................... 207
18.1.6.Crossbar Pin Assignment Example........................................................ 208
18.2.Ports 4 through 7 (C8051F060/2/4/6 only) ..................................................... 219
18.2.1.Configuring Ports which are not Pinned Out .......................................... 219
18.2.2.Configuring the Output Modes of the Port Pins...................................... 219
18.2.3.Configuring Port Pins as Digital Inputs................................................... 219
18.2.4.Weak Pull-ups ........................................................................................ 219
18.2.5.External Memory Interface ..................................................................... 220
19. Controller Area Network (CAN0, C8051F060/1/2/3) ........................................... 225
19.1.Bosch CAN Controller Operation.................................................................... 227
19.2.CAN Registers................................................................................................ 228
19.2.1.CAN Controller Protocol Registers......................................................... 228
19.2.2.Message Object Interface Registers ...................................................... 228
19.2.3.Message Handler Registers................................................................... 228
19.2.4.CIP-51 MCU Special Function Registers ............................................... 229
19.2.5.Using CAN0ADR, CAN0DATH, and CANDATL To Access CAN Registers
229
19.2.6.CAN0ADR Autoincrement Feature ........................................................ 229
20. System Management BUS / I2C BUS (SMBUS0)................................................ 235
20.1.Supporting Documents ................................................................................... 236
20.2.SMBus Protocol.............................................................................................. 236
20.2.1.Arbitration............................................................................................... 237
20.2.2.Clock Low Extension.............................................................................. 237
20.2.3.SCL Low Timeout................................................................................... 237
20.2.4.SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout .......................................................... 237
20.3.SMBus Transfer Modes.................................................................................. 238
20.3.1.Master Transmitter Mode ....................................................................... 238
20.3.2.Master Receiver Mode ........................................................................... 238
20.3.3.Slave Transmitter Mode ......................................................................... 239
20.3.4.Slave Receiver Mode ............................................................................. 239
20.4.SMBus Special Function Registers ................................................................ 241
20.4.1.Control Register ..................................................................................... 241
20.4.2.Clock Rate Register ............................................................................... 244
20.4.3.Data Register ......................................................................................... 245
20.4.4.Address Register.................................................................................... 245
20.4.5.Status Register....................................................................................... 246
21. Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0)...................................................... 251
21.1.Signal Descriptions......................................................................................... 252
21.1.1.Master Out, Slave In (MOSI).................................................................. 252
21.1.2.Master In, Slave Out (MISO).................................................................. 252
21.1.3.Serial Clock (SCK) ................................................................................. 252
21.1.4.Slave Select (NSS) ................................................................................ 252
21.2.SPI0 Master Mode Operation ......................................................................... 253
21.3.SPI0 Slave Mode Operation ........................................................................... 255
21.4.SPI0 Interrupt Sources ................................................................................... 255
6
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
21.5.Serial Clock Timing......................................................................................... 256
21.6.SPI Special Function Registers ...................................................................... 258
22. UART0.................................................................................................................... 265
22.1.UART0 Operational Modes ............................................................................ 266
22.1.1.Mode 0: Synchronous Mode .................................................................. 266
22.1.2.Mode 1: 8-Bit UART, Variable Baud Rate.............................................. 267
22.1.3.Mode 2: 9-Bit UART, Fixed Baud Rate .................................................. 269
22.1.4.Mode 3: 9-Bit UART, Variable Baud Rate.............................................. 270
22.2.Multiprocessor Communications .................................................................... 271
22.2.1.Configuration of a Masked Address ....................................................... 271
22.2.2.Broadcast Addressing ............................................................................ 271
22.3.Frame and Transmission Error Detection....................................................... 272
23. UART1.................................................................................................................... 277
23.1.Enhanced Baud Rate Generation................................................................... 278
23.2.Operational Modes ......................................................................................... 279
23.2.1.8-Bit UART ............................................................................................. 279
23.2.2.9-Bit UART ............................................................................................. 280
23.3.Multiprocessor Communications .................................................................... 281
24. Timers.................................................................................................................... 287
24.1.Timer 0 and Timer 1 ....................................................................................... 287
24.1.1.Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer ................................................................ 287
24.1.2.Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer ................................................................ 289
24.1.3.Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload...................................... 289
24.1.4.Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only)................................. 290
24.2.Timer 2, Timer 3, and Timer 4 ........................................................................ 295
24.2.1.Configuring Timer 2, 3, and 4 to Count Down........................................ 295
24.2.2.Capture Mode ........................................................................................ 296
24.2.3.Auto-Reload Mode ................................................................................. 297
24.2.4.Toggle Output Mode .............................................................................. 298
25. Programmable Counter Array ............................................................................. 303
25.1.PCA Counter/Timer ........................................................................................ 304
25.2.Capture/Compare Modules ............................................................................ 305
25.2.1.Edge-triggered Capture Mode................................................................ 306
25.2.2.Software Timer (Compare) Mode........................................................... 307
25.2.3.High Speed Output Mode....................................................................... 308
25.2.4.Frequency Output Mode ........................................................................ 309
25.2.5.8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode......................................................... 310
25.2.6.16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode....................................................... 311
25.3.Register Descriptions for PCA0...................................................................... 312
26. JTAG (IEEE 1149.1) .............................................................................................. 317
26.1.Boundary Scan ............................................................................................... 318
26.1.1.EXTEST Instruction................................................................................ 321
26.1.2.SAMPLE Instruction ............................................................................... 321
26.1.3.BYPASS Instruction ............................................................................... 321
26.1.4.IDCODE Instruction................................................................................ 321
Rev. 1.2
7
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
26.2.Flash Programming Commands..................................................................... 322
26.3.Debug Support ............................................................................................... 325
27. Document Change List ........................................................................................ 327
27.1.Revision 1.1 to Revision 1.2 ........................................................................... 327
8
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
List of Figures
1. System Overview.................................................................................................... 19
Figure 1.1. C8051F060 / C8051F062 Block Diagram .............................................. 21
Figure 1.2. C8051F061 / C8051F063 Block Diagram .............................................. 22
Figure 1.3. C8051F064 / C8051F066 Block Diagram .............................................. 23
Figure 1.4. C8051F065 / C8051F067 Block Diagram .............................................. 24
Figure 1.5. Comparison of Peak MCU Execution Speeds ....................................... 25
Figure 1.6. On-Board Clock and Reset .................................................................... 26
Figure 1.7. On-Chip Memory Map............................................................................ 27
Figure 1.8. Development/In-System Debug Diagram............................................... 28
Figure 1.9. Digital Crossbar Diagram ....................................................................... 29
Figure 1.10. PCA Block Diagram.............................................................................. 30
Figure 1.11. CAN Controller Overview ..................................................................... 31
Figure 1.12. 16-Bit ADC Block Diagram ................................................................... 33
Figure 1.13. 10-Bit ADC Diagram............................................................................. 34
Figure 1.14. DAC System Block Diagram ................................................................ 35
Figure 1.15. Comparator Block Diagram .................................................................. 36
2. Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................................. 37
3. Global DC Electrical Characteristics .................................................................... 38
4. Pinout and Package Definitions............................................................................ 39
Figure 4.1. C8051F060 / C8051F062 Pinout Diagram (TQFP-100)......................... 45
Figure 4.2. C8051F064 / C8051F066 Pinout Diagram (TQFP-100)......................... 46
Figure 4.3. TQFP-100 Package Drawing ................................................................. 47
Figure 4.4. C8051F061 / C8051F063 Pinout Diagram (TQFP-64)........................... 48
Figure 4.5. C8051F065 / C8051F067 Pinout Diagram (TQFP-64)........................... 49
Figure 4.6. TQFP-64 Package Drawing ................................................................... 50
5. 16-Bit ADCs (ADC0 and ADC1) ............................................................................. 51
Figure 5.1. 16-Bit ADC0 and ADC1 Control Path Diagram ...................................... 51
Figure 5.2. 16-bit ADC0 and ADC1 Data Path Diagram .......................................... 52
Figure 5.3. Voltage Reference Block Diagram ......................................................... 53
Figure 5.4. ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing......................................... 55
Figure 5.5. ADC0 and ADC1 Equivalent Input Circuits ............................................ 56
Figure 5.6. AMX0SL: AMUX Configuration Register................................................ 57
Figure 5.7. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration Register ................................................ 58
Figure 5.8. ADC1CF: ADC1 Configuration Register ................................................ 59
Figure 5.9. ADC0CN: ADC0 Control Register.......................................................... 60
Figure 5.10. ADC1CN: ADC1 Control Register ........................................................ 61
Figure 5.11. REF0CN: Reference Control Register 0 .............................................. 62
Figure 5.12. REF1CN: Reference Control Register 1 .............................................. 62
Figure 5.13. ADC0H: ADC0 Data Word MSB Register ............................................ 63
Figure 5.14. ADC0L: ADC0 Data Word LSB Register.............................................. 63
Figure 5.15. ADC0 Data Word Example................................................................... 64
Figure 5.16. ADC1H: ADC1 Data Word MSB Register ............................................ 65
Rev. 1.2
9
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.17. ADC1L: ADC1 Data Word LSB Register.............................................. 65
Figure 5.18. ADC1 Data Word Example................................................................... 65
Figure 5.19. Calibration Coefficient Locations.......................................................... 66
Figure 5.20. Offset and Gain Register Mapping ....................................................... 67
Figure 5.21. Offset and Gain Calibration Block Diagram.......................................... 67
Figure 5.22. ADC0CPT: ADC Calibration Pointer Register ...................................... 68
Figure 5.23. ADC0CCF: ADC Calibration Coefficient Register ................................ 68
Figure 5.24. ADC0GTH: ADC0 Greater-Than Data High Byte Register .................. 69
Figure 5.25. ADC0GTL: ADC0 Greater-Than Data Low Byte Register.................... 69
Figure 5.26. ADC0LTH: ADC0 Less-Than Data High Byte Register........................ 70
Figure 5.27. ADC0LTL: ADC0 Less-Than Data Low Byte Register ......................... 70
Figure 5.28. 16-Bit ADC0 Window Interrupt Example: Single-Ended Data .............. 71
Figure 5.29. 16-Bit ADC0 Window Interrupt Example: Differential Data .................. 72
6. Direct Memory Access Interface (DMA0) ............................................................. 75
Figure 6.1. DMA0 Block Diagram............................................................................. 75
Figure 6.2. DMA Mode 0 Operation ......................................................................... 77
Figure 6.3. DMA Mode 1 Operation ......................................................................... 78
Figure 6.4. DMA0CN: DMA0 Control Register ......................................................... 80
Figure 6.5. DMA0CF: DMA0 Configuration Register................................................ 81
Figure 6.6. DMA0IPT: DMA0 Instruction Write Address Register ............................ 82
Figure 6.7. DMA0IDT: DMA0 Instruction Write Data Register ................................. 82
Figure 6.8. DMA0BND: DMA0 Instruction Boundary Register ................................. 83
Figure 6.9. DMA0ISW: DMA0 Instruction Status Register ....................................... 83
Figure 6.10. DMA0DAH: DMA0 Data Address Beginning MSB Register................. 84
Figure 6.11. DMA0DAL: DMA0 Data Address Beginning LSB Register .................. 84
Figure 6.12. DMA0DSH: DMA0 Data Address Pointer MSB Register ..................... 84
Figure 6.13. DMA0DSL: DMA0 Data Address Pointer LSB Register ....................... 84
Figure 6.14. DMA0CTH: DMA0 Repeat Counter Limit MSB Register...................... 85
Figure 6.15. DMA0CTL: DMA0 Repeat Counter Limit LSB Register ....................... 85
Figure 6.16. DMA0CSH: DMA0 Repeat Counter MSB Register .............................. 85
Figure 6.17. DMA0CSL: DMA0 Repeat Counter LSB Register................................ 85
7. 10-Bit ADC (ADC2, C8051F060/1/2/3).................................................................... 87
Figure 7.1. ADC2 Functional Block Diagram............................................................ 87
Figure 7.2. Temperature Sensor Transfer Function ................................................. 89
Figure 7.3. 10-Bit ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing .............................. 90
Figure 7.4. ADC2 Equivalent Input Circuits.............................................................. 91
Figure 7.5. AMX2CF: AMUX2 Configuration Register ............................................. 92
Figure 7.6. AMX2SL: AMUX2 Channel Select Register........................................... 93
Figure 7.7. ADC2CF: ADC2 Configuration Register ................................................ 94
Figure 7.8. ADC2H: ADC2 Data Word MSB Register .............................................. 95
Figure 7.9. ADC2L: ADC2 Data Word LSB Register................................................ 95
Figure 7.10. ADC2CN: ADC2 Control Register ........................................................ 96
Figure 7.11. ADC2GTH: ADC2 Greater-Than Data High Byte Register .................. 97
Figure 7.12. ADC2GTL: ADC2 Greater-Than Data Low Byte Register.................... 97
Figure 7.13. ADC2LTH: ADC2 Less-Than Data High Byte Register........................ 98
10
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 7.14. ADC2LTL: ADC2 Less-Than Data Low Byte Register ......................... 98
Figure 7.15. ADC Window Compare Example: Right-Justified Single-Ended Data . 99
Figure 7.16. ADC Window Compare Example: Left-Justified Single-Ended Data.... 99
Figure 7.17. ADC Window Compare Example: Right-Justified Differential Data.... 100
Figure 7.18. ADC Window Compare Example: Left-Justified Differential Data ...... 100
8. DACs, 12-Bit Voltage Mode (DAC0 and DAC1, C8051F060/1/2/3) .................... 103
Figure 8.1. DAC Functional Block Diagram............................................................ 103
Figure 8.2. DAC0H: DAC0 High Byte Register ...................................................... 105
Figure 8.3. DAC0L: DAC0 Low Byte Register........................................................ 105
Figure 8.4. DAC0CN: DAC0 Control Register........................................................ 106
Figure 8.5. DAC1H: DAC1 High Byte Register ...................................................... 107
Figure 8.6. DAC1L: DAC1 Low Byte Register........................................................ 107
Figure 8.7. DAC1CN: DAC1 Control Register........................................................ 108
9. Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F060/2) .................................................................... 111
Figure 9.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram ..................................... 111
Figure 9.2. REF2CN: Reference Control Register 2 .............................................. 112
10. Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F061/3) ................................................................... 113
Figure 10.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram.................................... 113
Figure 10.2. REF2CN: Reference Control Register 2 ............................................ 114
11. Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F064/5/6/7) .............................................................. 115
Figure 11.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram.................................... 115
Figure 11.2. REF2CN: Reference Control Register 2 ............................................ 116
12. Comparators ......................................................................................................... 117
Figure 12.1. Comparator Functional Block Diagram .............................................. 117
Figure 12.2. Comparator Hysteresis Plot ............................................................... 118
Figure 12.3. CPTnCN: Comparator 0, 1, and 2 Control Register ........................... 120
Figure 12.4. CPTnMD: Comparator Mode Selection Register ............................... 121
13. CIP-51 Microcontroller ......................................................................................... 123
Figure 13.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram....................................................................... 124
Figure 13.2. Memory Map ...................................................................................... 130
Figure 13.3. SFR Page Stack................................................................................. 133
Figure 13.4. SFR Page Stack While Using SFR Page 0x0F To Access Port 5...... 134
Figure 13.5. SFR Page Stack After ADC2 Window Comparator Interrupt Occurs . 135
Figure 13.6. SFR Page Stack Upon PCA Interrupt Occurring During an ADC2 ISR....
136
Figure 13.7. SFR Page Stack Upon Return From PCA Interrupt ........................... 137
Figure 13.8. SFR Page Stack Upon Return From ADC2 Window Interrupt ........... 138
Figure 13.9. SFRPGCN: SFR Page Control Register ............................................ 139
Figure 13.10. SFRPAGE: SFR Page Register ....................................................... 139
Figure 13.11. SFRNEXT: SFR Next Register......................................................... 140
Figure 13.12. SFRLAST: SFR Last Register.......................................................... 140
Figure 13.13. SP: Stack Pointer ............................................................................. 148
Figure 13.14. DPL: Data Pointer Low Byte............................................................. 148
Figure 13.15. DPH: Data Pointer High Byte ........................................................... 148
Figure 13.16. PSW: Program Status Word............................................................. 149
Rev. 1.2
11
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.17. ACC: Accumulator............................................................................ 150
Figure 13.18. B: B Register .................................................................................... 150
Figure 13.19. IE: Interrupt Enable .......................................................................... 154
Figure 13.20. IP: Interrupt Priority .......................................................................... 155
Figure 13.21. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1................................................... 156
Figure 13.22. EIE2: Extended Interrupt Enable 2................................................... 157
Figure 13.23. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1................................................... 158
Figure 13.24. EIP2: Extended Interrupt Priority 2................................................... 159
Figure 13.25. PCON: Power Control ...................................................................... 161
14. Reset Sources....................................................................................................... 163
Figure 14.1. Reset Sources.................................................................................... 163
Figure 14.2. Reset Timing ...................................................................................... 164
Figure 14.3. WDTCN: Watchdog Timer Control Register....................................... 167
Figure 14.4. RSTSRC: Reset Source Register ...................................................... 168
15. Oscillators ............................................................................................................. 171
Figure 15.1. Oscillator Diagram.............................................................................. 171
Figure 15.2. OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration Register ............................... 172
Figure 15.3. OSCICN: Internal Oscillator Control Register .................................... 172
Figure 15.4. CLKSEL: Oscillator Clock Selection Register .................................... 173
Figure 15.5. OSCXCN: External Oscillator Control Register.................................. 174
16. Flash Memory ....................................................................................................... 177
Figure 16.1. C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5 Flash Program Memory Map and Security Bytes ..
180
Figure 16.2. C8051F066/7 Flash Program Memory Map and Security Bytes ........ 181
Figure 16.3. FLACL: Flash Access Limit ................................................................ 182
Figure 16.4. FLSCL: Flash Memory Control........................................................... 184
Figure 16.5. PSCTL: Program Store Read/Write Control....................................... 185
17. External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM........................................ 187
Figure 17.1. EMI0CN: External Memory Interface Control ..................................... 189
Figure 17.2. EMI0CF: External Memory Configuration........................................... 189
Figure 17.3. Multiplexed Configuration Example.................................................... 190
Figure 17.4. Non-multiplexed Configuration Example ............................................ 191
Figure 17.5. EMIF Operating Modes ...................................................................... 192
Figure 17.6. EMI0TC: External Memory Timing Control......................................... 194
Figure 17.7. Non-multiplexed 16-bit MOVX Timing ................................................ 196
Figure 17.8. Non-multiplexed 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select Timing ................. 197
Figure 17.9. Non-multiplexed 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select Timing ...................... 198
Figure 17.10. Multiplexed 16-bit MOVX Timing...................................................... 199
Figure 17.11. Multiplexed 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select Timing ....................... 200
Figure 17.12. Multiplexed 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select Timing ............................ 201
18. Port Input/Output.................................................................................................. 203
Figure 18.1. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram ............................................................... 203
Figure 18.2. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram ..................................................... 204
Figure 18.3. Priority Crossbar Decode Table ......................................................... 205
Figure 18.4. Crossbar Example:............................................................................. 209
12
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.5. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar Register 0................................................... 210
Figure 18.6. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar Register 1................................................... 211
Figure 18.7. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar Register 2................................................... 212
Figure 18.8. XBR3: Port I/O Crossbar Register 3................................................... 213
Figure 18.9. P0: Port0 Data Register ..................................................................... 214
Figure 18.10. P0MDOUT: Port0 Output Mode Register ......................................... 214
Figure 18.11. P1: Port1 Data Register ................................................................... 215
Figure 18.12. P1MDIN: Port1 Input Mode Register................................................ 215
Figure 18.13. P1MDOUT: Port1 Output Mode Register ......................................... 216
Figure 18.14. P2: Port2 Data Register ................................................................... 216
Figure 18.15. P2MDIN: Port2 Input Mode Register................................................ 217
Figure 18.16. P2MDOUT: Port2 Output Mode Register ......................................... 217
Figure 18.17. P3: Port3 Data Register ................................................................... 218
Figure 18.18. P3MDOUT: Port3 Output Mode Register ......................................... 218
Figure 18.19. P4: Port4 Data Register ................................................................... 221
Figure 18.20. P4MDOUT: Port4 Output Mode Register ......................................... 221
Figure 18.21. P5: Port5 Data Register ................................................................... 222
Figure 18.22. P5MDOUT: Port5 Output Mode Register ......................................... 222
Figure 18.23. P6: Port6 Data Register ................................................................... 223
Figure 18.24. P6MDOUT: Port6 Output Mode Register ......................................... 223
Figure 18.25. P7: Port7 Data Register ................................................................... 224
Figure 18.26. P7MDOUT: Port7 Output Mode Register ......................................... 224
19. Controller Area Network (CAN0, C8051F060/1/2/3) ........................................... 225
Figure 19.1. CAN Controller Diagram..................................................................... 226
Figure 19.2. Typical CAN Bus Configuration.......................................................... 226
Figure 19.3. CAN0DATH: CAN Data Access Register High Byte .......................... 231
Figure 19.4. CAN0DATL: CAN Data Access Register Low Byte............................ 231
Figure 19.5. CAN0ADR: CAN Address Index Register .......................................... 232
Figure 19.6. CAN0CN: CAN Control Register ........................................................ 232
Figure 19.7. CAN0TST: CAN Test Register ........................................................... 233
Figure 19.8. CAN0STA: CAN Status Register........................................................ 233
20. System Management BUS / I2C BUS (SMBUS0)................................................ 235
Figure 20.1. SMBus0 Block Diagram ..................................................................... 235
Figure 20.2. Typical SMBus Configuration ............................................................. 236
Figure 20.3. SMBus Transaction ............................................................................ 237
Figure 20.4. Typical Master Transmitter Sequence................................................ 238
Figure 20.5. Typical Master Receiver Sequence.................................................... 238
Figure 20.6. Typical Slave Transmitter Sequence.................................................. 239
Figure 20.7. Typical Slave Receiver Sequence...................................................... 240
Figure 20.8. SMB0CN: SMBus0 Control Register.................................................. 243
Figure 20.9. SMB0CR: SMBus0 Clock Rate Register............................................ 244
Figure 20.10. SMB0DAT: SMBus0 Data Register.................................................. 245
Figure 20.11. SMB0ADR: SMBus0 Address Register............................................ 246
Figure 20.12. SMB0STA: SMBus0 Status Register ............................................... 247
21. Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0)...................................................... 251
Rev. 1.2
13
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 21.1. SPI Block Diagram ............................................................................. 251
Figure 21.2. Multiple-Master Mode Connection Diagram ....................................... 254
Figure 21.3. 3-Wire Single Master and 3-Wire Single Slave Mode Connection Diagram
254
Figure 21.4. 4-Wire Single Master Mode and 4-Wire Slave Mode Connection Diagram
254
Figure 21.5. Master Mode Data/Clock Timing ........................................................ 256
Figure 21.6. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 0) .................................... 257
Figure 21.7. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 1) .................................... 257
Figure 21.8. SPI0CFG: SPI0 Configuration Register ............................................. 258
Figure 21.9. SPI0CN: SPI0 Control Register.......................................................... 259
Figure 21.10. SPI0CKR: SPI0 Clock Rate Register ............................................... 260
Figure 21.11. SPI0DAT: SPI0 Data Register.......................................................... 261
Figure 21.12. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 0)...................................................... 262
Figure 21.13. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 1)...................................................... 262
Figure 21.14. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 0)........................................................ 263
Figure 21.15. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 1)........................................................ 263
22. UART0.................................................................................................................... 265
Figure 22.1. UART0 Block Diagram ....................................................................... 265
Figure 22.2. UART0 Mode 0 Timing Diagram ........................................................ 267
Figure 22.3. UART0 Mode 0 Interconnect.............................................................. 267
Figure 22.4. UART0 Mode 1 Timing Diagram ........................................................ 267
Figure 22.5. UART0 Modes 2 and 3 Timing Diagram ............................................ 269
Figure 22.6. UART0 Modes 1, 2, and 3 Interconnect Diagram .............................. 270
Figure 22.7. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram .......................... 272
Figure 22.8. SCON0: UART0 Control Register ...................................................... 274
Figure 22.9. SSTA0: UART0 Status and Clock Selection Register........................ 275
Figure 22.10. SBUF0: UART0 Data Buffer Register .............................................. 276
Figure 22.11. SADDR0: UART0 Slave Address Register ...................................... 276
Figure 22.12. SADEN0: UART0 Slave Address Enable Register .......................... 276
23. UART1.................................................................................................................... 277
Figure 23.1. UART1 Block Diagram ....................................................................... 277
Figure 23.2. UART1 Baud Rate Logic .................................................................... 278
Figure 23.3. UART Interconnect Diagram .............................................................. 279
Figure 23.4. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram............................................................... 279
Figure 23.5. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram............................................................... 280
Figure 23.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram .......................... 281
Figure 23.7. SCON1: Serial Port 1 Control Register .............................................. 282
Figure 23.8. SBUF1: Serial (UART1) Port Data Buffer Register ............................ 283
24. Timers.................................................................................................................... 287
Figure 24.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram.................................................................. 288
Figure 24.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram.................................................................. 289
Figure 24.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram.................................................................. 290
Figure 24.4. TCON: Timer Control Register ........................................................... 291
Figure 24.5. TMOD: Timer Mode Register ............................................................. 292
14
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 24.6. CKCON: Clock Control Register ........................................................ 293
Figure 24.7. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte ....................................................................... 294
Figure 24.8. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte ....................................................................... 294
Figure 24.9. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte...................................................................... 294
Figure 24.10. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte.................................................................... 294
Figure 24.11. T2, 3, and 4 Capture Mode Block Diagram ...................................... 296
Figure 24.12. T2, 3, and 4 Auto-reload Mode Block Diagram ................................ 297
Figure 24.13. TMRnCN: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Control Registers ................................ 299
Figure 24.14. TMRnCF: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Configuration Registers ....................... 300
Figure 24.15. RCAPnL: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Capture Register Low Byte .................. 301
Figure 24.16. RCAPnH: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Capture Register High Byte................. 301
Figure 24.17. TMRnL: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Low Byte................................................. 301
Figure 24.18. TMRnH: Timer 2, 3, and 4 High Byte ............................................... 302
25. Programmable Counter Array ............................................................................. 303
Figure 25.1. PCA Block Diagram............................................................................ 303
Figure 25.2. PCA Counter/Timer Block Diagram.................................................... 304
Figure 25.3. PCA Interrupt Block Diagram ............................................................. 305
Figure 25.4. PCA Capture Mode Diagram.............................................................. 306
Figure 25.5. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram .................................................. 307
Figure 25.6. PCA High Speed Output Mode Diagram............................................ 308
Figure 25.7. PCA Frequency Output Mode ............................................................ 309
Figure 25.8. PCA 8-Bit PWM Mode Diagram ......................................................... 310
Figure 25.9. PCA 16-Bit PWM Mode...................................................................... 311
Figure 25.10. PCA0CN: PCA Control Register ...................................................... 312
Figure 25.11. PCA0MD: PCA0 Mode Register....................................................... 313
Figure 25.12. PCA0CPMn: PCA0 Capture/Compare Mode Registers................... 314
Figure 25.13. PCA0L: PCA0 Counter/Timer Low Byte........................................... 315
Figure 25.14. PCA0H: PCA0 Counter/Timer High Byte ......................................... 315
Figure 25.15. PCA0CPLn: PCA0 Capture Module Low Byte ................................. 316
Figure 25.16. PCA0CPHn: PCA0 Capture Module High Byte................................ 316
26. JTAG (IEEE 1149.1) .............................................................................................. 317
Figure 26.1. IR: JTAG Instruction Register............................................................. 317
Figure 26.2. DEVICEID: JTAG Device ID Register ................................................ 321
Figure 26.3. FLASHCON: JTAG Flash Control Register........................................ 323
Figure 26.4. FLASHDAT: JTAG Flash Data Register............................................. 324
Figure 26.5. FLASHADR: JTAG Flash Address Register....................................... 324
27. Document Change List ........................................................................................ 327
Rev. 1.2
15
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
16
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
List of Tables
1. System Overview ................................................................................................... 19
Table 1.1.Product Selection Guide .......................................................................... 20
2. Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................. 37
Table 2.1.Absolute Maximum Ratings* ................................................................... 37
3. Global DC Electrical Characteristics ................................................................... 38
Table 3.1.Global DC Electrical Characteristics ....................................................... 38
4. Pinout and Package Definitions ........................................................................... 39
Table 4.1.Pin Definitions ......................................................................................... 39
5. 16-Bit ADCs (ADC0 and ADC1) ............................................................................ 51
Table 5.1.Conversion Timing (tConv) ...................................................................... 55
Table 5.2.16-Bit ADC0 and ADC1 Electrical Characteristics .................................. 73
Table 5.3.Voltage Reference 0 and 1 Electrical Characteristics ............................. 74
6. Direct Memory Access Interface (DMA0) ............................................................ 75
Table 6.1.DMA0 Instruction Set .............................................................................. 76
7. 10-Bit ADC (ADC2, C8051F060/1/2/3) ................................................................... 87
Table 7.1.ADC2 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................ 101
8. DACs, 12-Bit Voltage Mode (DAC0 and DAC1, C8051F060/1/2/3) ................... 103
Table 8.1.DAC Electrical Characteristics .............................................................. 109
9. Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F060/2) ................................................................... 111
Table 9.1.Voltage Reference Electrical Characteristics ........................................ 112
10. Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F061/3) .................................................................. 113
Table 10.1.Voltage Reference Electrical Characteristics ...................................... 114
11. Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F064/5/6/7) ............................................................. 115
Table 11.1.Voltage Reference Electrical Characteristics ...................................... 116
12. Comparators ........................................................................................................ 117
Table 12.1.Comparator Electrical Characteristics ................................................. 122
13. CIP-51 Microcontroller ........................................................................................ 123
Table 13.1.CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary ......................................................... 126
Table 13.2.Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map ................................... 141
Table 13.3.Special Function Registers .................................................................. 143
Table 13.4.Interrupt Summary ............................................................................... 152
14. Reset Sources ...................................................................................................... 163
Table 14.1.Reset Electrical Characteristics ........................................................... 169
15. Oscillators ............................................................................................................ 171
Table 15.1.Internal Oscillator Electrical Characteristics ........................................ 173
16. Flash Memory ...................................................................................................... 177
Table 16.1.Flash Electrical Characteristics ........................................................... 178
17. External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM ....................................... 187
Table 17.1.AC Parameters for External Memory Interface .................................... 202
18. Port Input/Output ................................................................................................. 203
Table 18.1.Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics .................................................. 203
19. Controller Area Network (CAN0, C8051F060/1/2/3) .......................................... 225
Rev. 1.2
17
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 19.1.CAN Register Index and Reset Values ............................................... 229
20. System Management BUS / I2C BUS (SMBUS0) ............................................... 235
Table 20.1.SMB0STA Status Codes and States ................................................... 248
21. Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) ..................................................... 251
Table 21.1.SPI Slave Timing Parameters ............................................................. 264
22. UART0 ................................................................................................................... 265
Table 22.1.UART0 Modes ..................................................................................... 266
Table 22.2.Oscillator Frequencies for Standard Baud Rates ................................ 273
23. UART1 ................................................................................................................... 277
Table 23.1.Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using the Internal Oscillator 284
Table 23.2.Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator 284
Table 23.3.Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator 285
Table 23.4.Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator 285
Table 23.5.Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator 286
Table 23.6.Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator 286
24. Timers ................................................................................................................... 287
25. Programmable Counter Array ............................................................................ 303
Table 25.1.PCA Timebase Input Options .............................................................. 304
Table 25.2.PCA0CPM Register Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules ..... 305
26. JTAG (IEEE 1149.1) ............................................................................................. 317
Table 26.1.Boundary Data Register Bit Definitions (C8051F060/2/4/6) ................ 318
Table 26.2.Boundary Data Register Bit Definitions (C8051F061/3/5/7) ................ 320
27. Document Change List ....................................................................................... 327
18
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.
System Overview
The C8051F06x family of devices are fully integrated mixed-signal System-on-a-Chip MCUs with 59 digital
I/O pins (C8051F060/2/4/6) or 24 digital I/O pins (C8051F061/3/5/7), and two integrated 16-bit 1 Msps
ADCs. Highlighted features are listed below; refer to Table 1.1 for specific product feature selection.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
High-Speed pipelined 8051-compatible CIP-51 microcontroller core (up to 25 MIPS)
Two 16-bit 1 Msps ADCs with a Direct Memory Access controller
Controller Area Network (CAN 2.0B) Controller with 32 message objects, each with its own indentifier
mask (C8051F060/1/2/3)
In-system, full-speed, non-intrusive debug interface on-chip
10-bit 200 ksps ADC with PGA and 8-channel analog multiplexer (C8051F060/1/2/3)
Two 12-bit DACs with programmable update scheduling (C8051F060/1/2/3)
64 kB (C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5) or 32 kB (C8051F066/7) of in-system programmable Flash memory
4352 (4096 + 256) bytes of on-chip RAM
External Data Memory Interface with 64 kB direct address space (C8051F060/2/4/6)
SPI, SMBus/I2C, and (2) UART serial interfaces implemented in hardware
Five general purpose 16-bit Timers
Programmable Counter/Timer Array with six capture/compare modules
On-chip Watchdog Timer, VDD Monitor, and Temperature Sensor
With on-chip VDD monitor, Watchdog Timer, and clock oscillator, the C8051F06x family of devices are truly
stand-alone System-on-a-Chip solutions. All analog and digital peripherals are enabled/disabled and configured by user firmware. The Flash memory can be reprogrammed even in-circuit, providing non-volatile
data storage, and also allowing field upgrades of the 8051 firmware.
On-board JTAG debug circuitry allows non-intrusive (uses no on-chip resources), full speed, in-circuit
debugging using the production MCU installed in the final application. This debug system supports inspection and modification of memory and registers, setting breakpoints, watchpoints, single stepping, Run and
Halt commands. All analog and digital peripherals are fully functional while debugging using JTAG.
Each MCU is specified for 2.7 to 3.6 V operation over the industrial temperature range (-45 to +85 °C). The
C8051F060/2/4/6 are available in a 100-pin TQFP package and the C8051F061/3/5/7 are available in a
64-pin TQFP package (see block diagrams in Figure 1.1, Figure 1.2, Figure 1.3 and Figure 1.4).
Rev. 1.2
19
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
MIPS (Peak)
Flash Memory
RAM
External Memory Interface
SMBus/I2C and SPI
CAN
UARTS
Timers (16-bit)
Programmable Counter Array
Digital Port I/O’s
10-bit 200 ksps ADC Inputs
Voltage Reference
Temperature Sensor
DAC Resolution (bits)
DAC Outputs
Analog Comparators
Package
16-bit 1 Msps ADC Typical INL (LSBs)
Table 1.1. Product Selection Guide
C8051F060
25
64 k
4352
3
3
3
2
5
3
59 ±0.75
8
3
3
12
2
3
100 TQFP
C8051F061
25
64 k
4352
-
3
3
2
5
3
24 ±0.75
8
3
3
12
2
3
64 TQFP
C8051F062
25
64 k
4352
3
3
3
2
5
3
59
±1.5
8
3
3
12
2
3
100 TQFP
C8051F063
25
64 k
4352
-
3
3
2
5
3
24
±1.5
8
3
3
12
2
3
64 TQFP
C8051F064
25
64 k
4352
3
3
-
2
5
3
59 ±0.75
-
3
-
-
-
3
100 TQFP
C8051F065
25
64 k
4352
-
3
-
2
5
3
24 ±0.75
-
3
-
-
-
3
64 TQFP
C8051F066
25
32 k
4352
3
3
-
2
5
3
59 ±0.75
-
3
-
-
-
3
100 TQFP
C8051F067
25
32 k
4352
-
3
-
2
5
3
24 ±0.75
-
3
-
-
-
3
64 TQFP
20
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
VDD
VDD
VDD
DGND
DGND
DGND
AV+
Digital Power
8
0
5
1
Analog Power
AGND
TCK
TMS
TDI
TDO
Boundary Scan
JTAG
Logic
Debug HW
Reset
/RST
MONEN
XTAL1
XTAL2
VDDMonitor
VREF
VREFD
DAC0
DAC1
SFR Bus
SMBus
PCA
Timers 0, 1,
2,3,4
C
o
r
e
System Clock
VREF
DAC0
(12-Bit)
C
R
O
S
S
B
A
R
SPI Bus
64kbyte
FLASH
TrimmedInternal
Oscillator
32X136
CANRAM
AIN0
AIN1
VBGAP
CNVSTR1
1
P3
Drv
P3.0
P2.7
P3.7
VREF2
256 byte
RAM
Temp
Sensor
A
M
U
X
ADC2
200ksps
(10-Bit)
4kbyte RAM
+
+
+
-
P2.6
P2.7
P2.2
P2.3
P2.4
P2.5
External Data Memory Bus
A
D
C
0
P4 Latch
Bus Control
D
A
T
A
Ctrl Latch
+
Σ
ADC1
1Msps
(16-Bit)
P2.0
CANTX
CANRX
CP2
A
D
C
1
P2
Drv
CAN
2.0B
CP0
VBGAP
CNVSTR0
0
AV+
AGND
VREF1
VRGND
1
AIN1G
P1.7/
AIN2.7
CP1
ADC0
1Msps
(16-Bit)
P1.0/
AIN2.0
P1
Drv
P0,P1, P2,
P3 Latches
AVDD
AGND
AV+
AGND
VREF0
VRGND0
AIN0G
P0.7
UART1
WDT
External Oscillator
Circuit
P0.0
P0
Drv
UART0
-
D
I
F
F
DMA
Interface
EMIF
Control
P5 Latch
Address Bus
Addr[15:8]
P6 Latch
Addr[7:0]
D
A
T
A
Data Bus
P7 Latch
Data Latch
P4
DRV
P5
DRV
P6
DRV
P7
DRV
P4.5
P4.6
P4.7
P5.0
P5.7
P6.0
P6.7
P7.0
P7.7
Figure 1.1. C8051F060 / C8051F062 Block Diagram
Rev. 1.2
21
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
VDD
VDD
VDD
DGND
DGND
DGND
AV+
Digital Power
8
0
5
1
Analog Power
AGND
TCK
TMS
TDI
TDO
Boundary Scan
JTAG
Logic
Debug HW
Reset
/RST
MONEN
XTAL1
XTAL2
VDDMonitor
DAC0
DAC1
VREF
SMBus
VREF2
DAC0
(12-Bit)
PCA
Timers 0, 1,
2,3,4
32X136
CANRAM
AIN0
AIN1G
VBGAP
CNVSTR1
1
CANTX
CANRX
VREF2
256 byte
RAM
4kbyte RAM
+
+
+
-
P4 Latch
D
A
T
A
Ctrl Latch
+
Σ
-
D
I
F
F
DMA
Interface
EMIF
Control
P5 Latch
Addr[15:8]
P6 Latch
Addr[7:0]
D
A
T
A
P7 Latch
Data Latch
Figure 1.2. C8051F061 / C8051F063 Block Diagram
22
Temp
Sensor
A
M
U
X
ADC2
200ksps
(10-Bit)
P2.6
P2.7
P2.2
P2.3
P2.4
P2.5
External Data Memory Bus
A
D
C
0
A
D
C
1
P2.7
CAN
2.0B
CP1
ADC1
1Msps
(16-Bit)
P2.0
P2
Drv
P3
Drv
CP2
VBGAP
CNVSTR0
0
AV+
AGND
VREF1
VRGND
1
AIN1
P1.7/
AIN2.7
CP0
ADC0
1Msps
(16-Bit)
P1.0/
AIN2.0
P1
Drv
P0,P1,P2,
P3 Latches
AVDD
AGND
AV+
AGND
VREF0
VRGND0
AIN0G
C
R
O
S
S
B
A
R
SPI Bus
C
o
r
e
Trimmed Internal
Oscillator
VREF
SFR Bus
64kbyte
FLASH
System Clock
P0.7
UART1
WDT
External Oscillator
Circuit
P0.0
P0
Drv
UART0
Rev. 1.2
P4
DRV
P5
DRV
P6
DRV
P7
DRV
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
VDD
VDD
VDD
DGND
DGND
DGND
AV+
Digital Power
8
0
5
1
Analog Power
AGND
TCK
TMS
TDI
TDO
Boundary Scan
JTAG
Logic
Debug HW
Reset
/RST
MONEN
XTAL1
XTAL2
VDD Monitor
VREF
SFR Bus
SMBus
PCA
Timers 0,
1, 2,3,4
FLASH
Memory
C
o
r
e
System Clock
VREF
C
R
O
S
S
B
A
R
SPI Bus
64k byte
(C8051F064)
Trimmed Internal
Oscillator
P0.7
UART1
WDT
External Oscillator
Circuit
P0.0
P0
Drv
UART0
P0, P1, P2,
P3 Latches
32k byte
(C8051F066)
256 byte
RAM
+
-
CP0
+
-
CP1
CP2
4kbyte RAM
P1.0
P1
Drv
+
-
P1.7
P2
Drv
P2.0
P3
Drv
P3.0
P2.7
P3.7
P2.6
P2.7
P2.2
P2.3
P2.4
P2.5
AVDD
AGND
AV+
AGND
VREF0
VRGND0
AIN0
AIN0G
ADC0
1Msps
(16-Bit)
VBGAP0
CNVSTR0
AIN1
VBGAP1
CNVSTR1
Bus Control
D
A
T
A
AV+
AGND
VREF1
VRGND1
AIN1G
External Data Memory Bus
A
D
C
0
+
Σ
ADC1
1Msps
(16-Bit)
A
D
C
1
-
D
I
F
F
DMA
Interface
EMIF
Control
Address Bus
P4 Latch
Ctrl Latch
P5 Latch
Addr[15:8]
P6 Latch
Addr[7:0]
D
A
T
A
Data Bus
P7 Latch
Data Latch
P4
DRV
P5
DRV
P6
DRV
P7
DRV
P4.5
P4.6
P4.7
P5.0
P5.7
P6.0
P6.7
P7.0
P7.7
Figure 1.3. C8051F064 / C8051F066 Block Diagram
Rev. 1.2
23
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
VDD
VDD
VDD
DGND
DGND
DGND
AV+
Digital Power
8
0
5
1
Analog Power
AGND
TCK
TMS
TDI
TDO
Boundary Scan
JTAG
Logic
Debug HW
Reset
/RST
MONEN
XTAL1
XTAL2
VDD Monitor
VREF
C
R
O
S
S
B
A
R
SPI Bus
PCA
FLASH
Memory
C
o
r
e
Trimmed Internal
Oscillator
VREF
SMBus
SFR Bus
Timers 0,
1, 2,3,4
64k byte
(C8051F065)
System Clock
P0.7
UART1
WDT
External Oscillator
Circuit
P0.0
P0
Drv
UART0
P1.7
P2.0
P2
Drv
P0, P1, P2,
P3 Latches
P2.7
P3
Drv
32k byte
(C8051F067)
256 byte
RAM
+
-
CP0
+
-
CP1
CP2
4kbyte RAM
P1.0
P1
Drv
+
-
P2.6
P2.7
P2.2
P2.3
P2.4
P2.5
AVDD
AGND
AV+
AGND
VREF0
VRGND0
AIN0
AIN0G
ADC0
1Msps
(16-Bit)
VBGAP0
CNVSTR0
AIN1G
VBGAP1
CNVSTR1
P4 Latch
D
A
T
A
AV+
AGND
VREF1
VRGND1
AIN1
External Data Memory Bus
A
D
C
0
Ctrl Latch
+
Σ
ADC1
1Msps
(16-Bit)
A
D
C
1
-
D
I
F
F
DMA
Interface
EMIF
Control
P6 Latch
Addr[7:0]
D
A
T
A
P7 Latch
Data Latch
Figure 1.4. C8051F065 / C8051F067 Block Diagram
24
P5 Latch
Addr[15:8]
Rev. 1.2
P4
DRV
P5
DRV
P6
DRV
P7
DRV
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.1.
CIP-51™ Microcontroller Core
1.1.1. Fully 8051 Compatible
The C8051F06x family of devices utilizes Silicon Labs' proprietary CIP-51 microcontroller core. The CIP51 is fully compatible with the MCS-51™ instruction set; standard 803x/805x assemblers and compilers
can be used to develop software. The core has all the peripherals included with a standard 8052, including
five 16-bit counter/timers, two full-duplex UARTs, 256 bytes of internal RAM, 128 byte Special Function
Register (SFR) address space, and bit-addressable I/O Ports.
1.1.2. Improved Throughput
The CIP-51 employs a pipelined architecture that greatly increases its instruction throughput over the standard 8051 architecture. In a standard 8051, all instructions except for MUL and DIV take 12 or 24 system
clock cycles to execute with a maximum system clock of 12-to-24 MHz. By contrast, the CIP-51 core executes 70% of its instructions in one or two system clock cycles, with only four instructions taking more than
four system clock cycles.
The CIP-51 has a total of 109 instructions. The table below shows the total number of instructions that
require each execution time.
Clocks to Execute
1
2
2/3
3
3/4
4
4/5
5
8
Number of Instructions
26
50
5
14
7
3
1
2
1
With the CIP-51's maximum system clock at 25 MHz, it has a peak throughput of 25 MIPS. Figure 1.5
shows a comparison of peak throughputs of various 8-bit microcontroller cores with their maximum system
clocks.
25
MIPS
20
15
10
5
Silicon Labs Microchip
Philips
ADuC812
CIP-51
PIC17C75x
80C51
8051
(25 MHz clk) (33 MHz clk) (33 MHz clk) (16 MHz clk)
Figure 1.5. Comparison of Peak MCU Execution Speeds
Rev. 1.2
25
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.1.3. Additional Features
The C8051F06x MCU family includes several key enhancements to the CIP-51 core and peripherals to
improve overall performance and ease of use in end applications.
The extended interrupt handler provides 22 interrupt sources into the CIP-51, allowing the numerous analog and digital peripherals to interrupt the controller. An interrupt driven system requires less intervention
by the MCU, giving it more effective throughput. The extra interrupt sources are very useful when building
multi-tasking, real-time systems.
There are up to seven reset sources for the MCU: an on-board VDD monitor, a Watchdog Timer, a missing
clock detector, a voltage level detection from Comparator0, a forced software reset, the CNVSTR2 input
pin, and the /RST pin. The /RST pin is bi-directional, accommodating an external reset, or allowing the
internally generated POR to be output on the /RST pin. Each reset source except for the VDD monitor and
Reset Input pin may be disabled by the user in software; the VDD monitor is enabled/disabled via the
MONEN pin. The Watchdog Timer may be permanently enabled in software after a power-on reset during
MCU initialization.
The MCU has an internal, stand alone clock generator which is used by default as the system clock after
any reset. If desired, the clock source may be switched on the fly to the external oscillator, which can use a
crystal, ceramic resonator, capacitor, RC, or external clock source to generate the system clock. This can
be extremely useful in low power applications, allowing the MCU to run from a slow (power saving) external crystal source, while periodically switching to the fast (up to 25 MHz) internal oscillator as needed.
VDD
Crossbar
CNVSTR2
Supply
Monitor
(CNVSTR
reset
enable)
+
-
Comparator0
CP0+
+
-
CP0-
(wired-OR)
(CP0
reset
enable)
XTAL2
OSC
EN
Clock Select
PRE
WDT
Enable
MCD
Enable
System
Clock
Reset
Funnel
WDT
EN
XTAL1
CIP-51
Microcontroller
Core
Software Reset
System Reset
Extended Interrupt
Handler
Figure 1.6. On-Board Clock and Reset
26
(wired-OR)
VDD Monitor
reset enable
Missing
Clock
Detector
(oneshot)
Internal
Clock
Generator
Supply
Reset
Timeout
WDT
Strobe
(Port
I/O)
Rev. 1.2
/RST
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.2.
On-Chip Memory
The CIP-51 has a standard 8051 program and data address configuration. It includes 256 bytes of data
RAM, with the upper 128 bytes dual-mapped. Indirect addressing accesses the upper 128 bytes of general
purpose RAM, and direct addressing accesses the 128 byte SFR address space. The CIP-51 SFR
address space contains up to 256 SFR Pages. In this way, the CIP-51 MCU can accommodate the many
SFRs required to control and configure the various peripherals featured on the device. The lower
128 bytes of RAM are accessible via direct and indirect addressing. The first 32 bytes are addressable as
four banks of general purpose registers, and the next 16 bytes can be byte addressable or bit addressable.
The CIP-51 in the C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 MCUs additionally has an on-chip 4 kB RAM block. The onchip 4 kB block can be addressed over the entire 64 k external data memory address range (overlapping
4 k boundaries). The C8051F060/2/4/6 also have an external memory interface (EMIF) for accessing offchip data memory or memory-mapped peripherals. External data memory address space can be mapped
to on-chip memory only, off-chip memory only, or a combination of the two (addresses up to 4 k directed to
on-chip, above 4 k directed to EMIF). The EMIF is also configurable for multiplexed or non-multiplexed
address/data lines.
The MCU’s program memory consists of 64 k (C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5) or 32 k (C8051F066/7) of Flash. This
memory may be reprogrammed in-system in 512 byte sectors, and requires no special off-chip programming voltage. On the C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5, the 1024 bytes from addresses 0xFC00 to 0xFFFF are
reserved. There is also a single 128 byte Scratchpad Memory sector on all devices which may be used by
firmware for non-volatile data storage. See Figure 1.7 for the MCU system memory map.
DATA MEMORY (RAM)
PROGRAM/DATA MEMORY
(FLASH)
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5
0x1007F
0x10000
0xFFFF
0xFC00
Scrachpad Memory
(data only)
0xFF
0x80
0x7F
INTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE
Upper 128 RAM
(Indirect Addressing
Only)
Special Function
Registers
(Direct Addressing Only)
RESERVED
0xFBFF
FLASH
(In-System
Programmable in 512
Byte Sectors)
0x30
0x2F
0x20
0x1F
0x00
0
(Direct and Indirect
Addressing)
Bit Addressable
General Purpose
Registers
Lower 128 RAM
(Direct and Indirect
Addressing)
1
2
3
Up To
256 SFR Pages
0x0000
C8051F066/7
0x1007F
0x10000
Scrachpad Memory
(data only)
EXTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
Off-chip XRAM space
(C8051F060/2/4/6 Only)
RESERVED
0x8000
0x7FFF
0x0000
FLASH
(In-System
Programmable in 512
Byte Sectors)
0x1000
0x0FFF
0x0000
XRAM - 4096 Bytes
(accessable using MOVX
instruction)
Figure 1.7. On-Chip Memory Map
Rev. 1.2
27
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.3.
JTAG Debug and Boundary Scan
The C8051F06x family has on-chip JTAG boundary scan and debug circuitry that provides non-intrusive,
full speed, in-circuit debugging using the production part installed in the end application, via the four-pin
JTAG interface. The JTAG port is fully compliant to IEEE 1149.1, providing full boundary scan for test and
manufacturing purposes.
Silicon Laboratories' debugging system supports inspection and modification of memory and registers,
breakpoints, watchpoints, a stack monitor, and single stepping. No additional target RAM, program memory, timers, or communications channels are required. All the digital and analog peripherals are functional
and work correctly while debugging. All the peripherals (except for the ADCs and SMBus) are stalled when
the MCU is halted, during single stepping, or at a breakpoint in order to keep them synchronized with
instruction execution.
The C8051F060DK development kit provides all the hardware and software necessary to develop application code and perform in-circuit debugging with the C8051F06x MCUs. The kit includes a Windows (95 or
later) development environment, a serial adapter for connecting to the JTAG port, and a target application
board with a C8051F060 MCU installed. All of the necessary communication cables and a wall-mount
power supply are also supplied with the development kit. Silicon Labs’ debug environment is a vastly superior configuration for developing and debugging embedded applications compared to standard MCU emulators, which use on-board "ICE Chips" and target cables and require the MCU in the application board to
be socketed. Silicon Labs' debug environment both increases ease of use and preserves the performance
of the precision, on-chip analog peripherals.
Silicon Labs Integrated
Development Environment
WINDOWS 95 OR LATER
JTAG (x4), VDD, GND
Serial
Adapter
TARGET PCB
C8051
F060
Figure 1.8. Development/In-System Debug Diagram
28
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.4.
Programmable Digital I/O and Crossbar
Three standard 8051 Ports (0, 1, and 2) are available on the MCUs. The C8051F060/2/4/6 have 4 additional 8-bit ports (3, 5, 6, and 7), and a 3-bit port (port 4) for a total of 59 general-purpose I/O Pins. The
Ports behave like the standard 8051 with a few enhancements.
Each port pin can be configured as either a push-pull or open-drain output. Also, the "weak pull-ups" which
are normally fixed on an 8051 can be globally disabled, providing additional power saving capabilities for
low-power applications.
Perhaps the most unique enhancement is the Digital Crossbar. This is a large digital switching network that
allows mapping of internal digital system resources to Port I/O pins on P0, P1, P2, and P3.
(See Figure 1.9) Unlike microcontrollers with standard multiplexed digital I/O ports, all combinations of
functions are supported with all package options offered.
The on-chip counter/timers, serial buses, HW interrupts, comparator outputs, and other digital signals in
the controller can be configured to appear on the Port I/O pins specified in the Crossbar Control registers.
This allows the user to select the exact mix of general purpose Port I/O and digital resources needed for
the particular application.
Highest
Priority
2
UART0
4
SPI
2
SMBus
2
(Internal Digital Signals)
UART1
Lowest
Priority
XBR0, XBR1, XBR2,
XBR3 P1MDIN,
P2MDIN, P3MDIN
Registers
P0MDOUT, P1MDOUT,
P2MDOUT, P3MDOUT
Registers
External
Pins
Priority
Decoder
8
6
PCA
P0
I/O
Cells
P0.0
P1
I/O
Cells
P1.0
Highest
Priority
P0.7
2
Comptr.
Outputs
Digital
Crossba
r
T0, T1, T2,
T2EX, T3,
T3EX,
T4,T4EX,
/INT0,
/INT1
8
P1.7
8
8
/SYSCLK
P2
I/O
Cells
P2.0
P3
I/O
Cells
P3.0
P2.7
CNVSTR2
8
8
P0
(P0.0-P0.7)
P1
(P1.0-P1.7)
Lowest
Priority
C8051F060/2/4/6
Only
8
Port
Latches
P3.7
To ADC2 Input
(C8051F060/1/2/3)
8
P2
(P2.0-P2.7)
To Comparators
8
P3
(P3.0-P3.7)
Figure 1.9. Digital Crossbar Diagram
Rev. 1.2
29
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.5.
Programmable Counter Array
The C8051F06x MCU family includes an on-board Programmable Counter/Timer Array (PCA) in addition
to the five 16-bit general purpose counter/timers. The PCA consists of a dedicated 16-bit counter/timer
time base with 6 programmable capture/compare modules. The timebase is clocked from one of six
sources: the system clock divided by 12, the system clock divided by 4, Timer 0 overflow, an External
Clock Input (ECI pin), the system clock, or the external oscillator source divided by 8.
Each capture/compare module can be configured to operate in one of six modes: Edge-Triggered Capture,
Software Timer, High Speed Output, Frequency Output, 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator, or 16-Bit Pulse Width
Modulator. The PCA Capture/Compare Module I/O and External Clock Input are routed to the MCU Port I/
O via the Digital Crossbar.
SYSCLK/12
SYSCLK/4
Timer 0 Overflow
ECI
SYSCLK
PCA
CLOCK
MUX
16-Bit Counter/Timer
External Clock/8
Capture/Compare
Module 0
Capture/Compare
Module 1
Capture/Compare
Module 2
Capture/Compare
Module 3
Figure 1.10. PCA Block Diagram
30
Rev. 1.2
Capture/Compare
Module 5
CEX5
Port I/O
CEX4
CEX3
CEX2
CEX1
CEX0
ECI
Crossbar
Capture/Compare
Module 4
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.6.
Controller Area Network
The C8051F060/1/2/3 devices feature a Controller Area Network (CAN) controller that implements serial
communication using the CAN protocol. The CAN controller facilitates communication on a CAN network
in accordance with the Bosch specification 2.0A (basic CAN) and 2.0B (full CAN). The CAN controller consists of a CAN Core, Message RAM (separate from the C8051 RAM), a message handler state machine,
and control registers.
The CAN controller can operate at bit rates up to 1 Mbit/second. Silicon Labs CAN has 32 message
objects each having its own identifier mask used for acceptance filtering of received messages. Incoming
data, message objects and identifier masks are stored in the CAN message RAM. All protocol functions for
transmission of data and acceptance filtering is performed by the CAN controller and not by the C8051
MCU. In this way, minimal CPU bandwidth is used for CAN communication. The C8051 configures the
CAN controller, accesses received data, and passes data for transmission via Special Function Registers
(SFR) in the C8051.
CANRX
CANTX
C8051F060/1/2/3
C
8
0
5
1
CAN Controller
TX
RX
CAN
Core
Message RAM
(32 Message Objects)
Message Handler
REGISTERS
Interrupt
S
F
R
's
M
C
U
Figure 1.11. CAN Controller Overview
Rev. 1.2
31
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.7.
Serial Ports
The C8051F06x MCU Family includes two Enhanced Full-Duplex UARTs, an enhanced SPI Bus, and
SMBus/I2C. Each of the serial buses is fully implemented in hardware and makes extensive use of the
CIP-51's interrupts, thus requiring very little intervention by the CPU. The serial buses do not "share"
resources such as timers, interrupts, or Port I/O, so any or all of the serial buses may be used together with
any other.
32
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.8.
16-Bit Analog to Digital Converters
The C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 devices have two on-chip 16-bit SAR ADCs (ADC0 and ADC1), which can
be used independently in single-ended mode, or together in differential mode. ADC0 and ADC1 can
directly access on-chip or external RAM, using the DMA interface. With a maximum throughput of 1 Msps,
the ADCs offer 16 bit performance with two available linearity grades. ADC0 and ADC1 each have the
capability to use dedicated, on-chip voltage reference circuitry or an external voltage reference source.
The ADCs are under full control of the CIP-51 microcontroller via the associated Special Function Registers. The system controller can also put the ADCs into shutdown mode to save power.
Conversions can be started in four ways; a software command, an overflow of Timer 2, an overflow of
Timer 3, or an external signal input. This flexibility allows the start of conversion to be triggered by software
events, external HW signals, or a periodic timer overflow signal. The two ADCs can operate independently,
or be synchronized to perform conversions at the same time. Conversion completions are indicated by status bits, and can generate interrupts. The resulting 16-bit data words are latched into SFRs upon completion of a conversion. A DMA interface is also provided, which can gather conversions from the ADCs, and
directly store them to on-chip or external RAM.
REF
ADC0 also contains Window Compare registers, which can be configured to interrupt the controller when
ADC0 data is within or outside of a specified range. ADC0 can monitor a key voltage continuously in background mode, and not interrupt the controller unless the converted data is within the specified window.
Start Conversion
16-Bit
SAR
ADC0
AIN0
AIN0G
Write to AD0BUSY
Timer 3 Overflow
CNVSTR0
Timer 2 Overflow
16
ADC0
Window
Compare
Logic
(DC, -0.2 to 0.6 V)
Configuration and Control
Registers
AIN1G
(DC, -0.2 to 0.6 V)
REF
16-Bit
SAR
ADC1
AIN1
DMA
Interface
ADC Data
Registers
16
Start Conversion
Write to AD1BUSY
Timer 3 Overflow
CNVSTR1
Timer 2 Overflow
Write to AD0BUSY
Figure 1.12. 16-Bit ADC Block Diagram
Rev. 1.2
33
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.9.
10-Bit Analog to Digital Converter
The C8051F060/1/2/3 devices have an on-board 10-bit SAR ADC (ADC2) with a 9-channel input multiplexer and programmable gain amplifier. This ADC features a 200 ksps maximum throughput and true 10bit performance with an INL of ±1LSB. Eight input pins are available for measurement and can be programmed as single-ended or differential inputs. Additionally, the on-chip temperature sensor can be used
as an input to the ADC. The ADC is under full control of the CIP-51 microcontroller via the Special Function
Registers. The ADC2 voltage reference is selected between the analog power supply (AV+) and the external VREF2 pin. User software may put ADC2 into shutdown mode to save power.
A flexible conversion scheduling system allows ADC2 conversions to be initiated by software commands,
timer overflows, or an external input signal. Conversion completions are indicated by a status bit and an
interrupt (if enabled), and the resulting 10-bit data word is latched into two SFR locations upon completion.
ADC2 also contains Window Compare registers, which can be configured to interrupt the controller when
ADC2 data is within or outside of a specified range. ADC2 can monitor a key voltage continuously in background mode, and not interrupt the controller unless the converted data is within the specified window.
Analog Multiplexer
Configuration and Control Registers
AIN2.0
AIN2.1
AIN2.2
10
AIN2.3
10-Bit
SAR
9-to-1
AMUX
AIN2.4
AIN2.5
10
ADC
AIN2.6
AIN2.7
TEMP
SENSOR
VREF
Start Conversion
AV+
Single-ended or
Differential Measurement
Figure 1.13. 10-Bit ADC Diagram
34
ADC Data
Registers
Conversion
Complete
Interrupt
Write to AD2BUSY
VREF2 Pin
AGND
ADC2
Window
Compare
Logic
Rev. 1.2
Timer 3 Overflow
CNVSTR2 Input
Timer 2 Overflow
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.10. 12-bit Digital to Analog Converters
The C8051F060/1/2/3 MCUs have two integrated 12-bit Digital to Analog Converters (DACs). The MCU
data and control interface to each DAC is via the Special Function Registers. The MCU can place either or
both of the DACs in a low power shutdown mode.
The DACs are voltage output mode and include a flexible output scheduling mechanism. This scheduling
mechanism allows DAC output updates to be forced by a software write or scheduled on a Timer 2, 3, or 4
overflow. The DAC voltage reference is supplied from the dedicated VREFD input pin on C8051F060/2
devices or via the VREF2 pin on C8051F061/3 devices, which is shared with ADC2. The DACs are especially useful as references for the comparators or offsets for the differential inputs of the ADCs.
VREF
DAC0
DAC0
SFR's
(Data
and
Control)
VREF
DAC1
CIP-51
and
Interrupt
Handler
DAC1
Figure 1.14. DAC System Block Diagram
Rev. 1.2
35
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
1.11. Analog Comparators
The C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 MCUs include three analog comparators on-chip. The comparators have
software programmable hysteresis and response time. Each comparator can generate an interrupt on its
rising edge, falling edge, or both. The interrupts are capable of waking up the MCU from sleep mode, and
Comparator 0 can be used as a reset source. The output state of the comparators can be polled in software or routed to Port I/O pins via the Crossbar. Outputs from the comparator can be routed through the
crossbar. The comparators can be programmed to a low power shutdown mode when not in use.
(Port I/O)
CPn Output
CROSSBAR
3 Comparators
SFR's
CPn+
+
CPn-
-
CPn
(Data
and
Control)
Comparator inputs
Port 2.[7:2]
Figure 1.15. Comparator Block Diagram
36
Rev. 1.2
CIP-51
and
Interrupt
Handler
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
2.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 2.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings*
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Ambient temperature under bias
-55
125
°C
Storage Temperature
-65
150
°C
Voltage on any pin (except VDD, AV+, AVDD, and
Port 0) with respect to DGND
-0.3
VDD +
0.3
V
Voltage on any Port 0 Pin with respect to DGND.
-0.3
5.8
V
Voltage on VDD, AV+, or AVDD with respect to DGND
-0.3
4.2
V
Maximum Total current through VDD, AV+, AVDD,
DGND, and AGND
800
mA
Maximum output current sunk by any Port pin
100
mA
Maximum output current sunk by any other I/O pin
50
mA
Maximum output current sourced by any Port pin
100
mA
Maximum output current sourced by any other I/O pin
50
mA
*
Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the
device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the devices at those or any other conditions
above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum
rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Rev. 1.2
37
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
3.
Global DC Electrical Characteristics
Table 3.1. Global DC Electrical Characteristics
-40 to +85 °C, 25 MHz System Clock unless otherwise specified.
Parameter
Analog Supply Voltage (AV+,
AVDD)
Conditions
(Note 1)
Digital Supply Voltage (VDD)
Min
Typ
Max
Units
2.7
3.0
3.6
V
2.7
3.0
3.6
V
0.5
V
Analog-to-Digital Supply Delta
(|VDD - AV+| or |VDD - AVDD|)
Supply Current from Analog
Peripherals (active)
Internal REF, ADC, DAC, Comparators all enabled. (Note 2)
14
mA
Supply Current from Analog
Peripherals (inactive)
Internal REF, ADC, DAC, Comparators all disabled, oscillator
disabled.
0.2
µA
Supply Current from CPU and
VDD=2.7 V, Clock=25 MHz
Digital Peripherals (CPU active) VDD=2.7 V, Clock=1 MHz
VDD=2.7 V, Clock=32 kHz
(Note 3)
VDD=3.0 V, Clock=25 MHz
VDD=3.0 V, Clock=1 MHz
VDD=3.0 V, Clock=32 kHz
18
0.7
30
20
1.0
35
mA
mA
µA
mA
mA
µA
VDD=2.7 V, Clock=25 MHz
VDD=2.7 V, Clock=1 MHz
VDD=2.7 V, Clock=32 kHz
VDD=3.0 V, Clock=25 MHz
VDD=3.0 V, Clock=1 MHz
VDD=3.0 V, Clock=32 kHz
13
0.5
20
16
0.8
23
mA
mA
µA
mA
mA
µA
Supply Current with all systems Oscillator not running
shut down
0.2
µA
VDD Supply RAM Data Retention Voltage
1.5
V
Supply Current from CPU and
Digital Peripherals (CPU inactive, not accessing Flash)
(Note 3)
SYSCLK (System Clock)
(Note 4)
Specified Operating Temperature Range
0
25
MHz
-40
+85
°C
Note 1: Analog Supply AV+ must be greater than 1 V for VDD monitor to operate.
Note 2: Internal Oscillator and VDD Monitor current not included. Individual supply current contributions
for each peripheral are listed in the chapter.
Note 3: Current increases linearly with supply Voltage.
Note 4: SYSCLK must be at least 32 kHz to enable debugging.
38
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
4.
Pinout and Package Definitions
Table 4.1. Pin Definitions
Pin Numbers
Name
F060
F061
F064
F065
F062
F063
F066
F067
Type Description
VDD
37, 64, 26, 40, 37, 64, 26, 40,
90
55
90
55
Digital Supply Voltage. Must be tied to +2.7 to
+3.6 V.
DGND
38, 63, 27, 39, 38, 63, 27, 39,
89
54
89
54
Digital Ground. Must be tied to Ground.
AV+
11, 16, 7, 10, 11, 16, 7, 10,
24
18
24
18
Analog Supply Voltage. Must be tied to +2.7 to
+3.6 V.
AVDD
AGND
13
23
13
23
Analog Supply Voltage. Must be tied to +2.7 to
+3.6 V.
10, 14, 6, 11, 10, 14, 6, 11,
17, 23 19, 22 17, 23 19, 22
Analog Ground. Must be tied to Ground.
TMS
96
52
96
52
D In
JTAG Test Mode Select with internal pull-up.
TCK
97
53
97
53
D In
JTAG Test Clock with internal pull-up.
TDI
98
56
98
56
D In
JTAG Test Data Input with internal pull-up. TDI is
latched on the rising edge of TCK.
TDO
99
57
99
57
D Out JTAG Test Data Output with internal pull-up. Data is
shifted out on TDO on the falling edge of TCK. TDO
output is a tri-state driver.
/RST
100
58
100
58
D I/O Device Reset. Open-drain output of internal VDD
monitor. Is driven low when VDD is <2.7 V and
MONEN is high. An external source can initiate a
system reset by driving this pin low.
XTAL1
26
20
26
20
A In
XTAL2
27
21
27
21
MONEN
28
63
28
63
VREF
4
61
4
61
A Out Bandgap Voltage Reference Output
VREF0
21
15
21
15
A I/O Bandgap Voltage Reference Output for ADC0.
ADC0 Voltage Reference Input.
Crystal Input. This pin is the return for the internal
oscillator circuit for a crystal or ceramic resonator.
For a precision internal clock, connect a crystal or
ceramic resonator from XTAL1 to XTAL2. If overdriven by an external CMOS clock, this becomes
the system clock.
A Out Crystal Output. This pin is the excitation driver for a
crystal or ceramic resonator.
D In
VDD Monitor Enable. When tied high, this pin
enables the internal VDD monitor, which forces a
system reset when VDD is < 2.7 V. When tied low,
the internal VDD monitor is disabled. Recommended configuration is to connect directly to VDD.
Rev. 1.2
39
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 4.1. Pin Definitions (Continued)
Pin Numbers
Name
F060
F061
F064
F065
F062
F063
F066
F067
VRGND0
20
14
20
14
VBGAP0
22
16
22
16
A Out ADC0 Bandgap Bypass Pin.
VREF1
6
2
6
2
A I/O Bandgap Voltage Reference Output for ADC1.
ADC1 Voltage Reference Input.
VRGND1
7
3
7
3
A In
VBGAP1
5
1
5
1
VREF2
2
62
Type Description
A In
ADC0 Voltage Reference Ground. This pin should
be grounded if using the ADC.
ADC1 Voltage Reference Ground. This pin should
be grounded if using the ADC.
A Out ADC1 Bandgap Bypass Pin.
A In
ADC2 Voltage Reference Input.
A In
ADC2, DAC0, and DAC1 Voltage Reference Input.
A In
DAC0 and DAC1 Voltage Reference Input.
VREFD
3
AIN0
18
12
18
12
A In
ADC0 Signal Input (See ADC0 Specification for
complete description).
AIN0G
19
13
19
13
A In
ADC0 DC Bias Input (See ADC0 Specification for
complete description).
AIN1
9
5
9
5
A In
ADC1 Signal Input (See ADC1 Specification for
complete description).
AIN1G
8
4
8
4
A In
ADC1 DC Bias Input (See ADC1 Specification for
complete description).
CNVSTR0
15
9
15
9
D In
External Conversion Start Source for ADC0
CNVSTR1
12
8
12
8
D In
External Conversion Start Source for ADC1
CANTX
94
59
CANRX
95
60
DAC0
25
17
A Out Digital to Analog Converter 0 Voltage Output. (See
DAC Specification for complete description).
DAC1
1
64
A Out Digital to Analog Converter 1 Voltage Output. (See
DAC Specification for complete description).
P0.0
62
51
62
51
D I/O Port 0.0. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P0.1
61
50
61
50
D I/O Port 0.1. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P0.2
60
49
60
49
D I/O Port 0.2. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P0.3
59
48
59
48
D I/O Port 0.3. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P0.4
58
47
58
47
D I/O Port 0.4. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
40
D Out Controller Area Network Transmit Output.
D In
Controller Area Network Receive Input.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 4.1. Pin Definitions (Continued)
Pin Numbers
Name
F060
F061
F064
F065
Type Description
F062
F063
F066
F067
P0.5
57
46
57
46
D I/O Port 0.5. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P0.6
56
45
56
45
D I/O Port 0.6. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P0.7
55
44
55
44
D I/O Port 0.7. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P1.0/AIN2.0
36
33
36
33
D I/O Port 1.0. See Port Input/Output section for complete
A In description.
ADC2 Input Channel 0 (C8051F060/1/2/3 Only).
P1.1/AIN2.1
35
32
35
32
D I/O Port 1.1. See Port Input/Output section for complete
A In description.
ADC2 Input Channel 1 (C8051F060/1/2/3 Only).
P1.2/AIN2.2
34
31
34
31
D I/O Port 1.2. See Port Input/Output section for complete
A In description.
ADC2 Input Channel 2 (C8051F060/1/2/3 Only).
P1.3/AIN2.3
33
30
33
30
D I/O Port 1.3. See Port Input/Output section for complete
A In description.
ADC2 Input Channel 3 (C8051F060/1/2/3 Only).
P1.4/AIN2.4
32
29
32
29
D I/O Port 1.4. See Port Input/Output section for complete
A In description.
ADC2 Input Channel 4 (C8051F060/1/2/3 Only).
P1.5/AIN2.5
31
28
31
28
D I/O Port 1.5. See Port Input/Output section for complete
A In description.
ADC2 Input Channel 5 (C8051F060/1/2/3 Only).
P1.6/AIN2.6
30
25
30
25
D I/O Port 1.6. See Port Input/Output section for complete
A In description.
ADC2 Input Channel 6 (C8051F060/1/2/3 Only).
P1.7/AIN2.7
29
24
29
24
D I/O Port 1.7. See Port Input/Output section for complete
A In description.
ADC2 Input Channel 7 (C8051F060/1/2/3 Only).
P2.0
46
43
46
43
D I/O Port 2.0. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P2.1
45
42
45
42
D I/O Port 2.1. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P2.2
44
41
44
41
D I/O Port 2.2. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P2.3
43
38
43
38
D I/O Port 2.3. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P2.4
42
37
42
37
D I/O Port 2.4. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
Rev. 1.2
41
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 4.1. Pin Definitions (Continued)
Pin Numbers
Name
F060
F061
F064
F065
F062
F063
F066
F067
P2.5
41
36
41
36
D I/O Port 2.5. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P2.6
40
35
40
35
D I/O Port 2.6. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P2.7
39
34
39
34
D I/O Port 2.7. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P3.0
54
54
D I/O Port 3.0. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P3.1
53
53
D I/O Port 3.1. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P3.2
52
52
D I/O Port 3.2. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P3.3
51
51
D I/O Port 3.3. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P3.4
50
50
D I/O Port 3.4. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P3.5
49
49
D I/O Port 3.5. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P3.6
48
48
D I/O Port 3.6. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P3.7
47
47
D I/O Port 3.7. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P4.5/ALE
93
93
D I/O Port 4.5. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
ALE Strobe for External Memory Address Bus (Multiplexed mode).
P4.6/RD
92
92
D I/O Port 4.6. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
/RD Strobe for External Memory Address Bus.
P4.7/WR
91
91
D I/O Port 4.7. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
/WR Strobe for External Memory Address Bus.
P5.0/A8
88
88
D I/O Port 5.0. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
Bit 8 External Memory Address Bus (Non-multiplexed mode).
P5.1/A9
87
87
D I/O Port 5.1. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
42
Type Description
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 4.1. Pin Definitions (Continued)
Pin Numbers
Name
F060
F061
F064
F065
F062
F063
F066
F067
Type Description
P5.2/A10
86
86
D I/O Port 5.2. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P5.3/A11
85
85
D I/O Port 5.3. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P5.4/A12
84
84
D I/O Port 5.4. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P5.5/A13
83
83
D I/O Port 5.5. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P5.6/A14
82
82
D I/O Port 5.6. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P5.7/A15
81
81
D I/O Port 5.7. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P6.0/A8m/
A0
80
80
D I/O Port 6.0. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
Bit 8 External Memory Address Bus (Multiplexed
mode).
Bit 0 External Memory Address Bus (Non-multiplexed mode).
P6.1/A9m/
A1
79
79
D I/O Port 6.1. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P6.2/A10m/
A2
78
78
D I/O Port 6.2. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P6.3/A11m/
A3
77
77
D I/O Port 6.3. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P6.4/A12m/
A4
76
76
D I/O Port 6.4. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P6.5/A13m/
A5
75
75
D I/O Port 6.5. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P6.6/A14m/
A6
74
74
D I/O Port 6.6. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P6.7/A15m/
A7
73
73
D I/O Port 6.7. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P7.0/AD0m/
D0
72
72
D I/O Port 7.0. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
Bit 0 External Memory Address/Data Bus (Multiplexed mode).
Bit 0 External Memory Data Bus (Non-multiplexed
mode).
P7.1/AD1m/
D1
71
71
D I/O Port 7.1. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
Rev. 1.2
43
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 4.1. Pin Definitions (Continued)
Pin Numbers
Name
F060
F061
F064
F065
F062
F063
F066
F067
Type Description
P7.2/AD2m/
D2
70
70
D I/O Port 7.2. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P7.3/AD3m/
D3
69
69
D I/O Port 7.3. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P7.4/AD4m/
D4
68
68
D I/O Port 7.4. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P7.5/AD5m/
D5
67
67
D I/O Port 7.5. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P7.6/AD6m/
D6
66
66
D I/O Port 7.6. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
P7.7/AD7m/
D7
65
65
D I/O Port 7.7. See Port Input/Output section for complete
description.
NC
44
1, 2, 3, 17, 59,
25, 94, 60, 62,
64
95
No Connection.
Rev. 1.2
/RST
TDO
TDI
TCK
TMS
CANRX
CANTX
P4.5/ALE
P4.6/RD
P4.7/WR
VDD
DGND
P5.0/A8
P5.1/A9
P5.2/A10
P5.3/A11
P5.4/A12
P5.5/A13
P5.6/A14
P5.7/A15
P6.0/A8m/A0
P6.1/A9m/A1
P6.2/A10m/A2
P6.3/A11m/A3
P6.4/A12m/A4
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
DAC1
1
75
P6.5/A13m/A5
VREF2
VREFD
2
3
74
73
P6.6/A14m/A6
P6.7/A15m/A7
VREF
4
72
P7.0/AD0m/D0
VBGAP1
5
71
P7.1/AD1m/D1
VREF1
VRGND1
6
7
70
69
P7.2/AD2m/D2
P7.3/AD3m/D3
AIN1G
8
68
P7.4/AD4m/D4
AIN1
9
67
P7.5/AD5m/D5
AGND
AV+
10
11
66
65
P7.6/AD6m/D6
P7.7/AD7m/D7
CNVSTR1
12
64
VDD
AVDD
13
63
DGND
AGND
CNVSTR0
14
15
62
61
P0.0
P0.1
C8051F060/F062
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
P2.7
P2.6
P2.5
P2.4
P2.3
P2.2
P2.1
P2.0
P3.7
P3.6
P3.5
P3.4
P3.3
37
38
P3.2
51
VDD
DGND
52
25
36
24
35
AV+
DAC0
P1.0/AIN2.0
P3.0
P3.1
P1.1/AIN2.1
54
53
33
34
22
23
P1.3/AIN2.3
P1.2/AIN2.2
P0.7
VBGAP0
AGND
32
P0.6
55
31
56
21
P1.4/AIN2.4
20
VREF0
P1.5/AIN2.5
VRGND0
29
30
P0.4
P0.5
P1.7/AIN2.7
P1.6/AIN2.6
58
57
28
18
19
MONEN
P0.3
AIN0
AIN0G
27
P0.2
59
26
60
17
XTAL2
16
XTAL1
AV+
AGND
Figure 4.1. C8051F060 / C8051F062 Pinout Diagram (TQFP-100)
Rev. 1.2
45
/RST
TDO
TDI
TCK
TMS
NC
NC
P4.5/ALE
P4.6/RD
P4.7/WR
VDD
DGND
P5.0/A8
P5.1/A9
P5.2/A10
P5.3/A11
P5.4/A12
P5.5/A13
P5.6/A14
P5.7/A15
P6.0/A8m/A0
P6.1/A9m/A1
P6.2/A10m/A2
P6.3/A11m/A3
P6.4/A12m/A4
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
NC
1
75
P6.5/A13m/A5
NC
NC
2
3
74
73
P6.6/A14m/A6
P6.7/A15m/A7
VREF
4
72
P7.0/AD0m/D0
VBGAP1
5
71
P7.1/AD1m/D1
VREF1
VRGND1
6
7
70
69
P7.2/AD2m/D2
P7.3/AD3m/D3
AIN1G
8
68
P7.4/AD4m/D4
AIN1
9
67
P7.5/AD5m/D5
AGND
AV+
10
11
66
65
P7.6/AD6m/D6
P7.7/AD7m/D7
CNVSTR1
12
64
VDD
AVDD
13
63
DGND
AGND
CNVSTR0
14
15
62
61
P0.0
P0.1
C8051F064/F066
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
P2.7
P2.6
P2.5
P2.4
P2.3
P2.2
P2.1
P2.0
P3.7
P3.6
P3.5
P3.4
P3.3
37
38
P3.2
51
VDD
DGND
52
25
36
24
NC
35
AV+
P1.0
P3.0
P3.1
P1.1
54
53
33
34
22
23
P1.3
P1.2
P0.7
VBGAP0
AGND
32
P0.6
55
31
56
21
P1.4
20
VREF0
P1.5
VRGND0
29
30
P0.4
P0.5
P1.7
P1.6
58
57
28
18
19
MONEN
P0.3
AIN0
AIN0G
27
P0.2
59
26
60
17
XTAL2
16
XTAL1
AV+
AGND
Figure 4.2. C8051F064 / C8051F066 Pinout Diagram (TQFP-100)
46
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
D
MIN NOM MAX
(mm) (mm) (mm)
D1
A
-
A1 0.05
-
1.20
-
0.15
A2 0.95 1.00 1.05
b
E1
100
E
D
-
16.00
-
D1
-
14.00
-
e
-
0.50
-
E
-
16.00
-
E1
-
14.00
-
L
PIN 1
DESIGNATOR
A2
0.17 0.22 0.27
0.45 0.60 0.75
1
e
A
L
b
A1
Figure 4.3. TQFP-100 Package Drawing
Rev. 1.2
47
DAC1
MONEN
VREF2
VREF
CANRX
CANTX
/RST
TDO
TDI
VDD
DGND
TCK
TMS
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
VBGAP1
1
48
P0.3
VREF1
2
47
P0.4
VRGND1
3
46
P0.5
AIN1G
4
45
P0.6
AIN1
5
44
P0.7
AGND
6
43
P2.0
AV+
7
42
P2.1
CNVSTR1
8
41
P2.2
CNVSTR0
9
40
VDD
C8051F061/063
30
31
32
P1.2/AIN2.2
P1.1/AIN2.1
P1.0/AIN2.0
P1.3/AIN2.3
33
29
16
P1.4/AIN2.4
VBGAP0
28
P2.7
P1.5/AIN2.5
34
27
15
DGND
VREF0
26
P2.6
VDD
35
25
14
P1.6/AIN2.6
VRGND0
24
P2.5
P1.7/AIN2.7
36
23
13
AVDD
AIN0G
22
P2.4
AGND
37
21
12
XTAL2
AIN0
20
P2.3
XTAL1
38
19
11
AGND
AGND
18
DGND
AV+
39
17
10
DAC0
AV+
Figure 4.4. C8051F061 / C8051F063 Pinout Diagram (TQFP-64)
48
Rev. 1.2
NC
MONEN
NC
VREF
NC
NC
/RST
TDO
TDI
VDD
DGND
TCK
TMS
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
VBGAP1
1
48
P0.3
VREF1
2
47
P0.4
VRGND1
3
46
P0.5
AIN1G
4
45
P0.6
AIN1
5
44
P0.7
AGND
6
43
P2.0
AV+
7
42
P2.1
CNVSTR1
8
41
P2.2
CNVSTR0
9
40
VDD
C8051F065/067
30
31
32
P1.2
P1.1
P1.0
P1.3
33
29
16
P1.4
VBGAP0
28
P2.7
P1.5
34
27
15
DGND
VREF0
26
P2.6
VDD
35
25
14
P1.6
VRGND0
24
P2.5
P1.7
36
23
13
AVDD
AIN0G
22
P2.4
AGND
37
21
12
XTAL2
AIN0
20
P2.3
XTAL1
38
19
11
AGND
AGND
18
DGND
AV+
39
17
10
NC
AV+
Figure 4.5. C8051F065 / C8051F067 Pinout Diagram (TQFP-64)
Rev. 1.2
49
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
D
MIN NOM MAX
(mm) (mm) (mm)
D1
A
-
-
1.20
A1 0.05
-
0.15
A2 0.95
-
1.05
E1
E
64
PIN 1
DESIGNATOR
1
A2
e
b 0.17 0.22 0.27
D
-
12.00
-
D1
-
10.00
-
e
-
0.50
-
E
-
12.00
-
E1
-
10.00
-
A
L
b
A1
Figure 4.6. TQFP-64 Package Drawing
50
Rev. 1.2
L 0.45 0.60 0.75
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
5.
16-Bit ADCs (ADC0 and ADC1)
The ADC subsystem for the C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 consists of two 1 Msps, 16-bit successive-approximation-register ADCs with integrated track-and-hold, a Programmable Window Detector, and a DMA interface (see block diagrams in Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2). The ADCs can be configured as two separate,
single-ended ADCs, or as a differential pair. The Data Conversion Modes, Window Detector, and DMA
interface are all configurable under software control via the Special Function Registers shown in Figure 5.1
and Figure 5.2. The voltage references used by ADC0 and ADC1 are selected as described in Section 5.2.
The ADCs and their respective track-and-hold circuitry can be independently enabled or disabled with the
Special Function Registers. Either ADC can be enabled by setting the ADnEN bit in the ADC’s Control register (ADCnCN) to logic 1. The ADCs are in low power shutdown when these bits are logic 0.
REF
AV+
AD0EN
16-Bit
SAR
ADC0
AIN0
AIN0G
ADC0 Data Bus
16
00
Start Conversion 01
(DC, -0.2 to 0.6 V)
10
11
AD0EN
AD0TM
AD0INT
AD0BUSY
AD0CM1
AD0CM0
AD0WINT
÷
AD0SC3
AD0SC2
AD0SC1
AD0SC0
AD0SCAL
AD0GCAL
AD0LCAL
AD0OCAL
SYSCLK
AD0BUSY (W)
Timer 3 Overflow
CNVSTR0
Timer 2 Overflow
ADC0CF
ADC0CN
REF
AV+
AD1EN
16-Bit
SAR
ADC1
AIN1
AIN1G
ADC1 Data Bus
16
000
Start Conversion 010
(DC, -0.2 to 0.6 V)
100
110
xx1
ADC1CF
AD1EN
AD1TM
AD1INT
AD1BUSY
AD1CM2
AD1CM1
AD1CM0
÷
AD1SC3
AD1SC2
AD1SC1
AD1SC0
AD1SCAL
AD1GCAL
AD1LCAL
AD1OCAL
SYSCLK
AD1BUSY (W)
Timer 3 Overflow
CNVSTR1
Timer 2 Overflow
AD0BUSY (W)
ADC1CN
Figure 5.1. 16-Bit ADC0 and ADC1 Control Path Diagram
Rev. 1.2
51
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
AIN0G
AIN1
AIN1G
16-Bit
SAR
ADC0
16-Bit
SAR
ADC1
AMX0SL
DIFFSEL
AIN0
16
+
-
16
8
Σ
0
Single-Ended
1
Differential
8
ADC1H
ADC1L
8
ADC0H
16
DMA
Interface
8
ADC0L
16
Window
Compare
AD0WINT
32
ADC0GTH
ADC0GTL
ADC0LTH
ADC0LTL
Figure 5.2. 16-bit ADC0 and ADC1 Data Path Diagram
5.1.
Single-Ended or Differential Operation
ADC0 and ADC1 can be programmed to operate independently as single-ended ADCs, or together to
accept a differential input. In single-ended mode, the ADCs can be configured to sample simultaneously, or
to use different conversion speeds. In differential mode, ADC1 is a slave to ADC0, and its configuration is
based on ADC0 settings, except during offset or gain calibrations. The DIFFSEL bit in the Channel Select
Register AMX0SL (Figure 5.6) selects between single-ended and differential mode.
5.1.1. Pseudo-Differential Inputs
The inputs to the ADCs are pseudo-differential. The actual voltage measured by each ADC is equal to the
voltage between the AINn pin and the AINnG pin. AINnG must be a DC signal between -0.2 and 0.6 V. In
most systems, AINnG will be connected to AGND. If not tied to AGND, the AINnG signal can be used to
negate a limited amount of fixed offset, but it is recommended that the internal offset calibration features of
the device be used for this purpose. When operating in differential mode, AIN0G and AIN1G should be tied
together. AINn must remain above AINnG in both modes for accurate conversion results.
52
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
5.2.
Voltage Reference
The voltage reference circuitries for ADC0 and ADC1 allow for many different voltage reference configurations. Each ADC has the capability to use its own dedicated, on-chip voltage reference, or an off-chip reference circuit. A block diagram of the reference circuitry for one ADC is shown in Figure 5.3.
The internal voltage reference circuit for each ADC consists of an independent, temperature stable 1.2 V
bandgap voltage reference generator, with an output buffer amplifier which multiplies the bandgap reference by 2. The maximum load seen by the VREFn (VREF0 or VREF1) pin must be less than 100 µA to
AGND. Bypass capacitors of 0.1 µF and 47 µF are recommended from the VREFn pin to VRGNDn.
The voltage reference circuitry for each ADC is controlled in the Reference Control Registers. REF0CN
(defined in Figure 5.11) is the Reference Control Register for ADC0, and REF1CN (defined in Figure 5.12)
is the Reference Control Register for ADC1. The REFnCN registers are used to enable/disable the internal
reference and bias generator circuitry for each ADC independently. The BIASEn bits enable the on-board
bias generators for each ADC, while the REFBEn bits enable the 2x buffer amplifiers which drive the
VREFn pins. When disabled, the supply current drawn by the bandgap and buffer amplifier falls to less
than 1 µA (typical) and the output of the buffer amplifier enters a high impedance state (approximately 25 k
Ohms). If the internal voltage reference for an ADC is used, the BIASEn and REFBEn bits for that ADC
must both be set to logic 1. If an external reference is used, the REFBEn bit should be set to logic 0. Note
that the BIASEn bit for an ADC must be set to logic 1 to enable that ADC, regardless of the voltage reference that is used. If an ADC is not being used, the BIASEn bit can be set to logic 0 to conserve power. The
electrical specifications for the Voltage References are given in Table 5.3.
ADCn
External
Voltage
Reference
Ref
Bias
VREFn
47µF
0.1µF
x2
1.25V
Band-Gap
EN
VRGNDn
BIASEn
REFBEn
VBGAPn
0.1µF
REFnCN
Recommended
Bypass Capacitors
Figure 5.3. Voltage Reference Block Diagram
Rev. 1.2
53
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
5.3.
ADC Modes of Operation
ADC0 and ADC1 have a maximum conversion speed of 1 Msps. The conversion clocks for the ADCs are
derived from the system clock. The ADCnSC bits in the ADCnCF register determine how many system
clocks (from 1 to 16) are used for each conversion clock.
5.3.1. Starting a Conversion
For ADC0, conversions can be initiated in one of four ways, depending on the programmed states of the
ADC0 Start of Conversion Mode bits (AD0CM1, AD0CM0) in ADC0CN. For ADC0, conversions may be initiated by:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Writing a ‘1’ to the AD0BUSY bit of ADC0CN;
A Timer 3 overflow (i.e. timed continuous conversions);
A rising edge detected on the external ADC convert start signal, CNVSTR0;
A Timer 2 overflow (i.e. timed continuous conversions).
ADC1 conversions can be initiated in five different ways, according to the ADC1 Start of Conversion Mode
bits (AD1CM2-AD1CM0) in ADC1CN. For ADC1, conversions may be initiated by:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Writing a ‘1’ to the AD1BUSY bit of ADC1CN;
A Timer 3 overflow (i.e. timed continuous conversions);
A rising edge detected on the external ADC convert start signal, CNVSTR1;
A Timer 2 overflow (i.e. timed continuous conversions);
Writing a ‘1’ to the AD0BUSY bit of ADC0CN.
The ADnBUSY bit is set to logic 1 during conversion and restored to logic 0 when conversion is complete.
The falling edge of ADnBUSY triggers an interrupt (when enabled) and sets the ADnINT interrupt flag
(ADCnCN.5). In single-ended mode, the converted data for ADCn is available in the ADCn data word MSB
and LSB registers, ADCnH, ADCnL. In differential mode, the converted data (combined from ADC0 and
ADC1) is available in the ADC0 data word MSB and LSB registers, ADC0H, ADC0L.
When initiating conversions by writing a ‘1’ to ADnBUSY, the ADnINT bit should be polled to determine
when a conversion has completed (ADCn interrupts may also be used). The recommended polling procedure is shown below.
Step 1.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Step 4.
Write a ‘0’ to ADnINT;
Write a ‘1’ to ADnBUSY;
Poll ADnINT for ‘1’;
Process ADCn data.
When an external start-of-conversion source is required in differential mode the two pins (CNVSTR0 and
CNVSTR1) should be tied together.
5.3.2. Tracking Modes
The ADnTM bit in register ADCnCN controls the ADCn track-and-hold mode. When the ADC is enabled,
the ADC input is continuously tracked when a conversion is not in progress. When the ADnTM bit is logic
1, each conversion is preceded by a tracking period (after the start-of-conversion signal). When the
CNVSTRn signal is used to initiate conversions, the ADC will track until a rising edge occurs on the
CNVSTRn pin (see Figure 5.4 and Table 5.1 for conversion timing parameters). Setting ADnTM to 1 can
be useful to ensure that settling time requirements are met when an external multiplexer is used on the
analog input (see Section “5.3.3. Settling Time Requirements” on page 56).
54
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
A. ADC Timing for External Trigger Source
CNVSTRn
tConv
Track
Convert
Track
B. ADC Timing for Internal Trigger Sources
Timer 2, Timer 3 Overflow;
Write '1' to ADnBUSY
tConv
ADCnTM=1
Track
Track
Convert
Track
tConv
ADCnTM=0
Track
Convert
Track
Figure 5.4. ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing
Table 5.1. Conversion Timing (tConv)
ADnSC3-0
ADCnTM = 0
ADCnTM = 1
ADnSC3-0
ADCnTM = 0
ADCnTM = 1
0000
21*tSYSCLK
38*tSYSCLK
1000
171*tSYSCLK
315*tSYSCLK
0001
40*tSYSCLK
72*tSYSCLK
1001
189*tSYSCLK
349*tSYSCLK
0010
58*tSYSCLK
106*tSYSCLK
1010
208*tSYSCLK
384*tSYSCLK
0011
78*tSYSCLK
142*tSYSCLK
1011
226*tSYSCLK
418*tSYSCLK
0100
97*tSYSCLK
177*tSYSCLK
1100
245*tSYSCLK
453*tSYSCLK
0101
115*tSYSCLK
211*tSYSCLK
1101
263*tSYSCLK
487*tSYSCLK
0110
134*tSYSCLK
246*tSYSCLK
1110
282*tSYSCLK
522*tSYSCLK
0111
152*tSYSCLK
280*tSYSCLK
1111
300*tSYSCLK
556*tSYSCLK
Rev. 1.2
55
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
5.3.3. Settling Time Requirements
The ADC requires a minimum tracking time before an accurate conversion can be performed. This tracking
time is determined by the ADC input resistance, the ADC sampling capacitance, any external source resistance, and the accuracy required for the conversion. Figure 5.5 shows the equivalent ADC input circuits for
both Differential and Single-ended modes. Notice that the equivalent time constant for both input circuits is
the same. The required settling time for a given settling accuracy (SA) may be approximated by
Equation 5.1. An absolute minimum tracking time of 280 ns is required prior to the start of a conversion.
n
2
t = ln  ------- × R TOTAL C SAMPLE
 SA
Equation 5.1. ADC0 Settling Time Requirements
Where:
SA is the settling accuracy, given as a fraction of an LSB (for example, 0.25 to settle within 1/4 LSB)
t is the required settling time in seconds
RTOTAL is the sum of the ADC input resistance and any external source resistance.
n is the ADC resolution in bits (16).
Differential Mode
Single-Ended Mode
AIN0
or
AIN1
AIN0
RAIN = 30 Ω
RAIN = 30 Ω
CSAMPLE = 80pF
CSAMPLE = 80pF
RCInput= RAIN * CSAMPLE
RCInput= RAIN * CSAMPLE
CSAMPLE = 80pF
AIN1
RAIN = 30 Ω
Figure 5.5. ADC0 and ADC1 Equivalent Input Circuits
56
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.6. AMX0SL: AMUX Configuration Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
DIFFSEL
-
-
-
-
-
-
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xBB
SFR Page: 0
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
Bit 5-0:
NOTE:
RESERVED. Write to 0b.
DIFFSEL: Fully Differential Conversion Mode Select Bit.
0: Operate In Single-Ended Mode.
1: Operate In Differential Mode.
RESERVED. Write to 000000b.
For single-ended mode, the ADC0 Data Word is stored in ADC0H and ADC0L, while the
ADC1 Data Word is stored in ADC1H and ADC1L.
In differential mode, the combined ADC Data Word is stored in ADC0H and ADC0L, and is a
2’s complement number. ADC1’s Data Word (single-ended) is also stored in ADC1H and
ADC1L.
Rev. 1.2
57
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.7. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
AD0SC3
AD0SC2
AD0SC1
AD0SC0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
R/W
R/W
AD0SCAL AD0GCAL
Bit3
Bit2
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
AD0LCAL
AD0OCAL
11110000
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xBC
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-4: AD0SC3-0: ADC0 SAR Conversion Clock Period Bits.
SAR Conversion clock is divided down from the system clock according to the AD0SC bits
(AD0SC3-0). The number of system clocks used for each SAR conversion clock is equal to
AD0SC + 1. (Note: the ADC0 SAR Conversion Clock should be less than or equal to
25 MHz). See Table 5.1 for conversion timing details.
Bit 3:
AD0SCAL: System Calibration Enable.
0: Internal ground and reference voltage are used during offset and gain calibration.
1: External voltages can be used during offset and gain calibration.
Bit 2:
AD0GCAL: Gain Calibration.
Read:
0: Gain Calibration is completed or not yet started.
1: Gain Calibration is in progress.
Write:
0: No Effect.
1: Initiates a gain calibration if ADC0 is idle.
Bit 1:
AD0LCAL: Linearity Calibration
Read
0: Linearity Calibration is completed or not yet started
1: Linearity Calibration is in progress
Write
0: No Effect
1: Initiates a linearity calibration if ADC0 is idle
Bit 0:
AD0OCAL: Offset Calibration.
Read:
0: Offset Calibration is completed or not yet started.
1: Offset Calibration is in progress.
Write:
0: No Effect.
1: Initiates an offset calibration if ADC0 is idle.
58
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.8. ADC1CF: ADC1 Configuration Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
AD1SC3
AD1SC2
AD1SC1
AD1SC0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
R/W
R/W
AD1SCAL AD1GCAL
Bit3
Bit2
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
AD1LCAL
AD1OCAL
11110000
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xBC
SFR Page: 1
Bits 7-4: AD1SC3-0: ADC1 SAR Conversion Clock Period Bits.
SAR Conversion clock is divided down from the system clock according to the AD1SC bits
(AD1SC3-0). The number of system clocks used for each SAR conversion clock is equal to
AD1SC + 1. (Note: the ADC1 SAR Conversion Clock should be less than or equal to
25 MHz). See Table 5.1 for conversion timing details.
Bit 3:
AD1SCAL: System Calibration Enable.
0: Internal ground and reference voltage are used for offset and gain calibration.
1: External voltages can be used for offset and gain calibration.
Bit 2:
AD1GCAL: Gain Calibration.
Read:
0: Gain Calibration is completed or not yet started.
1: Gain Calibration is in progress.
Write:
0: No Effect.
1: Initiates a gain calibration if ADC1 is idle.
Bit 1:
AD1LCAL: Linearity Calibration
Read
0: Linearity Calibration is completed or not yet started
1: Linearity Calibration is in progress
Write
0: No Effect
1: Initiates a linearity calibration if ADC1 is idle
Bit 0:
AD1OCAL: Offset Calibration.
Read:
0: Offset Calibration is completed or not yet started.
1: Offset Calibration is in progress.
Write:
0: No Effect.
1: Initiates an offset calibration if ADC1 is idle.
Rev. 1.2
59
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.9. ADC0CN: ADC0 Control Register
R/W
R/W
AD0EN
AD0TM
Bit7
Bit6
R/W
R/W
AD0INT AD0BUSY
Bit5
Bit4
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
AD0CM1
AD0CM0
AD0WINT
-
Reset Value
00000000
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit Addressable
SFR Address: 0xE8
SFR Page: 0
Bit 7:
AD0EN: ADC0 Enable Bit.
0: ADC0 Disabled. ADC0 is in low-power shutdown.
1: ADC0 Enabled. ADC0 is active and ready for data conversions or calibrations.
Bit 6:
AD0TM: ADC Track Mode Bit.
0: When the ADC is enabled, tracking is continuous unless a conversion is in process.
1: Tracking Defined by AD0CM1-0 bits.
Bit 5:
AD0INT: ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt Flag.
This flag must be cleared by software.
0: ADC0 has not completed a data conversion since the last time this flag was cleared.
1: ADC0 has completed a data conversion.
Bit 4:
AD0BUSY: ADC0 Busy Bit.
Read:
0: ADC0 Conversion is complete or a conversion is not currently in progress. AD0INT is set
to logic 1 on the falling edge of AD0BUSY.
1: ADC0 Conversion is in progress.
Write:
0: No Effect.
1: Initiates ADC0 Conversion if AD0CM1-0 = 00b.
Bits 3-2: AD0CM1-0: ADC0 Start of Conversion Mode Select.
If AD0TM = 0:
00: ADC0 conversion initiated on every write of ‘1’ to AD0BUSY.
01: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 3.
10: ADC0 conversion initiated on rising edge of external CNVSTR0.
11: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 2.
If AD0TM = 1:
00: Tracking starts with the write of ‘1’ to AD0BUSY and is followed by the conversion.
01: Tracking started by the overflow of Timer 3 and is followed by the conversion.
10: ADC0 conversion starts on rising CNVSTR0 edge.
11: Tracking started by the overflow of Timer 2 and is followed by the conversion.
See Figure 5.4 and Table 5.1 for conversion timing parameters.
Bit 1:
AD0WINT: ADC0 Window Compare Interrupt Flag.
This bit must be cleared by software.
0: ADC0 Window Comparison Data match has not occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: ADC0 Window Comparison Data match has occurred.
Bit 0:
RESERVED: Write to 0b.
60
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.10. ADC1CN: ADC1 Control Register
R/W
R/W
AD1EN
AD1TM
Bit7
Bit6
R/W
R/W
AD1INT AD1BUSY
Bit5
Bit4
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
AD1CM2
AD1CM1
AD1CM0
-
Reset Value
00000000
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit Addressable
SFR Address: 0xE8
SFR Page: 1
Bit 7:
AD1EN: ADC1 Enable Bit.
0: ADC1 Disabled. ADC1 is in low-power shutdown.
1: ADC1 Enabled. ADC1 is active and ready for data conversions or calibrations.
Bit 6:
AD1TM: ADC Track Mode Bit.
0: When the ADC is enabled, tracking is continuous unless a conversion is in process.
1: Tracking Defined by AD1CM2-0 bits.
Bit 5:
AD1INT: ADC1 Conversion Complete Interrupt Flag.
This flag must be cleared by software.
0: ADC1 has not completed a data conversion since the last time this flag was cleared.
1: ADC1 has completed a data conversion.
Bit 4:
AD1BUSY: ADC1 Busy Bit.
Read:
0: ADC1 Conversion is complete or a conversion is not currently in progress. AD1INT is set
to logic 1 on the falling edge of AD1BUSY.
1: ADC1 Conversion is in progress.
Write:
0: No Effect.
1: Initiates ADC1 Conversion if AD1CM2-0 = 000b.
Bits 3-1: AD1CM2-0: ADC1 Start of Conversion Mode Select.
If AD1TM = 0:
000: ADC1 conversion initiated on every write of ‘1’ to AD1BUSY.
010: ADC1 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 3.
100: ADC1 conversion initiated on rising edge of external CNVSTR1.
110: ADC1 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 2.
xx1: ADC1 conversion initiated on every write of ‘1’ to AD0BUSY in ADC0CN
If AD1TM = 1:
000: Tracking starts with the write of ‘1’ to AD1BUSY and is followed by the conversion.
010: Tracking started by the overflow of Timer 3 and is followed by the conversion.
100: ADC1 conversion starts on rising CNVSTR1 edge.
110: Tracking started by the overflow of Timer 2 and is followed by the conversion.
xx1: Tracking starts with the write of ‘1’ to AD0BUSY and is followed by the conversion.
See Figure 5.4 and Table 5.1 for conversion timing parameters.
Bit 0:
RESERVED: Write to 0b.
Rev. 1.2
61
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.11. REF0CN: Reference Control Register 0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
-
-
BIASE0
REFBE0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD1
SFR Page: 0
Bits7-2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
RESERVED. Read = 000000b; Write = 000000b.
BIASE0: ADC0 Bias Generator Enable Bit. (Must be ‘1’ if using ADC0).
0: ADC0 Internal Bias Generator Off.
1: ADC0 Internal Bias Generator On.
REFBE0: Internal Reference Buffer for ADC0 Enable Bit.
0: Internal Reference Buffer for ADC0 Off. External voltage reference can be used.
1: Internal Reference Buffer for ADC0 On. Internal voltage reference is driven on the VREF0
pin.
Figure 5.12. REF1CN: Reference Control Register 1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
-
-
BIASE1
REFBE1
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD1
SFR Page: 1
Bits7-2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
62
RESERVED. Read = 000000b; Write = 000000b.
BIASE1: ADC1 Bias Generator Enable Bit. (Must be ‘1’ if using ADC1).
0: ADC1 Internal Bias Generator Off.
1: ADC1 Internal Bias Generator On.
REFBE1: Internal Reference Buffer for ADC1 Enable Bit.
0: Internal Reference Buffer for ADC1 Off. External voltage reference can be used.
1: Internal Reference Buffer for ADC1 On. Internal voltage reference is driven on the VREF1
pin.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.13. ADC0H: ADC0 Data Word MSB Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0xBF
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: ADC0 Data Word High-Order Bits.
Figure 5.14. ADC0L: ADC0 Data Word LSB Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0xBE
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: ADC0 Data Word Low-Order Bits.
Rev. 1.2
63
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.15. ADC0 Data Word Example
16-bit ADC0 Data Word appears in the ADC0 Data Word Registers as follows:
Example: ADC0 Data Word Conversion Map, AIN0 Input in Single-Ended Mode
(AMX0SL = 0x00)
AIN0-AIN0G (Volts)
VREF * (65535/65536)
VREF / 2
VREF * (32767/65536)
0
ADC0H:ADC0L
0xFFFF
0x8000
0x7FFF
0x0000
Example: ADC0 Data Word Conversion Map, AIN0-AIN1 Differential Input Pair
(AMX0SL = 0x40)
AIN0-AIN1 (Volts)
VREF * (32767/32768)
VREF / 2
VREF * (1/32768)
0
-VREF * (1/32768)
-VREF / 2
-VREF
Gain
Code = Vin × --------------- × 2 n
VREF
64
ADC0H:ADC0L
0x7FFF
0x4000
0x0001
0x0000
0xFFFF
0xC000
0x8000
; ‘n’ = 16 for Single-Ended; ‘n’=15 for Differential.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.16. ADC1H: ADC1 Data Word MSB Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0xBF
SFR Page: 1
Bits 7-0: ADC1 Data Word High-Order Bits.
Figure 5.17. ADC1L: ADC1 Data Word LSB Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0xBE
SFR Page: 1
Bits 7-0: ADC1 Data Word Low-Order Bits.
Figure 5.18. ADC1 Data Word Example
16-bit ADC1 Data Word appears in the ADC1 Data Word Registers as follows:
Example: ADC1 Data Word Conversion Map, AIN1 Input in Single-Ended Mode
(AMX1SL = 0x00)
AIN1-AIN1G (Volts)
VREF * (65535/65536)
VREF / 2
VREF * (32767/65536)
0
Gain
Code = Vin × --------------- × 2 n
VREF
ADC1H:ADC1L
0xFFFF
0x8000
0x7FFF
0x0000
; ‘n’ = 16
For differential mode, the differential data word appears in ADC0H and ADC0L. The singleended ADC1 results are always present in ADC1H and ADC1L, regardless of the operating
mode.
Rev. 1.2
65
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
5.4.
Calibration
The ADCs are calibrated for linearity, offset, and gain in production. ADC0 and ADC1 can also be independently calibrated for each of these parameters in-system. Calibrations are initiated using bits in the ADC0
or ADC1 Configuration Register. The calibration coefficients can be accessed using the ADC Calibration
Pointer Register (ADC0CPT, Figure 5.22) and the ADC Calibration Coefficient Register (ADC0CCF,
Figure 5.23). The CPTR bits in ADC0CPT allow the ADC0CCF register to read and write specific calibration coefficients. Figure 5.19 shows the Calibration Coefficient locations.
Figure 5.19. Calibration Coefficient Locations
ADC0CCF
ADC0CPT
Bits 5-0
0x00
.
.
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Linearity Calibration Coefficients (locations 0x00 through 0x12)
Offset7
Offset6
Gain7
Gain6
Offset5
Offset13
Gain5
Offset4
Offset12
Gain4
Gain12
Offset3
Offset11
Gain3
Gain11
Offset2
Offset10
Gain2
Gain10
Offset1
Offset9
Gain1
Gain9
Offset0
Offset8
Gain0
Gain8
The ADCs are calibrated for linearity in production. Under normal circumstances, no additional linearity
calibration is necessary. If linearity calibrations are desired, they can be initiated by setting the ADCnLCAL
bit to ‘1’. When the calibration is finished, the ADCnLCAL bit will be set to ‘0’ by the hardware. Linearity
Calibration Coefficients are stored in the locations shown in Figure 5.19.
Offset and gain calibrations can be performed using either internal or external voltages as calibration
sources. The ADCnSCAL bit determines whether the internal or external voltages are used in the calibration process. To ensure accuracy, offset calibration should be done prior to a gain calibration. The offset
and gain calibration coefficients are decoded in Figure 5.20. Offset calibration is initiated by setting the
ADCnOCAL bit to ‘1’. When the calibration is finished, the ADCnOCAL bit will be set to ‘0’ by the hardware.
Offset calibration can compensate for offset errors of approximately ±3.125% of full scale. The offset value
is added to the AINnG input prior to digitization by the ADC. Gain calibration is initiated by setting the ADCnGCAL bit to ‘1’. When the calibration is finished, the ADCnGCAL bit will be set to ‘0’ by the hardware.
Gain calibration can compensate for slope errors of approximately ±3.125%. The gain value is added to
the ADC’s VREF path to change the slope of the converter’s transfer function. Figure 5.21 shows how the
offset and gain values affect the analog signals used by the ADC.
66
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.20. Offset and Gain Register Mapping
The offset register value affects the offset at the analog input as follows:
Offset Register (14 Bits)
0x3FFF
0x2000
0x0000
Approximate Offset Change (V)
-3.125% * VREF
0
+3.125% * VREF
0x2000 – Offset Register
Offset Change ≅ ------------------------------------------------------------ × 3.125% × VREF
8192
The gain register value affects the slope of the ADC transfer function as follows:
Gain Register (13 Bits)
0x1FFF
0x1000
0x0000
Approximate Slope Change
+3.125%
0
-3.125%
Gain Register – 0x1000
Slope Change ≅ --------------------------------------------------------- × 3.125%
4096
Figure 5.21. Offset and Gain Calibration Block Diagram
VREF
Offset
AINn
+
+
Gain
-
ADCn
16
ADCn Data
AINnG
Rev. 1.2
67
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.22. ADC0CPT: ADC Calibration Pointer Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
INCR
ADCSEL
CPTR5
CPTR4
CPTR3
CPTR2
CPTR1
CPTR0
11010111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xBA
SFR Page: F
Bit 7:
INCR: Pointer Address Automatic Increment.
0: Disable Auto-Increment.
1: Enable Auto-Increment. CPTR5-0 will automatically be incremented after each read or
write to ADC0CCF.
Bit 6:
ADCSEL: ADC Calibration Coefficient Select.
0: Reads and Writes of ADC0CCF will access ADC0 Calibration Coefficients.
1: Reads and Writes of ADC0CCF will access ADC1 Calibration Coefficients.
Bits 5-0: CPTR5-0: Calibration Coefficent Pointer.
Select which Calibration Coefficient location will be accessed when ADC0CCF is read or
written.
Figure 5.23. ADC0CCF: ADC Calibration Coefficient Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
Variable
SFR Address: 0xBB
SFR Page: F
Bits 7-0: Calibration Coefficients at the location specified in ADC0CPT. See Table 5.19.
68
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
5.5.
ADC0 Programmable Window Detector
The ADC0 Programmable Window Detector continuously compares the ADC0 output to user-programmed
limits, and notifies the system when an out-of-bound condition is detected. This is especially effective in an
interrupt-driven system, saving code space and CPU bandwidth while delivering faster system response
times. The window detector interrupt flag (AD0WINT in ADC0CN) can also be used in polled mode. The
high and low bytes of the reference words are loaded into the ADC0 Greater-Than and ADC0 Less-Than
registers (ADC0GTH, ADC0GTL, ADC0LTH, and ADC0LTL). The Window Detector can be used in singleended or differential mode. In signle-ended mode, the Window Detector compares the ADC0GTx and
ADC0LTx registers to the output of ADC0. In differential mode, the combined output of ADC0 and ADC1
(contained in the ADC0 data registers) is used for the comparison. Reference comparisons are shown
starting on page 71. Notice that the window detector flag can be asserted when the measured data is
inside or outside the user-programmed limits, depending on the programming of the ADC0GTx and
ADC0LTx registers.
Figure 5.24. ADC0GTH: ADC0 Greater-Than Data High Byte Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
11111111
SFR Address: 0xC5
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: High byte of ADC0 Greater-Than Data Word.
Figure 5.25. ADC0GTL: ADC0 Greater-Than Data Low Byte Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
11111111
SFR Address: 0xC4
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: Low byte of ADC0 Greater-Than Data Word.
Rev. 1.2
69
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.26. ADC0LTH: ADC0 Less-Than Data High Byte Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0xC7
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: High byte of ADC0 Less-Than Data Word.
Figure 5.27. ADC0LTL: ADC0 Less-Than Data Low Byte Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0xC6
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: Low byte of ADC0 Less-Than Data Word.
70
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.28. 16-Bit ADC0 Window Interrupt Example: Single-Ended Data
Input Voltage
(AIN0 - AIN0G)
ADC0 Data
Word
Input Voltage
(AIN0 - AIN0G)
ADC0 Data
Word
REF x (65535/65536)
0xFFFF
REF x (65535/65536)
0xFFFF
AD0WINT
not affected
AD0WINT=1
0x2001
REF x (8192/65536)
0x2000
0x2001
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL
REF x (8192/65536)
0x1FFF
0x2000
0x1FFF
AD0WINT=1
0x1001
REF x (4096/65536)
0x1000
0x1001
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL
REF x (4096/65536)
0x0FFF
0x1000
AD0WINT
not affected
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL
0x0FFF
AD0WINT=1
AD0WINT
not affected
0
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL
0x0000
Given:
AMX0SL = 0x00,
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL = 0x2000,
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL = 0x1000.
An ADC0 End of Conversion will cause an
ADC0 Window Compare Interrupt (AD0WINT
= ‘1’) if the resulting ADC0 Data Word is
< 0x2000 and > 0x1000.
0
0x0000
Given:
AMX0SL = 0x00,
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL = 0x1000,
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL = 0x2000.
An ADC0 End of Conversion will cause an
ADC0 Window Compare Interrupt (AD0WINT
= ‘1’) if the resulting ADC0 Data Word is
> 0x2000 or < 0x1000.
Rev. 1.2
71
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 5.29. 16-Bit ADC0 Window Interrupt Example: Differential Data
Input Voltage
(AIN0 - AIN1)
ADC0 Data
Word
Input Voltage
(AIN0 - AIN1)
ADC0 Data
Word
REF x (32767/32768)
0x7FFF
REF x (32767/32768)
0x7FFF
AD0WINT
not affected
AD0WINT=1
0x1001
REF x (4096/32768)
0x1000
0x1001
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL
REF x (4096/32768)
0x0FFF
0x1000
0x0FFF
AD0WINT=1
0x0000
REF x (-1/32768)
0xFFFF
0x0000
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL
REF x (-1/32768)
0xFFFE
0xFFFF
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL
AD0WINT=1
0x8000
-REF
0x8000
Given:
AMX0SL = 0x40,
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL = 0xFFFF,
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL = 0x1000.
An ADC0 End of Conversion will cause an
ADC0 Window Compare Interrupt (AD0WINT
= ‘1’) if the resulting ADC0 Data Word is
< 0xFFFF or > 0x1000. (In two’s-complement
math, 0xFFFF = -1.)
Given:
AMX0SL = 0x40,
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL = 0x1000,
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL = 0xFFFF.
An ADC0 End of Conversion will cause an
ADC0 Window Compare Interrupt (AD0WINT
= ‘1’) if the resulting ADC0 Data Word is
< 0x1000 and > 0xFFFF. (In two’s-complement
math, 0xFFFF = -1.)
72
AD0WINT
not affected
0xFFFE
AD0WINT
not affected
-REF
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 5.2. 16-Bit ADC0 and ADC1 Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V, AV+ = 3.0 V, AVDD = 3.0 V, VREF = 2.50 V (REFBE=0), -40 to +85 °C unless otherwise
specified
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
DC Accuracy
Resolution
16
bits
Integral Nonlinearity
(C8051F060/1/4/5/6/7)
Single-Ended
Differential
±0.75
±0.5
±2
±1
LSB
Integral Nonlinearity
(C8051F062/3)
Single-Ended
Differential
±1.5
±1
±4
±2
LSB
Differential Nonlinearity
Guaranteed Monotonic
±0.5
LSB
0.1
mV
0.008
%F.S.
0.5
ppm/°C
Signal-to-Noise Plus Distortion Fin = 10 kHz, Single-Ended
Fin = 100 kHz, Single-Ended
Fin = 10 kHz, Differential
Fin = 100 kHz, Differential
86
84
89
88
dB
dB
dB
dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
Fin = 10 kHz, Single-Ended
Fin = 100 kHz, Single-Ended
Fin = 10 kHz, Differential
Fin = 100 kHz, Differential
96
84
103
93
dB
dB
dB
dB
Spurious-Free Dynamic Range Fin = 10 kHz, Single-Ended
Fin = 100 kHz, Single-Ended
Fin = 10 kHz, Differential
Fin = 100 kHz, Differential
97
88
104
99
dB
dB
dB
dB
CMRR
86
dB
100
dB
Offset Error
Full Scale Error
Gain Temperature Coefficient
Dynamic Performance (Sampling Rate = 1 Msps, AVDD, AV+ = 3.3V)
Fin = 10 kHz
Channel Isolation
Timing
SAR Clock Frequency
25
MHz
Conversion Time in SAR
Clocks
18
clocks
Track/Hold Acquisition Time
280
ns
Throughput Rate
1
Msps
Aperture Delay
External CNVST Signal
1.5
ns
RMS Aperture Jitter
External CNVST Signal
5
ps
Analog Inputs
Input Voltage Range
Single-Ended (AINn - AINnG)
Differential (AIN0 - AIN1)
Input Capacitance
0
-VREF
VREF
VREF
80
Rev. 1.2
V
V
pF
73
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 5.2. 16-Bit ADC0 and ADC1 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)
VDD = 3.0 V, AV+ = 3.0 V, AVDD = 3.0 V, VREF = 2.50 V (REFBE=0), -40 to +85 °C unless otherwise
specified
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Operating Input Range
AIN0 or AIN1
AIN0G or AIN1G (DC Only)
Typ
Max
-0.2
-0.2
AV+
0.6
Units
V
V
Power Specifications
Power Supply Current (each
ADC)
Operating Mode, 1 Msps
AV+
AVDD
Shutdown Mode
4.0
2.0
<1
mA
mA
µA
Power Supply Rejection
VDD ± 5%
±0.5
LSB
Table 5.3. Voltage Reference 0 and 1 Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V, AV+ = 3.0 V, AVDD = 3.0 V, -40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Internal Reference
Output Voltage
25 °C ambient
2.36
VREF Temperature Coefficient
Power Supply Current (each
Voltage Reference)
AV+
2.43
2.48
V
15
ppm/°C
1.5
mA
External Reference
Input Voltage Range
Input Current
74
2.0
ADC throughput = 1 Msps
Rev. 1.2
AV+
450
V
µA
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
6.
Direct Memory Access Interface (DMA0)
The DMA interface works in conjunction with ADC0 and ADC1 to write ADC outputs directly to a specified
region of XRAM. The DMA interface is configured by software using the Special Function Registers shown
in Figure 6.1. Up to 64 instructions can be programmed into the Instruction Buffer to designate a sequence
of DMA operations. The Instruction Buffer is accessed by the DMA Control Logic, which gathers the appropriate data from the ADCs and controls writes to XRAM. The DMA instructions tell the DMA Control Logic
which ADC(s) to expect results from, but do not initiate the actual conversions. It is important to configure
the ADCs for the desired start-of-conversion source, voltage reference, and SAR clock frequency prior to
starting the DMA interface. For information on setting up the ADCs, refer to Section “5. 16-Bit ADCs (ADC0
and ADC1)” on page 51.
Figure 6.1. DMA0 Block Diagram
DMA0IDT
DMA0CN
DMA0EN
DMA0INT
DMA0MD
DMA0DE1
DMA0DE0
DMA0DOE
DMA0DO1
DMA0DO0
DMA0IPT
DMA0CIE
DMA0CI
DMA0EOE
DMA0EO
Instruction Data
DMA0HLT
DMA0XBY
DMA0CF
Address
Write Logic
Current Address
DMA0ISW
Start Address
Address Bus
DMA
Control Logic
CCNV
DIFFSEL
ADC1EN
ADC0EN
DMA0BND
Instruction
Buffer
(64 Bytes)
AIN0
Data Bus
DMA0DSH
ADC0
DMA0DSL
Current XRAM Address
AIN0G
AIN1
XRAM
(on-chip or
off-chip)
DMA0DAH
ADC1
DMA0DAL
Beginning XRAM Address
AIN1G
DMA0CTH
DMA0CTL
Repeat Counter Limit
6.1.
DMA0CSH
DMA0CSL
Current Repeat Counter Value
Writing to the Instruction Buffer
The Instruction Buffer has 64 8-bit locations that can be programmed with a sequence of DMA instructions.
Filling the Instruction Buffer is done with the Special Function Registers DMA0IPT (DMA Instruction Write
Address Register, Figure 6.6) and DMA0IDT (DMA Instruction Write Data Register, Figure 6.7). Instructions are written to the Instruction Buffer at address DMA0IPT when the instruction word is written to
DMA0IDT. Reading the register DMA0IDT will return the instruction word at location DMA0IPT. After a write
or read operation on DMA0IDT, the DMA0IPT register is automatically incremented to the next Instruction
Buffer location.
Rev. 1.2
75
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
6.2.
DMA0 Instruction Format
DMA instructions can request single-ended data from both ADC0 and ADC1, as well as the differential
combination of the two ADC inputs. The instruction format is identical to the DMA0IDT register, shown in
Figure 6.7. Depending on which bits are set to ‘1’ in the instruction word, either 2 or 4 bytes of data will be
written to XRAM for each DMA instruction cycle (excluding End-Of-Operation instructions). Table 6.1
details all of the valid DMA instructions. Instructions not listed in the table are not valid DMA instructions,
and should not be used. Note that the ADCs can be independently controlled by the microcontroller when
their outputs are not requested by the DMA.
Table 6.1. DMA0 Instruction Set
First Data Written
to XRAM (2 bytes)
Second Data
Written to XRAM
(2 bytes)
00000000b End-Of-Operation
none
none
10000000b End-Of-Operation with Continuous Conversion
none
none
x0010000b Retrieve ADC0 Data
ADC0H:ADC0L
none
x0100000b Retrieve ADC1 Data
ADC1H:ADC1L
none
x0110000b
Retrieve ADC0 and ADC1 Data
ADC0H:ADC0L
ADC1H:ADC1L
x10x0000b
Retrieve Differential Data
ADC0H:ADC0L
(differential result
from both ADCs)
none
x11x0000b
Retrieve Differential and ADC1 Data
ADC0H:ADC0L
(differential result
from both ADCs)
ADC1H:ADC1L
Instruction
Description
Word
6.3.
XRAM Addressing and Setup
The DMA Interface can be configured to access either on-chip or off-chip XRAM. Any writes to on-chip
XRAM by the DMA Control Logic occur when the processor core is not accessing the on-chip XRAM. This
ensures that the DMA will not interfere with processor instruction timing.
Off-chip XRAM access (only available on the C8051F060/2/4/6) is controlled by the DMA0HLT bit in
DMA0CF (DMA Configuration Register, Figure 6.5). The DMA will have full access to off-chip XRAM when
this bit is ‘0’, and the processor core will have full access to off-chip XRAM when this bit is ‘1’. The
DMA0HLT bit should be controlled in software when both the processor core and the DMA Interface
require access to off-chip XRAM data space. Before setting DMA0HLT to ‘1’, the software should check the
DMA0XBY bit to ensure that the DMA is not currently accessing off-chip XRAM. The processor core cannot access off-chip XRAM while DMA0HLT is ‘0’. The processor will continue as though it was able to perform the desired memory access, but the data will not be written to or read from off-chip XRAM. When the
processor core is finished accessing off-chip XRAM, DMA0HLT should be set back to ‘0’in software to
return control to the DMA Interface. The DMA Control Logic will wait until DMA0HLT is ‘0’ before writing
data to off-chip XRAM. If new data becomes available to the DMA Interface before the previous data has
been written, an overflow condition will occur, and the new data word may be lost.
The Data Address Pointer Registers (DMA0DSH and DMA0DSL) contain the 16-bit XRAM address location where the DMA interface will write data. When the DMA is initially enabled, the DMA Data Address
76
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Pointer Registers are initialized to the values contained in the DMA Data Address Beginning Registers
(DMA0DAH and DMA0DAL). The Data Address Pointer Registers are automatically incremented by 2 or 4
after each data write by the DMA interface.
6.4.
Instruction Execution in Mode 0
When the DMA interface begins an operation cycle, the DMA Instruction Status Register (DMA0ISW,
Figure 6.9) is loaded with the address contained in the DMA Instruction Boundary Register (DMA0BND,
Figure 6.8). The instruction is fetched from the Instruction Buffer, and the DMA Control Logic waits for data
from the appropriate ADC(s). The DMA will execute each instruction once, and then increment DMA0ISW
to the next instruction address. When the current DMA instruction is an End of Operation instruction, the
Instruction Status Register is reset to the Instruction Boundary Register. If the Continuous Conversion bit
(bit 7, CCNV) in the End of Operation instruction word is set to ‘1’, the Repeat Counter is ignored, and the
DMA will continue to execute instructions indefinitely. When CCNV is set to ‘0’, the Repeat Counter (registers DMA0CSH and DMA0CSL) is decremented, and the DMA will continue to execute instructions until
the Repeat Counter reaches 0x0000. The Repeat Counter is initialized with the Repeat Counter Limit
value (registers DMA0CTH and DMA0CTL) at the beginning of the DMA operation. An example of Mode 0
operation is shown in Figure 6.2.
Figure 6.2. DMA Mode 0 Operation
XRAM
ADC1L
ADC1H
ADC0L
INSTRUCTION
BUFFER
(64 Bytes)
ADC0H (Diff.)
ADC0L
ADC0H
ADC1L
ADC1H
ADC0L
ADC0H
ADC0L (Diff.)
ADC0H (Diff.)
ADC0L
ADC0H
0x3F
...
DMA0BND
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
00000000
00110000
01000000
00010000
Rev. 1.2
DMA0CSH:L = 0x0000
DMA0CSH:L = DMA0CTH:L - 1
DMA0CSH:L = DMA0CTH:L
77
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
6.5.
Instruction Execution in Mode 1
When the DMA interface begins an operation cycle, the DMA Instruction Status Register (DMA0ISW,
Figure 6.9) is loaded with the address contained within the DMA Instruction Boundary Register
(DMA0BND, Figure 6.8). The instruction is fetched from the Instruction Buffer, and the DMA Control Logic
waits for data from the appropriate ADC(s). At the end of an instruction, the Repeat Counter (Registers
DMA0CSH and DMA0CSL) is decremented, and the instruction will be repeated until the Repeat Counter
reaches 0x0000. The Repeat Counter is then reset to the Repeat Counter Limit value (Registers
DMA0CTH and DMA0CTL), and the DMA will increment DMA0ISW to the next instruction address. When
the current DMA instruction is an End of Operation instruction, the Instruction Status Register is reset to
the Instruction Boundary Register. If the Continuous Conversion bit (bit 7, CCNV) in the End of Operation
instruction word is set to ‘1’, the DMA will continue to execute instructions. When CCNV is set to ‘0’, the
DMA will stop executing instructions at this point. An example of Mode 1 operation is shown in Figure 6.3.
Figure 6.3. DMA Mode 1 Operation
XRAM
ADC1L
ADC1H
ADC0L
ADC0H
ADC1L
ADC1H
ADC0L
ADC0H
ADC0L (Diff.)
ADC0H (Diff.)
INSTRUCTION
BUFFER
(64 Bytes)
0x3F
DMA0CSH:L = 0x0000
DMA0CSH:L = DMA0CTH:L
DMA0CSH:L = 0x0000
...
DMA0BND
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
00000000
00110000
01000000
00010000
ADC0L (Diff.)
ADC0H (Diff.)
ADC0L
ADC0H
ADC0L
ADC0H
ADC0L
ADC0H
78
Rev. 1.2
DMA0CSH:L = DMA0CTH:L
DMA0CSH:L = 0x0000
DMA0CSH:L = DMA0CTH:L - 1
DMA0CSH:L = DMA0CTH:L
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
6.6.
Interrupt Sources
The DMA contains multiple interrupt sources. Some of these can be individually enabled to generate interrupts as necessary. The DMA Control Register (DMA0CN, Figure 6.4) and DMA Configuration Register
(DMA0CF, Figure 6.5) contain the enable bits and flags for the DMA interrupt sources. When an interrupt is
enabled and the interrupt condition occurs, a DMA interrupt will be generated (EIE2.7 is set to ‘1’).
The DMA flags that can generate a DMA0 interrupt are:
1. DMA Operations Complete (DMA0CN.6, DMA0INT) occurs when all DMA operations have
been completed, and the DMA interface is idle.
2. ADC1 Data Overflow Error (DMA0CN.4, DMA0DE1) occurs when the DMA interface cannot
access XRAM for two conversion cycles of ADC1. This flag indicates that at least one conversion result from ADC1 has been discarded.
3. ADC0 Data Overflow Error (DMA0CN.3, DMA0DE0) occurs when the DMA interface cannot
access XRAM for two conversion cycles of ADC0. This flag indicates that at least one conversion result from ADC0 has been discarded.
4. ADC1 Data Overflow Warning (DMA0CN.1, DMA0DO1) occurs when data from ADC0
becomes available and the DMA has not yet written the previous results to XRAM. This interrupt source can be enabled and disabled with the Data Overflow Warning Enable bit
(DMA0CN.2, DMA0DOE).
5. ADC0 Data Overflow Warning (DMA0CN.0, DMA0DO0) occurs when data from ADC1
becomes available and the DMA has not yet written the previous results to XRAM. This interrupt source can be enabled and disabled with the Data Overflow Warning Enable bit
(DMA0CN.2, DMA0DOE).
6. Repeat Counter Overflow (DMA0CF.2, DMA0CI) occurs when the Repeat Counter reaches
the Repeat Counter Limit. This interrupt source can be enabled and disabled with the Repeat
Counter Overflow Interrupt Enable bit (DMA0CF.3, DMA0CIE).
7. End Of Operation (DMA0CF.0, DMA0EO) occurs when an End Of Operation instruction is
reached in the Instruction Buffer. This interrupt source can be enabled and disabled with the
End Of Operation Interrupt Enable bit (DMA0CF.1, DMA0EOE).
6.7.
Data Buffer Overflow Warnings and Errors
The data paths from the ADCs to XRAM are double-buffered when using the DMA interface. When a conversion is completed by the ADC, it first enters the ADCs data register. If the DMA’s data buffer is empty,
the conversion results will immediately be written into the DMA’s internal data buffer for that ADC. Data in
the DMA’s internal data buffer is written to XRAM at the first available opportunity (see Section “6.3. XRAM
Addressing and Setup” on page 76). Conversion results from the ADC’s data registers are not copied into
the DMA’s data buffer until data in the buffer has been written to XRAM. When a conversion is completed
and the DMA’s data buffer is not empty, an overflow warning flag is generated. If a second conversion data
word becomes available before the DMA’s data buffer is written to XRAM, the data in the ADC’s data registers is over-written with the new data word, and a data overflow error flag is generated.
Rev. 1.2
79
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 6.4. DMA0CN: DMA0 Control Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
R/W
R/W
R/W
DMA0EN
DMA0INT
DMA0MD
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
80
3
0xD8
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
DMA0DE1 DMA0DE0 DMA0DOE DMA0DO1 DMA0DO0 00000000
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
DMA0EN: DMA0 Enable.
Write:
0: Stop DMA0 Operations.
1: Begin DMA0 Operations.
Read:
0: DMA0 is Idle.
1: DMA0 Operation is in Progress.
DMA0INT: DMA0 Operations Complete Flag.
0: DMA0 has not completed all operations.
1: DMA0 operations are complete. This bit must be cleared by software.
DMA0MD: DMA0 Mode Select.
0: DMA0 will operate in Mode 0.
1: DMA0 will operate in Mode 1.
DMA0DE1: ADC1 Data Overflow Error Flag.
0: ADC1 Data Overflow has not occured.
1: ADC1 Data Overflow has occured, and data from ADC1 has been lost. This bit must be
cleared by software.
DMA0DE0: ADC0 Data Overflow Error Flag.
0: ADC0 Data Overflow has not occured.
1: ADC0 Data Overflow has occured, and data from ADC0 has been lost. This bit must be
cleared by software.
DMA0DOE: Data Overflow Warning Interrupt Enable.
0: Disable Data Overflow Warning interrupts.
1: Enable Data Overflow Warning interrups.
DMA0DO1: ADC1 Data Overflow Warning Flag.
0: No ADC1 Data Buffer Warnings have been issued.
1: ADC1 Data Buffer is full, and the DMA has not written previous data to XRAM. This bit
must be cleared by software.
DMA0DO0: ADC0 Data Overflow Warning Flag.
0: No ADC0 Data Buffer Warnings have been issued.
1: ADC0 Data Buffer is full, and the DMA has not written previous data to XRAM. This bit
must be cleared by software.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 6.5. DMA0CF: DMA0 Configuration Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
R/W
3
0xF8
(bit addressable)
R
DMA0HLT DMA0XBY
Bit7
Bit6
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
DMA0CIE
DMA0CI
DMA0EOE
DMA0EO
00000000
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit 7:
DMA0HLT: Halt DMA0 Off-Chip XRAM Access (C8051F060/2/4/6 Only).
0: DMA0 has complete access to off-chip XRAM.
1: Processor core has complete access to off-chip XRAM. DMA0 will wait until this bit is ‘0’
before writing to off-chip XRAM locations.
Bit 6:
DMA0XBY: Off-chip XRAM Busy Flag (C8051F060/2/4/6 Only).
0: DMA0 is not accessing off-chip XRAM.
1: DMA0 is accessing off-chip XRAM.
Bits 5-4: RESERVED. Write to 00b.
Bit 3:
DMA0CIE: Repeat Counter Overflow Interrupt Enable.
0: Disable Repeat Counter Overflow Interrupt.
1: Enable Repeat Counter Overflow Interrupt.
Bit 2:
DMA0CI: Repeat Counter Overflow Flag.
0: Repeat Counter Overflow has not occured.
1: Repeat Counter Overflow has occured. This bit must be cleared by software.
Bit 1:
DMA0EOE: End-Of-Operation Interrupt Enable.
0: Disable End-Of-Operation Interrupt.
1: Enable End-Of-Operation Interrupt.
Bit 0:
DMA0EO: End-Of-Operation Flag.
0: End-Of-Operation Instruction has not been received.
1: End-Of-Operation Instruction has been received. This bit must be cleared by software.
Rev. 1.2
81
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 6.6. DMA0IPT: DMA0 Instruction Write Address Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
R
3
0xDD
R
-
-
Bit7
Bit6
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-6: Unused.
Bits 5-0: DMA0 instruction address to write (or read). When DMA0IDT is written or read, this register
will be incremented to point to the next instruction address.
Figure 6.7. DMA0IDT: DMA0 Instruction Write Data Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
3
0xDE
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value†
CCNV
DIFFSEL
ADC1EN
ADC0EN
-
-
-
-
xxxxxxxx
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit 7:
CCNV: Continuous Conversion.
0: Disable Continuous Conversion.
1: Enable Continuous Conversion. Repeat Counter value is ignored, and conversions will
continue.
Bit 6:
DIFFSEL: Wait for data in differential mode.
0: Differential Data will not be collected.
1: Wait for differential data, and store to XRAM.
Bit 5:
ADC1EN: Wait for data from ADC1.
0: ADC1 Data will not be collected.
1: Wait for ADC1 data, and store to XRAM.
Bit 4:
ADC0EN: Wait for data from ADC0.
0: ADC0 Data will not be collected.
1: Wait for ADC0 data, and store to XRAM. If DIFFSEL is also ‘1’, only the differential data
will be stored.
Bits 3-0: RESERVED. Write to 0000b.
For more details on DMA instruction words, see Section “6.2. DMA0 Instruction Format” on page 76.
† This register points to a dedicated RAM location and its reset value is indeterminate.
82
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 6.8. DMA0BND: DMA0 Instruction Boundary Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
R/W
3
0xFD
R/W
-
-
Bit7
Bit6
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-6: Unused.
Bits 5-0: DMA0 instruction address to begin with when executing DMA instructions.
Figure 6.9. DMA0ISW: DMA0 Instruction Status Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
3
0xFE
R/W
R/W
-
-
Bit7
Bit6
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-6: Unused.
Bits 5-0: Contains the address of the current DMA0 Instruction to be executed.
Rev. 1.2
83
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 6.10. DMA0DAH: DMA0 Data Address Beginning MSB Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
3
0xDA
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-0: DMA0 Address Beginning High-Order Bits.
Figure 6.11. DMA0DAL: DMA0 Data Address Beginning LSB Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
3
0xD9
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-0: DMA0 Address Beginning Low-Order Bits.
Figure 6.12. DMA0DSH: DMA0 Data Address Pointer MSB Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
3
0xDC
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-0: DMA0 Address Pointer High-Order Bits.
Figure 6.13. DMA0DSL: DMA0 Data Address Pointer LSB Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
3
0xDB
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-0: DMA0 Address Pointer Low-Order Bits.
84
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 6.14. DMA0CTH: DMA0 Repeat Counter Limit MSB Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
3
0xFA
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-0: DMA0 Repeat Counter Limit High-Order Bits.
Figure 6.15. DMA0CTL: DMA0 Repeat Counter Limit LSB Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
3
0xF9
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-0: DMA0 Repeat Counter Limit Low-Order Bits.
Figure 6.16. DMA0CSH: DMA0 Repeat Counter MSB Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
3
0xFC
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-0: DMA0 Repeat Counter High-Order Bits.
Figure 6.17. DMA0CSL: DMA0 Repeat Counter LSB Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
3
0xFB
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-0: DMA0 Repeat Counter Low-Order Bits.
Rev. 1.2
85
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
86
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
7.
10-Bit ADC (ADC2, C8051F060/1/2/3)
The ADC2 subsystem for the C8051F060/1/2/3 consists of an analog multiplexer (referred to as AMUX2),
and a 200 ksps, 10-bit successive-approximation-register ADC with integrated track-and-hold and programmable window detector (see block diagram in Figure 7.1). The AMUX2, data conversion modes, and
window detector can all be configured from within software via the Special Function Registers shown in
Figure 7.1. ADC2 operates in both Single-ended and Differential modes, and may be configured to measure any of the pins on Port 1, or the Temperature Sensor output. The ADC2 subsystem is enabled only
when the AD2EN bit in the ADC2 Control register (ADC2CN) is set to logic 1. The ADC2 subsystem is in
low power shutdown when this bit is logic 0.
Figure 7.1. ADC2 Functional Block Diagram
ADC2GTL
ADC2LTH
ADC2LTL
20
AD2EN
AIN2.1
10
AIN2.4
AIN2.5
10-Bit
SAR
ADC
AIN2.6
AIN2.7
AD2CM
TEMP
SENSOR
AMX2CF
AMX2SL
ADC2CF
Rev. 1.2
AD2EN
AD2TM
AD2INT
AD2BUSY
AD2CM1
AD2CM0
AD2WINT
AD2LJST
AD2SC4
AD2SC3
AD2SC2
AD2SC1
AD2SC0
AMX2AD3
AMX2AD2
AMX2AD1
AMX2AD0
AIN67IC
AIN45IC
AIN23IC
AIN01IC
AGND
ADC2CN
10
ADC2L
9-to-1
AMUX
(SE or
DIFF)
ADC2H
AIN2.2
AIN2.3
AD2WINT
REF
SYSCLK
AV+
AIN2.0
Comb.
Logic
00
Start Conversion 01
AD2BUSY (W)
Timer 3 Overflow
10
CNVSTR2
11
Timer 2 Overflow
AD2CM
ADC2GTH
87
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
7.1.
Analog Multiplexer
The analog multiplexer (AMUX2) selects the inputs to the ADC, allowing any of the pins on Port 1 to be
measured in single-ended mode, or as a differential pair. Additionally, the on-chip temperature sensor may
be selected as a single-ended input. The ADC2 input channels are configured and selected in the
AMX2CF and AMX2SL registers as described in Figure 7.5 and Figure 7.6, respectively. In Single-ended
Mode, the selected pin is measured with respect to AGND. In Differential Mode, the selected differential
pair is measured with respect to one another. The polarity of the differential measurement depends on the
setting of the AMX2AD3-0 bits in the AMX2SL register. For example, if pins AIN2.0 and AIN2.1 are configured for differential measurement (AIN01IC = 1), and AMX2AD3-0 = 0000b, the ADC will measure the voltage (AIN2.0 - AIN2.1). If AMX2AD3-0 is changed to 0001b, the ADC will measure the same voltage, with
opposite polarity (AIN2.1 - AIN2.0).
The conversion code format differs between Single-ended and Differential modes. The registers ADC2H
and ADC2L contain the high and low bytes of the output conversion code from the ADC at the completion
of each conversion. Data can be right-justified or left-justified, depending on the setting of the AD2LJST bit
(ADC2CN.0). When in Single-ended Mode, conversion codes are represented as 10-bit unsigned integers.
Inputs are measured from ‘0’ to VREF * 1023/1024. Example codes are shown below for both right-justified
and left-justified data. Unused bits in the ADC2H and ADC2L registers are set to ‘0’.
Input Voltage
VREF * 1023/1024
VREF * 512/1024
VREF * 256/1024
0
Right-Justified ADC2H:ADC2L
(AD2LJST = 0)
0x03FF
0x0200
0x0100
0x0000
Left-Justified ADC2H:ADC2L
(AD2LJST = 1)
0xFFC0
0x8000
0x4000
0x0000
When in Differential Mode, conversion codes are represented as 10-bit signed 2’s complement numbers.
Inputs are measured from -VREF to VREF * 511/512. Example codes are shown below for both right-justified and left-justified data. For right-justified data, the unused MSBs of ADC2H are a sign-extension of the
data word. For left-justified data, the unused LSBs in the ADC2L register are set to ‘0’.
Input Voltage
VREF * 511/512
VREF * 256/512
0
-VREF * 256/512
- VREF
Right-Justified ADC2H:ADC2L
(AD2LJST = 0)
0x01FF
0x0100
0x0000
0xFF00
0xFE00
Left-Justified ADC2H:ADC2L
(AD2LJST = 1)
0x7FC0
0x4000
0x0000
0xC000
0x8000
Important Note About ADC2 Input Configuration: Port 1 pins selected as ADC2 inputs should be configured as analog inputs. To configure a Port 1 pin for analog input, set to ‘1’ the corresponding bit in register P1MDIN. Port 1 pins used as ADC2 inputs will be skipped by the crossbar for peripheral assignments.
See Section “18. Port Input/Output” on page 203 for more Port I/O configuration details.
The Temperature Sensor transfer function is shown in Figure 7.2 on Page 89. The output voltage (VTEMP)
is a single-ended input to ADC2 when the Temperature Sensor is selected by bits AMX2AD3-0 in register
AMX2SL. Typical values for the Slope and Offset parameters can be found in Table 7.1.
88
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 7.2. Temperature Sensor Transfer Function
Voltage
Slope (V / deg C)
Offset (V at 0 Celsius)
VTEMP = (Slope x TempC) + Offset
TempC = (VTEMP- Offset) / Slope
-50
0
50
100
Temperature (Celsius)
7.2.
Modes of Operation
ADC2 has a maximum conversion speed of 200 ksps. The ADC2 conversion clock is a divided version of
the system clock, determined by the AD2SC bits in the ADC2CF register (system clock divided by (AD2SC
+ 1) for 0 ≤ AD2SC ≤ 31). The ADC2 conversion clock should be no more than 3 MHz.
7.2.1. Starting a Conversion
A conversion can be initiated in one of four ways, depending on the programmed states of the ADC2 Start
of Conversion Mode bits (AD2CM1-0) in register ADC2CN. Conversions may be initiated by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Writing a ‘1’ to the AD2BUSY bit of register ADC2CN
A Timer 3 overflow (i.e. timed continuous conversions)
A rising edge on the CNVSTR2 input signal (Assigned by the crossbar)
A Timer 2 overflow
When CNVSTR2 is used as a conversion start source, it must be enabled in the crossbar, and the corresponding pin must be set to open-drain, high-impedance mode (see Section “18. Port Input/Output” on
page 203 for more details on Port I/O configuration).
Writing a ‘1’ to AD2BUSY provides software control of ADC2 whereby conversions are performed "ondemand". During conversion, the AD2BUSY bit is set to logic 1 and reset to logic 0 when the conversion is
complete. The falling edge of AD2BUSY triggers an interrupt (when enabled) and sets the ADC2 interrupt
flag (AD2INT). Note: When polling for ADC conversion completions, the ADC2 interrupt flag (AD2INT)
should be used. Converted data is available in the ADC2 data registers, ADC2H and ADC2L, when bit
AD2INT is logic 1. Note that when Timer 2 or Timer 3 overflows are used as the conversion source, low
byte overflows are used if the timer is in 8-bit mode; and high byte overflows are used if the timer is in 16bit mode. See Section “24. Timers” on page 287 for timer configuration.
Rev. 1.2
89
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
7.2.2. Tracking Modes
The AD2TM bit in register ADC2CN controls the ADC2 track-and-hold mode. In its default state, the ADC2
input is continuously tracked, except when a conversion is in progress. When the AD2TM bit is logic 1,
ADC2 operates in low-power track-and-hold mode. In this mode, each conversion is preceded by a tracking period of 3 SAR clocks (after the start-of-conversion signal). When the CNVSTR2 signal is used to initiate conversions in low-power tracking mode, ADC2 tracks only when CNVSTR2 is low; conversion
begins on the rising edge of CNVSTR2 (see Figure 7.3). Tracking can also be disabled (shutdown) when
the device is in low power standby or sleep modes. Low-power track-and-hold mode is also useful when
AMUX settings are frequently changed, due to the settling time requirements described in Section
“7.2.3. Settling Time Requirements” on page 91.
Figure 7.3. 10-Bit ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing
A. ADC2 Timing for External Trigger Source
CNVSTR2
(AD2CM[1:0]=10)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
SAR Clocks
AD2TM=1
AD2TM=0
Low Power
or Convert
Track
Track or Convert
Convert
Low Power
Mode
Convert
Track
B. ADC2 Timing for Internal Trigger Source
Write '1' to AD2BUSY,
Timer 3, Timer 2 Overflow
(AD2CM[1:0]=00, 01, 11)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14
SAR Clocks
AD2TM=1
Low Power
or Convert
Track
1
2
3
Convert
4
5
6
7
8
9
Low Power Mode
10 11
SAR Clocks
AD2TM=0
90
Track or
Convert
Convert
Rev. 1.2
Track
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
7.2.3. Settling Time Requirements
A minimum tracking time is required before an accurate conversion can be performed. This tracking time is
determined by the AMUX2 resistance, the ADC2 sampling capacitance, any external source resistance,
and the accuracy required for the conversion. Note that in low-power tracking mode, three SAR clocks are
used for tracking at the start of every conversion. For most applications, these three SAR clocks will meet
the minimum tracking time requirements.
Figure 7.4 shows the equivalent ADC2 input circuits for both Differential and Single-ended modes. Notice
that the equivalent time constant for both input circuits is the same. The required ADC2 settling time for a
given settling accuracy (SA) may be approximated by Equation 7.1. When measuring the Temperature
Sensor output, RTOTAL reduces to RMUX. See Table 7.1 for ADC2 minimum settling time requirements.
Equation 7.1. ADC2 Settling Time Requirements
n
2
t = ln  ------- × R TOTAL C SAMPLE
 SA
Where:
SA is the settling accuracy, given as a fraction of an LSB (for example, 0.25 to settle within 1/4 LSB)
t is the required settling time in seconds
RTOTAL is the sum of the AMUX2 resistance and any external source resistance.
n is the ADC resolution in bits (10).
Figure 7.4. ADC2 Equivalent Input Circuits
Differential Mode
Single-Ended Mode
MUX Select
MUX Select
P1.x
P1.x
RMUX = 5k
RMUX = 5k
CSAMPLE = 5pF
CSAMPLE = 5pF
RCInput= RMUX * CSAMPLE
RCInput= RMUX * CSAMPLE
CSAMPLE = 5pF
P1.y
RMUX = 5k
MUX Select
Rev. 1.2
91
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 7.5. AMX2CF: AMUX2 Configuration Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
2
0xBA
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
AIN67IC
AIN45IC
AIN23IC
AIN01IC
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bits 7-4: UNUSED. Read = 0000b; Write = don’t care.
Bit 3:
AIN67IC: AIN2.6, AIN2.7 Input Pair Configuration Bit.
0: AIN2.6 and AIN2.7 are independent, single-ended inputs.
1: AIN2.6 and AIN2.7 are a differential input pair.
Bit 2:
AIN45IC: AIN2.4, AIN2.5 Input Pair Configuration Bit.
0: AIN2.4 and AIN2.5 are independent, single-ended inputs.
1: AIN2.4 and AIN2.5 are a differential input pair.
Bit 1:
AIN23IC: AIN2.2, AIN2.3 Input Pair Configuration Bit.
0: AIN2.2 and AIN2.3 are independent, single-ended inputs.
1: AIN2.2 and AIN2.3 are a differential input pair.
Bit 0:
AIN01IC: AIN2.0, AIN2.1 Input Pair Configuration Bit.
0: AIN2.0 and AIN2.1 are independent, single-ended inputs.
1: AIN2.0 and AIN2.1 are a differential input pair.
NOTE:
92
The ADC2 Data Word is in the 2’s complement format for channels configured as differential. The polarity of a differential measurement is determined by the AMX2SL setting. See
Figure 7.5 for more details on multiplexer channel selection.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 7.6. AMX2SL: AMUX2 Channel Select Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
2
0xBB
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
-
-
-
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
AMX2AD3 AMX2AD2 AMX2AD1 AMX2AD0
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
00000000
Bit0
Bits 7-4: UNUSED. Read = 0000b; Write = don’t care.
Bits 3-0: AMX2AD3-0: AMX2 Address Bits.
0000-1111b: ADC input multiplexer channel selected per chart below.
AMX2AD3-0
Single-Ended Measurement
0000
AIN2.0
0001
AIN2.1
0010
AIN2.2
0011
AIN2.3
0100
AIN2.4
0101
AIN2.5
0110
AIN2.6
0111
AIN2.7
1xxx
Temperature
Sensor
AMX2AD3-0
AIN01IC = 0
AIN23IC = 0
AIN45IC = 0
AIN67IC = 0
Rev. 1.2
Differential Measurement
0000
+(AIN2.0) -(AIN2.1)
0001
+(AIN2.1) -(AIN2.0)
0010
+(AIN2.2) -(AIN2.3)
0011
+(AIN2.3) -(AIN2.2)
0100
+(AIN2.4) -(AIN2.5)
0101
+(AIN2.5) -(AIN2.4)
0110
+(AIN2.6) -(AIN2.7)
0111
+(AIN2.7) -(AIN2.6)
1xxx
-
AIN01IC = 1
AIN23IC = 1
AIN45IC = 1
AIN67IC = 1
93
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 7.7. ADC2CF: ADC2 Configuration Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
2
0xBC
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
AD2SC4
AD2SC3
AD2SC2
AD2SC1
AD2SC0
-
-
-
11111000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bits7-3:
AD2SC4-0: ADC2 SAR Conversion Clock Period Bits.
SAR Conversion clock is derived from system clock by the following equation, where ADSC
refers to the 5-bit value held in bits AD2SC4-AD2SC0. SAR Conversion clock requirements
are given in Table 7.1.
ADSC = SYSCLK
---------------------- – 1
CLK SAR
Bits2-0:
94
UNUSED. Read = 000b; Write = don’t care.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 7.8. ADC2H: ADC2 Data Word MSB Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
2
0xBF
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
ADC2 Data Word High-Order Bits.
For AD2LJST = 0: Bits 7-2 are the sign extension of Bit 1. Bits 1-0 are the upper 2 bits of the
10-bit ADC2 Data Word.
For AD2LJST = 1: Bits 7-0 are the most-significant bits of the 10-bit ADC2 Data Word.
Figure 7.9. ADC2L: ADC2 Data Word LSB Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
2
0xBE
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
ADC2 Data Word Low-Order Bits.
For AD2LJST = 0: Bits 7-0 are the lower 8 bits of the 10-bit Data Word.
For AD2LJST = 1: Bits 7-6 are the lower 2 bits of the 10-bit Data Word. Bits 5-0 will always
read ‘0’.
Rev. 1.2
95
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 7.10. ADC2CN: ADC2 Control Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
2
0xE8
(bit addressable)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
AD2EN
AD2TM
AD2INT
AD2BUSY
AD2CM1
AD2CM0
AD2WINT
AD2LJST
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit 7:
AD2EN: ADC2 Enable Bit.
0: ADC2 Disabled. ADC2 is in low-power shutdown.
1: ADC2 Enabled. ADC2 is active and ready for data conversions.
Bit6:
AD2TM: ADC2 Track Mode Bit.
0: Normal Track Mode: When ADC2 is enabled, tracking is continuous unless a conversion
is in progress.
1: Low-power Track Mode: Tracking Defined by AD2CM2-0 bits (see below).
Bit5:
AD2INT: ADC2 Conversion Complete Interrupt Flag.
0: ADC2 has not completed a data conversion since the last time AD2INT was cleared.
1: ADC2 has completed a data conversion.
Bit 4:
AD2BUSY: ADC2 Busy Bit.
Read:
0: ADC2 conversion is complete or a conversion is not currently in progress. AD2INT is set
to logic 1 on the falling edge of AD2BUSY.
1: ADC2 conversion is in progress.
Write:
0: No Effect.
1: Initiates ADC2 Conversion if AD2CM2-0 = 000b
Bits 3-2: AD2CM1-0: ADC2 Start of Conversion Mode Select.
When AD2TM = 0:
00: ADC2 conversion initiated on every write of ‘1’ to AD2BUSY.
01: ADC2 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 3.
10: ADC2 conversion initiated on rising edge of external CNVSTR2 pin.
11: ADC2 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 2.
When AD2TM = 1:
00: Tracking initiated on write of ‘1’ to AD2BUSY and lasts 3 SAR clocks, followed by conversion.
01: Tracking initiated on overflow of Timer 3 and lasts 3 SAR clocks, followed by conversion.
10: ADC2 tracks only when CNVSTR2 input is logic low; conversion starts on rising
CNVSTR2 edge.
11: Tracking initiated on overflow of Timer 2 and lasts 3 SAR clocks, followed by conversion.
Bit 1:
AD2WINT: ADC2 Window Compare Interrupt Flag.
0: ADC2 Window Comparison Data match has not occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: ADC2 Window Comparison Data match has occurred.
Bit 0:
AD2LJST: ADC2 Left Justify Select.
0: Data in ADC2H:ADC2L registers are right-justified.
1: Data in ADC2H:ADC2L registers are left-justified.
96
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
7.3.
Programmable Window Detector
The ADC Programmable Window Detector continuously compares the ADC2 output registers to user-programmed limits, and notifies the system when a desired condition is detected. This is especially effective in
an interrupt-driven system, saving code space and CPU bandwidth while delivering faster system
response times. The window detector interrupt flag (AD2WINT in register ADC2CN) can also be used in
polled mode. The ADC2 Greater-Than (ADC2GTH, ADC2GTL) and Less-Than (ADC2LTH, ADC2LTL) registers hold the comparison values. The window detector flag can be programmed to indicate when measured data is inside or outside of the user-programmed limits, depending on the contents of the ADC2
Less-Than and ADC2 Greater-Than registers.
Figure 7.11. ADC2GTH: ADC2 Greater-Than Data High Byte Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
2
0xC5
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
11111111
Bits7-0: High byte of ADC2 Greater-Than Data Word.
Figure 7.12. ADC2GTL: ADC2 Greater-Than Data Low Byte Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
2
0xC4
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
11111111
Bits7-0: Low byte of ADC2 Greater-Than Data Word.
Rev. 1.2
97
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 7.13. ADC2LTH: ADC2 Less-Than Data High Byte Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
2
0xC7
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0: High byte of ADC2 Less-Than Data Word.
Figure 7.14. ADC2LTL: ADC2 Less-Than Data Low Byte Register
SFR Page:
SFR Address:
2
0xC6
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0: Low byte of ADC2 Less-Than Data Word.
98
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
7.3.1. Window Detector In Single-Ended Mode
Figure 7.15 shows two example window comparisons for right-justified, single-ended data, with
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL = 0x0080 (128d) and ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL = 0x0040 (64d). In single-ended mode,
the input voltage can range from ‘0’ to VREF * (1023/1024) with respect to AGND, and is represented by a
10-bit unsigned integer value. In the left example, an AD2WINT interrupt will be generated if the ADC2
conversion word (ADC2H:ADC2L) is within the range defined by ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL and
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL (if 0x0040 < ADC2H:ADC2L < 0x0080). In the right example, and AD2WINT interrupt
will be generated if the ADC2 conversion word is outside of the range defined by the ADC2GT and
ADC2LT registers (if ADC2H:ADC2L < 0x0040 or ADC2H:ADC2L > 0x0080). Figure 7.16 shows an example using left-justified data with the same comparison values.
Figure 7.15. ADC Window Compare Example: Right-Justified Single-Ended Data
ADC2H:ADC2L
ADC2H:ADC2L
Input Voltage
(P1.x - AGND)
VREF x (1023/1024)
Input Voltage
(P1.x - AGND)
VREF x (1023/1024)
0x03FF
0x03FF
AD2WINT
not affected
AD2WINT=1
0x0081
VREF x (128/1024)
0x0080
0x0081
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL
VREF x (128/1024)
0x007F
0x0080
0x007F
AD2WINT=1
0x0041
VREF x (64/1024)
0x0040
0x0041
ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL
VREF x (64/1024)
0x003F
0x0040
ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL
AD2WINT
not affected
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL
0x003F
AD2WINT=1
AD2WINT
not affected
0x0000
0
0
0x0000
Figure 7.16. ADC Window Compare Example: Left-Justified Single-Ended Data
ADC2H:ADC2L
ADC2H:ADC2L
Input Voltage
(P1.x - AGND)
VREF x (1023/1024)
Input Voltage
(P1.x - AGND)
0xFFC0
VREF x (1023/1024)
0xFFC0
AD2WINT
not affected
AD2WINT=1
0x2040
VREF x (128/1024)
0x2000
0x2040
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL
VREF x (128/1024)
0x1FC0
0x2000
0x1FC0
AD2WINT=1
0x1040
VREF x (64/1024)
0x1000
0x1040
ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL
VREF x (64/1024)
0x0FC0
0x1000
AD2WINT
not affected
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL
0x0FC0
AD2WINT=1
AD2WINT
not affected
0
ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL
0x0000
0
Rev. 1.2
0x0000
99
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
7.3.2. Window Detector In Differential Mode
Figure 7.17 shows two example window comparisons for right-justified, differential data, with
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL = 0x0040 (+64d) and ADC2GTH:ADC2GTH = 0xFFFF (-1d). In differential mode, the
measurable voltage between the input pins is between -VREF and VREF*(511/512). Output codes are represented as 10-bit 2’s complement signed integers. In the left example, an AD2WINT interrupt will be generated if the ADC2 conversion word (ADC2H:ADC2L) is within the range defined by ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL
and ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL (if 0xFFFF (-1d) < ADC2H:ADC2L < 0x0040 (64d)). In the right example, an
AD2WINT interrupt will be generated if the ADC2 conversion word is outside of the range defined by the
ADC2GT and ADC2LT registers (if ADC2H:ADC2L < 0xFFFF (-1d) or ADC2H:ADC2L > 0x0040 (+64d)).
Figure 7.18 shows an example using left-justified data with the same comparison values.
Figure 7.17. ADC Window Compare Example: Right-Justified Differential Data
ADC2H:ADC2L
ADC2H:ADC2L
Input Voltage
(P1.x - P1.y)
VREF x (511/512)
Input Voltage
(P1.x - P1.y)
VREF x (511/512)
0x01FF
0x01FF
AD2WINT
not affected
AD2WINT=1
0x0041
VREF x (64/512)
0x0040
0x0041
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL
VREF x (64/512)
0x003F
0x0040
0x003F
AD2WINT=1
0x0000
VREF x (-1/512)
0xFFFF
0x0000
ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL
VREF x (-1/512)
0xFFFE
0xFFFF
ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL
AD2WINT
not affected
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL
0xFFFE
AD2WINT=1
AD2WINT
not affected
0x0200
-VREF
-VREF
0x0200
Figure 7.18. ADC Window Compare Example: Left-Justified Differential Data
ADC2H:ADC2L
ADC2H:ADC2L
Input Voltage
(P1.x - P1.y)
VREF x (511/512)
Input Voltage
(P1.x - P1.y)
0x7FC0
VREF x (511/512)
0x7FC0
AD2WINT
not affected
AD2WINT=1
0x1040
VREF x (64/512)
0x1000
0x1040
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL
VREF x (64/512)
0x0FC0
0x1000
0x0FC0
AD2WINT=1
0x0000
VREF x (-1/512)
0xFFC0
0x0000
ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL
VREF x (-1/512)
0xFF80
0xFFC0
100
AD2WINT
not affected
ADC2LTH:ADC2LTL
0xFF80
AD2WINT=1
AD2WINT
not affected
-VREF
ADC2GTH:ADC2GTL
0x8000
-VREF
Rev. 1.2
0x8000
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 7.1. ADC2 Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V, VREF = 2.40 V (REFSL=0), PGA Gain = 1, -40°C to +85°C unless otherwise specified
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
DC Accuracy
Resolution
10
Integral Nonlinearity
Differential Nonlinearity
Full Scale Error
±0.5
±1
LSB
±0.5
±1
LSB
-12
1
12
LSB
-15
-5
5
LSB
Guaranteed Monotonic
Offset Error
Differential mode
bits
Offset Temperature Coefficient
3.6
ppm/°C
DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE (10 kHz sine-wave Differential input, 1 dB below Full Scale, 200 ksps)
Signal-to-Noise Plus Distortion
Total Harmonic Distortion
53
Up to the 5th harmonic
Spurious-Free Dynamic Range
55.5
dB
-67
dB
78
dB
Conversion Rate
SAR Conversion Clock
3
MHz
Conversion Time in SAR Clocks
10
clocks
Track/Hold Acquisition Time
300
ns
Throughput Rate
200
ksps
0
-VREF
VREF
VREF
V
V
0
AV+
V
Analog Inputs
ADC Input Voltage Range
Single Ended (AIN+ - AGND)
Differential (AIN+ - AIN-)
Absolute Pin Voltage with respect
Single Ended or Differential
to AGND
Input Capacitance
5
pF
±0.2
°C
Temperature Sensor
Linearity
Offset
Temp = 0 °C
776
mV
Offset Error (Note 1)
Temp = 0 °C
±8.9
mV
Slope
2.89
mV/°C
Slope Error (Note 1)
±63
µV/°C
Power Specifications
Power Supply Current (VDD sup- Operating Mode, 200 ksps
plied to ADC2)
400
Power Supply Rejection
±0.3
900
µA
mV/V
Note 1: Represents one standard deviation from the mean value.
Rev. 1.2
101
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
102
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
8.
DACs, 12-Bit Voltage Mode (DAC0 and DAC1, C8051F060/1/2/3)
The C8051F060/1/2/3 devices include two on-chip 12-bit voltage-mode Digital-to-Analog Converters
(DACs). Each DAC has an output swing of 0 V to (VREF-1LSB) for a corresponding input code range of
0x000 to 0xFFF. The DACs may be enabled/disabled via their corresponding control registers, DAC0CN
and DAC1CN. While disabled, the DAC output is maintained in a high-impedance state, and the DAC supply current falls to 1 µA or less. The voltage reference for each DAC is supplied at the VREFD pin
(C8051F060/2 devices) or the VREF2 pin (C8051F061/3 devices). See Section “9. Voltage Reference 2
(C8051F060/2)” on page 111 or Section “10. Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F061/3)” on page 113 for more
information on configuring the voltage reference for the DACs. Note that the BIASE bit described in the
voltage reference sections must be set to ‘1’ to use the DACs.
Timer 2
REF
8
12
DAC0
DAC0
8
AGND
Timer 2
Latch
Timer 4
Timer 3
Latch
8
DAC1H
DAC0L
8
Dig. MUX
AV+
DAC1EN
DAC1MD1
DAC1MD0
DAC1DF2
DAC1DF1
DAC1DF0
REF
8
8
Dig. MUX
Latch
8
Latch
DAC1H
AV+
DAC1L
DAC1CN
Timer 4
DAC0H
DAC0MD1
DAC0MD0
DAC0DF2
DAC0DF1
DAC0DF0
DAC0H
DAC0CN
DAC0EN
Timer 3
Figure 8.1. DAC Functional Block Diagram
12
DAC1
DAC1
8
AGND
Rev. 1.2
103
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
8.1.
DAC Output Scheduling
Each DAC features a flexible output update mechanism which allows for seamless full-scale changes and
supports jitter-free updates for waveform generation. The following examples are written in terms of DAC0,
but DAC1 operation is identical.
8.1.1. Update Output On-Demand
In its default mode (DAC0CN.[4:3] = ‘00’) the DAC0 output is updated “on-demand” on a write to the highbyte of the DAC0 data register (DAC0H). It is important to note that writes to DAC0L are held, and have no
effect on the DAC0 output until a write to DAC0H takes place. If writing a full 12-bit word to the DAC data
registers, the 12-bit data word is written to the low byte (DAC0L) and high byte (DAC0H) data registers.
Data is latched into DAC0 after a write to the corresponding DAC0H register, so the write sequence
should be DAC0L followed by DAC0H if the full 12-bit resolution is required. The DAC can be used in 8bit mode by initializing DAC0L to the desired value (typically 0x00), and writing data to only DAC0H (also
see Section 8.2 for information on formatting the 12-bit DAC data word within the 16-bit SFR space).
8.1.2. Update Output Based on Timer Overflow
Similar to the ADC operation, in which an ADC conversion can be initiated by a timer overflow independently of the processor, the DAC outputs can use a Timer overflow to schedule an output update event.
This feature is useful in systems where the DAC is used to generate a waveform of a defined sampling rate
by eliminating the effects of variable interrupt latency and instruction execution on the timing of the DAC
output. When the DAC0MD bits (DAC0CN.[4:3]) are set to ‘01’, ‘10’, or ‘11’, writes to both DAC data registers (DAC0L and DAC0H) are held until an associated Timer overflow event (Timer 3, Timer 4, or Timer 2,
respectively) occurs, at which time the DAC0H:DAC0L contents are copied to the DAC input latches allowing the DAC output to change to the new value.
8.2.
DAC Output Scaling/Justification
In some instances, input data should be shifted prior to a DAC0 write operation to properly justify data
within the DAC input registers. This action would typically require one or more load and shift operations,
adding software overhead and slowing DAC throughput. To alleviate this problem, the data-formatting feature provides a means for the user to program the orientation of the DAC0 data word within data registers
DAC0H and DAC0L. The three DAC0DF bits (DAC0CN.[2:0]) allow the user to specify one of five data
word orientations as shown in the DAC0CN register definition.
DAC1 is functionally the same as DAC0 described above. The electrical specifications for both DAC0 and
DAC1 are given in Table 8.1.
104
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 8.2. DAC0H: DAC0 High Byte Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD3
SFR Page: 0
Bits7-0:
DAC0 Data Word Most Significant Byte.
Figure 8.3. DAC0L: DAC0 Low Byte Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0xD2
SFR Page: 0
Bits7-0:
DAC0 Data Word Least Significant Byte.
Rev. 1.2
105
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 8.4. DAC0CN: DAC0 Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
DAC0EN
-
-
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
R/W
R/W
R/W
DAC0MD1 DAC0MD0 DAC0DF2
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
DAC0DF1
DAC0DF0
00000000
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD4
SFR Page: 0
Bit7:
Bits6-5:
Bits4-3:
Bits2-0:
DAC0EN: DAC0 Enable Bit.
0: DAC0 Disabled. DAC0 Output pin is disabled; DAC0 is in low-power shutdown mode.
1: DAC0 Enabled. DAC0 Output pin is active; DAC0 is operational.
UNUSED. Read = 00b; Write = don’t care.
DAC0MD1-0: DAC0 Mode Bits.
00: DAC output updates occur on a write to DAC0H.
01: DAC output updates occur on Timer 3 overflow.
10: DAC output updates occur on Timer 4 overflow.
11: DAC output updates occur on Timer 2 overflow.
DAC0DF2-0: DAC0 Data Format Bits:
000:
The most significant nibble of the DAC0 Data Word is in DAC0H[3:0], while the least
significant byte is in DAC0L.
DAC0H
DAC0L
MSB
001:
LSB
The most significant 5-bits of the DAC0 Data Word is in DAC0H[4:0], while the least
significant 7-bits are in DAC0L[7:1].
DAC0H
DAC0L
MSB
010:
LSB
The most significant 6-bits of the DAC0 Data Word is in DAC0H[5:0], while the least
significant 6-bits are in DAC0L[7:2].
DAC0H
DAC0L
MSB
011:
LSB
The most significant 7-bits of the DAC0 Data Word is in DAC0H[6:0], while the least
significant 5-bits are in DAC0L[7:3].
DAC0H
DAC0L
MSB
1xx:
LSB
The most significant 8-bits of the DAC0 Data Word is in DAC0H[7:0], while the least
significant 4-bits are in DAC0L[7:4].
DAC0H
DAC0L
MSB
106
LSB
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 8.5. DAC1H: DAC1 High Byte Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0xD3
SFR Page: 1
Bits7-0:
DAC1 Data Word Most Significant Byte.
Figure 8.6. DAC1L: DAC1 Low Byte Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0xD2
SFR Page: 1
Bits7-0:
DAC1 Data Word Least Significant Byte.
Rev. 1.2
107
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 8.7. DAC1CN: DAC1 Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
DAC1EN
-
-
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
R/W
R/W
R/W
DAC1MD1 DAC1MD0 DAC1DF2
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
DAC1DF1
DAC1DF0
00000000
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD4
SFR Page: 1
Bit7:
Bits6-5:
Bits4-3:
Bits2-0:
DAC1EN: DAC1 Enable Bit.
0: DAC1 Disabled. DAC1 Output pin is disabled; DAC1 is in low-power shutdown mode.
1: DAC1 Enabled. DAC1 Output pin is active; DAC1 is operational.
UNUSED. Read = 00b; Write = don’t care.
DAC1MD1-0: DAC1 Mode Bits:
00: DAC output updates occur on a write to DAC1H.
01: DAC output updates occur on Timer 3 overflow.
10: DAC output updates occur on Timer 4 overflow.
11: DAC output updates occur on Timer 2 overflow.
DAC1DF2: DAC1 Data Format Bits:
000:
The most significant nibble of the DAC1 Data Word is in DAC1H[3:0], while the least
significant byte is in DAC1L.
DAC1H
DAC1L
MSB
001:
LSB
The most significant 5-bits of the DAC1 Data Word is in DAC1H[4:0], while the least
significant 7-bits are in DAC1L[7:1].
DAC1H
DAC1L
MSB
010:
LSB
The most significant 6-bits of the DAC1 Data Word is in DAC1H[5:0], while the least
significant 6-bits are in DAC1L[7:2].
DAC1H
DAC1L
MSB
011:
LSB
The most significant 7-bits of the DAC1 Data Word is in DAC1H[6:0], while the least
significant 5-bits are in DAC1L[7:3].
DAC1H
DAC1L
MSB
1xx:
LSB
The most significant 8-bits of the DAC1 Data Word is in DAC1H[7:0], while the least
significant 4-bits are in DAC1L[7:4].
DAC1H
DAC1L
MSB
108
LSB
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
.
Table 8.1. DAC Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V, AV+ = 3.0 V, VREF = 2.40 V (REFBE = 0), No Output Load unless otherwise specified
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Static Performance
Resolution
Integral Nonlinearity
12
bits
±1.5
LSB
Differential Nonlinearity
±1
Output Noise
No Output Filter
100 kHz Output Filter
10 kHz Output Filter
250
128
41
Offset Error
Data Word = 0x014
±3
LSB
µVrms
±30
mV
Offset Tempco
6
Full-Scale Error
±20
Full-Scale Error Tempco
10
ppm/°C
VDD Power Supply Rejection
Ratio
-60
dB
Output Impedance in Shutdown DACnEN = 0
Mode
100
kΩ
Output Sink Current
300
µA
15
mA
0.44
V/µs
10
µs
Output Short-Circuit Current
Data Word = 0xFFF
ppm/°C
±60
mV
Dynamic Performance
Voltage Output Slew Rate
Load = 40pF
Output Settling Time to 1/2 LSB Load = 40pF, Output swing from
code 0xFFF to 0x014
Output Voltage Swing
0
Startup Time
VREF1LSB
V
10
µs
60
ppm
Analog Outputs
Load Regulation
IL = 0.01mA to 0.3mA at code
0xFFF
Power Consumption (each DAC)
Power Supply Current (AV+
supplied to DAC)
Data Word = 0x7FF
Rev. 1.2
300
500
µA
109
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
110
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
9.
Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F060/2)
The voltage reference circuitry offers full flexibility in operating the ADC2 and DAC modules. Two voltage
reference input pins allow ADC2 and the two DACs to reference an external voltage reference or the onchip voltage reference output. ADC2 may also reference the analog power supply voltage, via the VREF
multiplexer shown in Figure 9.1.
The internal voltage reference circuit consists of a 1.2 V, temperature stable bandgap voltage reference
generator and a gain-of-two output buffer amplifier. The internal reference may be routed via the VREF pin
to external system components or to the voltage reference input pins shown in Figure 9.1. The maximum
load seen by the VREF pin must be less than 200 µA to AGND. Bypass capacitors of 0.1 µF and 4.7 µF
are recommended from the VREF pin to AGND, as shown in Figure 9.1.
The Reference Control Register 2, REF2CN (defined in Figure 9.2) enables/disables the internal reference
generator and selects the reference input for ADC2. The BIASE bit in REF2CN enables the on-board reference generator while the REFBE bit enables the gain-of-two buffer amplifier which drives the VREF pin.
When disabled, the supply current drawn by the bandgap and buffer amplifier falls to less than 1 µA (typical) and the output of the buffer amplifier enters a high impedance state. If the internal bandgap is used as
the reference voltage generator, BIASE and REFBE must both be set to logic 1. If the internal reference is
not used, REFBE may be set to logic 0. Note that the BIASE bit must be set to logic 1 if ADC2 or either
DAC is used, regardless of the voltage reference used. If neither ADC2 nor the DACs are being used, both
of these bits can be set to logic 0 to conserve power. Bit AD2VRS selects between VREF2 and AV+ for the
ADC2 voltage reference source. The electrical specifications for the Voltage Reference are given in
Table 9.1.
Figure 9.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram
AD2VRS
TEMPE
BIASE
REFBE
REF2CN
ADC2
AV+
VDD
External
Voltage
Reference
Circuit
1
R
Ref
VREF2
0
DAC0
VREFD
Ref
DAC1
BIASE
EN
VREF
4.7µF
+
x2
0.1µF
1.2V
Band-Gap
Bias to
ADC2,
DACs
REFBE
Recommended Bypass
Capacitors
Rev. 1.2
111
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
The temperature sensor connects to the highest order input of the ADC2 input multiplexer (see Section
“7. 10-Bit ADC (ADC2, C8051F060/1/2/3)” on page 87). The TEMPE bit within REF2CN enables and disables the temperature sensor. While disabled, the temperature sensor defaults to a high impedance state,
and any A/D measurements performed on the sensor while disabled result in meaningless data.
Figure 9.2. REF2CN: Reference Control Register 2
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
AD2VRS
TEMPE
BIASE
REFBE
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD1
SFR Page: 2
Bits7-4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
UNUSED. Read = 0000b; Write = don’t care.
AD2VRS: ADC2 Voltage Reference Select.
0: ADC2 voltage reference from VREF2 pin.
1: ADC2 voltage reference from AV+.
TEMPE: Temperature Sensor Enable Bit.
0: Internal Temperature Sensor Off.
1: Internal Temperature Sensor On.
BIASE: ADC/DAC Bias Generator Enable Bit. (Must be ‘1’ if using ADC2 or DACs).
0: Internal Bias Generator Off.
1: Internal Bias Generator On.
REFBE: Internal Reference Buffer Enable Bit.
0: Internal Reference Buffer Off.
1: Internal Reference Buffer On. Internal voltage reference is driven on the VREF pin.
Table 9.1. Voltage Reference Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V, AV+ = 3.0 V, -40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
2.36
2.43
2.48
V
Internal Reference (REFBE = 1)
Output Voltage
25 °C ambient
VREF Power Supply Current
50
VREF Short-Circuit Current
µA
30
VREF Temperature Coefficient
mA
15
ppm/°C
0.5
ppm/µA
Load Regulation
Load = 0 to 200 µA to AGND
VREF Turn-on Time 1
4.7 µF tantalum, 0.1 µF ceramic
bypass
2
ms
VREF Turn-on Time 2
0.1 µF ceramic bypass
20
µs
VREF Turn-on Time 3
no bypass cap
10
µs
External Reference (REFBE = 0)
Input Voltage Range
1.00
Input Current
112
0
Rev. 1.2
(AV+) 0.3
V
1
µA
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
10.
Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F061/3)
The internal voltage reference circuit consists of a 1.2 V, temperature stable bandgap voltage reference
generator and a gain-of-two output buffer amplifier. The internal reference may be routed via the VREF pin
to external system components or to the VREF2 input pin shown in Figure 10.1. The maximum load seen
by the VREF pin must be less than 200 µA to AGND. Bypass capacitors of 0.1 µF and 4.7 µF are recommended from the VREF pin to AGND, as shown in Figure 10.1.
The VREF2 pin provides a voltage reference input for ADC2 and the DACs. ADC2 may also reference the
analog power supply voltage, via the VREF multiplexers shown in Figure 10.1.
The Reference Control Register 2, REF2CN (defined in Figure 10.2) enables/disables the internal reference generator and selects the reference input for ADC2. The BIASE bit in REF2CN enables the on-board
reference generator while the REFBE bit enables the gain-of-two buffer amplifier which drives the VREF
pin. When disabled, the supply current drawn by the bandgap and buffer amplifier falls to less than 1 µA
(typical) and the output of the buffer amplifier enters a high impedance state. If the internal bandgap is
used as the reference voltage generator, BIASE and REFBE must both be set to logic 1. If the internal reference is not used, REFBE may be set to logic 0. Note that the BIASE bit must be set to logic 1 if ADC2 or
either DAC is used, regardless of the voltage reference used. If neither ADC2 nor the DACs are being
used, both of these bits can be set to logic 0 to conserve power. Bit AD2VRS selects between VREF2 and
AV+ for the ADC2 voltage reference source. The electrical specifications for the Voltage Reference are
given in Table 10.1.
Figure 10.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram
AD2VRS
TEMPE
BIASE
REFBE
REF2CN
ADC2
AV+
VDD
External
Voltage
Reference
Circuit
1
Ref
R
0
VREF2
DAC0
Ref
DAC1
BIASE
EN
VREF
4.7µF
+
x2
0.1µF
1.2V
Band-Gap
Bias to
ADC2,
DACs
REFBE
Recommended Bypass
Capacitors
Rev. 1.2
113
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
The temperature sensor connects to the highest order input of the ADC2 input multiplexer (see Section
“7. 10-Bit ADC (ADC2, C8051F060/1/2/3)” on page 87). The TEMPE bit within REF2CN enables and disables the temperature sensor. While disabled, the temperature sensor defaults to a high impedance state,
and any A/D measurements performed on the sensor while disabled result in meaningless data.
Figure 10.2. REF2CN: Reference Control Register 2
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
AD2VRS
TEMPE
BIASE
REFBE
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD1
SFR Page: 2
Bits7-4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
UNUSED. Read = 0000b; Write = don’t care.
AD2VRS: ADC2 Voltage Reference Select.
0: ADC2 voltage reference from VREF2 pin.
1: ADC2 voltage reference from AV+.
TEMPE: Temperature Sensor Enable Bit.
0: Internal Temperature Sensor Off.
1: Internal Temperature Sensor On.
BIASE: ADC/DAC Bias Generator Enable Bit. (Must be ‘1’ if using ADC2 or DACs).
0: Internal Bias Generator Off.
1: Internal Bias Generator On.
REFBE: Internal Reference Buffer Enable Bit.
0: Internal Reference Buffer Off.
1: Internal Reference Buffer On. Internal voltage reference is driven on the VREF pin.
Table 10.1. Voltage Reference Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V, AV+ = 3.0 V, -40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
2.36
2.43
2.48
V
Internal Reference (REFBE = 1)
Output Voltage
25 °C ambient
VREF Power Supply Current
50
VREF Short-Circuit Current
µA
30
VREF Temperature Coefficient
mA
15
ppm/°C
0.5
ppm/µA
Load Regulation
Load = 0 to 200 µA to AGND
VREF Turn-on Time 1
4.7 µF tantalum, 0.1 µF ceramic
bypass
2
ms
VREF Turn-on Time 2
0.1 µF ceramic bypass
20
µs
VREF Turn-on Time 3
no bypass cap
10
µs
External Reference (REFBE = 0)
Input Voltage Range
1.00
Input Current
114
0
Rev. 1.2
(AV+) 0.3
V
1
µA
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
11.
Voltage Reference 2 (C8051F064/5/6/7)
The internal voltage reference circuit consists of a 1.2 V, temperature stable bandgap voltage reference
generator and a gain-of-two output buffer amplifier. The internal reference may be routed to the VREF pin
as shown in Figure 11.1. The maximum load seen by the VREF pin must be less than 200 µA to AGND.
Bypass capacitors of 0.1 µF and 4.7 µF are recommended from the VREF pin to AGND, as shown in
Figure 11.1.
The Reference Control Register 2, REF2CN (defined in Figure 11.2) enables/disables the internal reference generator. The BIASE bit in REF2CN enables the on-board reference generator while the REFBE bit
enables the gain-of-two buffer amplifier which drives the VREF pin. When disabled, the supply current
drawn by the bandgap and buffer amplifier falls to less than 1 µA (typical) and the output of the buffer
amplifier enters a high impedance state. If the internal bandgap is used as the reference voltage generator,
BIASE and REFBE must both be set to logic 1. If the internal reference is not used, REFBE may be set to
logic 0. The electrical specifications for the Voltage Reference are given in Table 11.1.
Figure 11.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram
BIASE
EN
VREF
External
Circuitry
4.7µF
+
x2
0.1µF
1.2V
Band-Gap
REFBE
Recommended Bypass
Capacitors
Rev. 1.2
115
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 11.2. REF2CN: Reference Control Register 2
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
0
0
BIASE
REFBE
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD1
SFR Page: 2
Bits7-4:
Bits2-3:
Bit1:
Bit0:
UNUSED. Read = 0000b; Write = don’t care.
RESERVED. Must Write to 00b.
BIASE: ADC/DAC Bias Generator Enable Bit. (Must be ‘1’ if using ADC2 or DACs).
0: Internal Bias Generator Off.
1: Internal Bias Generator On.
REFBE: Internal Reference Buffer Enable Bit.
0: Internal Reference Buffer Off.
1: Internal Reference Buffer On. Internal voltage reference is driven on the VREF pin.
Table 11.1. Voltage Reference Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V, AV+ = 3.0 V, -40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
2.36
2.43
2.48
V
Internal Reference (REFBE = 1)
Output Voltage
25 °C ambient
VREF Power Supply Current
50
VREF Short-Circuit Current
µA
30
VREF Temperature Coefficient
mA
15
ppm/°C
0.5
ppm/µA
Load Regulation
Load = 0 to 200 µA to AGND
VREF Turn-on Time 1
4.7 µF tantalum, 0.1 µF ceramic
bypass
2
ms
VREF Turn-on Time 2
0.1 µF ceramic bypass
20
µs
VREF Turn-on Time 3
no bypass cap
10
µs
116
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
12.
Comparators
C8051F06x family of devices include three on-chip programmable voltage comparators, shown in
Figure 12.1. Each comparator offers programmable response time and hysteresis. When assigned to a
Port pin, the Comparator output may be configured as open drain or push-pull, and Comparator inputs
should be configured as analog inputs (see Section “18.1.5. Configuring Port 1 and 2 pins as Analog
Inputs” on page 207). The Comparator may also be used as a reset source (see Section
“14.5. Comparator0 Reset” on page 165).
The output of a Comparator can be polled by software, used as an interrupt source, used as a reset
source, and/or routed to a Port pin. Each comparator can be individually enabled and disabled (shutdown).
When disabled, the Comparator output (if assigned to a Port I/O pin via the Crossbar) defaults to the logic
low state, and its supply current falls to less than 1 µA. See Section “18.1.1. Crossbar Pin Assignment and
Allocation” on page 205 for details on configuring the Comparator output via the digital Crossbar. The
CPTnCN
Figure 12.1. Comparator Functional Block Diagram
CPnEN
CPnOUT
CPnRIF
CPnFIF
CPnHYP1
CPnHYP0
CPnHYN1
CPnHYN0
VDD
CPn
Interrupt
CPn
Rising-edge
Interrupt Flag
Comparator Pin Assignments
P2.6
P2.7
CP1 +
CP1 -
P2.2
P2.3
CP2 +
CP2 -
P2.4
P2.5
Interrupt
Logic
CPn +
+
D
CPn -
-
SET
CLR
Q
Q
D
SET
CLR
Q
Q
Crossbar
CPn
(SYNCHRONIZER)
GND
Reset
Decision
Tree
CPTnMD
CP0 +
CP0 -
CPn
Falling-edge
Interrupt Flag
CPnRIE
CPnFIE
CPnMD1
CPnMD0
Rev. 1.2
117
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Comparator inputs can be externally driven from -0.25 V to (VDD) + 0.25 V without damage or upset. The
complete electrical specifications for the Comparator are given in Table 12.1.
The Comparator response time may be configured in software using the CPnMD1-0 bits in register CPTnMD (see Figure 12.4). Selecting a longer response time reduces the amount of power consumed by the
comparator. See Table 12.1 for complete timing and current consumption specifications.
Figure 12.2. Comparator Hysteresis Plot
VIN+
VIN-
CPn+
CPn-
+
CPn
_
OUT
CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION
Positive Hysteresis Voltage
(Programmed with CPnHYP Bits)
VIN-
INPUTS
Negative Hysteresis Voltage
(Programmed by CPnHYN Bits)
VIN+
VOH
OUTPUT
VOL
Negative Hysteresis
Disabled
Positive Hysteresis
Disabled
Maximum
Negative Hysteresis
Maximum
Positive Hysteresis
The hysteresis of the Comparator is software-programmable via its Comparator Control register (CPTnCN). The user can program both the amount of hysteresis voltage (referred to the input voltage) and the
positive and negative-going symmetry of this hysteresis around the threshold voltage.
The Comparator hysteresis is programmed using Bits3-0 in the Comparator Control Register CPTnCN
(shown in Figure 12.3). The amount of negative hysteresis voltage is determined by the settings of the
CPnHYN bits. As shown in Figure 12.2, the negative hysteresis can be programmed to three different settings, or negative hysteresis can be disabled. In a similar way, the amount of positive hysteresis is determined by the setting the CPnHYP bits.
118
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Comparator interrupts can be generated on either rising-edge and falling-edge output transitions. (For
Interrupt enable and priority control, see Section “13.3. Interrupt Handler” on page 151). The rising and/or
falling -edge interrupts are enabled using the comparator’s Rising/Falling Edge Interrupt Enable Bits (CPnRIE and CPnFIE) in their respective Comparator Mode Selection Register (CPTnMD), shown in
Figure 12.4. These bits allow the user to control which edge (or both) will cause a comparator interrupt.
However, the comparator interrupt must also be enabled in the Extended Interrupt Enable Register (EIE1).
The CPnFIF flag is set to logic 1 upon a Comparator falling-edge interrupt, and the CPnRIF flag is set to
logic 1 upon the Comparator rising-edge interrupt. Once set, these bits remain set until cleared by software. The output state of a Comparator can be obtained at any time by reading the CPnOUT bit. A Comparator is enabled by setting its respective CPnEN bit to logic 1, and is disabled by clearing this bit to logic
0.Upon enabling a comparator, the output of the comparator is not immediately valid. Before using a comparator as an interrupt or reset source, software should wait for a minimum of the specified “Power-up
time” as specified in Table 12.1, “Comparator Electrical Characteristics,” on page 122.
12.1. Comparator Inputs
The Port pins selected as comparator inputs should be configured as analog inputs in the Port 2 Input Configuration Register (for details on Port configuration, see Section “18.1.3. Configuring Port Pins as Digital
Inputs” on page 207). The inputs for Comparator are on Port 2 as follows:
Comparator Input
Port PIN
CP0 +
P2.6
CP0 -
P2.7
CP1 +
P2.2
CP1 -
P2.3
CP2 +
P2.4
CP2 -
P2.5
Rev. 1.2
119
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 12.3. CPTnCN: Comparator 0, 1, and 2 Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
CPnEN
CPnOUT
CPnRIF
CPnFIF
CPnHYP1
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
R/W
R/W
R/W
CPnHYP0 CPnHYN1 CPnHYN0
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: CPT0CN: 0x88; CPT1CN: 0x88; CPT2CN: 0x88
SFR Pages: CPT0CN: page 1; CPT1CN: page 2; CPT2CN: page 3
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bits3-2:
Bits1-0:
NOTE:
120
CPnEN: Comparator Enable Bit. (Please see note below.)
0: Comparator Disabled.
1: Comparator Enabled.
CPnOUT: Comparator Output State Flag.
0: Voltage on CPn+ < CPn-.
1: Voltage on CPn+ > CPn-.
CPnRIF: Comparator Rising-Edge Interrupt Flag.
0: No Comparator Rising Edge Interrupt has occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: Comparator Rising Edge Interrupt has occurred. Must be cleared by software.
CPnFIF: Comparator Falling-Edge Interrupt Flag.
0: No Comparator Falling-Edge Interrupt has occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: Comparator Falling-Edge Interrupt has occurred. Must be cleared by software.
CPnHYP1-0: Comparator Positive Hysteresis Control Bits.
00: Positive Hysteresis Disabled.
01: Positive Hysteresis = 5 mV.
10: Positive Hysteresis = 10 mV.
11: Positive Hysteresis = 20 mV.
CPnHYN1-0: Comparator Negative Hysteresis Control Bits.
00: Negative Hysteresis Disabled.
01: Negative Hysteresis = 5 mV.
10: Negative Hysteresis = 10 mV.
11: Negative Hysteresis = 20 mV.
Upon enabling a comparator, the output of the comparator is not immediately valid. Before
using a comparator as an interrupt or reset source, software should wait for a minimum of
the specified “Power-up time” as specified in Table 12.1, “Comparator Electrical Characteristics,” on page 122.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 12.4. CPTnMD: Comparator Mode Selection Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
CPnRIE
CPnFIE
-
-
CPnMD1
CPnMD0
00000010
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: CPT0MD: 0x89; CPT1MD: 0x89; CPT2MD: 0x89
SFR Page: CPT0MD: page 1; CPT1MD: page 2; CPT2MD: page 3
Bits7-6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bits3-2:
Bits1-0:
UNUSED. Read = 00b, Write = don’t care.
CPnRIE: Comparator Rising-Edge Interrupt Enable Bit.
0: Comparator rising-edge interrupt disabled.
1: Comparator rising-edge interrupt enabled.
CPnFIE: Comparator Falling-Edge Interrupt Enable Bit.
0: Comparator falling-edge interrupt disabled.
1: Comparator falling-edge interrupt enabled.
UNUSED. Read = 00b, Write = don’t care.
CPnMD1-CPnMD0: Comparator Mode Select
These bits select the response time for the Comparator.
Mode
0
1
2
3
CPnMD1 CPnMD0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Notes
Fastest Response Time
Lowest Power Consumption
Rev. 1.2
121
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 12.1. Comparator Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V, -40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified.
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Response Time,
Mode 0
CPn+ - CPn- = 100 mV
100
ns
CPn+ - CPn- = 10 mV
250
ns
Response Time,
Mode 1
CPn+ - CPn- = 100 mV
175
ns
CPn+ - CPn- = 10 mV
500
ns
Response Time,
Mode 2
CPn+ - CPn- = 100 mV
320
ns
CPn+ - CPn- = 10 mV
1100
ns
Response Time,
Mode 3
CPn+ - CPn- = 100 mV
1050
ns
CPn+ - CPn- = 10 mV
5200
ns
Common-Mode Rejection
Ratio
Typ
Max
Units
1.5
4
mV/V
0
1
mV
Positive Hysteresis 1
CPnHYP1-0 = 00
Positive Hysteresis 2
CPnHYP1-0 = 01
3
5
7
mV
Positive Hysteresis 3
CPnHYP1-0 = 10
7
10
15
mV
Positive Hysteresis 4
CPnHYP1-0 = 11
15
20
25
mV
Negative Hysteresis 1
CPnHYN1-0 = 00
0
1
mV
Negative Hysteresis 2
CPnHYN1-0 = 01
3
5
7
mV
Negative Hysteresis 3
CPnHYN1-0 = 10
7
10
15
mV
Negative Hysteresis 4
CPnHYN1-0 = 11
15
20
25
mV
VDD +
0.25
V
Inverting or Non-Inverting
Input Voltage Range
-0.25
Input Capacitance
7
Input Bias Current
-5
Input Offset Voltage
-5
0.001
pF
+5
nA
+5
mV
1
mV/V
Power Supply
Power Supply Rejection
0.1
Power-up Time
10
µs
Mode 0
7.6
µA
Mode 1
3.2
µA
Mode 2
1.3
µA
Mode 3
0.4
µA
Supply Current at DC
122
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
13.
CIP-51 Microcontroller
The MCU system controller core is the CIP-51 microcontroller. The CIP-51 is fully compatible with the
MCS-51™ instruction set; standard 803x/805x assemblers and compilers can be used to develop software. The MCU family has a superset of all the peripherals included with a standard 8051. Included are
five 16-bit counter/timers (see description in Section 24), two full-duplex UARTs (see description in Section
22 and Section 23), 256 bytes of internal RAM, 128 byte Special Function Register (SFR) address space
(see Section 13.2.6), and 59/24 General-Purpose I/O Pins (see description in Section 18). The CIP-51 also
includes on-chip debug hardware (see description in Section 26), and interfaces directly with the MCU’s
analog and digital subsystems providing a complete data acquisition or control-system solution in a single
integrated circuit.
-
Fully Compatible with MCS-51 Instruction Set
25 MIPS Peak Throughput with 25 MHz Clock
0 to 25 MHz Clock Frequency
256 Bytes of Internal RAM
59/24 General-Purpose I/O Pins
-
Rev. 1.2
Extended Interrupt Handler
Reset Input
Power Management Modes
On-chip Debug Logic
Program and Data Memory Security
123
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
The CIP-51 Microcontroller core implements the standard 8051 organization and peripherals as well as
additional custom peripherals and functions to extend its capability (see Figure 13.1 for a block diagram).
The CIP-51 includes the following features:
Performance
The CIP-51 employs a pipelined architecture that greatly increases its instruction throughput over the standard 8051 architecture. In a standard 8051, all instructions except for MUL and DIV take 12 or 24 system
clock cycles to execute, and usually have a maximum system clock of 12 MHz. By contrast, the CIP-51
core executes 70% of its instructions in one or two system clock cycles, with no instructions taking more
than eight system clock cycles.
With the CIP-51's maximum system clock at 25 MHz, it has a peak throughput of 25 MIPS. The CIP-51 has
a total of 109 instructions. The table below shows the total number of instructions that require each execution time.
Clocks to Execute
1
2
2/3
3
3/4
4
4/5
5
8
Number of Instructions
26
50
5
14
7
3
1
2
1
Figure 13.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram
DATA BUS
D8
TMP2
B REGISTER
STACK POINTER
SRAM
ADDRESS
REGISTER
PSW
D8
D8
D8
ALU
SRAM
(256 X 8)
D8
D8
TMP1
ACCUMULATOR
D8
D8
D8
DATA BUS
DATA BUS
SFR_ADDRESS
BUFFER
D8
DATA POINTER
D8
D8
SFR
BUS
INTERFACE
SFR_CONTROL
SFR_WRITE_DATA
SFR_READ_DATA
DATA BUS
PC INCREMENTER
PROGRAM COUNTER (PC)
PRGM. ADDRESS REG.
PIPELINE
RESET
MEM_CONTROL
A16
SYSTEM_IRQs
D8
POWER CONTROL
REGISTER
MEM_WRITE_DATA
MEM_READ_DATA
CONTROL
LOGIC
STOP
124
MEMORY
INTERFACE
D8
CLOCK
IDLE
MEM_ADDRESS
D8
D8
Rev. 1.2
INTERRUPT
INTERFACE
DEBUG_IRQ
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Programming and Debugging Support
A JTAG-based serial interface is provided for in-system programming of the Flash program memory and
communication with on-chip debug support logic. The re-programmable Flash can also be read and
changed a single byte at a time by the application software using the MOVC and MOVX instructions. This
feature allows program memory to be used for non-volatile data storage as well as updating program code
under software control.
The on-chip debug support logic facilitates full speed in-circuit debugging, allowing the setting of hardware
breakpoints and watch points, starting, stopping and single stepping through program execution (including
interrupt service routines), examination of the program's call stack, and reading/writing the contents of registers and memory. This method of on-chip debug is completely non-intrusive and non-invasive, requiring
no RAM, Stack, timers, or other on-chip resources.
The CIP-51 is supported by development tools from Silicon Labs and third party vendors. Silicon Labs provides an integrated development environment (IDE) which interfaces to the CIP-51 via its JTAG port to provide fast and efficient in-system device programming and debugging. Third party macro assemblers and C
compilers are also available.
13.1. Instruction Set
The instruction set of the CIP-51 System Controller is fully compatible with the standard MCS-51™ instruction set; standard 8051 development tools can be used to develop software for the CIP-51. All CIP-51
instructions are the binary and functional equivalent of their MCS-51™ counterparts, including opcodes,
addressing modes and effect on PSW flags. However, instruction timing is different than that of the standard 8051.
13.1.1. Instruction and CPU Timing
In many 8051 implementations, a distinction is made between machine cycles and clock cycles, with
machine cycles varying from 2 to 12 clock cycles in length. However, the CIP-51 implementation is based
solely on clock cycle timing. All instruction timings are specified in terms of clock cycles.
Due to the pipelined architecture of the CIP-51, most instructions execute in the same number of clock
cycles as there are program bytes in the instruction. Conditional branch instructions take one less clock
cycle to complete when the branch is not taken as opposed to when the branch is taken. Table 13.1 is the
CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary, which includes the mnemonic, number of bytes, and number of clock
cycles for each instruction.
13.1.2. MOVX Instruction and Program Memory
In the CIP-51, the MOVX instruction serves three purposes: accessing on-chip XRAM, accessing off-chip
XRAM, and writing to on-chip program Flash memory. The Flash access feature provides a mechanism for
user software to update program code and use the program memory space for non-volatile data storage
(see Section “16. Flash Memory” on page 177). The External Memory Interface provides a fast access to
off-chip XRAM (or memory-mapped peripherals) via the MOVX instruction. Refer to Section “17. External
Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM” on page 187 for details.
Rev. 1.2
125
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 13.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonic
ADD A, Rn
ADD A, direct
ADD A, @Ri
ADD A, #data
ADDC A, Rn
ADDC A, direct
ADDC A, @Ri
ADDC A, #data
SUBB A, Rn
SUBB A, direct
SUBB A, @Ri
SUBB A, #data
INC A
INC Rn
INC direct
INC @Ri
DEC A
DEC Rn
DEC direct
DEC @Ri
INC DPTR
MUL AB
DIV AB
DA A
ANL A, Rn
ANL A, direct
ANL A, @Ri
ANL A, #data
ANL direct, A
ANL direct, #data
ORL A, Rn
ORL A, direct
ORL A, @Ri
ORL A, #data
ORL direct, A
ORL direct, #data
XRL A, Rn
XRL A, direct
XRL A, @Ri
XRL A, #data
XRL direct, A
126
Description
Arithmetic Operations
Add register to A
Add direct byte to A
Add indirect RAM to A
Add immediate to A
Add register to A with carry
Add direct byte to A with carry
Add indirect RAM to A with carry
Add immediate to A with carry
Subtract register from A with borrow
Subtract direct byte from A with borrow
Subtract indirect RAM from A with borrow
Subtract immediate from A with borrow
Increment A
Increment register
Increment direct byte
Increment indirect RAM
Decrement A
Decrement register
Decrement direct byte
Decrement indirect RAM
Increment Data Pointer
Multiply A and B
Divide A by B
Decimal adjust A
Logical Operations
AND Register to A
AND direct byte to A
AND indirect RAM to A
AND immediate to A
AND A to direct byte
AND immediate to direct byte
OR Register to A
OR direct byte to A
OR indirect RAM to A
OR immediate to A
OR A to direct byte
OR immediate to direct byte
Exclusive-OR Register to A
Exclusive-OR direct byte to A
Exclusive-OR indirect RAM to A
Exclusive-OR immediate to A
Exclusive-OR A to direct byte
Rev. 1.2
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
4
8
1
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 13.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued)
Mnemonic
Description
XRL direct, #data
CLR A
CPL A
RL A
RLC A
RR A
RRC A
SWAP A
Exclusive-OR immediate to direct byte
Clear A
Complement A
Rotate A left
Rotate A left through Carry
Rotate A right
Rotate A right through Carry
Swap nibbles of A
Data Transfer
Move Register to A
Move direct byte to A
Move indirect RAM to A
Move immediate to A
Move A to Register
Move direct byte to Register
Move immediate to Register
Move A to direct byte
Move Register to direct byte
Move direct byte to direct byte
Move indirect RAM to direct byte
Move immediate to direct byte
Move A to indirect RAM
Move direct byte to indirect RAM
Move immediate to indirect RAM
Load DPTR with 16-bit constant
Move code byte relative DPTR to A
Move code byte relative PC to A
Move external data (8-bit address) to A
Move A to external data (8-bit address)
Move external data (16-bit address) to A
Move A to external data (16-bit address)
Push direct byte onto stack
Pop direct byte from stack
Exchange Register with A
Exchange direct byte with A
Exchange indirect RAM with A
Exchange low nibble of indirect RAM with A
Boolean Manipulation
Clear Carry
Clear direct bit
Set Carry
Set direct bit
Complement Carry
Complement direct bit
AND direct bit to Carry
MOV A, Rn
MOV A, direct
MOV A, @Ri
MOV A, #data
MOV Rn, A
MOV Rn, direct
MOV Rn, #data
MOV direct, A
MOV direct, Rn
MOV direct, direct
MOV direct, @Ri
MOV direct, #data
MOV @Ri, A
MOV @Ri, direct
MOV @Ri, #data
MOV DPTR, #data16
MOVC A, @A+DPTR
MOVC A, @A+PC
MOVX A, @Ri
MOVX @Ri, A
MOVX A, @DPTR
MOVX @DPTR, A
PUSH direct
POP direct
XCH A, Rn
XCH A, direct
XCH A, @Ri
XCHD A, @Ri
CLR C
CLR bit
SETB C
SETB bit
CPL C
CPL bit
ANL C, bit
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Clock
Cycles
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
Bytes
Rev. 1.2
127
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 13.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued)
Mnemonic
Description
ANL C, /bit
ORL C, bit
ORL C, /bit
MOV C, bit
MOV bit, C
JC rel
JNC rel
JB bit, rel
JNB bit, rel
JBC bit, rel
AND complement of direct bit to Carry
OR direct bit to carry
OR complement of direct bit to Carry
Move direct bit to Carry
Move Carry to direct bit
Jump if Carry is set
Jump if Carry is not set
Jump if direct bit is set
Jump if direct bit is not set
Jump if direct bit is set and clear bit
Program Branching
Absolute subroutine call
Long subroutine call
Return from subroutine
Return from interrupt
Absolute jump
Long jump
Short jump (relative address)
Jump indirect relative to DPTR
Jump if A equals zero
Jump if A does not equal zero
Compare direct byte to A and jump if not equal
Compare immediate to A and jump if not equal
Compare immediate to Register and jump if not
equal
Compare immediate to indirect and jump if not
equal
Decrement Register and jump if not zero
Decrement direct byte and jump if not zero
No operation
ACALL addr11
LCALL addr16
RET
RETI
AJMP addr11
LJMP addr16
SJMP rel
JMP @A+DPTR
JZ rel
JNZ rel
CJNE A, direct, rel
CJNE A, #data, rel
CJNE Rn, #data, rel
CJNE @Ri, #data, rel
DJNZ Rn, rel
DJNZ direct, rel
NOP
128
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
Clock
Cycles
2
2
2
2
2
2/3
2/3
3/4
3/4
3/4
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
4
5
5
3
4
3
3
2/3
2/3
3/4
3/4
3
3/4
3
4/5
2
3
1
2/3
3/4
1
Bytes
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Notes on Registers, Operands and Addressing Modes:
Rn - Register R0-R7 of the currently selected register bank.
@Ri - Data RAM location addressed indirectly through R0 or R1.
rel - 8-bit, signed (two’s complement) offset relative to the first byte of the following instruction. Used by
SJMP and all conditional jumps.
direct - 8-bit internal data location’s address. This could be a direct-access Data RAM location (0x000x7F) or an SFR (0x80-0xFF).
#data - 8-bit constant
#data16 - 16-bit constant
bit - Direct-accessed bit in Data RAM or SFR
addr11 - 11-bit destination address used by ACALL and AJMP. The destination must be within the same
2K-byte page of program memory as the first byte of the following instruction.
addr16 - 16-bit destination address used by LCALL and LJMP. The destination may be anywhere within
the 64K-byte program memory space.
There is one unused opcode (0xA5) that performs the same function as NOP.
All mnemonics copyrighted © Intel Corporation 1980.
Rev. 1.2
129
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
13.2. Memory Organization
The memory organization of the CIP-51 System Controller is similar to that of a standard 8051. There are
two separate memory spaces: program memory and data memory. Program and data memory share the
same address space but are accessed via different instruction types. There are 256 bytes of internal data
memory and 64 k bytes (C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5) or 32 k bytes (C8051F066/7) of internal program memory
address space implemented within the CIP-51. The CIP-51 memory organization is shown in Figure 13.2.
Figure 13.2. Memory Map
PROGRAM/DATA MEMORY
(FLASH)
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/
5
0x1007F
0x10000
0xFFFF
0xFC00
Scrachpad Memory
(data only)
DATA MEMORY (RAM)
0xFF
INTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE
Upper 128 RAM
0x80 (Indirect Addressing Only)
0x7F
Special Function
Registers
(Direct Addressing Only)
RESERVED
0xFBFF
FLASH
(In-System Programmable
in 512 Byte Sectors)
0x30
0x2F
0x20
0x1F
0x00
(Direct and Indirect
Addressing)
Lower 128 RAM
(Direct and Indirect
Addressing)
Bit Addressable
0
1
2
3
Up To
256 SFR Pages
General Purpose
Registers
0x0000
C8051F066/7
0x1007F
0x10000
Scrachpad Memory
(data only)
EXTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
Off-chip XRAMspace
(C8051F060/2/4/6Only)
RESERVED
0x8000
0x7FFF
FLASH
0x1000
(In-System Programmable
in 512 Byte Sectors)
0x0FFF
0x0000
0x0000
XRAM - 4096 Bytes
(accessable usingMOVX
instruction)
13.2.1. Program Memory
The CIP-51 has a 64 k byte program memory space. The C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5 devices implement 64 k
bytes of this program memory space as in-system re-programmable Flash memory, organized in a contiguous block from addresses 0x0000 to 0xFFFF. Note: 1024 bytes (0xFC00 to 0xFFFF) of this memory are
reserved, and are not available for user program storage. The C8051F066/7 implement 32 k bytes of this
program memory space as in-system re-programmable Flash memory, organized in a contiguous block
from addresses 0x0000 to 0x7FFF.
Program memory is normally assumed to be read-only (using the MOVC instruction). However, the CIP-51
can write to program memory by enabling Flash writes, and using the MOVX instruction. This feature provides a mechanism for the CIP-51 to update program code and use the program memory space for nonvolatile data storage. Refer to Section “16. Flash Memory” on page 177 for further details.
130
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
13.2.2. Data Memory
The CIP-51 implements 256 bytes of internal RAM mapped into the data memory space from 0x00 through
0xFF. The lower 128 bytes of data memory are used for general purpose registers and scratch pad memory. Either direct or indirect addressing may be used to access the lower 128 bytes of data memory. Locations 0x00 through 0x1F are addressable as four banks of general purpose registers, each bank consisting
of eight byte-wide registers. The next 16 bytes, locations 0x20 through 0x2F, may either be addressed as
bytes or as 128 bit locations accessible with the direct addressing mode.
The upper 128 bytes of data memory are accessible only by indirect addressing. This region occupies the
same address space as the Special Function Registers (SFRs) but is physically separate from the SFR
space. The addressing mode used by an instruction when accessing locations above 0x7F determines
whether the CPU accesses the upper 128 bytes of data memory space or the SFRs. Instructions that use
direct addressing above 0x7F will access the SFR space. Instructions using indirect addressing above
0x7F access the upper 128 bytes of data memory. Figure 13.2 illustrates the data memory organization of
the CIP-51.
13.2.3. General Purpose Registers
The lower 32 bytes of data memory, locations 0x00 through 0x1F, may be addressed as four banks of general-purpose registers. Each bank consists of eight byte-wide registers designated R0 through R7. Only
one of these banks may be enabled at a time. Two bits in the program status word, RS0 (PSW.3) and RS1
(PSW.4), select the active register bank (see description of the PSW in Figure 13.16). This allows fast context switching when entering subroutines and interrupt service routines. Indirect addressing modes use
registers R0 and R1 as index registers.
13.2.4. Bit Addressable Locations
In addition to direct access to data memory organized as bytes, the sixteen data memory locations at 0x20
through 0x2F are also accessible as 128 individually addressable bits. Each bit has a bit address from
0x00 to 0x7F. Bit 0 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address 0x00 while bit 7 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address
0x07. Bit 7 of the byte at 0x2F has bit address 0x7F. A bit access is distinguished from a full byte access by
the type of instruction used (a bit source or destination operand as opposed to a byte source or destination).
The MCS-51™ assembly language allows an alternate notation for bit addressing of the form XX.B where
XX is the byte address and B is the bit position within the byte. For example, the instruction:
MOV
C, 22.3h
moves the Boolean value at 0x13 (bit 3 of the byte at location 0x22) into the Carry flag.
13.2.5. Stack
A programmer's stack can be located anywhere in the 256 byte data memory. The stack area is designated
using the Stack Pointer (SP, address 0x81) SFR. The SP will point to the last location used. The next value
pushed on the stack is placed at SP+1 and then SP is incremented. A reset initializes the stack pointer to
location 0x07; therefore, the first value pushed on the stack is placed at location 0x08, which is also the
first register (R0) of register bank 1. Thus, if more than one register bank is to be used, the SP should be
initialized to a location in the data memory not being used for data storage. The stack depth can extend up
to 256 bytes.
The MCUs also have built-in hardware for a stack record which is accessed by the debug logic. The stack
record is a 32-bit shift register, where each PUSH or increment SP pushes one record bit onto the register,
Rev. 1.2
131
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
and each CALL pushes two record bits onto the register. (A POP or decrement SP pops one record bit,
and a RET pops two record bits, also.) The stack record circuitry can also detect an overflow or underflow
on the 32-bit shift register, and can notify the debug software even with the MCU running at speed.
13.2.6. Special Function Registers
The direct-access data memory locations from 0x80 to 0xFF constitute the Special Function Registers
(SFRs). The SFRs provide control and data exchange with the CIP-51's resources and peripherals. The
CIP-51 duplicates the SFRs found in a typical 8051 implementation as well as implementing additional
SFRs used to configure and access the sub-systems unique to the MCU. This allows the addition of new
functionality while retaining compatibility with the MCS-51™ instruction set. Table 13.2 lists the SFRs
implemented in the CIP-51 System Controller.
The SFRs are accessed whenever the direct addressing mode is used to access memory locations from
0x80 to 0xFF. SFRs with addresses ending in 0x0 or 0x8 (e.g. P0, TCON, P1, SCON, IE, etc.) are bitaddressable as well as byte-addressable. All other SFRs are byte-addressable only. Unoccupied
addresses in the SFR space are reserved for future use. Accessing these areas will have an indeterminate
effect and should be avoided. Refer to the corresponding pages of the datasheet, as indicated in
Table 13.3, for a detailed description of each register.
13.2.6.1.SFR Paging
The CIP-51 features SFR paging, allowing the device to map many SFRs into the 0x80 to 0xFF memory
address space. The SFR memory space has 256 pages. In this way, each memory location from 0x80 to
0xFF can access up to 256 SFRs. The C8051F06x family of devices utilizes five SFR pages: 0, 1, 2, 3, and
F. SFR pages are selected using the Special Function Register Page Selection register, SFRPAGE (see
Figure 13.10). The procedure for reading and writing an SFR is as follows:
1. Select the appropriate SFR page number using the SFRPAGE register.
2. Use direct accessing mode to read or write the special function register (MOV instruction).
13.2.6.2.Interrupts and SFR Paging
When an interrupt occurs, the SFR Page Register will automatically switch to the SFR page containing the
flag bit that caused the interrupt. The automatic SFR Page switch function conveniently removes the burden of switching SFR pages from the interrupt service routine. Upon execution of the RETI instruction, the
SFR page is automatically restored to the SFR Page in use prior to the interrupt. This is accomplished via
a three-byte SFR Page Stack. The top byte of the stack is SFRPAGE, the current SFR Page. The second
byte of the SFR Page Stack is SFRNEXT. The third, or bottom byte of the SFR Page Stack is SFRLAST.
On interrupt, the current SFRPAGE value is pushed to the SFRNEXT byte, and the value of SFRNEXT is
pushed to SFRLAST. Hardware then loads SFRPAGE with the SFR Page containing the flag bit associated
with the interrupt. On a return from interrupt, the SFR Page Stack is popped resulting in the value of SFRNEXT returning to the SFRPAGE register, thereby restoring the SFR page context without software intervention. The value in SFRLAST (0x00 if there is no SFR Page value in the bottom of the stack) of the stack is
placed in SFRNEXT register. If desired, the values stored in SFRNEXT and SFRLAST may be modified
during an interrupt, enabling the CPU to return to a different SFR Page upon execution of the RETI instruction (on interrupt exit). Modifying registers in the SFR Page Stack does not cause a push or pop of the
stack. Only interrupt calls and returns will cause push/pop operations on the SFR Page Stack.
132
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.3. SFR Page Stack
SFRPGCN Bit
Interrupt
Logic
SFRPAGE
CIP-51
SFRNEXT
SFRLAST
Automatic hardware switching of the SFR Page on interrupts may be enabled or disabled as desired using
the SFR Automatic Page Control Enable Bit located in the SFR Page Control Register (SFRPGCN). This
function defaults to ‘enabled’ upon reset. In this way, the autoswitching function will be enabled unless disabled in software.
A summary of the SFR locations (address and SFR page) is provided in Table 13.2. in the form of an SFR
memory map. Each memory location in the map has an SFR page row, denoting the page in which that
SFR resides. Note that certain SFRs are accessible from ALL SFR pages, and are denoted by the “(ALL
PAGES)” designation. For example, the Port I/O registers P0, P1, P2, and P3 all have the “(ALL PAGES)”
designation, indicating these SFRs are accessible from all SFR pages regardless of the SFRPAGE register
value.
Rev. 1.2
133
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
13.2.6.3.SFR Page Stack Example
The following is an example that shows the operation of the SFR Page Stack during interrupts.
In this example, the SFR Page Control is left in the default enabled state (i.e., SFRPGEN = 1), and the
CIP-51 is executing in-line code that is writing values to Port 5 (SFR “P5”, located at address 0xD8 on SFR
Page 0x0F). The device is also using the Programmable Counter Array (PCA) and the 10-bit ADC (ADC2)
window comparator to monitor a voltage. The PCA is timing a critical control function in its interrupt service
routine (ISR), so its interrupt is enabled and is set to high priority. The ADC2 is monitoring a voltage that is
less important, but to minimize the software overhead its window comparator is being used with an associated ISR that is set to low priority. At this point, the SFR page is set to access the Port 5 SFR (SFRPAGE =
0x0F). See Figure 13.4 below.
Figure 13.4. SFR Page Stack While Using SFR Page 0x0F To Access Port 5
SFR Page
Stack SFR's
0x0F
SFRPAGE
(Port 5)
SFRNEXT
SFRLAST
134
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
While CIP-51 executes in-line code (writing values to Port 5 in this example), ADC2 Window Comparator
Interrupt occurs. The CIP-51 vectors to the ADC2 Window Comparator ISR and pushes the current SFR
Page value (SFR Page 0x0F) into SFRNEXT in the SFR Page Stack. The SFR page needed to access
ADC2’s SFRs is then automatically placed in the SFRPAGE register (SFR Page 0x02). SFRPAGE is considered the “top” of the SFR Page Stack. Software can now access the ADC2 SFRs. Software may switch
to any SFR Page by writing a new value to the SFRPAGE register at any time during the ADC2 ISR to
access SFRs that are not on SFR Page 0x02. See Figure 13.5 below.
Figure 13.5. SFR Page Stack After ADC2 Window Comparator Interrupt Occurs
SFR Page 0x02
Automatically
pushed on stack in
SFRPAGE on ADC2
interrupt
0x02
SFRPAGE
SFRPAGE
pushed to
SFRNEXT
(ADC2)
0x0F
SFRNEXT
(Port 5)
SFRLAST
Rev. 1.2
135
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
While in the ADC2 ISR, a PCA interrupt occurs. Recall the PCA interrupt is configured as a high priority
interrupt, while the ADC2 interrupt is configured as a low priority interrupt. Thus, the CIP-51 will now vector
to the high priority PCA ISR. Upon doing so, the CIP-51 will automatically place the SFR page needed to
access the PCA’s special function registers into the SFRPAGE register, SFR Page 0x00. The value that
was in the SFRPAGE register before the PCA interrupt (SFR Page 2 for ADC2) is pushed down the stack
into SFRNEXT. Likewise, the value that was in the SFRNEXT register before the PCA interrupt (in this
case SFR Page 0x0F for Port 5) is pushed down to the SFRLAST register, the “bottom” of the stack. Note
that a value stored in SFRLAST (via a previous software write to the SFRLAST register) will be overwritten.
See Figure 13.6 below.
Figure 13.6. SFR Page Stack Upon PCA Interrupt Occurring During an ADC2 ISR
SFR Page 0x00
Automatically
pushed on stack in
SFRPAGE on PCA
interrupt
0x00
SFRPAGE
SFRPAGE
pushed to
SFRNEXT
(PCA)
0x02
SFRNEXT
SFRNEXT
pushed to
SFRLAST
(ADC2)
0x0F
SFRLAST
(Port 5)
136
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
On exit from the PCA interrupt service routine, the CIP-51 will return to the ADC2 Window Comparator
ISR. On execution of the RETI instruction, SFR Page 0x00 used to access the PCA registers will be automatically popped off of the SFR Page Stack, and the contents of the SFRNEXT register will be moved to
the SFRPAGE register. Software in the ADC2 ISR can continue to access SFRs as it did prior to the PCA
interrupt. Likewise, the contents of SFRLAST are moved to the SFRNEXT register. Recall this was the
SFR Page value 0x0F being used to access Port 5 before the ADC2 interrupt occurred. See Figure 13.7
below.
Figure 13.7. SFR Page Stack Upon Return From PCA Interrupt
SFR Page 0x00
Automatically
popped off of the
stack on return from
interrupt
0x02
SFRPAGE
SFRNEXT
popped to
SFRPAGE
(ADC2)
0x0F
SFRNEXT
SFRLAST
popped to
SFRNEXT
(Port 5)
SFRLAST
Rev. 1.2
137
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
On the execution of the RETI instruction in the ADC2 Window Comparator ISR, the value in SFRPAGE
register is overwritten with the contents of SFRNEXT. The CIP-51 may now access the Port 5 SFR bits as
it did prior to the interrupts occurring. See Figure 13.8 below.
Figure 13.8. SFR Page Stack Upon Return From ADC2 Window Interrupt
SFR Page 0x02
Automatically
popped off of the
stack on return from
interrupt
0x0F
SFRPAGE
SFRNEXT
popped to
SFRPAGE
(Port 5)
SFRNEXT
SFRLAST
Note that in the above example, all three bytes in the SFR Page Stack are accessible via the SFRPAGE,
SFRNEXT, and SFRLAST special function registers. If the stack is altered while servicing an interrupt, it is
possible to return to a different SFR Page upon interrupt exit than selected prior to the interrupt call. Direct
access to the SFR Page stack can be useful to enable real-time operating systems to control and manage
context switching between multiple tasks.
Push operations on the SFR Page Stack only occur on interrupt service, and pop operations only occur on
interrupt exit (execution on the RETI instruction). The automatic switching of the SFRPAGE and operation
of the SFR Page Stack as described above can be disabled in software by clearing the SFR Automatic
Page Enable Bit (SFRPGEN) in the SFR Page Control Register (SFRPGCN). See Figure 13.9.
138
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.9. SFRPGCN: SFR Page Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000001
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SFRPGEN
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x96
SFR Page: F
Bits7-1:
Bit0:
Reserved.
SFRPGEN: SFR Automatic Page Control Enable.
Upon interrupt, the C8051 Core will vector to the specified interrupt service routine and
automatically switch the SFR page to the corresponding peripheral or function’s SFR page.
This bit is used to control this autopaging function.
0: SFR Automatic Paging disabled. C8051 core will not automatically change to the appropriate SFR page (i.e., the SFR page that contains the SFRs for the peripheral/function that
was the source of the interrupt).
1: SFR Automatic Paging enabled. Upon interrupt, the C8051 will switch the SFR page to
the page that contains the SFRs for the peripheral or function that is the source of the interrupt.
Figure 13.10. SFRPAGE: SFR Page Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0x84
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-0:
SFR Page Bits: Byte Represents the SFR Page the C8051 MCU uses when reading or
modifying SFRs.
Write: Sets the SFR Page.
Read: Byte is the SFR page the C8051 MCU is using.
When enabled in the SFR Page Control Register (SFRPGCN), the C8051 will automatically
switch to the SFR Page that contains the SFRs of the corresponding peripheral/function that
caused the interrupt, and return to the previous SFR page upon return from interrupt (unless
SFR Stack was altered before a returning from the interrupt).
SFRPAGE is the top byte of the SFR Page Stack, and push/pop events of this stack are
caused by interrupts (and not by reading/writing to the SFRPAGE register)
Rev. 1.2
139
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.11. SFRNEXT: SFR Next Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0x85
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-0:
SFR Page Stack Bits: SFR page context is retained upon interrupts/return from interrupts in
a 3 byte SFR Page Stack: SFRPAGE is the first entry, SFRNEXT is the second, and SFRLAST is the third entry. The SFR stack bytes may be used to alter the context in the SFR
Page Stack, and will not cause the stack to ‘push’ or ‘pop’. Only interrupts and return from
interrupt cause push and pop the SFR Page Stack.
Write: Sets the SFR Page contained in the second byte of the SFR Stack. This will cause
the SFRPAGE SFR to have this SFR page value upon a return from interrupt.
Read: Returns the value of the SFR page contained in the second byte of the SFR stack.
This is the value that will go to the SFR Page register upon a return from interrupt.
Figure 13.12. SFRLAST: SFR Last Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0x86
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-0:
140
SFR Page Stack Bits: SFR page context is retained upon interrupts/return from interrupts in
a 3 byte SFR Page Stack: SFRPAGE is the first entry, SFRNEXT is the second, and SFRLAST is the third entry. The SFR stack bytes may be used to alter the context in the SFR
Page Stack, and will not cause the stack to ‘push’ or ‘pop’. Only interrupts and return from
interrupt cause push and pop the SFR Page Stack.
Write:
Sets the SFR Page in the last entry of the SFR Stack. This will cause the SFRNEXT SFR to
have this SFR page value upon a return from interrupt.
Read:
Returns the value of the SFR page contained in the last entry of the SFR stack.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 13.2. Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
SFR
P
A
G
E
0
F8
1
2
3
F
0(8)
1(9)
2(A)
SPI0CN
CAN0CN
PCA0L
PCA0H
DMA0CF
P7
DMA0CTL
3(B)
4(C)
5(D)
6(E)
7(F)
PCA0CPL0 PCA0CPH0 PCA0CPL1 PCA0CPH1
WDTCN
(ALL PAGES)
DMA0CTH
DMA0CSL
DMA0CSH
DMA0BND
DMA0ISW
0
F0
E8
E0
D8
D0
C8
C0
B8
1
B
2
(ALL PAGES)
3
F
0
ADC0CN PCA0CPL2
1
ADC1CN
2
ADC2CN
3
F
P6
0
PCA0CPL5
1
ACC
2
(ALL PAGES)
3
F
XBR0
0
PCA0MD
PCA0CN
1 CAN0DATL CAN0DATH
2
3
DMA0DAL
DMA0CN
F
P5
0
REF0CN
1
REF1CN
PSW
2
REF2CN
(ALL PAGES)
3
F
0
TMR2CN
TMR2CF
1
TMR3CN
TMR3CF
2
TMR4CN
TMR4CF
3
F
P4
0
SMB0CN
SMB0STA
1 CAN0STA
2
3
F
0
SADEN0
1
IP
2
(ALL PAGES)
3
F
0(8)
1(9)
EIP1
EIP2
(ALL PAGES) (ALL PAGES)
PCA0CPH2 PCA0CPL3 PCA0CPH3 PCA0CPL4 PCA0CPH4
RSTSRC
PCA0CPH5
EIE1
EIE2
(ALL PAGES) (ALL PAGES)
XBR1
XBR2
XBR3
PCA0CPM0 PCA0CPM1 PCA0CPM2 PCA0CPM3 PCA0CPM4 PCA0CPM5
CAN0ADR CAN0TST
DMA0DAH
DMA0DSL
DMA0DSH
DAC0L
DAC1L
DAC0H
DAC1H
DAC0CN
DAC1CN
RCAP2L
RCAP3L
RCAP4L
RCAP2H
RCAP3H
RCAP4H
TMR2L
TMR3L
TMR4L
TMR2H
TMR3H
TMR4H
SMB0DAT
SMB0ADR
ADC0GTL
ADC0GTH
ADC0LTL
ADC0LTH
ADC2GTL
ADC2GTH
ADC2LTL
ADC2LTH
ADC0L
ADC1L
ADC2L
ADC0H
ADC1H
ADC2H
6(E)
7(F)
AMX2CF
AMX2SL
ADC0CF
ADC1CF
ADC2CF
ADC0CPT
2(A)
ADC0CCF
3(B)
4(C)
AMX0SL
Rev. 1.2
DMA0IPT
5(D)
DMA0IDT
SMB0CR
141
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 13.2. Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map
B0
0
FLSCL
1
P3
2
(ALL PAGES)
3
F
FLACL
0
A8
0
A0
98
1
P2
2
(ALL PAGES)
3
F
0
SCON0
1
SCON1
2
3
F
0
90
88
SADDR0
1
IE
2 (ALL PAGES)
3
F
1
P1
2
(ALL PAGES)
3
F
0
TCON
1
CPT0CN
2
CPT1CN
3
CPT2CN
F
EMI0TC
EMI0CN
EMI0CF
SBUF0
SBUF1
SPI0CFG
SPI0DAT
P1MDIN
P2MDIN
P0MDOUT
P1MDOUT
SPI0CKR
P2MDOUT
P3MDOUT
P4MDOUT
P5MDOUT
P6MDOUT
P7MDOUT
TH1
SFRPGCN
CKCON
CLKSEL
PSCTL
SSTA0
TMOD
CPT0MD
CPT1MD
CPT2MD
TL0
TL1
TH0
OSCICN
OSCICL
OSCXCN
0
80
142
1
P0
SP
DPL
DPH
SFRPAGE SFRNEXT SFRLAST
PCON
2
(ALL PAGES) (ALL PAGES) (ALL PAGES) (ALL PAGES) (ALL PAGES) (ALL PAGES) (ALL PAGES) (ALL PAGES)
3
F
0(8)
1(9)
2(A)
3(B)
4(C)
5(D)
6(E)
7(F)
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 13.3. Special Function Registers
SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved.
Register
Address
SFR Page Description
B
0xF0
All Pages B Register
ACC
0xE0
All Pages Accumulator
ADC0CCF
0xBB
F
ADC0 Calibration Coefficient
ADC0CF
0xBC
0
ADC0 Configuration
ADC0CN
0xE8
0
ADC0 Control
ADC0CPT
0xBA
F
ADC0 Calibration Pointer
ADC0GTH
0xC5
0
ADC0 Greater-Than High
ADC0GTL
0xC4
0
ADC0 Greater-Than Low
ADC0H
0xBF
0
ADC0 Data Word High
ADC0L
0xBE
0
ADC0 Data Word Low
ADC0LTH
0xC7
0
ADC0 Less-Than High
ADC0LTL
0xC6
0
ADC0 Less-Than Low
ADC1CF
0xBC
1
ADC1 Configuration
ADC1CN
0xE8
1
ADC1 Control
ADC1H
0xBF
1
ADC1 Data Word High
ADC1L
0xBE
1
ADC1 Data Word Low
ADC2CF
0xBC
2
ADC2 Configuration
page 94*5
ADC2CN
0xE8
2
ADC2 Control
page 96*5
ADC2GTH
0xC5
2
ADC2 Greater-Than High
page 97*5
ADC2GTL
0xC4
2
ADC2 Greater-Than Low
page 97*5
ADC2H
0xBF
2
ADC2 Data Word High
page 95*5
ADC2L
0xBE
2
ADC2 Data Word Low
page 95*5
ADC2LTH
0xC7
2
ADC2 Less-Than High
page 98*5
ADC2LTL
AMX0SL
AMX2CF
0xC6
0xBB
0xBA
2
0
2
ADC2 Less-Than Low
ADC0 Multiplexer Channel Select
ADC2 Analog Multiplexer Configuration
page 98*5
page 57
AMX2SL
0xBB
2
ADC2 Analog Multiplexer Channel Select
page 93*5
CAN0ADR
0xDA
1
CAN0 Address
page 232*5
CAN0CN
0xF8
1
CAN0 Control
page 232*5
CAN0DATH
0xD9
1
CAN0 Data High
page 231*5
CAN0DATL
0xD8
1
CAN0 Data Low
page 231*5
CAN0STA
0xC0
1
CAN0 Status
page 233*5
CAN0TST
CKCON
CLKSEL
CPT0CN
CPT0MD
CPT1CN
CPT1MD
CPT2CN
0xDB
0x8E
0x97
0x88
0x89
0x88
0x89
0x88
1
0
F
1
1
2
2
3
CAN0 Test
Clock Control
Oscillator Clock Selection Register
Comparator 0 Control
Comparator 0 Configuration
Comparator 1 Control
Comparator 1 Configuration
Comparator 2 Control
page 233*5
page 293
page 173
page 120
page 121
page 120
page 121
page 120
Rev. 1.2
Page No.
page 150
page 150
page 68
page 58
page 60
page 68
page 69
page 69
page 63
page 63
page 70
page 70
page 59
page 61
page 65
page 65
page 94*5
143
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 13.3. Special Function Registers (Continued)
SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved.
Register
Address
SFR Page Description
CPT2MD
0x89
3
Comparator 2 Configuration
DAC0CN
0xD4
0
DAC0 Control
page 106*5
DAC0H
0xD3
0
DAC0 High
page 105*5
DAC0L
0xD2
0
DAC0 Low
page 105*5
DAC1CN
0xD4
1
DAC1 Control
page 108*5
DAC1H
0xD3
1
DAC1 High
page 107*5
DAC1L
DMA0BND
DMA0CF
DMA0CN
DMA0CSH
DMA0CSL
DMA0CTH
DMA0CTL
DMA0DAH
DMA0DAL
DMA0DSH
DMA0DSL
DMA0IDT
DMA0IPT
DMA0ISW
DPH
DPL
EIE1
EIE2
EIP1
EIP2
EMI0CF
0xD2
0xFD
0xF8
0xD8
0xFC
0xFB
0xFA
0xF9
0xDA
0xD9
0xDC
0xDB
0xDE
0xDD
0xFE
0x83
0x82
0xE6
0xE7
0xF6
0xF7
0xA3
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
All Pages
All Pages
All Pages
All Pages
All Pages
All Pages
0
DAC1 Low
DMA0 Instruction Boundary
DMA0 Configuration
DMA0 Control
DMA0 Repeat Counter Status High Byte
DMA0 Repeat Counter Status Low Byte
DMA0 Repeat Counter Limit High Byte
DMA0 Repeat Counter Limit Low Byte
DMA0 Data Address Beginning High Byte
DMA0 Data Address Beginning Low Byte
DMA0 Data Address Pointer High Byte
DMA0 Data Address Pointer Low Byte
DMA0 Instruction Write Data
DMA0 Instruction Write Address
DMA0 Instruction Status
Data Pointer High
Data Pointer Low
Extended Interrupt Enable 1
Extended Interrupt Enable 2
Extended Interrupt Priority 1
Extended Interrupt Priority 2
EMIF Configuration
page 107*5
page 83
page 81
page 80
page 85
page 85
page 85
page 85
page 84
page 84
page 84
page 84
page 82
page 82
page 83
page 148
page 148
page 156
page 157
page 158
page 159
EMI0CN
0xA2
0
EMIF Control
page 189*1
EMI0TC
FLACL
FLSCL
IE
IP
OSCICL
OSCICN
OSCXCN
P0
P0MDOUT
P1
P1MDIN
P1MDOUT
P2
0xA1
0xB7
0xB7
0xA8
0xB8
0x8B
0x8A
0x8C
0x80
0xA4
0x90
0xAD
0xA5
0xA0
0
F
0
All Pages
All Pages
F
F
F
All Pages
F
All Pages
F
F
All Pages
EMIF Timing Control
Flash Access Limit
Flash Scale
Interrupt Enable
Interrupt Priority
Internal Oscillator Calibration
Internal Oscillator Control
External Oscillator Control
Port 0 Latch
Port 0 Output Mode Configuration
Port 1 Latch
Port 1 Input Mode
Port 1 Output Mode Configuration
Port 2 Latch
page 194*1
page 182
page 184
page 154
page 155
page 172
page 172
page 174
page 214
page 214
page 215
page 215
page 216
page 216
144
Rev. 1.2
Page No.
page 121
page 189*1
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 13.3. Special Function Registers (Continued)
SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved.
Register
Address
SFR Page Description
P2MDIN
0xAE
F
Port 2 Input Mode
P2MDOUT
0xA6
F
Port 2 Output Mode Configuration
P3
0xB0
All Pages Port 3 Latch
page 218*1
P3MDOUT
0xA7
F
Port 3 Output Mode Configuration
page 218*1
P4
0xC8
F
Port 4 Latch
page 221*1
P4MDOUT
0x9C
F
Port 4 Output Mode Configuration
page 221*1
P5
0xD8
F
Port 5 Latch
page 222*1
P5MDOUT
0x9D
F
Port 5 Output Mode Configuration
page 222*1
P6
0xE8
F
Port 6 Latch
page 223*1
P6MDOUT
0x9E
F
Port 6 Output Mode Configuration
page 223*1
P7
0xF8
F
Port 7 Latch
page 224*1
P7MDOUT
PCA0CN
PCA0CPH0
PCA0CPH1
PCA0CPH2
PCA0CPH3
PCA0CPH4
PCA0CPH5
PCA0CPL0
PCA0CPL1
PCA0CPL2
PCA0CPL3
PCA0CPL4
PCA0CPL5
PCA0CPM0
PCA0CPM1
PCA0CPM2
PCA0CPM3
PCA0CPM4
PCA0CPM5
PCA0H
PCA0L
PCA0MD
PCON
PSCTL
PSW
RCAP2H
RCAP2L
RCAP3H
RCAP3L
RCAP4H
RCAP4L
0x9F
0xD8
0xFC
0xFE
0xEA
0xEC
0xEE
0xE2
0xFB
0xFD
0xE9
0xEB
0xED
0xE1
0xDA
0xDB
0xDC
0xDD
0xDE
0xDF
0xFA
0xF9
0xD9
0x87
0x8F
0xD0
0xCB
0xCA
0xCB
0xCA
0xCB
0xCA
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
All Pages
0
All Pages
0
0
1
1
2
2
Port 7 Output Mode Configuration
PCA Control
PCA Capture 0 High
PCA Capture 1 High
PCA Capture 2 High
PCA Capture 3 High
PCA Capture 4 High
PCA Capture 5 High
PCA Capture 0 Low
PCA Capture 1 Low
PCA Capture 2 Low
PCA Capture 3 Low
PCA Capture 4 Low
PCA Capture 5 Low
PCA Module 0 Mode Register
PCA Module 1 Mode Register
PCA Module 2 Mode Register
PCA Module 3 Mode Register
PCA Module 4 Mode Register
PCA Module 5 Mode Register
PCA Counter High
PCA Counter Low
PCA Mode
Power Control
Program Store R/W Control
Program Status Word
Timer/Counter 2 Capture/Reload High
Timer/Counter 2 Capture/Reload Low
Timer/Counter 3 Capture/Reload High
Timer/Counter 3 Capture/Reload Low
Timer/Counter 4 Capture/Reload High
Timer/Counter 4 Capture/Reload Low
page 224*1
page 312
page 316
page 316
page 316
page 316
page 316
page 316
page 316
page 316
page 316
page 316
page 316
page 316
page 314
page 314
page 314
page 314
page 314
page 314
page 315
page 315
page 313
page 161
page 185
page 149
page 301
page 301
page 301
page 301
page 301
page 301
Rev. 1.2
Page No.
page 217
page 217
145
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 13.3. Special Function Registers (Continued)
SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved.
Register
Address
SFR Page Description
REF0CN
0xD1
0
Voltage Reference Control 0
REF1CN
0xD1
1
Voltage Reference Control 1
REF2CN
0xD1
2
RSTSRC
SADDR0
SADEN0
SBUF0
SBUF1
SCON0
SCON1
SFRLAST
SFRNEXT
SFRPAGE
SFRPGCN
SMB0ADR
SMB0CN
SMB0CR
SMB0DAT
SMB0STA
SP
SPI0CFG
SPI0CKR
SPI0CN
SPI0DAT
SSTA0
TCON
TH0
TH1
TL0
TL1
TMOD
TMR2CF
TMR2CN
TMR2H
TMR2L
TMR3CF
TMR3CN
TMR3H
TMR3L
TMR4CF
TMR4CN
TMR4H
0xEF
0xA9
0xB9
0x99
0x99
0x98
0x98
0x86
0x85
0x84
0x96
0xC3
0xC0
0xCF
0xC2
0xC1
0x81
0x9A
0x9D
0xF8
0x9B
0x91
0x88
0x8C
0x8D
0x8A
0x8B
0x89
0xC9
0xC8
0xCD
0xCC
0xC9
0xC8
0xCD
0xCC
0xC9
0xC8
0xCD
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
All Pages
All Pages
All Pages
F
0
0
0
0
0
All Pages
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
146
Voltage Reference Control 2
Reset Source
UART 0 Slave Address
UART 0 Slave Address Enable
UART 0 Data Buffer
UART 1 Data Buffer
UART 0 Control
UART 1 Control
SFR Page Stack Access Register
SFR Page Register
SFR Page Register
SFR Page Control Register
SMBus Slave Address
SMBus Control
SMBus Clock Rate
SMBus Data
SMBus Status
Stack Pointer
SPI Configuration
SPI Clock Rate Control
SPI Control
SPI Data
UART 0 Status
Timer/Counter Control
Timer/Counter 0 High
Timer/Counter 1 High
Timer/Counter 0 Low
Timer/Counter 1 Low
Timer/Counter Mode
Timer/Counter 2 Configuration
Timer/Counter 2 Control
Timer/Counter 2 High
Timer/Counter 2 Low
Timer/Counter 3 Configuration
Timer/Counter 3 Control
Timer/Counter 3 High
Timer/Counter 3 Low
Timer/Counter 4 Configuration
Timer/Counter 4 Control
Timer/Counter 4 High
Rev. 1.2
Page No.
page 62
page 62
page 112*2,
page 114*3,
page 116*5
page 168
page 276
page 276
page 276
page 283
page 274
page 282
page 140
page 140
page 139
page 139
page 246
page 243
page 244
page 245
page 247
page 148
page 258
page 260
page 259
page 261
page 275
page 291
page 294
page 294
page 294
page 294
page 292
page 300
page 299
page 302
page 301
page 300
page 299
page 302
page 301
page 300
page 299
page 302
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 13.3. Special Function Registers (Continued)
SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved.
Register
Address
SFR Page Description
TMR4L
0xCC
2
Timer/Counter 4 Low
WDTCN
0xFF
All Pages Watchdog Timer Control
XBR0
0xE1
F
Port I/O Crossbar Control 0
XBR1
0xE2
F
Port I/O Crossbar Control 1
XBR2
0xE3
F
Port I/O Crossbar Control 2
XBR3
0xE4
F
Port I/O Crossbar Control 3
Page No.
page 301
page 167
page 210
page 211
page 212
page 213
*1
Refers to a register in the C8051F060/2/4/6 only.
Refers to a register in the C8051F060/2 only.
*3
Refers to a register in the C8051F061/3 only.
*4
Refers to a register in the C8051F060/1/2/3 only.
*5
Refers to a register in the C8051F064/5/6/7 only.
*2
Rev. 1.2
147
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
13.2.7. Register Descriptions
Following are descriptions of SFRs related to the operation of the CIP-51 System Controller. Reserved bits
should not be set to logic l. Future product versions may use these bits to implement new features in which
case the reset value of the bit will be logic 0, selecting the feature's default state. Detailed descriptions of
the remaining SFRs are included in the sections of the datasheet associated with their corresponding system function.
Figure 13.13. SP: Stack Pointer
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000111
SFR Address: 0x81
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-0:
SP: Stack Pointer.
The Stack Pointer holds the location of the top of the stack. The stack pointer is incremented
before every PUSH operation. The SP register defaults to 0x07 after reset.
Figure 13.14. DPL: Data Pointer Low Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0x82
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-0:
DPL: Data Pointer Low.
The DPL register is the low byte of the 16-bit DPTR. DPTR is used to access indirectly
addressed XRAM and Flash memory.
Figure 13.15. DPH: Data Pointer High Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0x83
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-0:
148
DPH: Data Pointer High.
The DPH register is the high byte of the 16-bit DPTR. DPTR is used to access indirectly
addressed XRAM and Flash memory.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.16. PSW: Program Status Word
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
CY
AC
F0
RS1
RS0
OV
F1
PARITY
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xD0
SFR Page: All Pages
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bits4-3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
CY: Carry Flag.
This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry (addition) or a borrow
(subtraction). It is cleared to 0 by all other arithmetic operations.
AC: Auxiliary Carry Flag.
This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry into (addition) or a borrow from (subtraction) the high order nibble. It is cleared to 0 by all other arithmetic operations.
F0: User Flag 0.
This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control.
RS1-RS0: Register Bank Select.
These bits select which register bank is used during register accesses.
RS1
RS0
Register Bank
Address
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
0x00 - 0x07
0x08 - 0x0F
0x10 - 0x17
0x18 - 0x1F
OV: Overflow Flag.
This bit is set to 1 under the following circumstances:
• An ADD, ADDC, or SUBB instruction causes a sign-change overflow.
• A MUL instruction results in an overflow (result is greater than 255).
• A DIV instruction causes a divide-by-zero condition.
The OV bit is cleared to 0 by the ADD, ADDC, SUBB, MUL, and DIV instructions in all other
cases.
F1: User Flag 1.
This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control.
PARITY: Parity Flag.
This bit is set to 1 if the sum of the eight bits in the accumulator is odd and cleared if the sum
is even.
Rev. 1.2
149
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.17. ACC: Accumulator
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
ACC.7
ACC.6
ACC.5
ACC.4
ACC.3
ACC.2
ACC.1
ACC.0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xE0
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-0:
ACC: Accumulator.
This register is the accumulator for arithmetic operations.
Figure 13.18. B: B Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
B.7
B.6
B.5
B.4
B.3
B.2
B.1
B.0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xF0
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-0:
150
B: B Register.
This register serves as a second accumulator for certain arithmetic operations.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
13.3. Interrupt Handler
The CIP-51 includes an extended interrupt system supporting a total of 22 interrupt sources with two priority levels. The allocation of interrupt sources between on-chip peripherals and external inputs pins varies
according to the specific version of the device. Each interrupt source has one or more associated interruptpending flag(s) located in an SFR. When a peripheral or external source meets a valid interrupt condition,
the associated interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1.
If interrupts are enabled for the source, an interrupt request is generated when the interrupt-pending flag is
set. As soon as execution of the current instruction is complete, the CPU generates an LCALL to a predetermined address to begin execution of an interrupt service routine (ISR). Each ISR must end with an RETI
instruction, which returns program execution to the next instruction that would have been executed if the
interrupt request had not occurred. If interrupts are not enabled, the interrupt-pending flag is ignored by the
hardware and program execution continues as normal. (The interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1 regardless of the interrupt's enable/disable state.)
Each interrupt source can be individually enabled or disabled through the use of an associated interrupt
enable bit in an SFR (IE-EIE2). However, interrupts must first be globally enabled by setting the EA bit
(IE.7) to logic 1 before the individual interrupt enables are recognized. Setting the EA bit to logic 0 disables
all interrupt sources regardless of the individual interrupt-enable settings.
Some interrupt-pending flags are automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR.
However, most are not cleared by the hardware and must be cleared by software before returning from the
ISR. If an interrupt-pending flag remains set after the CPU completes the return-from-interrupt (RETI)
instruction, a new interrupt request will be generated immediately and the CPU will re-enter the ISR after
the completion of the next instruction.
13.3.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors
The MCUs support 22 interrupt sources. Software can simulate an interrupt event by setting any interruptpending flag to logic 1. If interrupts are enabled for the flag, an interrupt request will be generated and the
CPU will vector to the ISR address associated with the interrupt-pending flag. MCU interrupt sources,
associated vector addresses, priority order and control bits are summarized in Table 13.4. Refer to the
datasheet section associated with a particular on-chip peripheral for information regarding valid interrupt
conditions for the peripheral and the behavior of its interrupt-pending flag(s).
13.3.2. External Interrupts
The external interrupt sources (/INT0 and /INT1) are configurable as active-low level-sensitive or activelow edge-sensitive inputs depending on the setting of bits IT0 (TCON.0) and IT1 (TCON.2). IE0 (TCON.1)
and IE1 (TCON.3) serve as the interrupt-pending flag for the /INT0 and /INT1 external interrupts, respectively. If an /INT0 or /INT1 external interrupt is configured as edge-sensitive, the corresponding interruptpending flag is automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR. When configured
as level sensitive, the interrupt-pending flag follows the state of the external interrupt's input pin. The external interrupt source must hold the input active until the interrupt request is recognized. It must then deactivate the interrupt request before execution of the ISR completes or another interrupt request will be
generated.
Rev. 1.2
151
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Interrupt Priority
Pending Flag
Vector Order
Enable
Flag
Priority
Control
Always
Enabled
EX0 (IE.0)
ET0 (IE.1)
EX1 (IE.2)
ET1 (IE.3)
Always
Highest
PX0 (IP.0)
PT0 (IP.1)
PX1 (IP.2)
PT1 (IP.3)
Y
ES0 (IE.4)
PS0 (IP.4)
Y
ET2 (IE.5)
PT2 (IP.5)
Y
ESPI0
(EIE1.0)
PSPI0
(EIP1.0)
Reset
0x0000
Top
External Interrupt 0 (/INT0)
Timer 0 Overflow
External Interrupt 1 (/INT1)
Timer 1 Overflow
0x0003
0x000B
0x0013
0x001B
0
1
2
3
UART0
0x0023
4
Timer 2
0x002B
5
Serial Peripheral Interface
0x0033
6
SMBus Interface
0x003B
7
SI (SMB0CN.3)
Y
0x0043
8
AD0WINT (ADC0CN.1)
Y
0x004B
9
Comparator 0
0x0053
10
Comparator 1
0x005B
11
Comparator 2
0x0063
12
ADC0 End of Conversion
0x006B
13
ADC0INT (ADC0CN.5)
Y
Timer 3
0x0073
14
TF3 (TMR3CN.7)
Y
ADC1 End of Conversion
0x007B
15
ADC1INT (ADC1CN.5)
Y
Timer 4
0x0083
16
TF4 (TMR4CN.7)
Y
ADC2 Window
Comparator
0x008B
17
AD2WINT (ADC2CN.1)
Y
ADC2 End of Conversion
0x0093
18
AD2INT (ADC2CN.5)
Y
CAN Interrupt
0x009B
19
CAN0CN.7
Y
UART1
0x00A3
20
RI1 (SCON1.0)
TI1 (SCON1.1)
Y
DMA0 Interrupt
0x00AB
21
DMA0INT (DMA0CN.6)
Y
ADC0 Window
Comparator
Programmable Counter
Array
152
None
IE0 (TCON.1)
TF0 (TCON.5)
IE1 (TCON.3)
TF1 (TCON.7)
RI0 (SCON0.0)
TI0 (SCON0.1)
TF2 (TMR2CN.7)
SPIF (SPI0CN.7)
WCOL (SPI0CN.6)
MODF (SPI0CN.5)
RXOVRN (SPI0CN.4)
CF (PCA0CN.7)
CCFn (PCA0CN.n)
CP0FIF/CP0RIF
(CPT0CN.4/.5)
CP1FIF/CP1RIF
(CPT1CN.4/.5)
CP2FIF/CP2RIF
(CPT2CN.4/.5)
Rev. 1.2
Cleared by HW
Interrupt Source
Bit addressable
Table 13.4. Interrupt Summary
N/A N/A
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
ESMB0
(EIE1.1)
EWADC0
(EIE1.2)
EPCA0
(EIE1.3)
CP0IE
(EIE1.4)
CP1IE
(EIE1.5)
CP2IE
(EIE1.6)
EADC0
(EIE1.7)
ET3
(EIE2.0)
EADC1
(EIE2.1)
ET4
(EIE2.2)
EWADC2
(EIE2.3)
EADC2
(EIE2.4)
ECAN0
Y
(EIE2.5)
ES1
(EIP2.6)
EDMA0
(EIE2.7)
PSMB0
(EIP1.1)
PWADC0
(EIP1.2)
PPCA0
(EIP1.3)
PCP0
(EIP1.4)
PCP1
(EIP1.5)
PCP2
(EIP1.6)
PADC0
(EIP1.7)
PT3
(EIP2.0)
PADC1
(EIP2.1)
PT4
(EIP2.2)
PWADC2
(EIP2.3)
PADC2
(EIP2.4)
PCAN0
(EIP2.5)
PS1
(EIP2.6)
PDMA0
(EIP2.7)
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
13.3.3. Interrupt Priorities
Each interrupt source can be individually programmed to one of two priority levels: low or high. A low priority interrupt service routine can be preempted by a high priority interrupt. A high priority interrupt cannot be
preempted. Each interrupt has an associated interrupt priority bit in an SFR (IP-EIP2) used to configure its
priority level. Low priority is the default. If two interrupts are recognized simultaneously, the interrupt with
the higher priority is serviced first. If both interrupts have the same priority level, a fixed priority order is
used to arbitrate, given in Table 13.4.
13.3.4. Interrupt Latency
Interrupt response time depends on the state of the CPU when the interrupt occurs. Pending interrupts are
sampled and priority decoded each system clock cycle. Therefore, the fastest possible response time is
5 system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt and 4 clock cycles to complete the LCALL to the
ISR. If an interrupt is pending when a RETI is executed, a single instruction is executed before an LCALL
is made to service the pending interrupt. Therefore, the maximum response time for an interrupt (when no
other interrupt is currently being serviced or the new interrupt is of greater priority) occurs when the CPU is
performing an RETI instruction followed by a DIV as the next instruction. In this case, the response time is
18 system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt, 5 clock cycles to execute the RETI, 8 clock
cycles to complete the DIV instruction and 4 clock cycles to execute the LCALL to the ISR. If the CPU is
executing an ISR for an interrupt with equal or higher priority, the new interrupt will not be serviced until the
current ISR completes, including the RETI and following instruction.
Rev. 1.2
153
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
13.3.5. Interrupt Register Descriptions
The SFRs used to enable the interrupt sources and set their priority level are described below. Refer to the
datasheet section associated with a particular on-chip peripheral for information regarding valid interrupt
conditions for the peripheral and the behavior of its interrupt-pending flag(s).
Figure 13.19. IE: Interrupt Enable
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
EA
IEGF0
ET2
ES0
ET1
EX1
ET0
EX0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xA8
SFR Page: All Pages
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
154
EA: Enable All Interrupts.
This bit globally enables/disables all interrupts. It overrides the individual interrupt mask settings.
0: Disable all interrupt sources.
1: Enable each interrupt according to its individual mask setting.
IEGF0: General Purpose Flag 0.
This is a general purpose flag for use under software control.
ET2: Enabler Timer 2 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 2 interrupt.
0: Disable Timer 2 interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF2 flag.
ES0: Enable UART0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the UART0 interrupt.
0: Disable UART0 interrupt.
1: Enable UART0 interrupt.
ET1: Enable Timer 1 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 1 interrupt.
0: Disable all Timer 1 interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF1 flag.
EX1: Enable External Interrupt 1.
This bit sets the masking of external interrupt 1.
0: Disable external interrupt 1.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the /INT1 pin.
ET0: Enable Timer 0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 0 interrupt.
0: Disable all Timer 0 interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF0 flag.
EX0: Enable External Interrupt 0.
This bit sets the masking of external interrupt 0.
0: Disable external interrupt 0.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the /INT0 pin.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.20. IP: Interrupt Priority
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
PT2
PS0
PT1
PX1
PT0
PX0
11000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xB8
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
UNUSED. Read = 11b, Write = don't care.
PT2: Timer 2 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 2 interrupt.
0: Timer 2 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: Timer 2 interrupt set to high priority level.
PS0: UART0 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the UART0 interrupt.
0: UART0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: UART0 interrupt set to high priority level.
PT1: Timer 1 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 1 interrupt.
0: Timer 1 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: Timer 1 interrupt set to high priority level.
PX1: External Interrupt 1 Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 1 interrupt.
0: External Interrupt 1 set to low priority level.
1: External Interrupt 1 set to high priority level.
PT0: Timer 0 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 0 interrupt.
0: Timer 0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: Timer 0 interrupt set to high priority level.
PX0: External Interrupt 0 Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 0 interrupt.
0: External Interrupt 0 set to low priority level.
1: External Interrupt 0 set to high priority level.
Rev. 1.2
155
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.21. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
EADC0
CP2IE
CP1IE
CP0IE
EPCA0
EWADC0
ESMB0
ESPI0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xE6
SFR Page: All Pages
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit6:
Bit6:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
156
EADC0: Enable ADC0 End of Conversion Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the ADC0 End of Conversion Interrupt.
0: Disable ADC0 Conversion Interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the ADC1 Conversion Interrupt.
CP2IE: Enable Comparator (CP2) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the CP2 interrupt.
0: Disable CP2 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the CP2IF flag.
CP1IE: Enable Comparator (CP1) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the CP1 interrupt.
0: Disable CP1 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the CP1IF flag.
CP0IE: Enable Comparator (CP0) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the CP0 interrupt.
0: Disable CP0 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the CP0IF flag.
EPCA0: Enable Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the PCA0 interrupts.
0: Disable all PCA0 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by PCA0.
EWADC0: Enable Window Comparison ADC0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt.
0: Disable ADC0 Window Comparison Interrupt.
1: Enable Interrupt requests generated by ADC0 Window Comparisons.
ESMB0: Enable System Management Bus (SMBus0) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the SMBus interrupt.
0: Disable all SMBus interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the SI flag.
ESPI0: Enable Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of SPI0 interrupt.
0: Disable all SPI0 interrupts.
1: Enable Interrupt requests generated by the SPI0 flag.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.22. EIE2: Extended Interrupt Enable 2
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
EDMA0
ES1
ECAN0
EADC2
EWADC2
ET4
EADC1
ET3
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xE7
SFR Page: All Pages
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
EDMA0: Enable DMA0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the DMA0 Interrupt.
0: Disable DMA0 interrupt.
1: Enable DMA0 interrupt.
ES1: Enable UART1 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the UART1 Interrupt.
0: Disable UART1 interrupt.
1: Enable UART1 interrupt.
ECAN0: Enable CAN Controller Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the CAN Controller Interrupt.
0: Disable CAN Controller Interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the CAN Controller.
EADC2: Enable ADC2 End Of Conversion Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the ADC2 End of Conversion interrupt.
0: Disable ADC2 End of Conversion interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the ADC2 End of Conversion Interrupt.
EWADC2: Enable Window Comparison ADC1 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of ADC2 Window Comparison interrupt.
0: Disable ADC2 Window Comparison Interrupt.
1: Enable Interrupt requests generated by ADC2 Window Comparisons.
ET4: Enable Timer 4 Interrupt
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 4 interrupt.
0: Disable Timer 4 interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF4 flag.
EADC1: Enable ADC1 End of Conversion Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the ADC1 End of Conversion Interrupt.
0: Disable ADC1 Conversion Interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the ADC1 Conversion Interrupt.
ET3: Enable Timer 3 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 3 interrupt.
0: Disable all Timer 3 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF3 flag.
Rev. 1.2
157
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.23. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
PADC0
PCP2
PCP1
PCP0
PPCA0
PWADC0
PSMB0
PSPI0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xF6
SFR Page: All Pages
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
158
PADC0: ADC End of Conversion Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 End of Conversion Interrupt.
0: ADC0 End of Conversion interrupt set to low priority level.
1: ADC0 End of Conversion interrupt set to high priority level.
PCP2: Comparator2 (CP2) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the CP2 interrupt.
0: CP2 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: CP2 interrupt set to high priority level.
PCP1: Comparator1 (CP1) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the CP1 interrupt.
0: CP1 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: CP1 interrupt set to high priority level.
PCP0: Comparator0 (CP0) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the CP0 interrupt.
0: CP0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: CP0 interrupt set to high priority level.
PPCA0: Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the PCA0 interrupt.
0: PCA0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: PCA0 interrupt set to high priority level.
PWADC0: ADC0 Window Comparator Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Window interrupt.
0: ADC0 Window interrupt set to low priority level.
1: ADC0 Window interrupt set to high priority level.
PSMB0: System Management Bus (SMBus0) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the SMBus0 interrupt.
0: SMBus interrupt set to low priority level.
1: SMBus interrupt set to high priority level.
PSPI0: Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the SPI0 interrupt.
0: SPI0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: SPI0 interrupt set to high priority level.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 13.24. EIP2: Extended Interrupt Priority 2
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
PDMA0
PS1
PCAN0
PADC2
PWADC2
PT4
PADC1
PT3
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xF7
SFR Page: All Pages
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
PDMA0: DMA0 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the DMA0 interrupt.
0: DMA0 interrupt set to low priority.
1: DMA0 interrupt set to high priority.
PS1: UART1 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the UART1 interrupt.
0: UART1 interrupt set to low priority.
1: UART1 interrupt set to high priority.
PCAN0: CAN Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the CAN Interrupt.
0: CAN Interrupt set to low priority level.
1: CAN Interrupt set to high priority level.
PADC2: ADC2 End Of Conversion Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the ADC2 End of Conversion interrupt.
0: ADC2 End of Conversion interrupt set to low priority.
1: ADC2 End of Conversion interrupt set to high priority.
PWADC2: ADC2 Window Comparator Interrupt Priority Control.
0: ADC2 Window interrupt set to low priority.
1: ADC2 Window interrupt set to high priority.
PT4: Timer 4 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 4 interrupt.
0: Timer 4 interrupt set to low priority.
1: Timer 4 interrupt set to high priority.
PADC1: ADC End of Conversion Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the ADC1 End of Conversion Interrupt.
0: ADC1 End of Conversion interrupt set to low priority level.
1: ADC1 End of Conversion interrupt set to high priority level.
PT3: Timer 3 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 3 interrupts.
0: Timer 3 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: Timer 3 interrupt set to high priority level.
Rev. 1.2
159
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
13.4. Power Management Modes
The CIP-51 core has two software programmable power management modes: Idle and Stop. Idle mode
halts the CPU while leaving the external peripherals and internal clocks active. In Stop mode, the CPU is
halted, all interrupts and timers (except the Missing Clock Detector) are inactive, and the internal oscillator
is stopped. Since clocks are running in Idle mode, power consumption is dependent upon the system clock
frequency and the number of peripherals left in active mode before entering Idle. Stop mode consumes the
least power. Figure 13.25 describes the Power Control Register (PCON) used to control the CIP-51's
power management modes.
Although the CIP-51 has Idle and Stop modes built in (as with any standard 8051 architecture), power
management of the entire MCU is better accomplished by enabling/disabling individual peripherals as
needed. Each analog peripheral can be disabled when not in use and put into low power mode. Digital
peripherals, such as timers or serial buses, draw little power whenever they are not in use. Turning off the
oscillator saves even more power, but requires a reset to restart the MCU.
13.4.1. Idle Mode
Setting the Idle Mode Select bit (PCON.0) causes the CIP-51 to halt the CPU and enter Idle mode as soon
as the instruction that sets the bit completes. All internal registers and memory maintain their original
data. All analog and digital peripherals can remain active during Idle mode.
Idle mode is terminated when an enabled interrupt or /RST is asserted. The assertion of an enabled interrupt will cause the Idle Mode Selection bit (PCON.0) to be cleared and the CPU to resume operation. The
pending interrupt will be serviced and the next instruction to be executed after the return from interrupt
(RETI) will be the instruction immediately following the one that set the Idle Mode Select bit. If Idle mode is
terminated by an internal or external reset, the CIP-51 performs a normal reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000.
If enabled, the WDT will eventually cause an internal watchdog reset and thereby terminate the Idle mode.
This feature protects the system from an unintended permanent shutdown in the event of an inadvertent
write to the PCON register. If this behavior is not desired, the WDT may be disabled by software prior to
entering the Idle mode if the WDT was initially configured to allow this operation. This provides the opportunity for additional power savings, allowing the system to remain in the Idle mode indefinitely, waiting for
an external stimulus to wake up the system. Refer to Section 14.7 for more information on the use and
configuration of the WDT.
Note: Any instruction which sets the IDLE bit should be immediately followed by an instruction which has
two or more opcode bytes.For example:
// in ‘C’:
PCON |= 0x01;
PCON = PCON;
// Set IDLE bit
// ... Followed by a 3-cycle Dummy Instruction
; in assembly:
ORL PCON, #01h
MOV PCON, PCON
; Set IDLE bit
; ... Followed by a 3-cycle Dummy Instruction
If the instruction following the write to the IDLE bit is a single-byte instruction and an interrupt occurs during
the execution of the instruction of the instruction which sets the IDLE bit, the CPU may not wake from IDLE
mode when a future interrupt occurs.
160
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
13.4.2. Stop Mode
Setting the Stop Mode Select bit (PCON.1) causes the CIP-51 to enter Stop mode as soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes. In Stop mode, the CPU and internal oscillators are stopped, effectively
shutting down all digital peripherals. Each analog peripheral must be shut down individually prior to entering Stop Mode. Stop mode can only be terminated by an internal or external reset. On reset, the CIP-51
performs the normal reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000.
If enabled, the Missing Clock Detector will cause an internal reset and thereby terminate the Stop mode.
The Missing Clock Detector should be disabled if the CPU is to be put to sleep for longer than the MCD
timeout of 100 µs.
Figure 13.25. PCON: Power Control
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
-
-
STOP
IDLE
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x87
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
Reserved.
STOP: STOP Mode Select.
Writing a ‘1’ to this bit will place the CIP-51 into STOP mode. This bit will always read ‘0’.
1: CIP-51 forced into power-down mode. (Turns off internal oscillator).
IDLE: IDLE Mode Select.
Writing a ‘1’ to this bit will place the CIP-51 into IDLE mode. This bit will always read ‘0’.
1: CIP-51 forced into IDLE mode. (Shuts off clock to CPU, but clock to Timers, Interrupts,
and all peripherals remain active.)
See Note in Section “13.4.1. Idle Mode” on page 160.
Rev. 1.2
161
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
162
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
14.
Reset Sources
Reset circuitry allows the controller to be easily placed in a predefined default condition. On entry to this
reset state, the following occur:
•
•
•
•
CIP-51 halts program execution
Special Function Registers (SFRs) are initialized to their defined reset values
External port pins are forced to a known configuration
Interrupts and timers are disabled.
All SFRs are reset to the predefined values noted in the SFR detailed descriptions. The contents of internal
data memory are unaffected during a reset; any previously stored data is preserved. However, since the
stack pointer SFR is reset, the stack is effectively lost even though the data on the stack are not altered.
The I/O port latches are reset to 0xFF (all logic 1’s), activating internal weak pull-ups which take the external I/O pins to a high state. The external I/O pins do not go high immediately, but will go high within four
system clock cycles after entering the reset state. This allows power to be conserved while the part is held
in reset. For VDD Monitor resets, the /RST pin is driven low until the end of the VDD reset timeout.
On exit from the reset state, the program counter (PC) is reset, and the system clock defaults to the internal oscillator running at its lowest frequency. Refer to Section “15. Oscillators” on page 171 for information
on selecting and configuring the system clock source. The Watchdog Timer is enabled using its longest
timeout interval (see Section “14.7. Watchdog Timer Reset” on page 165). Once the system clock source
is stable, program execution begins at location 0x0000.
There are seven sources for putting the MCU into the reset state: power-on, power-fail, external /RST pin,
external CNVSTR2 signal, software command, Comparator0, Missing Clock Detector, and Watchdog
Timer. Each reset source is described in the following sections.
Figure 14.1. Reset Sources
VDD
Crossbar
CNVSTR2
Supply
Monitor
(CNVSTR
reset
enable)
+
-
Comparator0
CP0+
+
-
CP0-
XTAL2
OSC
Clock Select
Reset
Funnel
WDT
EN
PRE
WDT
Enable
MCD
Enable
System
Clock
/RST
(wired-OR)
(CP0
reset
enable)
EN
XTAL1
(wired-OR)
VDD Monitor
reset enable
Missing
Clock
Detector
(oneshot)
Internal
Clock
Generator
Supply
Reset
Timeout
WDT
Strobe
(Port
I/O)
CIP-51
Microcontroller
Core
Software Reset
System Reset
Extended Interrupt
Handler
Rev. 1.2
163
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
14.1. Power-on Reset
The C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 family incorporates a power supply monitor that holds the MCU in the reset
state until VDD rises above the VRST level during power-up. See Figure 14.2 for timing diagram, and refer
to Table 14.1 for the Electrical Characteristics of the power supply monitor circuit. The /RST pin is asserted
low until the end of the 100 ms VDD Monitor timeout in order to allow the VDD supply to stabilize. The VDD
Monitor reset is enabled and disabled using the external VDD monitor enable pin (MONEN).
On exit from a power-on reset, the PORSF flag (RSTSRC.1) is set by hardware to logic 1. All of the other
reset flags in the RSTSRC Register are indeterminate. PORSF is cleared by all other resets. Since all
resets cause program execution to begin at the same location (0x0000) software can read the PORSF flag
to determine if a power-up was the cause of reset. The contents of internal data memory should be
assumed to be undefined after a power-on reset.
volts
Figure 14.2. Reset Timing
2.70
VRST
2.55
VD
D
2.0
1.0
t
Logic HIGH
/RST
100ms
100ms
Logic LOW
Power-On Reset
VDD Monitor Reset
14.2. Power-fail Reset
When a power-down transition or power irregularity causes VDD to drop below VRST, the power supply
monitor will drive the /RST pin low and return the CIP-51 to the reset state. When VDD returns to a level
above VRST, the CIP-51 will leave the reset state in the same manner as that for the power-on reset (see
Figure 14.2). Note that even though internal data memory contents are not altered by the power-fail reset,
it is impossible to determine if VDD dropped below the level required for data retention. If the PORSF flag
is set to logic 1, the data may no longer be valid.
14.3. External Reset
The external /RST pin provides a means for external circuitry to force the MCU into a reset state. Asserting
the /RST pin low will cause the MCU to enter the reset state. It may be desirable to provide an external
pull-up and/or decoupling of the /RST pin to avoid erroneous noise-induced resets. The MCU will remain in
164
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
reset until at least 12 clock cycles after the active-low /RST signal is removed. The PINRSF flag
(RSTSRC.0) is set on exit from an external reset.
14.4. Missing Clock Detector Reset
The Missing Clock Detector is essentially a one-shot circuit that is triggered by the MCU system clock. If
the system clock goes away for more than 100 µs, the one-shot will time out and generate a reset. After a
Missing Clock Detector reset, the MCDRSF flag (RSTSRC.2) will be set, signifying the MSD as the reset
source; otherwise, this bit reads ‘0’. The state of the /RST pin is unaffected by this reset. Setting the
MCDRSF bit, RSTSRC.2 (see Section “15. Oscillators” on page 171) enables the Missing Clock Detector.
14.5. Comparator0 Reset
Comparator0 can be configured as a reset input by writing a ‘1’ to the C0RSEF flag (RSTSRC.5).
Comparator0 should be enabled using CPT0CN.7 (see Section “12. Comparators” on page 117) prior to
writing to C0RSEF to prevent any turn-on chatter on the output from generating an unwanted reset. The
Comparator0 reset is active-low: if the non-inverting input voltage (CP0+ pin) is less than the inverting
input voltage (CP0- pin), the MCU is put into the reset state. After a Comparator0 Reset, the C0RSEF flag
(RSTSRC.5) will read ‘1’ signifying Comparator0 as the reset source; otherwise, this bit reads ‘0’. The state
of the /RST pin is unaffected by this reset.
14.6. External CNVSTR2 Pin Reset
The external CNVSTR2 signal can be configured as a reset input by writing a ‘1’ to the CNVRSEF flag
(RSTSRC.6). The CNVSTR2 signal can appear on any of the P0, P1, P2 or P3 I/O pins as described in
Section “18.1. Ports 0 through 3 and the Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 205. Note that the Crossbar
must be configured for the CNVSTR2 signal to be routed to the appropriate Port I/O. The Crossbar should
be configured and enabled before the CNVRSEF is set. CNVSTR2 cannot be used to start ADC2 conversions when it is configured as a reset source. When configured as a reset, CNVSTR2 is active-low and
level sensitive. After a CNVSTR2 reset, the CNVRSEF flag (RSTSRC.6) will read ‘1’ signifying CNVSTR2
as the reset source; otherwise, this bit reads ‘0’. The state of the /RST pin is unaffected by this reset.
14.7. Watchdog Timer Reset
The MCU includes a programmable Watchdog Timer (WDT) running off the system clock. A WDT overflow
will force the MCU into the reset state. To prevent the reset, the WDT must be restarted by application software before overflow. If the system experiences a software or hardware malfunction preventing the software from restarting the WDT, the WDT will overflow and cause a reset. This should prevent the system
from running out of control.
Following a reset the WDT is automatically enabled and running with the default maximum time interval. If
desired the WDT can be disabled by system software or locked on to prevent accidental disabling. Once
locked, the WDT cannot be disabled until the next system reset. The state of the /RST pin is unaffected by
this reset.
The WDT consists of a 21-bit timer running from the programmed system clock. The timer measures the
period between specific writes to its control register. If this period exceeds the programmed limit, a WDT
reset is generated. The WDT can be enabled and disabled as needed in software, or can be permanently
enabled if desired. Watchdog features are controlled via the Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTCN)
shown in Figure 14.3.
Rev. 1.2
165
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
14.7.1. Enable/Reset WDT
The watchdog timer is both enabled and reset by writing 0xA5 to the WDTCN register. The user's application software should include periodic writes of 0xA5 to WDTCN as needed to prevent a watchdog timer
overflow. The WDT is enabled and reset as a result of any system reset.
14.7.2. Disable WDT
Writing 0xDE followed by 0xAD to the WDTCN register disables the WDT. The following code segment
illustrates disabling the WDT:
CLR
MOV
MOV
SETB
EA
WDTCN,#0DEh
WDTCN,#0ADh
EA
; disable all interrupts
; disable software watchdog timer
; re-enable interrupts
The writes of 0xDE and 0xAD must occur within 4 clock cycles of each other, or the disable operation is
ignored. Interrupts should be disabled during this procedure to avoid delay between the two writes.
14.7.3. Disable WDT Lockout
Writing 0xFF to WDTCN locks out the disable feature. Once locked out, the disable operation is ignored
until the next system reset. Writing 0xFF does not enable or reset the watchdog timer. Applications always
intending to use the watchdog should write 0xFF to WDTCN in the initialization code.
14.7.4. Setting WDT Interval
WDTCN.[2:0] control the watchdog timeout interval. The interval is given by the following equation:
4
3 + WDTCN [ 2 – 0 ]
166
× T sysclk ; where Tsysclk is the system clock period.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
For a 3 MHz system clock, this provides an interval range of 0.021 ms to 349.5 ms. WDTCN.7 must be
logic 0 when setting this interval. Reading WDTCN returns the programmed interval. WDTCN.[2:0] reads
111b after a system reset.
Figure 14.3. WDTCN: Watchdog Timer Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
xxxxx111
SFR Address: 0xFF
SFR Page: All Pages
Bits7-0:
Bit4:
Bits2-0:
WDT Control.
Writing 0xA5 both enables and reloads the WDT.
Writing 0xDE followed within 4 system clocks by 0xAD disables the WDT.
Writing 0xFF locks out the disable feature.
Watchdog Status Bit (when Read).
Reading the WDTCN.[4] bit indicates the Watchdog Timer Status.
0: WDT is inactive.
1: WDT is active.
Watchdog Timeout Interval Bits.
The WDTCN.[2:0] bits set the Watchdog Timeout Interval. When writing these bits,
WDTCN.7 must be set to 0.
Rev. 1.2
167
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 14.4. RSTSRC: Reset Source Register
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
CNVRSEF
C0RSEF
SWRSEF
WDTRSF
MCDRSF
PORSF
PINRSF
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xEF
SFR Page: 0
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
168
Reserved.
CNVRSEF: Convert Start Reset Source Enable and Flag
Write: 0: CNVSTR2 is not a reset source.
1: CNVSTR2 is a reset source (active low).
Read: 0: Source of prior reset was not CNVSTR2.
1: Source of prior reset was CNVSTR2.
C0RSEF: Comparator0 Reset Enable and Flag.
Write: 0: Comparator0 is not a reset source.
1: Comparator0 is a reset source (active low).
Read: 0: Source of last reset was not Comparator0.
1: Source of last reset was Comparator0.
SWRSF: Software Reset Force and Flag.
Write: 0: No effect.
1: Forces an internal reset. /RST pin is not effected.
Read: 0: Source of last reset was not a write to the SWRSF bit.
1: Source of last reset was a write to the SWRSF bit.
WDTRSF: Watchdog Timer Reset Flag.
0: Source of last reset was not WDT timeout.
1: Source of last reset was WDT timeout.
MCDRSF: Missing Clock Detector Flag.
Write: 0: Missing Clock Detector disabled.
1: Missing Clock Detector enabled; triggers a reset if a missing clock condition is
detected.
Read: 0: Source of last reset was not a Missing Clock Detector timeout.
1: Source of last reset was a Missing Clock Detector timeout.
PORSF: Power-On Reset Flag.
Write: If the VDD monitor circuitry is enabled (by tying the MONEN pin to a logic high state),
this bit can be written to select or de-select the VDD monitor as a reset source.
0: De-select the VDD monitor as a reset source.
1: Select the VDD monitor as a reset source.
Important: At power-on, the VDD monitor is enabled/disabled using the external VDD
monitor enable pin (MONEN). The PORSF bit does not disable or enable the VDD monitor
circuit. It simply selects the VDD monitor as a reset source.
Read: This bit is set whenever a power-on reset occurs. This may be due to a true power-on
reset or a VDD monitor reset. In either case, data memory should be considered indeterminate
following the reset.
0: Source of last reset was not a power-on or VDD monitor reset.
1: Source of last reset was a power-on or VDD monitor reset.
Note: When this flag is read as '1', all other reset flags are indeterminate.
PINRSF: HW Pin Reset Flag.
Write: 0: No effect.
1: Forces a Power-On Reset. /RST is driven low.
Read: 0: Source of prior reset was not /RST pin.
1: Source of prior reset was /RST pin.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 14.1. Reset Electrical Characteristics
-40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified.
Parameter
Conditions
IOL = 8.5 mA, VDD = 2.7 V to 3.6 V
/RST Output Low Voltage
Min
/RST Input High Voltage
0.7 x
VDD
Typ
Reset Time Delay
Missing Clock Detector Timeout
Units
V
V
0.3 x
VDD
/RST Input Low Voltage
/RST Input Leakage Current
VDD for /RST Output Valid
AV+ for /RST Output Valid
VDD POR Threshold (VRST)
Minimum /RST Low Time to
Generate a System Reset
Max
0.6
/RST = 0.0 V
50
1.0
1.0
2.40
2.55
2.70
10
/RST rising edge after VDD
crosses VRST threshold
Time from last system clock to
reset initiation
Rev. 1.2
µA
V
V
V
ns
80
100
120
ms
100
220
500
µs
169
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
170
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
15.
Oscillators
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 devices include a programmable internal oscillator and an external oscillator
drive circuit. The internal oscillator can be enabled, disabled and calibrated using the OSCICN and
OSCICL registers, as shown in Figure 15.1. The system clock can be sourced by the external oscillator circuit, the internal oscillator, or a scaled version of the internal oscillator. The internal oscillator's electrical
specifications are given in Table 15.1.
Figure 15.1. Oscillator Diagram
CLKSL
Option 3
XTAL1
CLKSEL
IFCN1
IFCN0
OSCICN
IOSCEN
IFRDY
OSCICL
XTAL2
Option 4
EN
XTAL1
Option 2
VDD
Programmable
Internal Clock
Generator
n
0
SYSCLK
Option 1
XTAL1
Input
Circuit
XTAL1
OSC
1
XFCN2
XFCN1
XFCN0
XTLVLD
XOSCMD2
XOSCMD1
XOSCMD0
XTAL2
OSCXCN
15.1. Programmable Internal Oscillator
All C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 devices include a programmable internal oscillator that defaults as the system
clock after a system reset. The internal oscillator period can be adjusted via the OSCICL register as
defined by Figure 15.2.
OSCICL is factory calibrated to obtain a 24.5 MHz base frequency (fBASE).
Electrical specifications for the precision internal oscillator are given in Table 15.1. The programmed internal oscillator frequency must not exceed 25 MHz. Note that the system clock may be derived from the programmed internal oscillator divided by 1, 2, 4, or 8, as defined by the IFCN bits in register OSCICN.
Rev. 1.2
171
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
.
Figure 15.2. OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
Variable
SFR Address: 0x8B
SFR Page: F
Bits 7-0: OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration Register
This register calibrates the internal oscillator period. The reset value for OSCICL defines the
internal oscillator base frequency. The reset value is factory calibrated to generate an internal oscillator frequency of 24.5 MHz.
Figure 15.3. OSCICN: Internal Oscillator Control Register
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
IOSCEN
IFRDY
-
-
-
-
IFCN1
IFCN0
11000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x8A
SFR Page: F
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bits5-2:
Bits1-0:
172
IOSCEN: Internal Oscillator Enable Bit
0: Internal Oscillator Disabled
1: Internal Oscillator Enabled
IFRDY: Internal Oscillator Frequency Ready Flag
0: Internal Oscillator not running at programmed frequency.
1: Internal Oscillator running at programmed frequency.
Reserved.
IFCN1-0: Internal Oscillator Frequency Control Bits
00: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 8.
01: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 4.
10: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 2.
11: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 1.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 15.1. Internal Oscillator Electrical Characteristics
-40°C to +85°C unles otherwise specified.
Parameter
Conditions
Calibrated Internal Oscillator
Frequency
Internal Oscillator Supply
OSCICN.7 = 1
Current (3.0V Supply)
Min
Typ
Max
Units
24
24.5
25
MHz
550
µA
15.2. External Oscillator Drive Circuit
The external oscillator circuit may drive an external crystal, ceramic resonator, capacitor, or RC network. A
CMOS clock may also provide a clock input. For a crystal or ceramic resonator configuration, the crystal/
resonator must be wired across the XTAL1 and XTAL2 pins as shown in Option 1 of Figure 15.1. In RC,
capacitor, or CMOS clock configuration, the clock source should be wired to the XTAL2 and/or XTAL1
pin(s) as shown in Option 2, 3, or 4 of Figure 15.1. The type of external oscillator must be selected in the
OSCXCN register, and the frequency control bits (XFCN) must be selected appropriately (see
Figure 15.5).
15.3. System Clock Selection
The CLKSL bit in register CLKSEL selects which oscillator generates the system clock. CLKSL must be
set to ‘1’ for the system clock to run from the external oscillator; however the external oscillator may still
clock peripherals (timers, PCA) when the internal oscillator is selected as the system clock. The system
clock may be switched on-the-fly between the internal and external oscillator, so long as the selected oscillator is enabled and settled. The internal oscillator requires little start-up time, and may be enabled and
selected as the system clock in the same write to OSCICN. External crystals and ceramic resonators typically require a start-up time before they are settled and ready for use as the system clock. The Crystal
Valid Flag (XTLVLD in register OSCXCN) is set to ‘1’ by hardware when the external oscillator is settled. To
avoid reading a false XTLVLD, in crystal mode software should delay at least 1 ms between enabling the
external oscillator and checking XTLVLD. RC and C modes typically require no startup time.
Figure 15.4. CLKSEL: Oscillator Clock Selection Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CLKSL
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x97
SFR Page: F
Bits7-1:
Bit0:
Reserved.
CLKSL: System Clock Source Select Bit.
0: SYSCLK derived from the Internal Oscillator, and scaled as per the IFCN bits in OSCICN.
1: SYSCLK derived from the External Oscillator circuit.
Rev. 1.2
173
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 15.5. OSCXCN: External Oscillator Control Register
R
XTLVLD
Bit7
R/W
R/W
R/W
XOSCMD2 XOSCMD1 XOSCMD0
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
XFCN2
XFCN1
XFCN0
00000000
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x8C
SFR Page: F
Bit7:
Bits6-4:
Bit3:
Bits2-0:
XTLVLD: Crystal Oscillator Valid Flag.
(Valid only when XOSCMD = 11x.).
0: Crystal Oscillator is unused or not yet stable.
1: Crystal Oscillator is running and stable.
XOSCMD2-0: External Oscillator Mode Bits.
00x: External Oscillator circuit off.
010: External CMOS Clock Mode (External CMOS Clock input on XTAL1 pin).
011: External CMOS Clock Mode with divide by 2 stage (External CMOS Clock input on
XTAL1 pin).
10x: RC/C Oscillator Mode with divide by 2 stage.
110: Crystal Oscillator Mode.
111: Crystal Oscillator Mode with divide by 2 stage.
Unused. Read = 0, Write = don't care.
XFCN2-0: External Oscillator Frequency Control Bits.
000-111: see table below:
XFCN
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
Crystal (XOSCMD = 11x)
f ≤ 32 kHz
32 kHz < f ≤ 84 kHz
84 kHz < f ≤ 225 kHz
225 kHz < f ≤ 590 kHz
590 kHz < f ≤ 1.5 MHz
1.5 MHz < f ≤ 4 MHz
4 MHz < f ≤ 10 MHz
10 MHz < f ≤ 30 MHz
RC (XOSCMD = 10x)
f ≤ 25 kHz
25 kHz < f ≤ 50 kHz
50 kHz < f ≤ 100 kHz
100 kHz < f ≤ 200 kHz
200 kHz < f ≤ 400 kHz
400 kHz < f ≤ 800 kHz
800 kHz < f ≤ 1.6 MHz
1.6 MHz < f ≤ 3.2 MHz
CRYSTAL MODE (Circuit from Figure 15.1, Option 1; XOSCMD = 11x).
Choose XFCN value to match crystal frequency.
RC MODE (Circuit from Figure 15.1, Option 2; XOSCMD = 10x).
Choose XFCN value to match frequency range:
f = 1.23(103) / (R * C), where
f = frequency of oscillation in MHz
C = capacitor value in pF
R = Pull-up resistor value in kΩ
C MODE (Circuit from Figure 15.1, Option 3; XOSCMD = 10x).
Choose K Factor (KF) for the oscillation frequency desired:
f = KF / (C * VDD), where
f = frequency of oscillation in MHz
C = capacitor value on XTAL1, XTAL2 pins in pF
VDD = Power Supply on MCU in volts
174
Rev. 1.2
C (XOSCMD = 10x)
K Factor = 0.87
K Factor = 2.6
K Factor = 7.7
K Factor = 22
K Factor = 65
K Factor = 180
K Factor = 664
K Factor = 1590
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
15.4. External Crystal Example
If a crystal or ceramic resonator is used as an external oscillator source for the MCU, the circuit should be
configured as shown in Figure 15.1, Option 1. The External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN)
should be chosen from the Crystal column of the table in Figure 15.5 (OSCXCN register). For example, an
11.0592 MHz crystal requires an XFCN setting of 111b.
When the crystal oscillator is enabled, the oscillator amplitude detection circuit requires a settle time to
achieve proper bias. Introducing a blanking interval of at least 1 ms between enabling the oscillator and
checking the XTLVLD bit will prevent a premature switch to the external oscillator as the system clock.
Switching to the external oscillator before the crystal oscillator has stabilized can result in unpredictable
behavior. The recommended procedure is:
Step 1.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Step 4.
Enable the external oscillator.
Wait at least1 ms.
Poll for XTLVLD => ‘1’.
Switch the system clock to the external oscillator.
Important Note on External Crystals: Crystal oscillator circuits are quite sensitive to PCB layout and
external noise. The crystal should be placed as close as possible to the XTAL pins on the device. The
traces should be as short as possible and shielded with ground plane from any other traces which could
introduce noise or interference. Crystal loading capacitors should be referenced to AGND.
15.5. External RC Example
If an RC network is used as an external oscillator source for the MCU, the circuit should be configured as
shown in Figure 15.1, Option 2. The capacitor should be no greater than 100 pF; however for very small
capacitors, the total capacitance may be dominated by parasitic capacitance in the PCB layout. To determine the required External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN) in the OSCXCN Register, first
select the RC network value to produce the desired frequency of oscillation. If the frequency desired is
100 kHz, let R = 246 kΩ and C = 50 pF:
f = 1.23( 103 ) / RC = 1.23 ( 103 ) / [ 246 * 50 ] = 0.1 MHz = 100 kHz
Referring to the table in Figure 15.5, the required XFCN setting is 010.
15.6. External Capacitor Example
If a capacitor is used as an external oscillator for the MCU, the circuit should be configured as shown in
Figure 15.1, Option 3. The capacitor should be no greater than 100 pF; however for very small capacitors,
the total capacitance may be dominated by parasitic capacitance in the PCB layout. To determine the
required External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN) in the OSCXCN Register, select the capacitor to be used and find the frequency of oscillation from the equations below. Assume VDD = 3.0 V and C
= 50 pF:
f = KF / ( C * VDD ) = KF / ( 50 * 3 )
f = KF / 150
If a frequency of roughly 50 kHz is desired, select the K Factor from the table in Figure 15.5 as KF = 7.7:
f = 7.7 / 150 = 0.051 MHz, or 51 kHz
Therefore, the XFCN value to use in this example is 010.
Rev. 1.2
175
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
176
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
16.
Flash Memory
The C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 devices include on-chip, reprogrammable Flash memory for program code
and non-volatile data storage. The C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5 include 64 k + 128 bytes of Flash, and the
C8051F066/7 include 32 k + 128 bytes of Flash. The Flash memory can be programmed in-system, a single byte at a time, through the JTAG interface or by software using the MOVX write instructions. Once
cleared to logic 0, a Flash bit must be erased to set it back to logic 1. The bytes would typically be erased
(set to 0xFF) before being reprogrammed. Flash write and erase operations are automatically timed by
hardware for proper execution; data polling to determine the end of the write/erase operation is not
required. The CPU is stalled during write/erase operations while the device peripherals remain active.
Interrupts that occur during Flash write/erase operations are held, and are then serviced in their priority
order once the Flash operation has completed. Refer to Table 16.1 for the electrical characteristics of the
Flash memory.
16.1. Programming The Flash Memory
The simplest means of programming the Flash memory is through the JTAG interface using programming
tools provided by Silicon Labs or a third party vendor. This is the only means for programming a non-initialized device. For details on the JTAG commands to program Flash memory, see Section “26. JTAG (IEEE
1149.1)” on page 317.
The Flash memory can be programmed from software using the MOVX write instruction with the address
and data byte to be programmed provided as normal operands. Before writing to Flash memory using
MOVX, Flash write operations must be enabled by setting the PSWE Program Store Write Enable bit
(PSCTL.0) to logic 1. This directs the MOVX writes to Flash memory instead of to XRAM, which is the
default target. The PSWE bit remains set until cleared by software. To avoid errant Flash writes, it is recommended that interrupts be disabled while the PSWE bit is logic 1.
Flash memory is read using the MOVC instruction. MOVX reads are always directed to XRAM, regardless
of the state of PSWE.
NOTE: To ensure the integrity of Flash memory contents, it is strongly recommended that the onchip VDD monitor be enabled by connecting the VDD monitor enable pin (MONEN) to VDD and setting the PORSF bit in the RSTSRC register to ‘1’ in any system that writes and/or erases Flash
memory from software. See “Reset Sources” on page 163 for more information.
A write to Flash memory can clear bits but cannot set them; only an erase operation can set bits in Flash.
A byte location to be programmed must be erased before a new value can be written. The Flash
memory is organized in 512-byte pages. The erase operation applies to an entire page (setting all bytes in
the page to 0xFF). The following steps illustrate the algorithm for programming Flash from user software.
Step 1. Disable interrupts.
Step 2. Set FLWE (FLSCL.0) to enable Flash writes/erases via user software.
Step 3. Set PSEE (PSCTL.1) to enable Flash erases.
Step 4. Set PSWE (PSCTL.0) to redirect MOVX commands to write to Flash.
Step 5. Use the MOVX command to write a data byte to any location within the 512-byte page to
be erased.
Step 6. Clear PSEE to disable Flash erases
Step 7. Use the MOVX command to write a data byte to the desired byte location within the
erased 512-byte page. Repeat this step until all desired bytes are written (within the target
page).
Rev. 1.2
177
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Step 8. Clear the PSWE bit to redirect MOVX write commands to the XRAM data space.
Step 9. Re-enable interrupts.
Write/Erase timing is automatically controlled by hardware. Note that code execution in the 8051 is stalled
while the Flash is being programmed or erased.
Table 16.1. Flash Electrical Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Flash Size *
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5
Flash Size *
C8051F066/7
Endurance
Erase Cycle Time
Write Cycle Time
* Includes 128-byte Scratch Pad Area
Min
20 k
10
40
Typ
65664 †
32896
100 k
12
50
Max
14
60
Units
Bytes
Bytes
Erase/Write
ms
µs
† 1024 Bytes at location 0xFC00 to 0xFFFF are reserved.
16.2. Non-volatile Data Storage
The Flash memory can be used for non-volatile data storage as well as program code. This allows data
such as calibration coefficients to be calculated and stored at run time. Data is written using the MOVX
write instruction (as described in the previous section) and read using the MOVC instruction.
An additional 128-byte sector of Flash memory is included for non-volatile data storage. Its smaller sector
size makes it particularly well suited as general purpose, non-volatile scratchpad memory. Even though
Flash memory can be written a single byte at a time, an entire sector must be erased first. In order to
change a single byte of a multi-byte data set, the data must be moved to temporary storage. The 128-byte
sector size facilitates updating data without wasting program memory or RAM space. The 128-byte sector
is double-mapped over the normal Flash memory area; its address ranges from 0x00 to 0x7F (see
Figure 16.1 and Figure 16.2). To access this 128-byte sector, the SFLE bit in PSCTL must be set to logic 1.
Code execution from this 128-byte scratchpad sector is not supported.
178
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
16.3. Security Options
The CIP-51 provides security options to protect the Flash memory from inadvertent modification by software as well as prevent the viewing of proprietary program code and constants. The Program Store Write
Enable (PSCTL.0) and the Program Store Erase Enable (PSCTL.1) bits protect the Flash memory from
accidental modification by software. These bits must be explicitly set to logic 1 before software can write or
erase the Flash memory. Additional security features prevent proprietary program code and data constants
from being read or altered across the JTAG interface or by software running on the system controller.
A set of security lock bytes protect the Flash program memory from being read or altered across the JTAG
interface. Each bit in a security lock-byte protects one 8k-byte block of memory. Clearing a bit to logic 0 in
a Read Lock Byte prevents the corresponding block of Flash memory from being read across the JTAG
interface. Clearing a bit in the Write/Erase Lock Byte protects the block from JTAG erasures and/or writes.
The Scratchpad area is read or write/erase locked when all bits in the corresponding security byte are
cleared to logic 0.
On the C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5, the security lock bytes are located at 0xFBFE (Write/Erase Lock) and
0xFBFF (Read Lock), as shown in Figure 16.1. On the C8051F066/7, the security lock bytes are located at
0x7FFE (Write/Erase Lock) and 0x7FFF (Read Lock), as shown in Figure 16.2. The 512-byte sector containing the lock bytes can be written to, but not erased, by software. An attempted read of a read-locked
byte returns undefined data. Debugging code in a read-locked sector is not possible through the JTAG
interface. The lock bits can always be read from and written to logic 0 regardless of the security setting
applied to the block containing the security bytes. This allows additional blocks to be protected after the
block containing the security bytes has been locked.
Important Note: To ensure protection from external access, the block containing the lock bytes
must be Write/Erase locked. On the 64 k byte devices (C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5), the page containing
the security bytes is 0xFA00-0xFBFF, and is locked by clearing bit 7 of the Write/Erase Lock Byte.
On the 32 k byte devices (C8051F066/7), the page containing the security bytes is 0x7E00-0x7FFF,
and is locked by clearing bit 3 of the Write/Erase Lock Byte. If the page containing the security
bytes is not Write/Erase locked, it is still possible to erase this page of Flash memory through the
JTAG port and reset the security bytes.
When the page containing the security bytes has been Write/Erase locked, a JTAG full device erase
must be performed to unlock any areas of Flash protected by the security bytes. A JTAG full
device erase is initiated by performing a normal JTAG erase operation on either of the security byte
locations. This operation must be initiated through the JTAG port, and cannot be performed from
firmware running on the device.
Rev. 1.2
179
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 16.1. C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5 Flash Program Memory Map and Security Bytes
Read and Write/Erase Security Bits
(Bit 7 is MSB)
Bit
Memory Block
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0xE000 - 0xFBFD
0xC000 - 0xDFFF
0xA000 - 0xBFFF
0x8000 - 0x9FFF
0x6000 - 0x7FFF
0x4000 - 0x5FFF
0x2000 - 0x3FFF
0x0000 - 0x1FFF
SFLE = 0
0xFFFF
Reserved
0xFC00
Read Lock Byte
0xFBFF
Write/Erase Lock Byte
0xFBFE
0xFBFD
Flash Access Limit
SFLE = 1
0x007F
0x0000
Program/Data
Memory Space
0x0000
ScratchpadMemory
(Dataonly)
Flash Read Lock Byte
Bits7-0: Each bit locks a corresponding block of memory. (Bit7 is MSB).
0: Read operations are locked (disabled) for corresponding block across the JTAG interface.
1: Read operations are unlocked (enabled) for corresponding block across the JTAG interface.
Flash Write/Erase Lock Byte
Bits7-0: Each bit locks a corresponding block of memory.
0: Write/Erase operations are locked (disabled) for corresponding block across the JTAG
interface.
1: Write/Erase operations are unlocked (enabled) for corresponding block across the JTAG
interface.
NOTE: When the block containing the security bytes is locked, the security bytes may be
written but not erased.
Flash Access Limit
The Flash Access Limit is defined by the setting of the FLACL register, as described in
Figure 16.3. Firmware running at or above this address is prohibited from using the MOVX
and MOVC instructions to read, write, or erase Flash locations below this address.
180
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 16.2. C8051F066/7 Flash Program Memory Map and Security Bytes
Read and Write/Erase Security Bits
(Bit 7 is MSB)
Bit
Memory Block
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0x6000 - 0x7FFD
0x4000 - 0x5FFF
0x2000 - 0x3FFF
0x0000 - 0x1FFF
SFLE = 0
0xFFFF
Reserved
0x8000
Read Lock Byte
0x7FFF
Write/Erase Lock Byte
0x7FFE
0x7FFD
Flash Access Limit
SFLE = 1
0x007F
0x0000
Program/Data
Memory Space
0x0000
ScratchpadMemory
(Dataonly)
Flash Read Lock Byte
Bits7-0: Each bit locks a corresponding block of memory.
0: Read operations are locked (disabled) for corresponding block across the JTAG interface.
1: Read operations are unlocked (enabled) for corresponding block across the JTAG interface.
Flash Write/Erase Lock Byte
Bits7-0: Each bit locks a corresponding block of memory.
0: Write/Erase operations are locked (disabled) for corresponding block across the JTAG
interface.
1: Write/Erase operations are unlocked (enabled) for corresponding block across the JTAG
interface.
NOTE: When the block containing the security bytes is locked, the security bytes may be
written but not erased.
Flash Access Limit Register (FLACL)
The Flash Access Limit is defined by the setting of the FLACL register, as described in
Figure 16.3. Firmware running at or above this address is prohibited from using the MOVX
and MOVC instructions to read, write, or erase Flash locations below this address.
The Flash Access Limit security feature (see Figure 16.3) protects proprietary program code and data from
being read by software running on the C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7. This feature provides support for OEMs
that wish to program the MCU with proprietary value-added firmware before distribution. The value-added
firmware can be protected while allowing additional code to be programmed in remaining program memory
space later.
The Flash Access Limit (FAL) is a 16-bit address that establishes two logical partitions in the program
memory space. The first is an upper partition consisting of all the program memory locations at or above
the FAL address, and the second is a lower partition consisting of all the program memory locations start-
Rev. 1.2
181
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
ing at 0x0000 up to (but excluding) the FAL address. Software in the upper partition can execute code in
the lower partition, but is prohibited from reading locations in the lower partition using the MOVC instruction. (Executing a MOVC instruction from the upper partition with a source address in the lower partition
will always return a data value of 0x00.) Software running in the lower partition can access locations in both
the upper and lower partition without restriction.
The Value-added firmware should be placed in the lower partition. On reset, control is passed to the valueadded firmware via the reset vector. Once the value-added firmware completes its initial execution, it
branches to a predetermined location in the upper partition. If entry points are published, software running
in the upper partition may execute program code in the lower partition, but it cannot read the contents of
the lower partition. Parameters may be passed to the program code running in the lower partition either
through the typical method of placing them on the stack or in registers before the call or by placing them in
prescribed memory locations in the upper partition.
The FAL address is specified using the contents of the Flash Access Limit Register. The 16-bit FAL
address is calculated as 0xNN00, where NN is the contents of the FAL Security Register. Thus, the FAL
can be located on 256-byte boundaries anywhere in program memory space. However, the 512-byte erase
sector size essentially requires that a 512 boundary be used. The contents of a non-initialized FAL security
byte is 0x00, thereby setting the FAL address to 0x0000 and allowing read access to all locations in program memory space by default.
Figure 16.3. FLACL: Flash Access Limit
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
SFR
Address:
SFR Address: 0xB7
SFR Page: F
Bit0
Bits 7-0: FLACL: Flash Access Limit.
This register holds the high byte of the 16-bit program memory read/write/erase limit
address. The entire 16-bit access limit address value is calculated as 0xNN00 where NN is
replaced by contents of FLACL. A write to this register sets the Flash Access Limit. This
register can only be written once after any reset. Any subsequent writes are ignored until
the next reset. To fully protect all addresses below this limit, bit 0 of FLACL should be
set to ‘0’ to align the FAL on a 512-byte Flash page boundary.
182
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
16.3.1. Summary of Flash Security Options
There are three Flash access methods supported on the C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7; 1) Accessing Flash
through the JTAG debug interface, 2) Accessing Flash from firmware residing below the Flash Access
Limit, and 3) Accessing Flash from firmware residing at or above the Flash Access Limit.
Accessing Flash through the JTAG debug interface:
1. The Read and Write/Erase Lock bytes (security bytes) provide security for Flash access
through the JTAG interface.
2. Any unlocked page may be read from, written to, or erased.
3. Locked pages cannot be read from, written to, or erased.
4. Reading the security bytes is always permitted.
5. Locking additional pages by writing to the security bytes is always permitted.
6. If the page containing the security bytes is unlocked, it can be directly erased. Doing so will
reset the security bytes and unlock all pages of Flash.
7. If the page containing the security bytes is locked, it cannot be directly erased. To unlock the
page containing the security bytes, a full JTAG device erase is required. A full JTAG
device erase will erase all Flash pages, including the page containing the security bytes and
the security bytes themselves.
8. The Reserved Area cannot be read from, written to, or erased at any time.
Accessing Flash from firmware residing below the Flash Access Limit:
1. The Read and Write/Erase Lock bytes (security bytes) do not restrict Flash access from user
firmware.
2. Any page of Flash except the page containing the security bytes may be read from, written to,
or erased.
3. The page containing the security bytes cannot be erased. Unlocking pages of Flash can
only be performed via the JTAG interface.
4. The page containing the security bytes may be read from or written to. Pages of Flash can be
locked from JTAG access by writing to the security bytes.
5. The Reserved Area cannot be read from, written to, or erased at any time.
Accessing Flash from firmware residing at or above the Flash Access Limit:
1. The Read and Write/Erase Lock bytes (security bytes) do not restrict Flash access from user
firmware.
2. Any page of Flash at or above the Flash Access Limit except the page containing the security
bytes may be read from, written to, or erased.
3. Any page of Flash below the Flash Access Limit cannot be read from, written to, or erased.
4. Code branches to locations below the Flash Access Limit are permitted.
5. The page containing the security bytes cannot be erased. Unlocking pages of Flash can
only be performed via the JTAG interface.
6. The page containing the security bytes may be read from or written to. Pages of Flash can be
locked from JTAG access by writing to the security bytes.
7. The Reserved Area cannot be read from, written to, or erased at any time.
Rev. 1.2
183
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 16.4. FLSCL: Flash Memory Control
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
FOSE
FRAE
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
FLWE
10000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit 7:
FOSE: Flash One-Shot Timer Enable
This is the timer that turns off the sense amps after a Flash read.
0: Flash One-Shot Timer disabled.
1: Flash One-Shot Timer enabled (recommended setting.)
Bit 6:
FRAE: Flash Read Always Enable
0: Flash reads occur as necessary (recommended setting.).
1: Flash reads occur every system clock cycle.
Bits 5-1: RESERVED. Read = 00000b. Must Write 00000b.
Bit 0:
FLWE: Flash Write/Erase Enable
This bit must be set to allow Flash writes/erases from user software.
0: Flash writes/erases disabled.
1: Flash writes/erases enabled.
184
Rev. 1.2
SFR
Address:
SFR Address: 0xB7
SFR Page: 0
Bit0
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 16.5. PSCTL: Program Store Read/Write Control
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
-
SFLE
PSEE
PSWE
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
SFR
Address:
SFR Address: 0x8F
SFR Page: 0
Bit0
Bits 7-3: UNUSED. Read = 00000b, Write = don't care.
Bit 2:
SFLE: Scratchpad Flash Memory Access Enable
When this bit is set, Flash MOVC reads and writes from user software are directed to the
128-byte Scratchpad Flash sector. When SFLE is set to logic 1, Flash accesses out of the
address range 0x00-0x7F should not be attempted. Reads/Writes out of this range will yield
undefined results.
0: Flash access from user software directed to the Program/Data Flash sector.
1: Flash access from user software directed to the Scratchpad sector.
Bit 1:
PSEE: Program Store Erase Enable.
Setting this bit allows an entire page of the Flash program memory to be erased provided
the PSWE bit is also set. After setting this bit, a write to Flash memory using the MOVX
instruction will erase the entire page that contains the location addressed by the MOVX
instruction. The value of the data byte written does not matter. Note: The Flash page containing the Read Lock Byte and Write/Erase Lock Byte cannot be erased by software.
0: Flash program memory erasure disabled.
1: Flash program memory erasure enabled.
Bit 0:
PSWE: Program Store Write Enable.
Setting this bit allows writing a byte of data to the Flash program memory using the MOVX
write instruction. The location must be erased prior to writing data.
0: Write to Flash program memory disabled. MOVX write operations target External RAM.
1: Write to Flash program memory enabled. MOVX write operations target Flash memory.
Rev. 1.2
185
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
186
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.
External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM
The C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 MCUs include 4 k bytes of on-chip RAM mapped into the external data
memory space (XRAM). In addition, the C8051F060/2/4/6 include an External Data Memory Interface
which can be used to access off-chip memories and memory-mapped devices connected to the GPIO
ports. The external memory space may be accessed using the external move instruction (MOVX) and the
data pointer (DPTR), or using the MOVX indirect addressing mode using R0 or R1. If the MOVX instruction
is used with an 8-bit address operand (such as @R1), then the high byte of the 16-bit address is provided
by the External Memory Interface Control Register (EMI0CN, shown in Figure 17.1). Note: the MOVX
instruction can also be used for writing to the Flash memory. See Section “16. Flash Memory” on page 177
for details. The MOVX instruction accesses XRAM by default.
17.1. Accessing XRAM
The XRAM memory space (both internal and external) is accessed using the MOVX instruction. The
MOVX instruction has two forms, both of which use an indirect addressing method. The first method uses
the Data Pointer, DPTR, a 16-bit register which contains the effective address of the XRAM location to be
read or written. The second method uses R0 or R1 in combination with the EMI0CN register to generate
the effective XRAM address. Examples of both of these methods are given below.
17.1.1. 16-Bit MOVX Example
The 16-bit form of the MOVX instruction accesses the memory location pointed to by the contents of the
DPTR register. The following series of instructions reads the value of the byte at address 0x1234 into the
accumulator A:
MOV
MOVX
DPTR, #1234h
A, @DPTR
; load DPTR with 16-bit address to read (0x1234)
; load contents of 0x1234 into accumulator A
The above example uses the 16-bit immediate MOV instruction to set the contents of DPTR. Alternately,
the DPTR can be accessed through the SFR registers DPH, which contains the upper 8-bits of DPTR, and
DPL, which contains the lower 8-bits of DPTR.
17.1.2. 8-Bit MOVX Example
The 8-bit form of the MOVX instruction uses the contents of the EMI0CN SFR to determine the upper 8-bits
of the effective address to be accessed and the contents of R0 or R1 to determine the lower 8-bits of the
effective address to be accessed. The following series of instructions read the contents of the byte at
address 0x1234 into the accumulator A.
MOV
MOV
MOVX
EMI0CN, #12h
R0, #34h
a, @R0
; load high byte of address into EMI0CN
; load low byte of address into R0 (or R1)
; load contents of 0x1234 into accumulator A
Rev. 1.2
187
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.2. Configuring the External Memory Interface
Configuring the External Memory Interface consists of four steps:
1. Enable the EMIF on the High Ports (P7, P6, P5, and P4).
2. Configure the Output Modes of the port pins as either push-pull or open-drain (push-pull is
most common).
3. Configure Port latches to “park” the EMIF pins in a dormant state (usually by setting them to
logic ‘1’).
4. Select Multiplexed mode or Non-multiplexed mode.
5. Select the memory mode (on-chip only, split mode without bank select, split mode with bank
select, or off-chip only).
6. Set up timing to interface with off-chip memory or peripherals.
Each of these four steps is explained in detail in the following sections. The Port enable bit, Multiplexed
mode selection, and Mode bits are located in the EMI0CF register shown in Figure 17.2.
17.3. Port Selection and Configuration
When enabled, the External Memory Interface appears on Ports 7, 6, 5, and 4 in non-multiplexed mode, or
Ports 7, 6, and 4 in multiplexed mode.
The External Memory Interface claims the associated Port pins for memory operations ONLY during the
execution of an off-chip MOVX instruction. Once the MOVX instruction has completed, control of the Port
pins reverts to the Port latches. See Section “18. Port Input/Output” on page 203 for more information
about the Port operation and configuration. The Port latches should be explicitly configured to ‘park’
the External Memory Interface pins in a dormant state when not in use, most commonly by setting
them to a logic 1.
During the execution of the MOVX instruction, the External Memory Interface will explicitly disable the drivers on all Port pins that are acting as Inputs (Data[7:0] during a READ operation, for example). The Output
mode of the Port pins (whether the pin is configured as Open-Drain or Push-Pull) is unaffected by the
External Memory Interface operation, and remains controlled by the PnMDOUT registers. See Section
“18. Port Input/Output” on page 203 for more information about Port output mode configuration.
188
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 17.1. EMI0CN: External Memory Interface Control
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
PGSEL7
PGSEL6
PGSEL5
PGSEL4
PGSEL3
PGSEL2
PGSEL1
PGSEL0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bits7-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xA2
SFR Page: 0
PGSEL[7:0]: XRAM Page Select Bits.
The XRAM Page Select Bits provide the high byte of the 16-bit external data memory
address when using an 8-bit MOVX command, effectively selecting a 256-byte page of
RAM.
0x00: 0x0000 to 0x00FF
0x01: 0x0100 to 0x01FF
...
0xFE: 0xFE00 to 0xFEFF
0xFF: 0xFF00 to 0xFFFF
Figure 17.2. EMI0CF: External Memory Configuration
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
PRTSEL
EMD2
EMD1
EMD0
EALE1
EALE0
00000011
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bits7-6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bits3-2:
Bits1-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xA3
SFR Page: 0
Unused. Read = 00b. Write = don’t care.
PRTSEL: EMIF Port Select.
0: EMIF not mapped to port pins.
1: EMIF active on P4-P7.
EMD2: EMIF Multiplex Mode Select.
0: EMIF operates in multiplexed address/data mode.
1: EMIF operates in non-multiplexed mode (separate address and data pins).
EMD1-0: EMIF Operating Mode Select.
These bits control the operating mode of the External Memory Interface.
00: Internal Only: MOVX accesses on-chip XRAM only. All effective addresses alias to on-chip
memory space.
01: Split Mode without Bank Select: Accesses below the 4 kB boundary are directed on-chip.
Accesses above the 4 kB boundary are directed off-chip. 8-bit off-chip MOVX operations use the
current contents of the Address High port latches to resolve upper address byte. Note that in
order to access off-chip space, EMI0CN must be set to a page that is not contained in the on-chip
address space.
10: Split Mode with Bank Select: Accesses below the 4 kB boundary are directed on-chip.
Accesses above the 4 kB boundary are directed off-chip. 8-bit off-chip MOVX operations use the
contents of EMI0CN to determine the high-byte of the address.
11: External Only: MOVX accesses off-chip XRAM only. On-chip XRAM is not visible to the CPU.
EALE1-0: ALE Pulse-Width Select Bits (only has effect when EMD2 = 0).
00: ALE high and ALE low pulse width = 1 SYSCLK cycle.
01: ALE high and ALE low pulse width = 2 SYSCLK cycles.
10: ALE high and ALE low pulse width = 3 SYSCLK cycles.
11: ALE high and ALE low pulse width = 4 SYSCLK cycles.
Rev. 1.2
189
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.4. Multiplexed and Non-multiplexed Selection
The External Memory Interface is capable of acting in a Multiplexed mode or a Non-multiplexed mode,
depending on the state of the EMD2 (EMI0CF.4) bit.
17.4.1. Multiplexed Configuration
In Multiplexed mode, the Data Bus and the lower 8-bits of the Address Bus share the same Port pins:
AD[7:0]. In this mode, an external latch (74HC373 or equivalent logic gate) is used to hold the lower 8-bits
of the RAM address. The external latch is controlled by the ALE (Address Latch Enable) signal, which is
driven by the External Memory Interface logic. An example of a Multiplexed Configuration is shown in
Figure 17.3.
In Multiplexed mode, the external MOVX operation can be broken into two phases delineated by the state
of the ALE signal. During the first phase, ALE is high and the lower 8-bits of the Address Bus are presented to AD[7:0]. During this phase, the address latch is configured such that the ‘Q’ outputs reflect the
states of the ‘D’ inputs. When ALE falls, signaling the beginning of the second phase, the address latch
outputs remain fixed and are no longer dependent on the latch inputs. Later in the second phase, the Data
Bus controls the state of the AD[7:0] port at the time /RD or /WR is asserted.
See Section “17.6.2. Multiplexed Mode” on page 199 for more information.
Figure 17.3. Multiplexed Configuration Example
A[15:8]
(P6)
A[15:8]
ADDRESS BUS
74HC373
ALE (P4.5)
E
M
I
F
AD[7:0]
(P7)
G
D
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
Q
A[7:0]
VDD
64K X 8
SRAM
(Optional)
8
I/O[7:0]
/RD (P4.6)
OE
/WR (P4.7)
WE
CE
190
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.4.2. Non-multiplexed Configuration
In Non-multiplexed mode, the Data Bus and the Address Bus pins are not shared. An example of a Nonmultiplexed Configuration is shown in Figure 17.4. See Section “17.6.1. Non-multiplexed Mode” on
page 196 for more information about Non-multiplexed operation.
Figure 17.4. Non-multiplexed Configuration Example
A[15:0]
(P5 and P6)
E
M
I
F
ADDRESS BUS
A[15:0]
VDD
(Optional)
D[7:0]
(P7)
8
DATA BUS
/RD (P4.6)
/WR (P4.7)
64K X 8
SRAM
I/O[7:0]
OE
WE
CE
Rev. 1.2
191
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.5. Memory Mode Selection
The external data memory space can be configured in one of four modes, shown in Figure 17.5, based on
the EMIF Mode bits in the EMI0CF register (Figure 17.2). These modes are summarized below. More information about the different modes can be found in Section “17.6. Timing” on page 194.
17.5.1. Internal XRAM Only
When EMI0CF.[3:2] are set to ‘00’, all MOVX instructions will target the internal XRAM space on the
device. Memory accesses to addresses beyond the populated space will wrap on 4 k byte boundaries. As
an example, the addresses 0x1000 and 0x2000 both evaluate to address 0x0000 in on-chip XRAM space.
•
8-bit MOVX operations use the contents of EMI0CN to determine the high-byte of the effective address
and R0 or R1 to determine the low-byte of the effective address.
16-bit MOVX operations use the contents of the 16-bit DPTR to determine the effective address.
•
17.5.2. Split Mode without Bank Select
When EMI0CF.[3:2] are set to ‘01’, the XRAM memory map is split into two areas, on-chip space and offchip space.
•
•
•
Effective addresses below the 4 kB boundary will access on-chip XRAM space.
Effective addresses beyond the 4 kB boundary will access off-chip space.
8-bit MOVX operations use the contents of EMI0CN to determine whether the memory access is onchip or off-chip. However, in the “No Bank Select” mode, an 8-bit MOVX operation will not drive the
upper 8-bits A[15:8] of the Address Bus during an off-chip access. This allows the user to manipulate
the upper address bits at will by setting the Port state directly. This behavior is in contrast with “Split
Mode with Bank Select” described below. The lower 8-bits of the Address Bus A[7:0] are driven, determined by R0 or R1.
16-bit MOVX operations use the contents of DPTR to determine whether the memory access is onchip or off-chip, and unlike 8-bit MOVX operations, the full 16-bits of the Address Bus A[15:0] are
driven during the off-chip transaction.
•
Figure 17.5. EMIF Operating Modes
EMI0CF[3:2] = 00
EMI0CF[3:2] = 01
0xFFFF
EMI0CF[3:2] = 10
EMI0CF[3:2] = 11
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
On-Chip XRAM
On-Chip XRAM
Off-Chip
Memory
(No Bank Select)
Off-Chip
Memory
(Bank Select)
On-Chip XRAM
Off-Chip
Memory
On-Chip XRAM
On-Chip XRAM
On-Chip XRAM
On-Chip XRAM
On-Chip XRAM
0x0000
192
0x0000
Rev. 1.2
0x0000
0x0000
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.5.3. Split Mode with Bank Select
When EMI0CF.[3:2] are set to ‘10’, the XRAM memory map is split into two areas, on-chip space and offchip space.
•
•
•
•
Effective addresses below the 4 kB boundary will access on-chip XRAM space.
Effective addresses beyond the 4 kB boundary will access off-chip space.
8-bit MOVX operations use the contents of EMI0CN to determine whether the memory access is onchip or off-chip. The upper 8-bits of the Address Bus A[15:8] are determined by EMI0CN, and the lower
8-bits of the Address Bus A[7:0] are determined by R0 or R1. All 16-bits of the Address Bus A[15:0] are
driven in “Bank Select” mode.
16-bit MOVX operations use the contents of DPTR to determine whether the memory access is onchip or off-chip, and the full 16-bits of the Address Bus A[15:0] are driven during the off-chip transaction.
17.5.4. External Only
When EMI0CF[3:2] are set to ‘11’, all MOVX operations are directed to off-chip space. On-chip XRAM is
not visible to the CPU. This mode is useful for accessing off-chip memory located between 0x0000 and the
4 kB boundary.
•
•
8-bit MOVX operations ignore the contents of EMI0CN. The upper Address bits A[15:8] are not driven
(identical behavior to an off-chip access in “Split Mode without Bank Select” described above). This
allows the user to manipulate the upper address bits at will by setting the Port state directly. The lower
8-bits of the effective address A[7:0] are determined by the contents of R0 or R1.
16-bit MOVX operations use the contents of DPTR to determine the effective address A[15:0]. The full
16-bits of the Address Bus A[15:0] are driven during the off-chip transaction.
Rev. 1.2
193
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.6. Timing
The timing parameters of the External Memory Interface can be configured to enable connection to
devices having different setup and hold time requirements. The Address Setup time, Address Hold time, /
RD and /WR strobe widths, and in multiplexed mode, the width of the ALE pulse are all programmable in
units of SYSCLK periods through EMI0TC, shown in Figure 17.6, and EMI0CF[1:0].
The timing for an off-chip MOVX instruction can be calculated by adding 4 SYSCLK cycles to the timing
parameters defined by the EMI0TC register. Assuming non-multiplexed operation, the minimum execution
time for an off-chip XRAM operation is 5 SYSCLK cycles (1 SYSCLK for /RD or /WR pulse + 4 SYSCLKs).
For multiplexed operations, the Address Latch Enable signal will require a minimum of 2 additional
SYSCLK cycles. Therefore, the minimum execution time for an off-chip XRAM operation in multiplexed
mode is 7 SYSCLK cycles (2 for /ALE + 1 for /RD or /WR + 4). The programmable setup and hold times
default to the maximum delay settings after a reset.
Figure 17.6. EMI0TC: External Memory Timing Control
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
EAS1
EAS0
ERW3
EWR2
EWR1
EWR0
EAH1
EAH0
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bits7-6:
Bits5-2:
Bits1-0:
194
EAS1-0: EMIF Address Setup Time Bits.
00: Address setup time = 0 SYSCLK cycles.
01: Address setup time = 1 SYSCLK cycle.
10: Address setup time = 2 SYSCLK cycles.
11: Address setup time = 3 SYSCLK cycles.
EWR3-0: EMIF /WR and /RD Pulse-Width Control Bits.
0000: /WR and /RD pulse width = 1 SYSCLK cycle.
0001: /WR and /RD pulse width = 2 SYSCLK cycles.
0010: /WR and /RD pulse width = 3 SYSCLK cycles.
0011: /WR and /RD pulse width = 4 SYSCLK cycles.
0100: /WR and /RD pulse width = 5 SYSCLK cycles.
0101: /WR and /RD pulse width = 6 SYSCLK cycles.
0110: /WR and /RD pulse width = 7 SYSCLK cycles.
0111: /WR and /RD pulse width = 8 SYSCLK cycles.
1000: /WR and /RD pulse width = 9 SYSCLK cycles.
1001: /WR and /RD pulse width = 10 SYSCLK cycles.
1010: /WR and /RD pulse width = 11 SYSCLK cycles.
1011: /WR and /RD pulse width = 12 SYSCLK cycles.
1100: /WR and /RD pulse width = 13 SYSCLK cycles.
1101: /WR and /RD pulse width = 14 SYSCLK cycles.
1110: /WR and /RD pulse width = 15 SYSCLK cycles.
1111: /WR and /RD pulse width = 16 SYSCLK cycles.
EAH1-0: EMIF Address Hold Time Bits.
00: Address hold time = 0 SYSCLK cycles.
01: Address hold time = 1 SYSCLK cycle.
10: Address hold time = 2 SYSCLK cycles.
11: Address hold time = 3 SYSCLK cycles.
Rev. 1.2
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xA1
SFR Page: 0
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 17.1 lists the AC parameters for the External Memory Interface, and Figure 17.7 through
Figure 17.12 show the timing diagrams for the different External Memory Interface modes and MOVX
operations.
Rev. 1.2
195
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.6.1. Non-multiplexed Mode
17.6.1.1.16-bit MOVX: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘101’, ‘110’, or ‘111’.
Figure 17.7. Non-multiplexed 16-bit MOVX Timing
Nonmuxed 16-bit WRITE
ADDR[15:8]
P5
EMIF ADDRESS (8 MSBs) from DPH
P5
ADDR[7:0]
P6
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from DPL
P6
DATA[7:0]
P7
EMIF WRITE DATA
P7
T
T
WDS
T
WDH
T
ACS
T
ACW
ACH
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
Nonmuxed 16-bit READ
ADDR[15:8]
P5
EMIF ADDRESS (8 MSBs) from DPH
P5
ADDR[7:0]
P6
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from DPL
P6
DATA[7:0]
P7
EMIF READ DATA
P7
T
RDS
T
T
ACS
196
ACW
T
RDH
T
ACH
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.6.1.2.8-bit MOVX without Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘101’ or ‘111’.
Figure 17.8. Non-multiplexed 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select Timing
Nonmuxed 8-bit WRITE without Bank Select
ADDR[15:8]
P5
ADDR[7:0]
P6
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from R0 or R1
P6
DATA[7:0]
P7
EMIF WRITE DATA
P7
T
T
WDS
T
WDH
T
ACS
T
ACW
ACH
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
Nonmuxed 8-bit READ without Bank Select
ADDR[15:8]
P5
ADDR[7:0]
P6
DATA[7:0]
P7
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from R0 or R1
EMIF READ DATA
T
RDS
T
T
ACS
ACW
P6
P7
T
RDH
T
ACH
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
Rev. 1.2
197
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.6.1.3.8-bit MOVX with Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘110’.
Figure 17.9. Non-multiplexed 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select Timing
Nonmuxed 8-bit WRITE with Bank Select
ADDR[15:8]
P5
EMIF ADDRESS (8 MSBs) from EMI0CN
P5
ADDR[7:0]
P6
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from R0 or R1
P6
DATA[7:0]
P7
EMIF WRITE DATA
P7
T
T
WDS
T
WDH
T
ACS
T
ACW
ACH
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
Nonmuxed 8-bit READ with Bank Select
ADDR[15:8]
P5
EMIF ADDRESS (8 MSBs) from EMI0CN
P5
ADDR[7:0]
P6
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from R0 or R1
P6
DATA[7:0]
P7
EMIF READ DATA
T
RDS
T
T
ACS
198
ACW
P7
T
RDH
T
ACH
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.6.2. Multiplexed Mode
17.6.2.1.16-bit MOVX: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘001’, ‘010’, or ‘011’.
Figure 17.10. Multiplexed 16-bit MOVX Timing
Muxed 16-bit WRITE
ADDR[15:8]
P6
AD[7:0]
P7
EMIF ADDRESS (8 MSBs) from DPH
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from
DPL
T
ALEH
ALE
P6
EMIF WRITE DATA
P7
T
ALEL
P4.5
P4.5
T
T
WDS
T
ACS
WDH
T
T
ACW
ACH
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
Muxed 16-bit READ
ADDR[15:8]
P6
AD[7:0]
P7
EMIF ADDRESS (8 MSBs) from DPH
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from
DPL
T
ALEH
ALE
P6
EMIF READ DATA
T
T
ALEL
RDS
P7
T
RDH
P4.5
P4.5
T
ACS
T
ACW
T
ACH
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
Rev. 1.2
199
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.6.2.2.8-bit MOVX without Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘001’ or ‘011’.
Figure 17.11. Multiplexed 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select Timing
Muxed 8-bit WRITE Without Bank Select
ADDR[15:8]
AD[7:0]
P6
P7
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from
R0 or R1
T
ALEH
ALE
EMIF WRITE DATA
P7
T
ALEL
P4.5
P4.5
T
T
WDS
T
ACS
WDH
T
T
ACW
ACH
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
Muxed 8-bit READ Without Bank Select
ADDR[15:8]
AD[7:0]
P6
P7
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from
R0 or R1
T
ALEH
ALE
EMIF READ DATA
T
T
ALEL
RDS
T
RDH
P4.5
P4.5
T
ACS
200
P7
T
ACW
T
ACH
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
17.6.2.3.8-bit MOVX with Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = ‘010’.
Figure 17.12. Multiplexed 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select Timing
Muxed 8-bit WRITE with Bank Select
ADDR[15:8]
P6
AD[7:0]
P7
EMIF ADDRESS (8 MSBs) from EMI0CN
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from
R0 or R1
T
ALEH
ALE
P6
EMIF WRITE DATA
P7
T
ALEL
P4.5
P4.5
T
T
WDS
T
ACS
WDH
T
T
ACW
ACH
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
Muxed 8-bit READ with Bank Select
ADDR[15:8]
P6
AD[7:0]
P7
EMIF ADDRESS (8 MSBs) from EMI0CN
EMIF ADDRESS (8 LSBs) from
R0 or R1
T
ALEH
ALE
P6
EMIF READ DATA
T
T
ALEL
RDS
P7
T
RDH
P4.5
P4.5
T
ACS
T
ACW
T
ACH
/RD
P4.6
P4.6
/WR
P4.7
P4.7
Rev. 1.2
201
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 17.1. AC Parameters for External Memory Interface
Parameter
Description
Min
TSYSCLK
System Clock Period
40
TACS
Address / Control Setup Time
0
3*TSYSCLK
ns
TACW
Address / Control Pulse Width
1*TSYSCLK
16*TSYSCLK
ns
TACH
Address / Control Hold Time
0
3*TSYSCLK
ns
TALEH
Address Latch Enable High Time
1*TSYSCLK
4*TSYSCLK
ns
TALEL
Address Latch Enable Low Time
1*TSYSCLK
4*TSYSCLK
ns
TWDS
Write Data Setup Time
1*TSYSCLK
19*TSYSCLK
ns
TWDH
Write Data Hold Time
0
3*TSYSCLK
ns
TRDS
Read Data Setup Time
20
ns
TRDH
Read Data Hold Time
0
ns
202
Rev. 1.2
Max
Units
ns
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
18.
Port Input/Output
The C8051F06x family of devices are fully integrated mixed-signal System on a Chip MCUs with 59 digital
I/O pins (C8051F060/2/4/6) or 24 digital I/O pins (C8051F061/3/5/7), organized as 8-bit Ports. All ports are
both bit- and byte-addressable through their corresponding Port Data registers. All Port pins support configurable Open-Drain or Push-Pull output modes and weak pull-ups. Additionally, Port 0 pins are 5 V-tolerant. A block diagram of the Port I/O cell is shown in Figure 18.1. Complete Electrical Specifications for the
Port I/O pins are given in Table 18.1.
Figure 18.1. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram
/WEAK-PULLUP
VDD
VDD
PUSH-PULL
/PORT-OUTENABLE
(WEAK)
PORT
PAD
PORT-OUTPUT
ANALOG INPUT
DGND
Analog Select
(Port 1 and 2 Only)
PORT-INPUT
Table 18.1. Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V, -40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified.
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Output High Voltage
(VOH)
IOH = -3 mA, Port I/O Push-Pull
IOH = -10 µA, Port I/O Push-Pull
Output Low Voltage
(VOL)
IOL = 8.5 mA
IOL = 10 µA
Typ
VDD - 0.7
VDD - 0.1
Units
V
0.6
0.1
Input High Voltage (VIH)
V
0.7 x VDD
Input Low Voltage (VIL)
Input Leakage Current
Max
0.3 x VDD
DGND < Port Pin < VDD, Pin Tri-state
Weak Pull-up Off
Weak Pull-up On
Input Capacitance
Rev. 1.2
10
±1
µA
µA
5
pF
203
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
The C8051F06x family of devices have a wide array of digital resources which are available through the
four lower I/O Ports: P0, P1, P2, and (on the C8051F060/2/4/6) P3. Each of the pins on P0, P1, P2, and
P3, can be defined as a General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) pin or can be controlled by a digital peripheral or
function (like UART0 or /INT1 for example), as shown in Figure 18.2. The system designer controls which
digital functions are assigned pins, limited only by the number of pins available. This resource assignment
flexibility is achieved through the use of a Priority Crossbar Decoder. Note that the state of a Port I/O pin
can always be read from its associated Data register regardless of whether that pin has been assigned to
a digital peripheral or behaves as GPIO. The Port pins on Port 2 can be used as analog inputs to the analog Voltage comparators. On the C8051F060/1/2/3, the pins of Port 1 can be used as analog inputs for
ADC2.
The upper Ports (available on C8051F060/2/4/6) can be byte-accessed as GPIO pins, or used as part of
an External Memory Interface which is active during a MOVX instruction whose target address resides in
off-chip memory. See Section “17. External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM” on page 187 for
more information about the External Memory Interface.
Figure 18.2. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram
Highest
Priority
2
UART0
4
SPI
2
SMBus
2
(Internal Digital Signals)
UART1
Lowest
Priority
XBR0, XBR1, XBR2,
XBR3 P1MDIN,
P2MDIN, P3MDIN
Registers
External
Pins
Priority
Decoder
8
6
PCA
P0
I/O
Cells
P0.0
P1
I/O
Cells
P1.0
P2
I/O
Cells
P2.0
P3
I/O
Cells
P3.0
Highest
Priority
P0.7
2
Comptr.
Outputs
Digital
Crossbar
T0, T1,
T2, T2EX,
T3, T3EX,
T4,T4EX,
/INT0,
/INT1
8
P1.7
8
8
/SYSCLK
P2.7
CNVSTR2
8
8
P0
(P0.0-P0.7)
To
ADC2
Input
8
P1
Port
Latches
(P1.0-P1.7)
To
Comparators
8
P2
(P2.0-P2.7)
8
P3
204
P0MDOUT, P1MDOUT,
P2MDOUT, P3MDOUT
Registers
(P3.0-P3.7)
Rev. 1.2
P3.7
C8051F060/2
Only
Lowest
Priority
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
18.1. Ports 0 through 3 and the Priority Crossbar Decoder
The Priority Crossbar Decoder, or “Crossbar”, allocates and assigns Port pins on Port 0 through Port 3 to
the digital peripherals (UARTs, SMBus, PCA, Timers, etc.) on the device using a priority order. The Port
pins are allocated in order starting with P0.0 and continue through P3.7 (on the C8051F060/2/4/6) or P2.7
(on the C8051F061/3/5/7) if necessary. The digital peripherals are assigned Port pins in a priority order
which is listed in Figure 18.3, with UART0 having the highest priority and CNVSTR2 having the lowest priority.
18.1.1. Crossbar Pin Assignment and Allocation
The Crossbar assigns Port pins to a peripheral if the corresponding enable bits of the peripheral are set to
a logic 1 in the Crossbar configuration registers XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, and XBR3, shown in Figure 18.5,
Figure 18.6, Figure 18.7, and Figure 18.8. For example, if the UART0EN bit (XBR0.2) is set to a logic 1,
the TX0 and RX0 pins will be mapped to P0.0 and P0.1 respectively. Because UART0 has the highest priority, its pins will always be mapped to P0.0 and P0.1 when UART0EN is set to a logic 1. If a digital periphFigure 18.3. Priority Crossbar Decode Table
(P1MDIN = 0xFF; P2MDIN = 0xFF)
P0
PIN I/O 0
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
P3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
●
SPI0EN: XBR0.1
●
CEX5
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
SMB0EN: XBR0.0
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
UART1EN: XBR2.2
PCA0ME: XBR0.[5:3]
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
ECI0E: XBR0.6
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CP0E: XBR0.7
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CP0-
●
NSS is not assigned to a port pin when the SPI is placed in 3-wire mode
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CP0+
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CP2-
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CP2+
●
● ●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
CP1-
●
CP1+
●
●
●
CP0
●
CP1
●
CP2
●
T0
●
/INT0
●
T1
●
/INT1
●
T2
●
T2EX
●
T3
●
T3EX
●
T4
●
T4EX
/SYSCLK ●
CNVSTR2 ●
Crossbar Register Bits
UART0EN: XBR0.2
CEX4
ECI
P2
4
AIN2.7
CEX3
3
AIN2.6
CEX2
2
AIN2.5
CEX1
1
AIN2.4
CEX0
0
AIN2.3
RX1
7
AIN2.2
TX1
6
AIN2.1
SCL
5
●
MOSI
SDA
P1
4
●
●
MISO
NSS
3
●
RX0
SCK
2
AIN2.0
TX0
1
CP1E: XBR1.0
Rev. 1.2
CP2E: XBR3.3
T0E: XBR1.1
INT0E: XBR1.2
T1E: XBR1.3
INT1E: XBR1.4
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
T2E: XBR1.5
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
T2EXE: XBR1.6
●
●
●
●
●
●
T3E: XBR3.0
●
●
●
●
●
T3EXE: XBR3.1
●
● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
T4E: XBR2.3
T4EXE: XBR2.4
SYSCKE: XBR1.7
CNVSTE2: XBR3.2
205
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
eral’s enable bits are not set to a logic 1, then its ports are not accessible at the Port pins of the device.
Also note that the Crossbar assigns pins to all associated functions when the SMBus, UART0 or UART1
are selected (i.e. SMBus, SPI, UART). It would be impossible, for example, to assign TX0 to a Port pin
without assigning RX0 as well. The SPI can operate in 3 or 4-wire mode (with or without NSS). Each combination of enabled peripherals results in a unique device pinout.
All Port pins on Ports 0 through 3 that are not allocated by the Crossbar can be accessed as General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) pins by reading and writing the associated Port Data registers (See Figure 18.9,
Figure 18.11, Figure 18.14, and Figure 18.17), a set of SFRs which are both byte- and bit-addressable.
The output states of Port pins that are allocated by the Crossbar are controlled by the digital peripheral that
is mapped to those pins. Writes to the Port Data registers (or associated Port bits) will have no effect on
the states of these pins.
A Read of a Port Data register (or Port bit) will always return the logic state present at the pin itself, regardless of whether the Crossbar has allocated the pin for peripheral use or not. An exception to this occurs
during the execution of a read-modify-write instruction (ANL, ORL, XRL, CPL, INC, DEC, DJNZ, JBC,
CLR, SETB, and the bitwise MOV write operation). During the read cycle of the read-modify-write instruction, it is the contents of the Port Data register, not the state of the Port pins themselves, which is read.
Because the Crossbar registers affect the pinout of the peripherals of the device, they are typically configured in the initialization code of the system before the peripherals themselves are configured. Once configured, the Crossbar registers are typically left alone.
Once the Crossbar registers have been properly configured, the Crossbar is enabled by setting XBARE
(XBR2.4) to a logic 1. Until XBARE is set to a logic 1, the output drivers on Ports 0 through 3 are
explicitly disabled in order to prevent possible contention on the Port pins while the Crossbar registers and other registers which can affect the device pinout are being written.
The output drivers on Crossbar-assigned input signals (like RX0, for example) are explicitly disabled; thus
the values of the Port Data registers and the PnMDOUT registers have no effect on the states of these
pins.
18.1.2. Configuring the Output Modes of the Port Pins
The output drivers on Ports 0 through 3 remain disabled until the Crossbar is enabled by setting XBARE
(XBR2.4) to a logic 1.
The output mode of each port pin can be configured to be either Open-Drain or Push-Pull. In the Push-Pull
configuration, writing a logic 0 to the associated bit in the Port Data register will cause the Port pin to be
driven to GND, and writing a logic 1 will cause the Port pin to be driven to VDD. In the Open-Drain configuration, writing a logic 0 to the associated bit in the Port Data register will cause the Port pin to be driven to
GND, and a logic 1 will cause the Port pin to assume a high-impedance state. The Open-Drain configuration is useful to prevent contention between devices in systems where the Port pin participates in a shared
interconnection in which multiple outputs are connected to the same physical wire (like the SDA signal on
an SMBus connection).
The output modes of the Port pins on Ports 0 through 3 are determined by the bits in the associated PnMDOUT registers (See Figure 18.10, Figure 18.13, Figure 18.16, and Figure 18.18). For example, a logic 1
in P3MDOUT.7 will configure the output mode of P3.7 to Push-Pull; a logic 0 in P3MDOUT.7 will configure
the output mode of P3.7 to Open-Drain. All Port pins default to Open-Drain output.
206
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
The PnMDOUT registers control the output modes of the port pins regardless of whether the Crossbar has
allocated the Port pin for a digital peripheral or not. The exceptions to this rule are: the Port pins connected
to SDA, SCL, RX0 (if UART0 is in Mode 0), and RX1 (if UART1 is in Mode 0) are always configured as
Open-Drain outputs, regardless of the settings of the associated bits in the PnMDOUT registers.
18.1.3. Configuring Port Pins as Digital Inputs
A Port pin is configured as a digital input by setting its output mode to “Open-Drain” and writing a logic 1 to
the associated bit in the Port Data register. For example, P3.7 is configured as a digital input by setting
P3MDOUT.7 to a logic 0 and P3.7 to a logic 1.
If the Port pin has been assigned to a digital peripheral by the Crossbar and that pin functions as an input
(for example RX0, the UART0 receive pin), then the output drivers on that pin are automatically disabled.
18.1.4. Weak Pull-ups
By default, each Port pin has an internal weak pull-up device enabled which provides a resistive connection (about 100 kΩ) between the pin and VDD. The weak pull-up devices can be globally disabled by writing a logic 1 to the Weak Pull-up Disable bit, (WEAKPUD, XBR2.7). The weak pull-up is automatically
deactivated on any pin that is driving a logic 0; that is, an output pin will not contend with its own pull-up
device. The weak pull-up device can also be explicitly disabled on a Port 1 pin by configuring the pin as an
Analog Input, as described below.
18.1.5. Configuring Port 1 and 2 pins as Analog Inputs
The pins on Port 1 can serve as analog inputs to the ADC2 analog MUX (C8051F060/1/2/3 only) and the
pins on Port 2 can serve as analog inputs to the Comparators (all devices). A Port pin is configured as an
Analog Input by writing a logic 0 to the associated bit in the PnMDIN registers. All Port pins default to a
Digital Input mode. Configuring a Port pin as an analog input:
1. Disables the digital input path from the pin. This prevents additional power supply current from
being drawn when the voltage at the pin is near VDD / 2. A read of the Port Data bit will return
a logic 0 regardless of the voltage at the Port pin.
2. Disables the weak pull-up device on the pin.
3. Causes the Crossbar to “skip over” the pin when allocating Port pins for digital peripherals.
Note that the output drivers on a pin configured as an Analog Input are not explicitly disabled. Therefore,
the associated PnMDOUT bits of pins configured as Analog Inputs should explicitly be set to logic 0
(Open-Drain output mode), and the associated Port Data bits should be set to logic 1 (high-impedance).
Also note that it is not required to configure a Port pin as an Analog Input in order to use it as an input to
ADC2 or the Comparators, however, it is strongly recommended. See the analog peripheral’s corresponding section in this datasheet for further information.
Rev. 1.2
207
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
18.1.6. Crossbar Pin Assignment Example
In this example (Figure 18.4), we configure the Crossbar to allocate Port pins for UART0, the SMBus, all 6
PCA modules, /INT0, and /INT1 (12 pins total). Additionally, we configure P1.2, P1.3, and P1.4 for Analog
Input mode so that the voltages at these pins can be measured by ADC2. The configuration steps are as
follows:
XBR0, XBR1, and XBR2 are set such that UART0EN = 1, SMB0EN = 1, PCA0ME = ‘110’, INT0E = 1, and
INT1E = 1. Thus: XBR0 = 0x3D, XBR1 = 0x14, and XBR2 = 0x40.
1. We configure the desired Port 1 pins to Analog Input mode by setting P1MDIN to 0xE3 (P1.4,
P1.3, and P1.2 are Analog Inputs, so their associated P1MDIN bits are set to logic 0).
2. We enable the Crossbar by setting XBARE = 1: XBR2 = 0x40.
- UART0 has the highest priority, so P0.0 is assigned to TX0, and P0.1 is assigned to RX0.
- The SMBus is next in priority order, so P0.2 is assigned to SDA, and P0.3 is assigned to
SCL.
- PCA0 is next in priority order, so P0.4 through P1.1 are assigned to CEX0 through CEX5
- P1MDIN is set to 0xE3, which configures P1.2, P1.3, and P1.4 as Analog Inputs, causing
the Crossbar to skip these pins.
- /INT0 is next in priority order, so it is assigned to the next non-skipped pin, which is P1.5.
- /INT1 is next in priority order, so it is assigned to P1.6.
3. We set the UART0 TX pin (TX0, P0.0) output and the CEX0-3 outputs to Push-Pull by setting
P0MDOUT = 0xF1.
4. We explicitly disable the output drivers on the 3 Analog Input pins by setting the corresponding
bits in the P1MDOUT register to ‘0’, and in P1 to ‘1’. Additionally, the CEX5-4 output pins are
set to Push-Pull mode. Therefore, P1MDOUT = 0x03 (configure unused pins to Open-Drain)
and P1 = 0xFF (a logic 1 selects the high-impedance state).
208
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.4. Crossbar Example:
(P1MDIN = 0xE3; XBR0 = 0x3D; XBR1 = 0x14; XBR2 = 0x40)
P0
PIN I/O 0
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
P3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
●
●
SPI0EN: XBR0.1
●
●
CEX5
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
SMB0EN: XBR0.0
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
UART1EN: XBR2.2
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
PCA0ME: XBR0.[5:3]
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CP0-
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CP0+
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CP2-
●
● ●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
CP2+
●
CP1-
●
●
●
CP0
●
CP1
●
CP2
●
T0
●
/INT0
●
T1
●
/INT1
●
T2
●
T2EX
●
T3
●
T3EX
●
T4
●
T4EX
/SYSCLK ●
CNVSTR2 ●
Crossbar Register Bits
UART0EN: XBR0.2
CEX4
ECI
P2
4
CP1+
CEX3
3
AIN2.7
CEX2
2
AIN2.6
CEX1
1
AIN2.5
CEX0
0
AIN2.4
RX1
7
AIN2.3
TX1
6
AIN2.2
SCL
5
AIN2.1
●
MOSI
SDA
P1
4
●
MISO
NSS
3
●
RX0
SCK
2
AIN2.0
TX0
1
Rev. 1.2
ECI0E: XBR0.6
CP0E: XBR0.7
CP1E: XBR1.0
CP2E: XBR3.3
T0E: XBR1.1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
INT0E: XBR1.2
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
T1E: XBR1.3
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
INT1E: XBR1.4
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
T2E: XBR1.5
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
T2EXE: XBR1.6
●
●
●
●
●
●
T3E: XBR3.0
●
●
●
●
●
T3EXE: XBR3.1
●
●
●
●
T4E: XBR2.3
T4EXE: XBR2.4
SYSCKE: XBR1.7
CNVSTE2: XBR3.2
209
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.5. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar Register 0
R/W
R/W
CP0E
ECI0E
Bit7
Bit6
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bits5-3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
210
R/W
R/W
R/W
PCA0ME
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
UART0EN
SPI0EN
SMB0EN
00000000
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xE1
SFR Page: F
CP0E: Comparator 0 Output Enable Bit.
0: CP0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: CP0 routed to Port pin.
ECI0E: PCA0 External Counter Input Enable Bit.
0: PCA0 External Counter Input unavailable at Port pin.
1: PCA0 External Counter Input (ECI0) routed to Port pin.
PCA0ME: PCA0 Module I/O Enable Bits.
000: All PCA0 I/O unavailable at port pins.
001: CEX0 routed to port pin.
010: CEX0, CEX1 routed to 2 port pins.
011: CEX0, CEX1, and CEX2 routed to 3 port pins.
100: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2, and CEX3 routed to 4 port pins.
101: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2, CEX3, and CEX4 routed to 5 port pins.
110: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2, CEX3, CEX4, and CEX5 routed to 6 port pins.
UART0EN: UART0 I/O Enable Bit.
0: UART0 I/O unavailable at Port pins.
1: UART0 TX routed to P0.0, and RX routed to P0.1.
SPI0EN: SPI0 Bus I/O Enable Bit.
0: SPI0 I/O unavailable at Port pins.
4-wire mode:
1: SPI0 SCK, MISO, MOSI, and NSS routed to 4 Port pins.
3-wire mode:
1: SPI0 SCK, MISO and MOSI routed to 3 Port pins.
SMB0EN: SMBus0 Bus I/O Enable Bit.
0: SMBus0 I/O unavailable at Port pins.
1: SMBus0 SDA and SCL routed to 2 Port pins.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.6. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar Register 1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
SYSCKE
T2EXE
T2E
INT1E
T1E
INT0E
T0E
CP1E
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xE2
SFR Page: F
SYSCKE: /SYSCLK Output Enable Bit.
0: /SYSCLK unavailable at Port pin.
1: /SYSCLK routed to Port pin.
T2EXE: T2EX Input Enable Bit.
0: T2EX unavailable at Port pin.
1: T2EX routed to Port pin.
T2E: T2 Input Enable Bit.
0: T2 unavailable at Port pin.
1: T2 routed to Port pin.
INT1E: /INT1 Input Enable Bit.
0: /INT1 unavailable at Port pin.
1: /INT1 routed to Port pin.
T1E: T1 Input Enable Bit.
0: T1 unavailable at Port pin.
1: T1 routed to Port pin.
INT0E: /INT0 Input Enable Bit.
0: /INT0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: /INT1 routed to Port pin.
T0E: T0 Input Enable Bit.
0: T0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: T1 routed to Port pin.
CP1E: CP1 Output Enable Bit.
0: CP1 unavailable at Port pin.
1: CP1 routed to Port pin.
Rev. 1.2
211
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.7. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar Register 2
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
WEAKPUD
XBARE
-
T4EXE
T4E
UART1E
-
-
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bits1-0:
212
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xE3
SFR Page: F
WEAKPUD: Weak Pull-Up Disable Bit.
0: Weak pull-ups globally enabled.
1: Weak pull-ups globally disabled.
XBARE: Crossbar Enable Bit.
0: Crossbar disabled. All pins on Ports 0, 1, 2, and 3, are forced to Input mode.
1: Crossbar enabled.
UNUSED. Read = 0, Write = don't care.
T4EXE: T4EX Input Enable Bit.
0: T4EX unavailable at Port pin.
1: T4EX routed to Port pin.
T4E: T4 Input Enable Bit.
0: T4 unavailable at Port pin.
1: T4 routed to Port pin.
UART1E: UART1 I/O Enable Bit.
0: UART1 I/O unavailable at Port pins.
1: UART1 TX and RX routed to 2 Port pins.
Reserved
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.8. XBR3: Port I/O Crossbar Register 3
R
R
R
CTXOUT
-
-
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit7:
Bit6-4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
R/W
Bit4
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
CP2E
CNVST2E
T3EXE
T3E
00000000
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xE4
SFR Page: F
CTXOUT: CAN Transmit Pin (CTX) Output Mode.
0: CTX pin output mode is configured as open-drain.
1: CTX pin output mode is configured as push-pull.
Reserved
CP2E: CP2 Output Enable Bit.
0: CP2 unavailable at Port pin.
1: CP2 routed to Port pin.
CNVST2E: ADC2 External Convert Start Input Enable Bit.
0: CNVST2 for ADC2 unavailable at Port pin.
1: CNVST2 for ADC2 routed to Port pin.
T3EXE: T3EX Input Enable Bit.
0: T3EX unavailable at Port pin.
1: T3EX routed to Port pin.
T3E: T3 Input Enable Bit.
0: T3 unavailable at Port pin.
1: T3 routed to Port pin.
Rev. 1.2
213
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.9. P0: Port0 Data Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
P0.7
P0.6
P0.5
P0.4
P0.3
P0.2
P0.1
P0.0
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bits7-0:
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0x80
SFR Page: All Pages
Bit0
P0.[7:0]: Port0 Output Latch Bits.
(Write - Output appears on I/O pins per XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, and XBR3 Registers)
0: Logic Low Output.
1: Logic High Output (open if corresponding P0MDOUT.n bit = 0).
(Read - Regardless of XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, and XBR3 Register settings).
0: P0.n pin is logic low.
1: P0.n pin is logic high.
Figure 18.10. P0MDOUT: Port0 Output Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xA4
SFR Page: F
Bits7-0:
P0MDOUT.[7:0]: Port0 Output Mode Bits.
0: Port Pin output mode is configured as Open-Drain.
1: Port Pin output mode is configured as Push-Pull.
Note:
SDA, SCL, and RX0 (when UART0 is in Mode 0) and RX1 (when UART1 is in Mode 0) are
always configured as Open-Drain when they appear on Port pins.
214
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.11. P1: Port1 Data Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
P1.7
P1.6
P1.5
P1.4
P1.3
P1.2
P1.1
P1.0
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bits7-0:
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0x90
SFR Page: All Pages
Bit0
P1.[7:0]: Port1 Output Latch Bits.
(Write - Output appears on I/O pins per XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, and XBR3 Registers)
0: Logic Low Output.
1: Logic High Output (open if corresponding P1MDOUT.n bit = 0).
(Read - Regardless of XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, and XBR3 Register settings).
0: P1.n pin is logic low.
1: P1.n pin is logic high.
Note:
On the C8051F060/1/2/3, P1.[7:0] can be configured as inputs to ADC2 as AIN2.[7:0], in
which case they are ‘skipped’ by the Crossbar assignment process and their digital input
paths are disabled, depending on P1MDIN (See Figure 18.12). Note that in analog mode,
the output mode of the pin is determined by the Port 1 latch and P1MDOUT (Figure 18.13).
See Section “7. 10-Bit ADC (ADC2, C8051F060/1/2/3)” on page 87 for more information
about ADC2.
Figure 18.12. P1MDIN: Port1 Input Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
11111111
Bits7-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xAD
SFR Page: F
P1MDIN.[7:0]: Port 1 Input Mode Bits.
0: Port Pin is configured in Analog Input mode. The digital input path is disabled (a read from
the Port bit will always return ‘0’). The weak pull-up on the pin is disabled.
1: Port Pin is configured in Digital Input mode. A read from the Port bit will return the logic
level at the Pin. The state of the weak pull-up is determined by the WEAKPUD bit (XBR2.7,
see Figure 18.7).
Rev. 1.2
215
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.13. P1MDOUT: Port1 Output Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xA5
SFR Page: F
Bits7-0:
P1MDOUT.[7:0]: Port1 Output Mode Bits.
0: Port Pin output mode is configured as Open-Drain.
1: Port Pin output mode is configured as Push-Pull.
Note:
SDA, SCL, and RX0 (when UART0 is in Mode 0) and RX1 (when UART1 is in Mode 0) are
always configured as Open-Drain when they appear on Port pins.
Figure 18.14. P2: Port2 Data Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
P2.7
P2.6
P2.5
P2.4
P2.3
P2.2
P2.1
P2.0
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bits7-0:
216
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xA0
SFR Page: All Pages
Bit0
P2.[7:0]: Port2 Output Latch Bits.
(Write - Output appears on I/O pins per XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, and XBR3 Registers)
0: Logic Low Output.
1: Logic High Output (open if corresponding P2MDOUT.n bit = 0).
(Read - Regardless of XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, and XBR3 Register settings).
0: P2.n pin is logic low.
1: P2.n pin is logic high.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.15. P2MDIN: Port2 Input Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
11111111
Bit7
Bits7-0:
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xAE
SFR Page: F
P2MDIN.[7:0]: Port 2 Input Mode Bits.
0: Port Pin is configured in Analog Input mode. The digital input path is disabled (a read from
the Port bit will always return ‘0’). The weak pull-up on the pin is disabled.
1: Port Pin is configured in Digital Input mode. A read from the Port bit will return the logic
level at the Pin. The state of the weak pull-up is determined by the WEAKPUD bit (XBR2.7,
see Figure 18.7).
Figure 18.16. P2MDOUT: Port2 Output Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xA6
SFR Page: F
Bits7-0:
P2MDOUT.[7:0]: Port2 Output Mode Bits.
0: Port Pin output mode is configured as Open-Drain.
1: Port Pin output mode is configured as Push-Pull.
Note:
SDA, SCL, and RX0 (when UART0 is in Mode 0) and RX1 (when UART1 is in Mode 0) are
always configured as Open-Drain when they appear on Port pins.
Rev. 1.2
217
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.17. P3: Port3 Data Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
P3.7
P3.6
P3.5
P3.4
P3.3
P3.2
P3.1
P3.0
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xB0
SFR Page: All Pages
Bit0
Bits7-0:
P3.[7:0]: Port3 Output Latch Bits.
(Write - Output appears on I/O pins per XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, and XBR3 Registers)
0: Logic Low Output.
1: Logic High Output (open if corresponding P3MDOUT.n bit = 0).
(Read - Regardless of XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, and XBR3 Register settings).
0: P3.n pin is logic low.
1: P3.n pin is logic high.
Note:
Although P3 is not brought out to pins on the C8051F061/3/5/7 devices, the Port Data register is still present and can be used by software. See “Configuring Ports which are not Pinned
Out” on page 219.
Figure 18.18. P3MDOUT: Port3 Output Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
218
P3MDOUT.[7:0]: Port3 Output Mode Bits.
0: Port Pin output mode is configured as Open-Drain.
1: Port Pin output mode is configured as Push-Pull.
Rev. 1.2
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xA7
SFR Page: F
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
18.2. Ports 4 through 7 (C8051F060/2/4/6 only)
All Port pins on Ports 4 through 7 can be accessed as General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) pins by reading and
writing the associated Port Data registers (See Figure 18.19, Figure 18.21, Figure 18.23, and
Figure 18.25), a set of SFRs which are byte-addressable. Note that Port 4 has only three pins: P4.5, P4.6,
and P4.7. Note also that the Port 4, 5, 6, and 7 registers are located on SFR Page F. The SFRPAGE register must be set to 0x0F to access these Port registers.
A Read of a Port Data register (or Port bit) will always return the logic state present at the pin itself, regardless of whether the Crossbar has allocated the pin for peripheral use or not. An exception to this occurs
during the execution of a read-modify-write instruction (ANL, ORL, XRL, CPL, INC, DEC, DJNZ, JBC,
CLR, SETB, and the bitwise MOV write operation). During the read cycle of the read-modify-write instruction, it is the contents of the Port Data register, not the state of the Port pins themselves, which is read.
18.2.1. Configuring Ports which are not Pinned Out
Although P3, P4, P5, P6, and P7 are not brought out to pins on the C8051F061/3/5/7 devices, the Port
Data registers are still present and can be used by software. Because the digital input paths also remain
active, it is recommended that these pins not be left in a ‘floating’ state in order to avoid unnecessary
power dissipation arising from the inputs floating to non-valid logic levels. This condition can be prevented
by any of the following:
1. Leave the weak pull-up devices enabled by setting WEAKPUD (XBR2.7) to a logic 0.
2. Configure the output modes of P3, P4, P5, P6, and P7 to “Push-Pull” by writing 0xFF to the
associated output mode register (PnMDOUT).
3. Force the output states of P3, P4, P5, P6, and P7 to logic 0 by writing zeros to the Port Data
registers: P3 = 0x00, P4 = 0x00, P5 = 0x00, P6= 0x00, and P7 = 0x00.
18.2.2. Configuring the Output Modes of the Port Pins
The output mode of each port pin can be configured to be either Open-Drain or Push-Pull. In the Push-Pull
configuration, a logic 0 in the associated bit in the Port Data register will cause the Port pin to be driven to
GND, and a logic 1 will cause the Port pin to be driven to VDD. In the Open-Drain configuration, a logic 0 in
the associated bit in the Port Data register will cause the Port pin to be driven to GND, and a logic 1 will
cause the Port pin to assume a high-impedance state. The Open-Drain configuration is useful to prevent
contention between devices in systems where the Port pin participates in a shared interconnection in
which multiple outputs are connected to the same physical wire.
The output modes of the Port pins on Ports 4 through 7 are determined by the bits in their respective PnMDOUT Output Mode Registers. Each bit in PnMDOUT controls the output mode of its corresponding port
pin (see Figure 18.20, Figure 18.22, Figure 18.24, and Figure 18.26). For example, to place Port pin 5.3 in
push-pull mode (digital output), set P5MDOUT.3 to logic 1. All port pins default to open-drain mode upon
device reset.
18.2.3. Configuring Port Pins as Digital Inputs
A Port pin is configured as a digital input by setting its output mode to “Open-Drain” and writing a logic 1 to
the associated bit in the Port Data register. For example, P7.7 is configured as a digital input by setting
P7MDOUT.7 to a logic 0 and P7.7 to a logic 1.
18.2.4. Weak Pull-ups
By default, each Port pin has an internal weak pull-up device enabled which provides a resistive connection (about 100 kΩ) between the pin and VDD. The weak pull-up devices can be globally disabled by writ-
Rev. 1.2
219
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
ing a logic 1 to the Weak Pull-up Disable bit, (WEAKPUD, XBR2.7). The weak pull-up is automatically
deactivated on any pin that is driving a logic 0; that is, an output pin will not contend with its own pull-up
device.
18.2.5. External Memory Interface
If the External Memory Interface is enabled on the High ports and an off-chip MOVX operation occurs, the
External Memory Interface will control the output states of the affected Port pins during the execution
phase of the MOVX instruction, regardless of the settings of the Port Data registers. The output configuration of the Port pins is not affected by the EMIF operation, except that Read operations will explicitly disable the output drivers on the Data Bus during the MOVX execution. See Section “17. External Data
Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM” on page 187 for more information about the External Memory Interface.
220
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.19. P4: Port4 Data Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
P4.7
P4.6
P4.5
-
-
-
-
-
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xC8
SFR Page: F
Bit0
Bits7-5:
P4.[7:5]: Port4 Output Latch Bits.
Write - Output appears on I/O pins.
0: Logic Low Output.
1: Logic High Output (open, if corresponding P4MDOUT.n bit = 0). See Figure 18.20.
Read - Returns states of I/O pins.
0: P4.n pin is logic low.
1: P4.n pin is logic high.
Bits 4-0: Reserved. Write to ‘11111’.
Note: P4.7 (/WR), P4.6 (/RD), and P4.5 (ALE) can be driven by the External Data Memory
Interface. See Section “17. External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM” on
page 187 for more information.
Figure 18.20. P4MDOUT: Port4 Output Mode Register
R/W
Bit7
R/W
Bit6
R/W
Bit5
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
-
00000000
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x9C
SFR Page: F
Bits7-5:
P4MDOUT.[7:5]: Port4 Output Mode Bits.
0: Port Pin output mode is configured as Open-Drain.
1: Port Pin output mode is configured as Push-Pull.
Bits 4-0: Reserved. Write to ‘00000’.
Rev. 1.2
221
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.21. P5: Port5 Data Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
P5.7
P5.6
P5.5
P5.4
P5.3
P5.2
P5.1
P5.0
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xD8
SFR Page: F
Bit0
Bits7-0:
P5.[7:0]: Port5 Output Latch Bits.
Write - Output appears on I/O pins.
0: Logic Low Output.
1: Logic High Output (open, if corresponding P5MDOUT bit = 0). See Figure 18.22.
Read - Returns states of I/O pins.
0: P5.n pin is logic low.
1: P5.n pin is logic high.
Note:
P5.[7:0] can be driven by the External Data Memory Interface (as Address[15:8] in Non-multiplexed mode). See Section “17. External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM” on
page 187 for more information about the External Memory Interface.
Figure 18.22. P5MDOUT: Port5 Output Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
222
P5MDOUT.[7:0]: Port5 Output Mode Bits.
0: Port Pin output mode is configured as Open-Drain.
1: Port Pin output mode is configured as Push-Pull.
Rev. 1.2
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x9D
SFR Page: F
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.23. P6: Port6 Data Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
P6.7
P6.6
P6.5
P6.4
P6.3
P6.2
P6.1
P6.0
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xE8
SFR Page: F
Bit0
Bits7-0:
P6.[7:0]: Port6 Output Latch Bits.
Write - Output appears on I/O pins.
0: Logic Low Output.
1: Logic High Output (open, if corresponding P6MDOUT bit = 0). See Figure 18.24.
Read - Returns states of I/O pins.
0: P6.n pin is logic low.
1: P6.n pin is logic high.
Note:
P6.[7:0] can be driven by the External Data Memory Interface (as Address[15:8] in Multiplexed mode, or as Address[7:0] in Non-multiplexed mode). See Section “17. External Data
Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM” on page 187 for more information about the External
Memory Interface.
Figure 18.24. P6MDOUT: Port6 Output Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x9E
SFR Page: F
P6MDOUT.[7:0]: Port6 Output Mode Bits.
0: Port Pin output mode is configured as Open-Drain.
1: Port Pin output mode is configured as Push-Pull.
Rev. 1.2
223
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 18.25. P7: Port7 Data Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
P7.7
P7.6
P7.5
P7.4
P7.3
P7.2
P7.1
P7.0
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xF8
SFR Page: F
Bit0
Bits7-0:
P7.[7:0]: Port7 Output Latch Bits.
Write - Output appears on I/O pins.
0: Logic Low Output.
1: Logic High Output (open, if corresponding P7MDOUT bit = 0). See Figure 18.26.
Read - Returns states of I/O pins.
0: P7.n pin is logic low.
1: P7.n pin is logic high.
Note:
P7.[7:0] can be driven by the External Data Memory Interface (as AD[7:0] in Multiplexed
mode, or as D[7:0] in Non-multiplexed mode). See Section “17. External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM” on page 187 for more information about the External Memory
Interface.
Figure 18.26. P7MDOUT: Port7 Output Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
224
P7MDOUT.[7:0]: Port7 Output Mode Bits.
0: Port Pin output mode is configured as Open-Drain.
1: Port Pin output mode is configured as Push-Pull.
Rev. 1.2
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x9F
SFR Page: F
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
19.
Controller Area Network (CAN0, C8051F060/1/2/3)
IMPORTANT DOCUMENTATION NOTE: The Bosch CAN Controller is integrated in the C8051F060/1/2/3
devices. This section of the data sheet gives a description of the CAN controller as an overview and offers
a description of how the Silicon Labs CIP-51 MCU interfaces with the on-chip Bosch CAN controller. In
order to use the CAN controller, please refer to Bosch’s C_CAN User’s Manual (revision 1.2) as an accompanying manual to Silicon Labs’ C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 Data sheet.
The C8051F060/1/2/3 family of devices feature a Control Area Network (CAN) controller that enables
serial communication using the CAN protocol. Silicon Labs CAN controller facilitates communication on a
CAN network in accordance with the Bosch specification 2.0A (basic CAN) and 2.0B (full CAN). The CAN
controller consists of a CAN Core, Message RAM (separate from the CIP-51 RAM), a message handler
state machine, and control registers. Silicon Labs CAN is a protocol controller and does not provide physical layer drivers (i.e., transceivers). Figure 19.2 shows an example typical configuration on a CAN bus.
Silicon Labs CAN operates at bit rates of up to 1 Mbit/second, though this can be limited by the physical
layer chosen to transmit data on the CAN bus. The CAN processor has 32 Message Objects that can be
configured to transmit or receive data. Incoming data, message objects and their identifier masks are
stored in the CAN message RAM. All protocol functions for transmission of data and acceptance filtering is
performed by the CAN controller and not by the CIP-51 MCU. In this way, minimal CPU bandwidth is
needed to use CAN communication. The CIP-51 configures the CAN controller, accesses received data,
and passes data for transmission via Special Function Registers (SFR) in the CIP-51. The CAN controller’s clock (fsys, or CAN_CLK in the C_CAN User’s Guide) is equal to the CIP-51 MCU’s clock (SYSCLK).
Rev. 1.2
225
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 19.1. CAN Controller Diagram
CANRX
CANTX
C8051F060/1/2/3
C
8
0
5
1
CAN Controller
TX
RX
CAN
Core
Message RAM
REGISTERS
(32 Message Objects)
Message Handler
S
F
R
's
M
C
U
Interrupt
Figure 19.2. Typical CAN Bus Configuration
C8051F06x
CANTX
CANRX
CAN
Transceiver
Isolation/Buffer (Optional)
CAN Protocol Device
CAN Protocol Device
CAN
Transceiver
CAN
Transceiver
Isolation/Buffer (Optional)
Isolation/Buffer (Optional)
CAN_H
R
R
CAN_L
226
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
19.1. Bosch CAN Controller Operation
The CAN Controller featured in the C8051F060/1/2/3 devices is a full implementation of Bosch’s full CAN
module and fully complies with CAN specification 2.0B.
The function and use of the CAN Controller is detailed in the Bosch CAN User’s Guide. The User’s Guide
should be used as a reference to configure and use the CAN controller. This Silicon Labs datasheet
describes how to access the CAN controller.
The CAN Control Register (CAN0CN), CAN Test Register (CAN0TST), and CAN Status Register
(CAN0STA) in the CAN controller can be accessed directly or indirectly via CIP-51 SFRs. All other CAN
registers must be accessed via an indirect indexing method. See “Using CAN0ADR, CAN0DATH, and
CANDATL To Access CAN Registers” on page 229.
Rev. 1.2
227
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
19.2. CAN Registers
CAN registers are classified as follows:
1. CAN Controller Protocol Registers: CAN control, interrupt, error control, bus status, test
modes.
2. Message Object Interface Registers: Used to configure 32 Message Objects, send and
receive data to and from Message Objects. The C8051 MCU accesses the CAN message
RAM via the Message Object Interface Registers. Upon writing a message object number
to an IF1 or IF2 Command Request Register, the contents of the associated Interface
Registers (IF1 or IF2) will be transferred to or from the message object in CAN RAM.
3. Message Handler Registers: These read only registers are used to provide information to
the CIP-51 MCU about the message objects (MSGVLD flags, Transmission Request
Pending, New Data Flags) and Interrupts Pending (which Message Objects have caused
an interrupt or status interrupt condition).
4. C8051 MCU Special Function Registers (SFR): Five registers located in the C8051 MCU
memory map that allow direct access to certain CAN Controller Protocol Registers, and
Indexed indirect access to all CAN registers.
19.2.1. CAN Controller Protocol Registers
The CAN Control Protocol Registers are used to configure the CAN controller, process interrupts, monitor
bus status, and place the controller in test modes. The CAN controller protocol registers are accessible
using C8051 MCU SFRs by an indexed method, and some can be accessed directly by addressing the
SFRs in the C8051 SFR map for convenience.
The registers are: CAN Control Register (CAN0CN), CAN Status Register (CAN0STA), CAN Test Register
(CAN0TST), Error Counter Register, Bit Timing Register, and the Baud Rate Prescaler (BRP) Extension
Register. CAN0STA, CAN0CN, and CAN0TST can be accessed via C8051 MCU SFRs. All others are
accessed indirectly using the CAN address indexed method via CAN0ADR, CAN0DATH, and CAN0DATL.
Please refer to the Bosch CAN User’s Guide for information on the function and use of the CAN
Control Protocol Registers.
19.2.2. Message Object Interface Registers
There are two sets of Message Object Interface Registers used to configure the 32 Message Objects that
transmit and receive data to and from the CAN bus. Message objects can be configured for transmit or
receive, and are assigned arbitration message identifiers for acceptance filtering by all CAN nodes.
Message Objects are stored in Message RAM, and are accessed and configured using the Message
Object Interface Registers. These registers are accessed via the C8051’s CAN0ADR and CAN0DAT registers using the indirect indexed address method.
Please refer to the Bosch CAN User’s Guide for information on the function and use of the Message Object Interface Registers.
19.2.3. Message Handler Registers
The Message Handler Registers are read only registers. Their flags can be read via the indexed access
method with CAN0ADR, CAN0DATH, and CAN0DATL. The message handler registers provide interrupt,
error, transmit/receive requests, and new data information.
228
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Please refer to the Bosch CAN User’s Guide for information on the function and use of the Message Handler Registers.
19.2.4. CIP-51 MCU Special Function Registers
C8051F060/1/2/3 peripherals are modified, monitored, and controlled using Special Function Registers
(SFRs). Most of the CAN Controller registers cannot be accessed directly using the SFRs. Three of the
CAN Controller’s registers may be accessed directly with SFRs. All other CAN Controller registers are
accessed indirectly using three CIP-51 MCU SFRs: the CAN Data Registers (CAN0DATH and
CAN0DATL) and CAN Address Register (CAN0ADR). In this way, there are a total of five CAN registers
used to configure and run the CAN Controller.
19.2.5. Using CAN0ADR, CAN0DATH, and CANDATL To Access CAN Registers
Each CAN Controller Register has an index number (see Table below). The CAN register address space
is 128 words (256 bytes). A CAN register is accessed via the CAN Data Registers (CAN0DATH and
CAN0DATL) when a CAN register’s index number is placed into the CAN Address Register (CAN0ADR).
For example, if the Bit Timing Register is to be configured with a new value, CAN0ADR is loaded with
0x03. The low byte of the desired value is accessed using CAN0DATL and the high byte of the bit timing
register is accessed using CAN0DATH. CAN0DATL is bit addressable for convenience. To load the value
0x2304 into the Bit Timing Register:
CAN0ADR = 0x03;
CAN0DATH = 0x23;
CAN0DATL = 0x04;
// Load Bit Timing Register’s index (Table 18.1)
// Move the upper byte into data reg high byte
// Move the lower byte into data reg low byte
Note: CAN0CN, CAN0STA, and CAN0TST may be accessed either by using the index method, or by direct
access with the CIP-51 MCU SFRs. CAN0CN is located at SFR location 0xF8/SFR page 1 (Figure 19.6),
CAN0TST at 0xDB/SFR page 1 (Figure 19.7), and CAN0STA at 0xC0/SFR page 1 (Figure 19.8).
19.2.6. CAN0ADR Autoincrement Feature
For ease of programming message objects, CAN0ADR features autoincrementing for the index ranges
0x08 to 0x12 (Interface Registers 1) and 0x20 to 0x2A (Interface Registers 2). When the CAN0ADR register has an index in these ranges, the CAN0ADR will autoincrement by 1 to point to the next CAN register 16-bit word upon a read/write of CAN0DATL. This speeds programming of the frequently
programmed interface registers when configuring message objects.
NOTE: Table below supersedes Figure 5 in section 3, “Programmer’s Model” of the Bosch CAN
User’s Guide.
Table 19.1. CAN Register Index and Reset Values
CAN Register
Index
Register name
Reset
Value
0x00
CAN Control Register
0x0001 Accessible in CIP-51 SFR Map
0x01
Status Register
0x0000 Accessible in CIP-51 SFR Map
0x02
Error Register
0x0000 Read Only
0x03
Bit Timing Register
Notes
0x2301 Write Enabled by CCE Bit in CAN0CN
Rev. 1.2
229
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 19.1. CAN Register Index and Reset Values (Continued)
CAN Register
Index
Register name
0x04
Interrupt Register
0x05
Test Register
0x06
BRP Extension Register
0x0000 Write Enabled by TEST bit in CAN0CN
0x08
IF1 Command Request
0x0001 CAN0ADR autoincrements in IF1 index space (0x08
- 0x12) upon write to CAN0DATL
0x09
IF1 Command Mask
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x0A
IF1 Mask 1
0xFFFF CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x0B
IF1 Mask 2
0xFFFF CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x0C
IF1 Arbitration 1
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x0D
IF1 Arbitration 2
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x0E
IF1 Message Control
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x0F
IF1 Data A1
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x10
IF1 Data A2
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x11
IF1 Data B1
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x12
IF1 Data B2
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x20
IF2 Command Request
0x0001 CAN0ADR autoincrements in IF1 index space (0x08
- 0x12) upon write to CAN0DATL
0x21
IF2 Command Mask
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x22
IF2 Mask 1
0xFFFF CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x23
IF2 Mask 2
0xFFFF CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x24
IF2 Arbitration 1
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x25
IF2 Arbitration 2
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x26
IF2 Message Control
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x27
IF2 Data A1
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x28
IF2 Data A2
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x29
IF2 Data B1
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x2A
IF2 Data B2
0x0000 CAN0ADR autoincrement upon write to CAN0DATL
0x40
Transmission Request 1
0x0000 Transmission request flags for message objects
(read only)
0x41
Transmission Request 2
0x0000 Transmission request flags for message objects
(read only)
0x48
New Data 1
0x0000 New Data flags for message objects (read only)
0x49
New Data 2
0x0000 New Data flags for message objects (read only)
0x50
Interrupt Pending 1
0x0000 Interrupt pending flags for message objects (read
only)
0x51
Interrupt Pending 2
0x0000 Interrupt pending flags for message objects (read
only)
0x58
Message Valid 1
230
Reset
Value
Notes
0x0000 Read Only
0x0000 Bit 7 (RX) is determined by CAN bus
0x0000 Message valid flags for message objects (read only)
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 19.1. CAN Register Index and Reset Values (Continued)
CAN Register
Index
Register name
Reset
Value
0x59
Message Valid 2
0x0000 Message valid flags for message objects (read only)
Notes
Figure 19.3. CAN0DATH: CAN Data Access Register High Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD9
SFR Page: 1
CAN0DATH: CAN Data Access Register High Byte.
The CAN0DAT Registers are used to read/write register values and data to and from the
CAN Registers pointed to with the index number in the CAN0ADR Register.
The CAN0ADR Register is used to point the [CAN0DATH:CAN0DATL] to a desired CAN
Register. The desired CAN Register’s index number is moved into CAN0ADR. The
CAN0DAT Register can then read/write to and from the CAN Register.
Figure 19.4. CAN0DATL: CAN Data Access Register Low Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000001
Bit7-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD8
SFR Page: 1
CAN0DATL: CAN Data Access Register Low Byte.
The CAN0DAT Registers are used to read/write register values and data to and from the
CAN Registers pointed to with the index number in the CAN0ADR Register.
The CAN0ADR Register is used to point the [CAN0DATH:CAN0DATL] to a desired CAN
Register. The desired CAN Register’s index number is moved into CAN0ADR. The
CAN0DAT Register can then read/write to and from the CAN Register.
Rev. 1.2
231
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 19.5. CAN0ADR: CAN Address Index Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xDA
SFR Page: 1
CAN0ADR: CAN Address Index Register.
The CAN0ADR Register is used to point the [CAN0DATH:CAN0DATL] to a desired CAN
Register. The desired CAN Register’s index number is moved into CAN0ADR. The
CAN0DAT Register can then read/write to and from the CAN Register.
Note: When the value of CAN0ADR is 0x08-0x12 and 0x20-2A (IF1 and IF2 registers), this
register will autoincrement by 1 upon a write to CAN0DATL. See Section “19.2.6. CAN0ADR
Autoincrement Feature” on page 229.
All CAN registers’ functions/definitions are listed and described in the Bosch CAN
User’s Guide.
Figure 19.6. CAN0CN: CAN Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
*
*
*
CANIF
*
*
*
*
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit 4:
Reset Value
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xF8
SFR Page: 1
CANIF: CAN Interrupt Flag. Write = don’t care.
0: CAN interrupt has not occured.
1: CAN interrupt has occured and is active.
CANIF is controlled by the CAN controller and is cleared by hardware once all interrupt conditions have been cleared in the CAN controller. See section 3.4.1 in the Bosch CAN User’s
Guide (page 24) for more information concerning CAN controller interrupts.
*All CAN registers’ functions/definitions are listed and described in the Bosch CAN
User’s Guide with the exception of the CANIF bit.
This register may be accessed directly in the CIP-51 SFR register space, or through the indirect, index method (See Section “19.2.5. Using CAN0ADR, CAN0DATH, and CANDATL To
Access CAN Registers” on page 229).
232
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 19.7. CAN0TST: CAN Test Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
Please see the Bosch CAN User’s Guide for a complete definition of this register
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xDB
SFR Page: 1
All CAN registers’ functions/definitions are listed and described in the Bosch CAN
User’s Guide.
This register may be accessed directly in the CIP-51 SFR register space, or through the indirect, index method (See Section “19.2.5. Using CAN0ADR, CAN0DATH, and CANDATL To
Access CAN Registers” on page 229).
Figure 19.8. CAN0STA: CAN Status Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
Please see the Bosch CAN User’s Guide for a complete definition of this register
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xC0
SFR Page: 1
All CAN registers’ functions/definitions are listed and described in the Bosch CAN
User’s Guide.
This register may be accessed directly in the CIP-51 SFR register space, or through the indirect, index method (See Section “19.2.5. Using CAN0ADR, CAN0DATH, and CANDATL To
Access CAN Registers” on page 229).
Rev. 1.2
233
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
234
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
20.
System Management BUS / I2C BUS (SMBUS0)
The SMBus0 I/O interface is a two-wire, bi-directional serial bus. SMBus0 is compliant with the System
Management Bus Specification, version 1.1, and compatible with the I2C serial bus. Reads and writes to
the interface by the system controller are byte oriented with the SMBus0 interface autonomously controlling the serial transfer of the data. A method of extending the clock-low duration is available to accommodate devices with different speed capabilities on the same bus.
SMBus0 may operate as a master and/or slave, and may function on a bus with multiple masters. SMBus0
provides control of SDA (serial data), SCL (serial clock) generation and synchronization, arbitration logic,
and START/STOP control and generation.
Figure 20.1. SMBus0 Block Diagram
SFR Bus
SMB0CN
B
U
S
Y
SMB0STA
E S S S A F T
N T T I A T O
S A O
E E
M
B
S
T
A
7
S
T
A
6
S
T
A
5
S
T
A
4
S
T
A
3
S
T
A
2
SMB0CR
S
T
A
1
S
T
A
0
C C C C C C C C
R R R R R R R R
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Clock Divide
Logic
SYSCLK
SCL
FILTER
SMBUS CONTROL LOGIC
SMBUS
IRQ
Arbitration
SCL Synchronization
Status Generation
SCL Generation (Master Mode)
IRQ Generation
B
SCL
Control
Data Path
Control
N
SDA
Control
C
R
O
S
S
B
A
R
A=B
A=B
Interrupt
Request
A
B
A
Port I/O
0000000b
7 MSBs
8
7
SMB0DAT
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
S
L
V
6
S
L
V
5
S
L
V
4
S
L
V
3
S
L
V
2
S
L
V
1
S
L
V G
0 C
8
8
SDA
FILTER
1
N
0
Read
SMB0DAT
SMB0ADR
Write to
SMB0DAT
SFR Bus
Rev. 1.2
235
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 20.2 shows a typical SMBus configuration. The SMBus0 interface will work at any voltage between
3.0 V and 5.0 V and different devices on the bus may operate at different voltage levels. The bi-directional
SCL (serial clock) and SDA (serial data) lines must be connected to a positive power supply voltage
through a pull-up resistor or similar circuit. Every device connected to the bus must have an open-drain or
open-collector output for both the SCL and SDA lines, so that both are pulled high when the bus is free.
The maximum number of devices on the bus is limited only by the requirement that the rise and fall times
on the bus will not exceed 300 ns and 1000 ns, respectively.
Figure 20.2. Typical SMBus Configuration
VDD = 5V
VDD = 3V
VDD = 5V
VDD = 3V
Master
Device
Slave
Device 1
Slave
Device 2
SDA
SCL
20.1. Supporting Documents
It is assumed the reader is familiar with or has access to the following supporting documents:
1. The I2C-bus and how to use it (including specifications), Philips Semiconductor.
2. The I2C-Bus Specification -- Version 2.0, Philips Semiconductor.
3. System Management Bus Specification -- Version 1.1, SBS Implementers Forum.
20.2. SMBus Protocol
Two types of data transfers are possible: data transfers from a master transmitter to an addressed slave
receiver (WRITE), and data transfers from an addressed slave transmitter to a master receiver (READ).
The master device initiates both types of data transfers and provides the serial clock pulses on SCL. Note:
multiple master devices on the same bus are supported. If two or more masters attempt to initiate a data
transfer simultaneously, an arbitration scheme is employed with a single master always winning the arbitration. Note that it is not necessary to specify one device as the master in a system; any device who transmits a START and a slave address becomes the master for that transfer.
A typical SMBus transaction consists of a START condition followed by an address byte (Bits7-1: 7-bit
slave address; Bit0: R/W direction bit), one or more bytes of data, and a STOP condition. Each byte that is
received (by a master or slave) must be acknowledged (ACK) with a low SDA during a high SCL (see
Figure 20.3). If the receiving device does not ACK, the transmitting device will read a “not acknowledge”
(NACK), which is a high SDA during a high SCL.
236
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
The direction bit (R/W) occupies the least-significant bit position of the address. The direction bit is set to
logic 1 to indicate a "READ" operation and cleared to logic 0 to indicate a "WRITE" operation.
All transactions are initiated by a master, with one or more addressed slave devices as the target. The
master generates the START condition and then transmits the slave address and direction bit. If the transaction is a WRITE operation from the master to the slave, the master transmits the data a byte at a time
waiting for an ACK from the slave at the end of each byte. For READ operations, the slave transmits the
data waiting for an ACK from the master at the end of each byte. At the end of the data transfer, the master
generates a STOP condition to terminate the transaction and free the bus. Figure 20.3 illustrates a typical
SMBus transaction.
Figure 20.3. SMBus Transaction
SCL
SDA
SLA6
START
SLA5-0
R/W
Slave Address + R/W
D7
ACK
D6-0
Data Byte
NACK
STOP
20.2.1. Arbitration
A master may start a transfer only if the bus is free. The bus is free after a STOP condition or after the SCL
and SDA lines remain high for a specified time (see Section 20.2.4). In the event that two or more devices
attempt to begin a transfer at the same time, an arbitration scheme is employed to force one master to give
up the bus. The master devices continue transmitting until one attempts a HIGH while the other transmits a
LOW. Since the bus is open-drain, the bus will be pulled LOW. The master attempting the HIGH will detect
a LOW SDA and give up the bus. The winning master continues its transmission without interruption; the
losing master becomes a slave and receives the rest of the transfer. This arbitration scheme is nondestructive: one device always wins, and no data is lost.
20.2.2. Clock Low Extension
SMBus provides a clock synchronization mechanism, similar to I2C, which allows devices with different
speed capabilities to coexist on the bus. A clock-low extension is used during a transfer in order to allow
slower slave devices to communicate with faster masters. The slave may temporarily hold the SCL line
LOW to extend the clock low period, effectively decreasing the serial clock frequency.
20.2.3. SCL Low Timeout
If the SCL line is held low by a slave device on the bus, no further communication is possible. Furthermore,
the master cannot force the SCL line high to correct the error condition. To solve this problem, the SMBus
protocol specifies that devices participating in a transfer must detect any clock cycle held low longer than
25 ms as a “timeout” condition. Devices that have detected the timeout condition must reset the communication no later than 10 ms after detecting the timeout condition.
20.2.4. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout
The SMBus specification stipulates that if the SCL and SDA lines remain high for more that 50 µs, the bus
is designated as free. If an SMBus device is waiting to generate a Master START, the START will be generated following the bus free timeout.
Rev. 1.2
237
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
20.3. SMBus Transfer Modes
The SMBus0 interface may be configured to operate as a master and/or a slave. At any particular time, the
interface will be operating in one of the following modes: Master Transmitter, Master Receiver, Slave
Transmitter, or Slave Receiver. See Table 20.1 for transfer mode status decoding using the SMB0STA status register. The following mode descriptions illustrate an interrupt-driven SMBus0 application; SMBus0
may alternatively be operated in polled mode.
20.3.1. Master Transmitter Mode
Serial data is transmitted on SDA while the serial clock is output on SCL. SMBus0 generates a START
condition and then transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave device and the data
direction bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 0 to indicate a "WRITE" operation. The
SMBus0 interface transmits one or more bytes of serial data, waiting for an acknowledge (ACK) from the
slave after each byte. To indicate the end of the serial transfer, SMBus0 generates a STOP condition.
Figure 20.4. Typical Master Transmitter Sequence
S
SLA
W
Interrupt
A
Data Byte
Interrupt
A
Data Byte
Interrupt
A
P
Interrupt
S = START
P = STOP
A = ACK
W = WRITE
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
20.3.2. Master Receiver Mode
Serial data is received on SDA while the serial clock is output on SCL. The SMBus0 interface generates a
START followed by the first data byte containing the address of the target slave and the data direction bit.
In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 1 to indicate a "READ" operation. The SMBus0 interface receives serial data from the slave and generates the clock on SCL. After each byte is received,
SMBus0 generates an ACK or NACK depending on the state of the AA bit in register SMB0CN. SMBus0
generates a STOP condition to indicate the end of the serial transfer.
Figure 20.5. Typical Master Receiver Sequence
S
SLA
R
Interrupt
A
Data Byte
Interrupt
Data Byte
Interrupt
N
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
Rev. 1.2
P
Interrupt
S = START
P = STOP
A = ACK
N = NACK
R = READ
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
238
A
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
20.3.3. Slave Transmitter Mode
Serial data is transmitted on SDA while the serial clock is received on SCL. The SMBus0 interface receives
a START followed by data byte containing the slave address and direction bit. If the received slave address
matches the address held in register SMB0ADR, the SMBus0 interface generates an ACK. SMBus0 will
also ACK if the general call address (0x00) is received and the General Call Address Enable bit
(SMB0ADR.0) is set to logic 1. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 1 to indicate a "READ"
operation. The SMBus0 interface receives the clock on SCL and transmits one or more bytes of serial
data, waiting for an ACK from the master after each byte. SMBus0 exits slave mode after receiving a
STOP condition from the master.
Figure 20.6. Typical Slave Transmitter Sequence
Interrupt
S
SLA
R
A
Data Byte
Interrupt
A
Data Byte
Interrupt
N
P
Interrupt
S = START
P = STOP
N = NACK
R = READ
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
20.3.4. Slave Receiver Mode
Serial data is received on SDA while the serial clock is received on SCL. The SMBus0 interface receives a
START followed by data byte containing the slave address and direction bit. If the received slave address
matches the address held in register SMB0ADR, the interface generates an ACK. SMBus0 will also ACK if
the general call address (0x00) is received and the General Call Address Enable bit (SMB0ADR.0) is set to
logic 1. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 0 to indicate a "WRITE" operation. The
SMBus0 interface receives one or more bytes of serial data; after each byte is received, the interface
Rev. 1.2
239
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
transmits an ACK or NACK depending on the state of the AA bit in SMB0CN. SMBus0 exits Slave Receiver
Mode after receiving a STOP condition from the master.
Figure 20.7. Typical Slave Receiver Sequence
Interrupt
S
SLA
W
A
Interrupt
Data Byte
A
Interrupt
A
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
Rev. 1.2
P
Interrupt
S = START
P = STOP
A = ACK
W = WRITE
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
240
Data Byte
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
20.4. SMBus Special Function Registers
The SMBus0 serial interface is accessed and controlled through five SFRs: SMB0CN Control Register,
SMB0CR Clock Rate Register, SMB0ADR Address Register, SMB0DAT Data Register and SMB0STA Status Register. The five special function registers related to the operation of the SMBus0 interface are
described in the following sections.
20.4.1. Control Register
The SMBus0 Control register SMB0CN is used to configure and control the SMBus0 interface. All of the
bits in the register can be read or written by software. Two of the control bits are also affected by the
SMBus0 hardware. The Serial Interrupt flag (SI, SMB0CN.3) is set to logic 1 by the hardware when a valid
serial interrupt condition occurs. It can only be cleared by software. The Stop flag (STO, SMB0CN.4) is set
to logic 1 by software. It is cleared to logic 0 by hardware when a STOP condition is detected on the bus.
Setting the ENSMB flag to logic 1 enables the SMBus0 interface. Clearing the ENSMB flag to logic 0 disables the SMBus0 interface and removes it from the bus. Momentarily clearing the ENSMB flag and then
resetting it to logic 1 will reset SMBus0 communication. However, ENSMB should not be used to temporarily remove a device from the bus since the bus state information will be lost. Instead, the Assert
Acknowledge (AA) flag should be used to temporarily remove the device from the bus (see description of
AA flag below).
Setting the Start flag (STA, SMB0CN.5) to logic 1 will put SMBus0 in a master mode. If the bus is free,
SMBus0 will generate a START condition. If the bus is not free, SMBus0 waits for a STOP condition to free
the bus and then generates a START condition after a 5 µs delay per the SMB0CR value (In accordance
with the SMBus protocol, the SMBus0 interface also considers the bus free if the bus is idle for 50 µs and
no STOP condition was recognized). If STA is set to logic 1 while SMBus0 is in master mode and one or
more bytes have been transferred, a repeated START condition will be generated.
When the Stop flag (STO, SMB0CN.4) is set to logic 1 while the SMBus0 interface is in master mode, the
interface generates a STOP condition. In a slave mode, the STO flag may be used to recover from an error
condition. In this case, a STOP condition is not generated on the bus, but the SMBus hardware behaves
as if a STOP condition has been received and enters the "not addressed" slave receiver mode. Note that
this simulated STOP will not cause the bus to appear free to SMBus0. The bus will remain occupied until a
STOP appears on the bus or a Bus Free Timeout occurs. Hardware automatically clears the STO flag to
logic 0 when a STOP condition is detected on the bus.
The Serial Interrupt flag (SI, SMB0CN.3) is set to logic 1 by hardware when the SMBus0 interface enters
one of 27 possible states. If interrupts are enabled for the SMBus0 interface, an interrupt request is generated when the SI flag is set. The SI flag must be cleared by software.
Important Note: If SI is set to logic 1 while the SCL line is low, the clock-low period of the serial clock will
be stretched and the serial transfer is suspended until SI is cleared to logic 0. A high level on SCL is not
affected by the setting of the SI flag.
The Assert Acknowledge flag (AA, SMB0CN.2) is used to set the level of the SDA line during the acknowledge clock cycle on the SCL line. Setting the AA flag to logic 1 will cause an ACK (low level on SDA) to be
sent during the acknowledge cycle if the device has been addressed. Setting the AA flag to logic 0 will
cause a NACK (high level on SDA) to be sent during acknowledge cycle. After the transmission of a byte in
slave mode, the slave can be temporarily removed from the bus by clearing the AA flag. The slave's own
address and general call address will be ignored. To resume operation on the bus, the AA flag must be
reset to logic 1 to allow the slave's address to be recognized.
Rev. 1.2
241
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Setting the SMBus0 Free Timer Enable bit (FTE, SMB0CN.1) to logic 1 enables the timer in SMB0CR.
When SCL goes high, the timer in SMB0CR counts up. A timer overflow indicates a free bus timeout: if
SMBus0 is waiting to generate a START, it will do so after this timeout. The bus free period should be less
than 50 µs (see Figure 20.9, SMBus0 Clock Rate Register).
When the TOE bit in SMB0CN is set to logic 1, Timer 4 is used to detect SCL low timeouts. If Timer 4 is
enabled (see Section “24.2. Timer 2, Timer 3, and Timer 4” on page 295), Timer 4 is forced to reload when
SCL is high, and forced to count when SCL is low. With Timer 4 enabled and configured to overflow after
242
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25 ms (and TOE set), a Timer 4 overflow indicates a SCL low timeout; the Timer 4 interrupt service routine
can then be used to reset SMBus0 communication in the event of an SCL low timeout.
Figure 20.8. SMB0CN: SMBus0 Control Register
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
BUSY
ENSMB
STA
STO
SI
AA
FTE
TOE
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xC0
SFR Page: 0
Bit0
BUSY: Busy Status Flag.
0: SMBus0 is free.
1: SMBus0 is busy.
ENSMB: SMBus Enable.
This bit enables/disables the SMBus serial interface.
0: SMBus0 disabled.
1: SMBus0 enabled.
STA: SMBus Start Flag.
0: No START condition is transmitted.
1: When operating as a master, a START condition is transmitted if the bus is free. (If the
bus is not free, the START is transmitted after a STOP is received.) If STA is set after one or
more bytes have been transmitted or received and before a STOP is received, a repeated
START condition is transmitted.
STO: SMBus Stop Flag.
0: No STOP condition is transmitted.
1: Setting STO to logic 1 causes a STOP condition to be transmitted. When a STOP condition is received, hardware clears STO to logic 0. If both STA and STO are set, a STOP condition is transmitted followed by a START condition. In slave mode, setting the STO flag
causes SMBus to behave as if a STOP condition was received.
SI: SMBus Serial Interrupt Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when one of 27 possible SMBus0 states is entered. (Status code
0xF8 does not cause SI to be set.) When the SI interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes
the CPU to vector to the SMBus interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically
cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
AA: SMBus Assert Acknowledge Flag.
This bit defines the type of acknowledge returned during the acknowledge cycle on the SCL
line.
0: A "not acknowledge" (high level on SDA) is returned during the acknowledge cycle.
1: An "acknowledge" (low level on SDA) is returned during the acknowledge cycle.
FTE: SMBus Free Timer Enable Bit.
0: No timeout when SCL is high.
1: Timeout when SCL high time exceeds limit specified by the SMB0CR value.
TOE: SMBus Timeout Enable Bit.
0: No timeout when SCL is low.
1: Timeout when SCL low time exceeds limit specified by Timer 4, if enabled.
Rev. 1.2
243
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
20.4.2. Clock Rate Register
Figure 20.9. SMB0CR: SMBus0 Clock Rate Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xCF
SFR Page: 0
SMB0CR.[7:0]: SMBus0 Clock Rate Preset.
The SMB0CR Clock Rate register controls the frequency of the serial clock SCL in master
mode. The 8-bit word stored in the SMB0CR Register preloads a dedicated 8-bit timer. The
timer counts up, and when it rolls over to 0x00, the SCL logic state toggles.
The SMB0CR setting should be bounded by the following equation , where SMB0CR is the
unsigned 8-bit value in register SMB0CR, and SYSCLK is the system clock frequency in Hz:
6
SMB0CR < ( ( 288 – 0.85 ⋅ SYSCLK ) ⁄ ( 1.125 ⋅ 10 ) )
The resulting SCL signal high and low times are given by the following equations:
T LOW = ( 256 – SMB0CR ) ⁄ SYSCLK
T HIGH ≅ ( 258 – SMB0CR ) ⁄ SYSCLK + 625ns
Using the same value of SMB0CR from above, the Bus Free Timeout period is given in the
following equation:
( 256 – SMB0CR ) + 1
T BFT ≅ 10 × ----------------------------------------------------SYSCLK
244
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
20.4.3. Data Register
The SMBus0 Data register SMB0DAT holds a byte of serial data to be transmitted or one that has just
been received. Software can read or write to this register while the SI flag is set to logic 1; software should
not attempt to access the SMB0DAT register when the SMBus is enabled and the SI flag reads logic 0
since the hardware may be in the process of shifting a byte of data in or out of the register.
Data in SMB0DAT is always shifted out MSB first. After a byte has been received, the first bit of received
data is located at the MSB of SMB0DAT. While data is being shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously
being shifted in. Therefore, SMB0DAT always contains the last data byte present on the bus. In the event
of lost arbitration, the transition from master transmitter to slave receiver is made with the correct data in
SMB0DAT.
Figure 20.10. SMB0DAT: SMBus0 Data Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xC2
SFR Page: 0
SMB0DAT: SMBus0 Data.
The SMB0DAT register contains a byte of data to be transmitted on the SMBus0 serial interface or a byte that has just been received on the SMBus0 serial interface. The CPU can
read from or write to this register whenever the SI serial interrupt flag (SMB0CN.3) is set to
logic 1. When the SI flag is not set, the system may be in the process of shifting data and the
CPU should not attempt to access this register.
20.4.4. Address Register
The SMB0ADR Address register holds the slave address for the SMBus0 interface. In slave mode, the
seven most-significant bits hold the 7-bit slave address. The least significant bit (Bit0) is used to enable the
recognition of the general call address (0x00). If Bit0 is set to logic 1, the general call address will be recog-
Rev. 1.2
245
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
nized. Otherwise, the general call address is ignored. The contents of this register are ignored when
SMBus0 is operating in master mode.
Figure 20.11. SMB0ADR: SMBus0 Address Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
SLV6
SLV5
SLV4
SLV3
SLV2
SLV1
SLV0
GC
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xC3
SFR Page: 0
Bits7-1:
SLV6-SLV0: SMBus0 Slave Address.
These bits are loaded with the 7-bit slave address to which SMBus0 will respond when operating as a slave transmitter or slave receiver. SLV6 is the most significant bit of the address
and corresponds to the first bit of the address byte received.
Bit0:
GC: General Call Address Enable.
This bit is used to enable general call address (0x00) recognition.
0: General call address is ignored.
1: General call address is recognized.
20.4.5. Status Register
The SMB0STA Status register holds an 8-bit status code indicating the current state of the SMBus0 interface. There are 28 possible SMBus0 states, each with a corresponding unique status code. The five most
significant bits of the status code vary while the three least-significant bits of a valid status code are fixed at
zero when SI = ‘1’. Therefore, all possible status codes are multiples of eight. This facilitates the use of status codes in software as an index used to branch to appropriate service routines (allowing 8 bytes of code
to service the state or jump to a more extensive service routine).
246
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
For the purposes of user software, the contents of the SMB0STA register is only defined when the SI flag is
logic 1. Software should never write to the SMB0STA register; doing so will yield indeterminate results. The
28 SMBus0 states, along with their corresponding status codes, are given in Table 1.1.
Figure 20.12. SMB0STA: SMBus0 Status Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
STA7
STA6
STA5
STA4
STA3
STA2
STA1
STA0
11111000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xC1
SFR Page: 0
Bits7-3:
STA7-STA3: SMBus0 Status Code.
These bits contain the SMBus0 Status Code. There are 28 possible status codes; each status code corresponds to a single SMBus state. A valid status code is present in SMB0STA
when the SI flag (SMB0CN.3) is set to logic 1. The content of SMB0STA is not defined when
the SI flag is logic 0. Writing to the SMB0STA register at any time will yield indeterminate
results.
Bits2-0:
STA2-STA0: The three least significant bits of SMB0STA are always read as logic 0 when
the SI flag is logic 1.
Rev. 1.2
247
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 20.1. SMB0STA Status Codes and States
Master Receiver
Master Transmitter
MT/
MR
Mode
248
Status
Code
SMBus State
Typical Action
0x08
START condition transmitted.
Load SMB0DAT with Slave Address +
R/W. Clear STA.
0x10
Repeated START condition transmitted.
Load SMB0DAT with Slave Address +
R/W. Clear STA.
0x18
Slave Address + W transmitted. ACK
received.
Load SMB0DAT with data to be transmitted.
0x20
Slave Address + W transmitted. NACK
received.
Acknowledge poll to retry. Set STO +
STA.
0x28
Data byte transmitted. ACK received.
0x30
Data byte transmitted. NACK received.
1) Retry transfer OR
2) Set STO.
0x38
Arbitration Lost.
Save current data.
0x40
Slave Address + R transmitted. ACK received.
If only receiving one byte, clear AA (send
NACK after received byte). Wait for
received data.
0x48
Slave Address + R transmitted. NACK
received.
Acknowledge poll to retry. Set STO +
STA.
0x50
Data byte received. ACK transmitted.
Read SMB0DAT. Wait for next byte. If
next byte is last byte, clear AA.
0x58
Data byte received. NACK transmitted.
Set STO.
Rev. 1.2
1) Load SMB0DAT with next byte, OR
2) Set STO, OR
3) Clear STO then set STA for repeated
START.
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 20.1. SMB0STA Status Codes and States
All
Slave
Slave Transmitter
Slave Receiver
Mode
Status
Code
SMBus State
Typical Action
0x60
Own slave address + W received. ACK transmitted.
Wait for data.
0x68
Arbitration lost in sending SLA + R/W as master. Own address + W received. ACK transmitted.
Save current data for retry when bus is
free. Wait for data.
0x70
General call address received. ACK transmitted.
Wait for data.
0x78
Arbitration lost in sending SLA + R/W as master. General call address received. ACK transmitted.
Save current data for retry when bus is
free.
0x80
Data byte received. ACK transmitted.
Read SMB0DAT. Wait for next byte or
STOP.
0x88
Data byte received. NACK transmitted.
Set STO to reset SMBus.
0x90
Data byte received after general call address.
ACK transmitted.
Read SMB0DAT. Wait for next byte or
STOP.
0x98
Data byte received after general call address.
NACK transmitted.
Set STO to reset SMBus.
0xA0
STOP or repeated START received.
No action necessary.
0xA8
Own address + R received. ACK transmitted.
Load SMB0DAT with data to transmit.
0xB0
Arbitration lost in transmitting SLA + R/W as
master. Own address + R received. ACK
transmitted.
Save current data for retry when bus is
free. Load SMB0DAT with data to transmit.
0xB8
Data byte transmitted. ACK received.
Load SMB0DAT with data to transmit.
0xC0
Data byte transmitted. NACK received.
Wait for STOP.
0xC8
Last data byte transmitted (AA=0). ACK
received.
Set STO to reset SMBus.
0xD0
SCL Clock High Timer per SMB0CR timed out
Set STO to reset SMBus.
0x00
Bus Error (illegal START or STOP)
Set STO to reset SMBus.
0xF8
Idle
State does not set SI.
Rev. 1.2
249
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
250
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
21.
Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0)
The Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) provides access to a flexible, full-duplex synchronous
serial bus. SPI0 can operate as a master or slave device in both 3-wire or 4-wire modes, and supports multiple masters and slaves on a single SPI bus. The slave-select (NSS) signal can be configured as an input
to select SPI0 in slave mode, or to disable Master Mode operation in a multi-master environment, avoiding
contention on the SPI bus when more than one master attempts simultaneous data transfers. NSS can
also be configured as a chip-select output in master mode, or disabled for 3-wire operation. Additional general purpose port I/O pins can be used to select multiple slave devices in master mode.
Figure 21.1. SPI Block Diagram
SFR Bus
SYSCLK
SPI0CN
SPIBSY
MSTEN
CKPHA
CKPOL
SLVSEL
NSSIN
SRMT
RXBMT
SPIF
WCOL
MODF
RXOVRN
NSSMD1
NSSMD0
TXBMT
SPIEN
SPI0CFG
SCR7
SCR6
SCR5
SCR4
SCR3
SCR2
SCR1
SCR0
SPI0CKR
Clock Divide
Logic
SPI CONTROL LOGIC
Data Path
Control
SPI IRQ
Pin Interface
Control
MOSI
Tx Data
SPI0DAT
SCK
Transmit Data Buffer
Shift Register
Rx Data
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Receive Data Buffer
Write
SPI0DAT
Pin
Control
Logic
MISO
C
R
O
S
S
B
A
R
Port I/O
NSS
Read
SPI0DAT
SFR Bus
Rev. 1.2
251
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
21.1. Signal Descriptions
The four signals used by SPI0 (MOSI, MISO, SCK, NSS) are described below.
21.1.1. Master Out, Slave In (MOSI)
The master-out, slave-in (MOSI) signal is an output from a master device and an input to slave devices. It
is used to serially transfer data from the master to the slave. This signal is an output when SPI0 is operating as a master and an input when SPI0 is operating as a slave. Data is transferred most-significant bit
first. When configured as a master, MOSI is driven by the MSB of the shift register in both 3- and 4-wire
mode.
21.1.2. Master In, Slave Out (MISO)
The master-in, slave-out (MISO) signal is an output from a slave device and an input to the master device.
It is used to serially transfer data from the slave to the master. This signal is an input when SPI0 is operating as a master and an output when SPI0 is operating as a slave. Data is transferred most-significant bit
first. The MISO pin is placed in a high-impedance state when the SPI module is disabled and when the SPI
operates in 4-wire mode as a slave that is not selected. When acting as a slave in 3-wire mode, MISO is
always driven by the MSB of the shift register.
21.1.3. Serial Clock (SCK)
The serial clock (SCK) signal is an output from the master device and an input to slave devices. It is used
to synchronize the transfer of data between the master and slave on the MOSI and MISO lines. SPI0 generates this signal when operating as a master. The SCK signal is ignored by a SPI slave when the slave is
not selected (NSS = 1) in 4-wire slave mode.
21.1.4. Slave Select (NSS)
The function of the slave-select (NSS) signal is dependent on the setting of the NSSMD1 and NSSMD0
bits in the SPI0CN register. There are three possible modes that can be selected with these bits:
1. NSSMD[1:0] = 00: 3-Wire Master or 3-Wire Slave Mode: SPI0 operates in 3-wire mode, and
NSS is disabled. When operating as a slave device, SPI0 is always selected in 3-wire mode.
Since no select signal is present, SPI0 must be the only slave on the bus in 3-wire mode. This
is intended for point-to-point communication between a master and one slave.
2. NSSMD[1:0] = 01: 4-Wire Slave or Multi-Master Mode: SPI0 operates in 4-wire mode, and
NSS is enabled as an input. When operating as a slave, NSS selects the SPI0 device. When
operating as a master, a 1-to-0 transition of the NSS signal disables the master function of
SPI0 so that multiple master devices can be used on the same SPI bus.
3. NSSMD[1:0] = 1x: 4-Wire Master Mode: SPI0 operates in 4-wire mode, and NSS is enabled as
an output. The setting of NSSMD0 determines what logic level the NSS pin will output. This
configuration should only be used when operating SPI0 as a master device.
See Figure 21.2, Figure 21.3, and Figure 21.4 for typical connection diagrams of the various operational
modes. Note that the setting of NSSMD bits affects the pinout of the device. When in 3-wire master or
3-wire slave mode, the NSS pin will not be mapped by the crossbar. In all other modes, the NSS signal will
be mapped to a pin on the device. See Section “18. Port Input/Output” on page 203 for general purpose
port I/O and crossbar information.
252
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
21.2. SPI0 Master Mode Operation
A SPI master device initiates all data transfers on a SPI bus. SPI0 is placed in master mode by setting the
Master Enable flag (MSTEN, SPI0CN.6). Writing a byte of data to the SPI0 data register (SPI0DAT) when
in master mode writes to the transmit buffer. If the SPI shift register is empty, the byte in the transmit buffer
is moved to the shift register, and a data transfer begins. The SPI0 master immediately shifts out the data
serially on the MOSI line while providing the serial clock on SCK. The SPIF (SPI0CN.7) flag is set to logic
1 at the end of the transfer. If interrupts are enabled, an interrupt request is generated when the SPIF flag
is set. While the SPI0 master transfers data to a slave on the MOSI line, the addressed SPI slave device
simultaneously transfers the contents of its shift register to the SPI master on the MISO line in a full-duplex
operation. Therefore, the SPIF flag serves as both a transmit-complete and receive-data-ready flag. The
data byte received from the slave is transferred MSB-first into the master's shift register. When a byte is
fully shifted into the register, it is moved to the receive buffer where it can be read by the processor by
reading SPI0DAT.
When configured as a master, SPI0 can operate in one of three different modes: multi-master mode, 3-wire
single-master mode, and 4-wire single-master mode. The default, multi-master mode is active when
NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 1. In this mode, NSS is an input to the device, and
is used to disable the master SPI0 when another master is accessing the bus. When NSS is pulled low in
this mode, MSTEN (SPI0CN.6) and SPIEN (SPI0CN.0) are set to 0 to disable the SPI master device, and
a Mode Fault is generated (MODF, SPI0CN.5 = 1). Mode Fault will generate an interrupt if enabled. SPI0
must be manually re-enabled in software under these circumstances. In multi-master systems, devices will
typically default to being slave devices while they are not acting as the system master device. In multi-master mode, slave devices can be addressed individually (if needed) using general-purpose I/O pins.
Figure 21.2 shows a connection diagram between two master devices in multiple-master mode.
3-wire single-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 0. In this
mode, NSS is not used, and is not mapped to an external port pin through the crossbar. Any slave devices
that must be addressed in this mode should be selected using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 21.3
shows a connection diagram between a master device in 3-wire master mode and a slave device.
4-wire single-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 1. In this mode, NSS is configured as an
output pin, and can be used as a slave-select signal for a single SPI device. In this mode, the output value
of NSS is controlled (in software) with the bit NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2). Additional slave devices can be
addressed using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 21.4 shows a connection diagram for a master device in
4-wire master mode and two slave devices.
Rev. 1.2
253
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 21.2. Multiple-Master Mode Connection Diagram
Master
Device 1
NSS
GPIO
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
SCK
SCK
GPIO
NSS
Master
Device 2
Figure 21.3. 3-Wire Single Master and 3-Wire Single Slave Mode Connection Diagram
Master
Device
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
SCK
SCK
Slave
Device
Figure 21.4. 4-Wire Single Master Mode and 4-Wire Slave Mode Connection Diagram
Master
Device
GPIO
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
SCK
SCK
NSS
NSS
MISO
MOSI
SCK
NSS
254
Rev. 1.2
Slave
Device
Slave
Device
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
21.3. SPI0 Slave Mode Operation
When SPI0 is enabled and not configured as a master, it will operate as a SPI slave. As a slave, bytes are
shifted in through the MOSI pin and out through the MISO pin by a master device controlling the SCK signal. A bit counter in the SPI0 logic counts SCK edges. When 8 bits have been shifted through the shift register, the SPIF flag is set to logic 1, and the byte is copied into the receive buffer. Data is read from the
receive buffer by reading SPI0DAT. A slave device cannot initiate transfers. Data to be transferred to the
master device is pre-loaded into the shift register by writing to SPI0DAT. Writes to SPI0DAT are doublebuffered, and are placed in the transmit buffer first. If the shift register is empty, the contents of the transmit
buffer will immediately be transferred into the shift register. When the shift register already contains data,
the SPI will load the shift register with the transmit buffer’s contents after the last SCK edge of the next (or
current) SPI transfer.
When configured as a slave, SPI0 can be configured for 4-wire or 3-wire operation. The default, 4-wire
slave mode, is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 1. In 4-wire mode, the
NSS signal is routed to a port pin and configured as a digital input. SPI0 is enabled when NSS is logic 0,
and disabled when NSS is logic 1. The bit counter is reset on a falling edge of NSS. Note that the NSS signal must be driven low at least 2 system clocks before the first active edge of SCK for each byte transfer.
Figure 21.4 shows a connection diagram between two slave devices in 4-wire slave mode and a master
device.
3-wire slave mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 0. NSS is not
used in this mode, and is not mapped to an external port pin through the crossbar. Since there is no way of
uniquely addressing the device in 3-wire slave mode, SPI0 must be the only slave device present on the
bus. It is important to note that in 3-wire slave mode there is no external means of resetting the bit counter
that determines when a full byte has been received. The bit counter can only be reset by disabling and reenabling SPI0 with the SPIEN bit. Figure 21.3 shows a connection diagram between a slave device in 3wire slave mode and a master device.
21.4. SPI0 Interrupt Sources
When SPI0 interrupts are enabled, the following four flags will generate an interrupt when they are set to
logic 1:
Note that all of the following bits must be cleared by software.
1. The SPI Interrupt Flag, SPIF (SPI0CN.7) is set to logic 1 at the end of each byte transfer. This
flag can occur in all SPI0 modes.
2. The Write Collision Flag, WCOL (SPI0CN.6) is set to logic 1 if a write to SPI0DAT is attempted
when the transmit buffer has not been emptied to the SPI shift register. When this occurs, the
write to SPI0DAT will be ignored, and the transmit buffer will not be written.This flag can occur
in all SPI0 modes.
3. The Mode Fault Flag MODF (SPI0CN.5) is set to logic 1 when SPI0 is configured as a master,
and for multi-master mode and the NSS pin is pulled low. When a Mode Fault occurs, the
MSTEN and SPIEN bits in SPI0CN are set to logic 0 to disable SPI0 and allow another master
device to access the bus.
4. The Receive Overrun Flag RXOVRN (SPI0CN.4) is set to logic 1 when configured as a slave,
and a transfer is completed and the receive buffer still holds an unread byte from a previous
transfer. The new byte is not transferred to the receive buffer, allowing the previously received
data byte to be read. The data byte which caused the overrun is lost.
Rev. 1.2
255
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
21.5. Serial Clock Timing
Four combinations of serial clock phase and polarity can be selected using the clock control bits in the
SPI0 Configuration Register (SPI0CFG). The CKPHA bit (SPI0CFG.5) selects one of two clock phases
(edge used to latch the data). The CKPOL bit (SPI0CFG.4) selects between an active-high or active-low
clock. Both master and slave devices must be configured to use the same clock phase and polarity. SPI0
should be disabled (by clearing the SPIEN bit, SPI0CN.0) when changing the clock phase or polarity. The
clock and data line relationships for master mode are shown in Figure 21.5. For slave mode, the clock and
data relationships are shown in Figure 21.6 and Figure 21.7. Note that CKPHA must be set to ‘0’ on both
the master and slave SPI when communicating between two of the following devices: C8051F04x,
C8051F06x, C8051F12x, C8051F31x, C8051F32x, and C8051F33x
The SPI0 Clock Rate Register (SPI0CKR) as shown in Figure 21.10 controls the master mode serial clock
frequency. This register is ignored when operating in slave mode. When the SPI is configured as a master,
the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) is one-half the system clock frequency or 12.5 MHz, whichever is
slower. When the SPI is configured as a slave, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) for full-duplex
operation is 1/10 the system clock frequency, provided that the master issues SCK, NSS (in 4-wire slave
mode), and the serial input data synchronously with the slave’s system clock. If the master issues SCK,
NSS, and the serial input data asynchronously, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) must be less
than 1/10 the system clock frequency. In the special case where the master only wants to transmit data to
the slave and does not need to receive data from the slave (i.e. half-duplex operation), the SPI slave can
receive data at a maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) of 1/4 the system clock frequency. This is provided
that the master issues SCK, NSS, and the serial input data synchronously with the slave’s system clock.
Figure 21.5. Master Mode Data/Clock Timing
SCK
(CKPOL=0, CKPHA=0)
SCK
(CKPOL=0, CKPHA=1)
SCK
(CKPOL=1, CKPHA=0)
SCK
(CKPOL=1, CKPHA=1)
MISO/MOSI
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
NSS (Must Remain High
in Multi-Master Mode)
256
Rev. 1.2
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 21.6. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 0)
SCK
(CKPOL=0, CKPHA=0)
SCK
(CKPOL=1, CKPHA=0)
MOSI
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
MISO
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
NSS (4-Wire Mode)
Figure 21.7. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 1)
SCK
(CKPOL=0, CKPHA=1)
SCK
(CKPOL=1, CKPHA=1)
MOSI
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
MISO
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 0
NSS (4-Wire Mode)
Rev. 1.2
257
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
21.6. SPI Special Function Registers
SPI0 is accessed and controlled through four special function registers in the system controller: SPI0CN
Control Register, SPI0DAT Data Register, SPI0CFG Configuration Register, and SPI0CKR Clock Rate
Register. The four special function registers related to the operation of the SPI0 Bus are described in the
following figures.
Figure 21.8. SPI0CFG: SPI0 Configuration Register
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
Reset Value
SPIBSY
MSTEN
CKPHA
CKPOL
SLVSEL
NSSIN
SRMT
RXBMT
00000111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x9A
SFR Page: 0
SPIBSY: SPI Busy (read only).
This bit is set to logic 1 when a SPI transfer is in progress (Master or slave Mode).
MSTEN: Master Mode Enable.
0: Disable master mode. Operate in slave mode.
1: Enable master mode. Operate as a master.
CKPHA: SPI0 Clock Phase.
This bit controls the SPI0 clock phase.
0: Data centered on first edge of SCK period.†
1: Data centered on second edge of SCK period.†
CKPOL: SPI0 Clock Polarity.
This bit controls the SPI0 clock polarity.
0: SCK line low in idle state.
1: SCK line high in idle state.
SLVSEL: Slave Selected Flag (read only).
This bit is set to logic 1 whenever the NSS pin is low indicating SPI0 is the selected slave. It
is cleared to logic 0 when NSS is high (slave not selected). This bit does not indicate the
instantaneous value at the NSS pin, but rather a de-glitched version of the pin input.
NSSIN: NSS Instantaneous Pin Input (read only).
This bit mimics the instantaneous value that is present on the NSS port pin at the time that
the register is read. This input is not de-glitched.
SRMT: Shift Register Empty (Valid in Slave Mode, read only).
This bit will be set to logic 1 when all data has been transferred in/out of the shift register,
and there is no new information available to read from the transmit buffer or write to the
receive buffer. It returns to logic 0 when a data byte is transferred to the shift register from
the transmit buffer or by a transition on SCK.
NOTE: SRMT = 1 when in Master Mode.
RXBMT: Receive Buffer Empty (Valid in Slave Mode, read only).
This bit will be set to logic 1 when the receive buffer has been read and contains no new
information. If there is new information available in the receive buffer that has not been read,
this bit will return to logic 0.
NOTE: RXBMT = 1 when in Master Mode.
†
In slave mode, data on MOSI is sampled in the center of each data bit. In master mode, data on MISO is
sampled one SYSCLK before the end of each data bit, to provide maximum settling time for the slave
device. See Table 21.1 for timing parameters.
258
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 21.9. SPI0CN: SPI0 Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
Reset Value
SPIF
WCOL
MODF
RXOVRN
NSSMD1
NSSMD0
TXBMT
SPIEN
00000110
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0xF8
SFR Page: 0
Bit0
Bit 7:
SPIF: SPI0 Interrupt Flag.
This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware at the end of a data transfer. If interrupts are enabled,
setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the SPI0 interrupt service routine. This bit is not
automatically cleared by hardware. It must be cleared by software.
Bit 6:
WCOL: Write Collision Flag.
This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware (and generates a SPI0 interrupt) to indicate a write to
the SPI0 data register was attempted while a data transfer was in progress. It must be
cleared by software.
Bit 5:
MODF: Mode Fault Flag.
This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware (and generates a SPI0 interrupt) when a master mode
collision is detected (NSS is low, MSTEN = 1, and NSSMD[1:0] = 01). This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. It must be cleared by software.
Bit 4:
RXOVRN: Receive Overrun Flag (Slave Mode only).
This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware (and generates a SPI0 interrupt) when the receive
buffer still holds unread data from a previous transfer and the last bit of the current transfer is
shifted into the SPI0 shift register. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. It must
be cleared by software.
Bits 3-2: NSSMD1-NSSMD0: Slave Select Mode.
Selects between the following NSS operation modes:
(See Section “21.2. SPI0 Master Mode Operation” on page 253 and Section “21.3. SPI0
Slave Mode Operation” on page 255).
00: 3-Wire Slave or 3-wire Master Mode. NSS signal is not routed to a port pin.
01: 4-Wire Slave or Multi-Master Mode (Default). NSS is always an input to the device.
1x: 4-Wire Single-Master Mode. NSS signal is mapped as an output from the device and will
assume the value of NSSMD0.
Bit 1:
TXBMT: Transmit Buffer Empty.
This bit will be set to logic 0 when new data has been written to the transmit buffer. When
data in the transmit buffer is transferred to the SPI shift register, this bit will be set to logic 1,
indicating that it is safe to write a new byte to the transmit buffer.
Bit 0:
SPIEN: SPI0 Enable.
This bit enables/disables the SPI.
0: SPI disabled.
1: SPI enabled.
Rev. 1.2
259
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 21.10. SPI0CKR: SPI0 Clock Rate Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
SCR7
SCR6
SCR5
SCR4
SCR3
SCR2
SCR1
SCR0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x9D
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: SCR7-SCR0: SPI0 Clock Rate.
These bits determine the frequency of the SCK output when the SPI0 module is configured
for master mode operation. The SCK clock frequency is a divided version of the system
clock, and is given in the following equation, where SYSCLK is the system clock frequency
and SPI0CKR is the 8-bit value held in the SPI0CKR register.
SYSCLK
f SCK = -----------------------------------------------2 × ( SPI0CKR + 1 )
for 0 <= SPI0CKR <= 255
Example: If SYSCLK = 2 MHz and SPI0CKR = 0x04,
2000000 f SCK = ------------------------2 × (4 + 1)
f SCK = 200kHz
260
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 21.11. SPI0DAT: SPI0 Data Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x9B
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: SPI0DAT: SPI0 Transmit and Receive Data.
The SPI0DAT register is used to transmit and receive SPI0 data. Writing data to SPI0DAT
places the data into the transmit buffer and initiates a transfer when in Master Mode. A read
of SPI0DAT returns the contents of the receive buffer.
Rev. 1.2
261
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 21.12. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 0)
SCK*
T
T
MCKH
MCKL
T
T
MIS
MIH
MISO
MOSI
* SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1.
Figure 21.13. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 1)
SCK*
T
T
MCKH
MCKL
T
T
MIS
MIH
MISO
MOSI
* SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1.
262
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 21.14. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 0)
NSS
T
T
SE
T
CKL
SD
SCK*
T
CKH
T
SIS
T
SIH
MOSI
T
T
SEZ
T
SOH
SDZ
MISO
* SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1.
Figure 21.15. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 1)
NSS
T
T
SE
T
CKL
SD
SCK*
T
CKH
T
SIS
T
SIH
MOSI
T
SEZ
T
T
SOH
SLH
T
SDZ
MISO
* SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1.
Rev. 1.2
263
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 21.1. SPI Slave Timing Parameters
Parameter
Description
Min
Max
Units
Master Mode Timing† (See Figure 21.12 and Figure 21.13)
TMCKH
SCK High Time
1*TSYSCLK
ns
TMCKL
SCK Low Time
1*TSYSCLK
ns
1*TSYSCLK +
20
ns
0
ns
TMIS
TMIH
MISO Valid to SCK Shift Edge
SCK Shift Edge to MISO Change
Slave Mode Timing† (See Figure 21.14 and Figure 21.15)
TSE
NSS Falling to First SCK Edge
2*TSYSCLK
ns
TSD
Last SCK Edge to NSS Rising
2*TSYSCLK
ns
TSEZ
NSS Falling to MISO Valid
4*TSYSCLK
ns
TSDZ
NSS Rising to MISO High-Z
4*TSYSCLK
ns
TCKH
SCK High Time
5*TSYSCLK
ns
TCKL
SCK Low Time
5*TSYSCLK
ns
TSIS
MOSI Valid to SCK Sample Edge
2*TSYSCLK
ns
TSIH
SCK Sample Edge to MOSI Change
2*TSYSCLK
ns
TSOH
SCK Shift Edge to MISO Change
TSLH
Last SCK Edge to MISO Change (CKPHA = 1
ONLY)
†T
SYSCLK
264
is equal to one period of the device system clock (SYSCLK).
Rev. 1.2
6*TSYSCLK
4*TSYSCLK
ns
8*TSYSCLK
ns
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
22.
UART0
UART0 is an enhanced serial port with frame error detection and address recognition hardware. UART0
may operate in full-duplex asynchronous or half-duplex synchronous modes, and mutiproccessor communication is fully supported. Receive data is buffered in a holding register, allowing UART0 to start reception
of a second incoming data byte before software has finished reading the previous data byte. A Receive
Overrun bit indicates when new received data is latched into the receive buffer before the previously
received byte has been read.
UART0 is accessed via its associated SFRs, Serial Control (SCON0) and Serial Data Buffer (SBUF0). The
single SBUF0 location provides access to both transmit and receive registers. Reading SCON0 accesses
the Receive register and writing SCON0 accesses the Transmit register.
UART0 may be operated in polled or interrupt mode. UART0 has two sources of interrupts: a Transmit
Interrupt flag, TI0 (SCON0.1) set when transmission of a data byte is complete, and a Receive Interrupt
flag, RI0 (SCON0.0) set when reception of a data byte is complete. UART0 interrupt flags are not cleared
by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine; they must be cleared manually by software. This allows software to determine the cause of the UART0 interrupt (transmit complete or receive
complete).
Figure 22.1. UART0 Block Diagram
SFR Bus
Write to
SBUF0
TB80
SET
D
SSTA0
F R T S
E X X M
0 O C O
V O D
0 L 0
0
S
0
T
C
L
K
1
S
0
T
C
L
K
1
SBUF0
Q
TX0
CLR
S
0
R
C
L
K
1
S
0
R
C
L
K
1
Crossbar
Zero Detector
Shift
Stop Bit
Gen.
Data
Tx Control
Start
Tx Clock
Send
Tx IRQ
SCON0
UART0
Baud Rate Generation
Logic
S
M
0
0
Rx Clock
S
M
1
0
S
M
2
0
R
E
N
0
T
B
8
0
TI0
R T R
B I I
8 0 0
0
EN
Serial Port
(UART0) Interrupt
RI0
Rx IRQ
Rx Control
Start
Shift
Frame Error
Detection
Load
SBUF
Address
Match
Port I/O
0x1FF
Input Shift Register
(9 bits)
Load
SBUF0
RB80
SBUF0
Match Detect
SADDR0
SADEN0
Read
SBUF0
SFR Bus
RX0
Rev. 1.2
Crossbar
265
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
22.1. UART0 Operational Modes
UART0 provides four operating modes (one synchronous and three asynchronous) selected by setting
configuration bits in the SCON0 register. These four modes offer different baud rates and communication
protocols. The four modes are summarized in Table 22.1.
Table 22.1. UART0 Modes
Mode
0
1
2
3
Synchronization
Synchronous
Asynchronous
Asynchronous
Asynchronous
Baud Clock
SYSCLK / 12
Timer 1, 2, 3, or 4 Overflow
SYSCLK / 32 or SYSCLK / 64
Timer 1, 2, 3, or 4 Overflow
Data Bits
8
8
9
9
Start/Stop Bits
None
1 Start, 1 Stop
1 Start, 1 Stop
1 Start, 1 Stop
22.1.1. Mode 0: Synchronous Mode
Mode 0 provides synchronous, half-duplex communication. Serial data is transmitted and received on the
RX0 pin. The TX0 pin provides the shift clock for both transmit and receive. The MCU must be the master
since it generates the shift clock for transmission in both directions (see the interconnect diagram in
Figure 22.3).
Data transmission begins when an instruction writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. Eight data bits are
transferred LSB first (see the timing diagram in Figure 22.2), and the TI0 Transmit Interrupt Flag
(SCON0.1) is set at the end of the eighth bit time. Data reception begins when the REN0 Receive Enable
bit (SCON0.4) is set to logic 1 and the RI0 Receive Interrupt Flag (SCON0.0) is cleared. One cycle after
the eighth bit is shifted in, the RI0 flag is set and reception stops until software clears the RI0 bit. An interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI0 or RI0 are set.
266
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
The Mode 0 baud rate is SYSCLK / 12. RX0 is forced to open-drain in Mode 0, and an external pull-up will
typically be required.
Figure 22.2. UART0 Mode 0 Timing Diagram
MODE 0 TRANSMIT
RX (data out)
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
TX (clk out)
MODE 0 RECEIVE
RX (data in)
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
TX (clk out)
Figure 22.3. UART0 Mode 0 Interconnect
TX
CLK
RX
DATA
Shift
Reg.
C8051Fxxx
8 Extra Outputs
22.1.2. Mode 1: 8-Bit UART, Variable Baud Rate
Mode 1 provides standard asynchronous, full duplex communication using a total of 10 bits per data byte:
one start bit, eight data bits (LSB first), and one stop bit. Data are transmitted from the TX0 pin and
received at the RX0 pin. On receive, the eight data bits are stored in SBUF0 and the stop bit goes into
RB80 (SCON0.2).
Data transmission begins when an instruction writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI0 Transmit
Interrupt Flag (SCON0.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data
reception can begin any time after the REN0 Receive Enable bit (SCON0.4) is set to logic 1. After the stop
bit is received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are
met: RI0 must be logic 0, and if SM20 is logic 1, the stop bit must be logic 1.
If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data is stored in SBUF0, the stop bit is stored in RB80 and the
RI0 flag is set. If these conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB80 will not be loaded and the RI0 flag will not
be set. An interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI0 or RI0 are set.
Figure 22.4. UART0 Mode 1 Timing Diagram
MARK
SPACE
START
BIT
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
STOP
BIT
BIT TIMES
BIT SAMPLING
Rev. 1.2
267
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
The baud rate generated in Mode 1 is a function of timer overflow. UART0 can use Timer 1 operating in 8Bit Auto-Reload Mode, or Timer 2, 3, or 4 operating in Auto-reload Mode to generate the baud rate (note
that the TX and RX clocks are selected separately). On each timer overflow event (a rollover from all ones
- (0xFF for Timer 1, 0xFFFF for Timer 2, 3, or 4) - to zero) a clock is sent to the baud rate logic.
Timers 1, 2, 3, or 4 are selected as the baud rate source with bits in the SSTA0 register (see Figure 22.9).
The transmit baud rate clock is selected using the S0TCLK1 and S0TCLK0 bits, and the receive baud rate
clock is selected using the S0RCLK1 and S0RCLK0 bits.
When Timer 1 is selected as a baud rate source, the SMOD0 bit (SSTA0.4) selects whether or not to divide
the Timer 1 overflow rate by two. On reset, the SMOD0 bit is logic 0, thus selecting the lower speed baud
rate by default. The SMOD0 bit affects the baud rate generated by Timer 1 as shown in Equation 22.1.
Equation 22.1. Mode 1 Baud Rate using Timer 1
When SMOD0 = 0:
Mode1_BaudRate = 1 ⁄ 32 ⋅ Timer1_OverflowRate
When SMOD0 = 1:
Mode1_BaudRate = 1 ⁄ 16 ⋅ Timer1_OverflowRate
The Timer 1 overflow rate is determined by the Timer 1 clock source (T1CLK) and reload value (TH1). The
frequency of T1CLK is selected as described in Section “24.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1” on page 287. The
Timer 1 overflow rate is calculated as shown in Equation 22.2.
Equation 22.2. Timer 1 Overflow Rate
Timer1_OverflowRate = T1CLK ⁄ ( 256 – TH1 )
When Timers 2, 3, or 4 are selected as a baud rate source, the baud rate is generated as shown in
Equation 22.3.
Equation 22.3. Mode 1 Baud Rate using Timer 2, 3, or 4
Mode1_BaudRate = 1 ⁄ 16 ⋅ Timer234_OverflowRate
The overflow rate for Timer 2, 3, or 4 is determined by the clock source for the timer (TnCLK) and the 16bit reload value stored in the RCAPn register (n = 2, 3, or 4), as shown in Equation 22.4.
Equation 22.4. Timer 2, 3, or 4 Overflow Rate
Timer234_OverflowRate = TnCLK ⁄ ( 65536 – RCAPn )
268
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
22.1.3. Mode 2: 9-Bit UART, Fixed Baud Rate
Mode 2 provides asynchronous, full-duplex communication using a total of eleven bits per data byte: a start
bit, 8 data bits (LSB first), a programmable ninth data bit, and a stop bit. Mode 2 supports multiprocessor
communications and hardware address recognition (see Section 22.2). On transmit, the ninth data bit is
determined by the value in TB80 (SCON0.3). It can be assigned the value of the parity flag P in the PSW or
used in multiprocessor communications. On receive, the ninth data bit goes into RB80 (SCON0.2) and the
stop bit is ignored.
Data transmission begins when an instruction writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI0 Transmit
Interrupt Flag (SCON0.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data
reception can begin any time after the REN0 Receive Enable bit (SCON0.4) is set to logic 1. After the stop
bit is received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if RI0 is logic 0 and one of the
following requirements are met:
1. SM20 is logic 0
2. SM20 is logic 1, the received 9th bit is logic 1, and the received address matches the UART0
address as described in Section 22.2.
If the above conditions are satisfied, the eight bits of data are stored in SBUF0, the ninth bit is stored in
RB80 and the RI0 flag is set. If these conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB80 will not be loaded and the
RI0 flag will not be set. An interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI0 or RI0 are set.
The baud rate in Mode 2 is either SYSCLK / 32 or SYSCLK / 64, according to the value of the SMOD0 bit
in register SSTA0.
Equation 22.5. Mode 2 Baud Rate
BaudRate = 2
SMOD0
SYSCLK
×  ----------------------
 64 
Figure 22.5. UART0 Modes 2 and 3 Timing Diagram
MARK
SPACE
START
BIT
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
STOP
BIT
BIT TIMES
BIT SAMPLING
Rev. 1.2
269
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 22.6. UART0 Modes 1, 2, and 3 Interconnect Diagram
RS-232
LEVEL
XLTR
RS-232
TX
RX
C8051Fxxx
OR
TX
TX
RX
RX
MCU
C8051Fxxx
22.1.4. Mode 3: 9-Bit UART, Variable Baud Rate
Mode 3 uses the Mode 2 transmission protocol with the Mode 1 baud rate generation. Mode 3 operation
transmits 11 bits: a start bit, 8 data bits (LSB first), a programmable ninth data bit, and a stop bit. The baud
rate is derived from Timer 1 or Timer 2, 3, or 4 overflows, as defined by Equation 22.1 and Equation 22.3.
Multiprocessor communications and hardware address recognition are supported, as described in Section
22.2.
270
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
22.2. Multiprocessor Communications
Modes 2 and 3 support multiprocessor communication between a master processor and one or more slave
processors by special use of the ninth data bit and the built-in UART0 address recognition hardware. When
a master processor wants to transmit to one or more slaves, it first sends an address byte to select the target(s). An address byte differs from a data byte in that its ninth bit is logic 1; in a data byte, the ninth bit is
always set to logic 0. UART0 will recognize as “valid” (i.e., capable of causing an interrupt) two types of
addresses: (1) a masked address and (2) a broadcast address at any given time. Both are described
below.
22.2.1. Configuration of a Masked Address
The UART0 address is configured via two SFRs: SADDR0 (Serial Address) and SADEN0 (Serial Address
Enable). SADEN0 sets the bit mask for the address held in SADDR0: bits set to logic 1 in SADEN0 correspond to bits in SADDR0 that are checked against the received address byte; bits set to logic 0 in SADEN0
correspond to “don’t care” bits in SADDR0.
Example 1, SLAVE #1
SADDR0
= 00110101
SADEN0
= 00001111
UART0 Address = xxxx0101
Example 2, SLAVE #2
SADDR0
= 00110101
SADEN0
= 11110011
UART0 Address = 0011xx01
Example 3, SLAVE #3
SADDR0
= 00110101
SADEN0
= 11000000
UART0 Address = 00xxxxxx
Setting the SM20 bit (SCON0.5) configures UART0 such that when a stop bit is received, UART0 will generate an interrupt only if the ninth bit is logic 1 (RB80 = ‘1’) and the received data byte matches the UART0
slave address. Following the received address interrupt, the slave will clear its SM20 bit to enable interrupts on the reception of the following data byte(s). Once the entire message is received, the addressed
slave resets its SM20 bit to ignore all transmissions until it receives the next address byte. While SM20 is
logic 1, UART0 ignores all bytes that do not match the UART0 address and include a ninth bit that is logic
1.
22.2.2. Broadcast Addressing
Multiple addresses can be assigned to a single slave and/or a single address can be assigned to multiple
slaves, thereby enabling "broadcast" transmissions to more than one slave simultaneously. The broadcast
address is the logical OR of registers SADDR0 and SADEN0, and ‘0’s of the result are treated as “don’t
cares”. Typically a broadcast address of 0xFF (hexadecimal) is acknowledged by all slaves, assuming
“don’t care” bits as ‘1’s. The master processor can be configured to receive all transmissions or a protocol
can be implemented such that the master/slave role is temporarily reversed to enable half-duplex transmission between the original master and slave(s)..
Example 4, SLAVE #1
Example 5, SLAVE #2
Example 6, SLAVE #3
SADDR0
= 00110101
SADDR0
= 00110101
SADDR0
= 00110101
SADEN0
= 00001111
SADEN0
= 11110011
SADEN0
= 11000000
Broadcast
Broadcast
Broadcast
= 00111111
= 11110111
= 11110101
Address
Address
Address
Where all ZEROES in the Broadcast address are don’t cares.
Note in the above examples 4, 5, and 6, each slave would recognize as “valid” an address of 0xFF as a
broadcast address. Also note that examples 4, 5, and 6 uses the same SADDR0 and SADEN0 register
values as shown in the examples 1, 2, and 3 respectively (slaves #1, 2, and 3). Thus, a master could
address each slave device individually using a masked address, and also broadcast to all three slave
devices. For example, if a Master were to send an address “11110101”, only slave #1 would recognize the
Rev. 1.2
271
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
address as valid. If a master were to then send an address of “11111111”, all three slave devices would recognize the address as a valid broadcast address.
Figure 22.7. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram
Master
Device
RX
TX
Slave
Device
RX
TX
Slave
Device
RX
TX
Slave
Device
RX
+5V
TX
22.3. Frame and Transmission Error Detection
All Modes:
The Transmit Collision bit (TXCOL0 bit in register SCON0) reads ‘1’ if user software writes data to the
SBUF0 register while a transmit is in progress. Note that the TXCOL0 bit is also used as the SM20 bit
when written by user software. This bit does not generate an interrupt.
Modes 1, 2, and 3:
The Receive Overrun bit (RXOV0 in register SCON0) reads ‘1’ if a new data byte is latched into the receive
buffer before software has read the previous byte. Note that the RXOV0 bit is also used as the SM10 bit
when written by user software. The Frame Error bit (FE0 in register SSTA0) reads ‘1’ if an invalid (low)
STOP bit is detected. Note that the FE0 bit is also used as the SM00 bit when written by user software.
The RXOV0 and FE0 bits do not generate interrupts.
272
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 22.2. Oscillator Frequencies for Standard Baud Rates
Oscillator frequency
(MHz)
Divide Fac- Timer 1 Reload Timer 2, 3, or Resulting Baud Rate (Hz)**
tor
Value*
4 Reload
Value
24.0
208
0xF3
0xFFF3
115200 (115384)
22.1184
192
0xF4
0xFFF4
115200
18.432
160
0xF6
0xFFF6
115200
11.0592
96
0xFA
0xFFFA
115200
3.6864
32
0xFE
0xFFFE
115200
1.8432
16
0xFF
0xFFFF
115200
24.0
832
0xCC
0xFFCC
28800 (28846)
22.1184
768
0xD0
0xFFD0
28800
18.432
640
0xD8
0xFFD8
28800
11.0592
348
0xE8
0xFFE8
28800
3.6864
128
0xF8
0xFFF8
28800
1.8432
64
0xFC
0xFFFC
28800
24.0
2496
0x64
0xFF64
9600 (9615)
22.1184
2304
0x70
0xFF70
9600
18.432
1920
0x88
0xFF88
9600
11.0592
1152
0xB8
0xFFB8
9600
3.6864
384
0xE8
0xFFE8
9600
1.8432
192
0xF4
0xFFF4
9600
* Assumes SMOD0=1 and T1M=1.
** Numbers in parenthesis show the actual baud rate.
Rev. 1.2
273
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 22.8. SCON0: UART0 Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
SM00
SM10
SM20
REN0
TB80
RB80
TI0
RI0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bits7-6:
SM00-SM10: Serial Port Operation Mode:
Write:
When written, these bits select the Serial Port Operation Mode as follows:
SM00
0
0
1
1
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
274
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0x98
SFR Page: 0
Bit0
SM10
0
1
0
1
Mode
Mode 0: Synchronous Mode
Mode 1: 8-Bit UART, Variable Baud Rate
Mode 2: 9-Bit UART, Fixed Baud Rate
Mode 3: 9-Bit UART, Variable Baud Rate
Reading these bits returns the current UART0 mode as defined above.
SM20: Multiprocessor Communication Enable.
The function of this bit is dependent on the Serial Port Operation Mode.
Mode 0: No effect.
Mode 1: Checks for valid stop bit.
0: Logic level of stop bit is ignored.
1: RI0 will only be activated if stop bit is logic level 1.
Mode 2 and 3: Multiprocessor Communications Enable.
0: Logic level of ninth bit is ignored.
1: RI0 is set and an interrupt is generated only when the ninth bit is logic 1 and the
received address matches the UART0 address or the broadcast address.
REN0: Receive Enable.
This bit enables/disables the UART0 receiver.
0: UART0 reception disabled.
1: UART0 reception enabled.
TB80: Ninth Transmission Bit.
The logic level of this bit will be assigned to the ninth transmission bit in Modes 2 and 3. It is
not used in Modes 0 and 1. Set or cleared by software as required.
RB80: Ninth Receive Bit.
The bit is assigned the logic level of the ninth bit received in Modes 2 and 3. In Mode 1, if
SM20 is logic 0, RB80 is assigned the logic level of the received stop bit. RB8 is not used in
Mode 0.
TI0: Transmit Interrupt Flag.
Set by hardware when a byte of data has been transmitted by UART0 (after the 8th bit in
Mode 0, or at the beginning of the stop bit in other modes). When the UART0 interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the UART0 interrupt service routine.
This bit must be cleared manually by software.
RI0: Receive Interrupt Flag.
Set by hardware when a byte of data has been received by UART0 (as selected by the
SM20 bit). When the UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to
the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 22.9. SSTA0: UART0 Status and Clock Selection Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
FE0
RXOV0
TXCOL0
SMOD0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bits3-2:
R/W
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
S0RCLK0
00000000
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x91
SFR Page: 0
UART0 Transmit Baud Rate Clock Selection Bits.
S0TCLK0
0
1
0
1
Serial Transmit Baud Rate Clock Source
Timer 1 generates UART0 TX Baud Rate
Timer 2 Overflow generates UART0 TX baud rate
Timer 3 Overflow generates UART0 TX baud rate
Timer 4 Overflow generates UART0 TX baud rate
UART0 Receive Baud Rate Clock Selection Bits.
S0RCLK1 S0RCLK0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
†
R/W
FE0: Frame Error Flag.†
This flag indicates if an invalid (low) STOP bit is detected.
0: Frame Error has not been detected.
1: Frame Error has been detected.
RXOV0: Receive Overrun Flag.†
This flag indicates new data has been latched into the receive buffer before software has
read the previous byte.
0: Receive overrun has not been detected.
1: Receive Overrun has been detected.
TXCOL0: Transmit Collision Flag.†
This flag indicates user software has written to the SBUF0 register while a transmission is in
progress.
0: Transmission Collision has not been detected.
1: Transmission Collision has been detected.
SMOD0: UART0 Baud Rate Doubler Enable.
This bit enables/disables the divide-by-two function of the UART0 baud rate logic for configurations described in the UART0 section.
0: UART0 baud rate divide-by-two enabled.
1: UART0 baud rate divide-by-two disabled.
S0TCLK1
0
0
1
1
Bits1-0:
R/W
S0TCLK1 S0TCLK0 S0RCLK1
Serial Receive Baud Rate Clock Source
Timer 1 generates UART0 RX Baud Rate
Timer 2 Overflow generates UART0 RX baud rate
Timer 3 Overflow generates UART0 RX baud rate
Timer 4 Overflow generates UART0 RX baud rate
Note: FE0, RXOV0, and TXCOL0 are flags only, and no interrupt is generated by these conditions.
Rev. 1.2
275
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 22.10. SBUF0: UART0 Data Buffer Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x99
SFR Page: 0
SBUF0.[7:0]: UART0 Buffer Bits 7-0 (MSB-LSB).
This is actually two registers; a transmit and a receive buffer register. When data is moved to
SBUF0, it goes to the transmit buffer and is held for serial transmission. Moving a byte to
SBUF0 is what initiates the transmission. When data is moved from SBUF0, it comes from
the receive buffer.
Figure 22.11. SADDR0: UART0 Slave Address Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bits7-0:
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xA9
SFR Page: 0
SADDR0.[7:0]: UART0 Slave Address.
The contents of this register are used to define the UART0 slave address. Register SADEN0
is a bit mask to determine which bits of SADDR0 are checked against a received address:
corresponding bits set to logic 1 in SADEN0 are checked; corresponding bits set to logic 0
are “don’t cares”.
Figure 22.12. SADEN0: UART0 Slave Address Enable Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
276
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xB9
SFR Page: 0
SADEN0.[7:0]: UART0 Slave Address Enable.
Bits in this register enable corresponding bits in register SADDR0 to determine the UART0
slave address.
0: Corresponding bit in SADDR0 is a “don’t care”.
1: Corresponding bit in SADDR0 is checked against a received address.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
23.
UART1
UART1 is an asynchronous, full duplex serial port offering modes 1 and 3 of the standard 8051 UART.
Enhanced baud rate support allows a wide range of clock sources to generate standard baud rates (details
in Section “23.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation” on page 278). Received data buffering allows UART1
to start reception of a second incoming data byte before software has finished reading the previous data
byte.
UART1 has two associated SFRs: Serial Control Register 1 (SCON1) and Serial Data Buffer 1 (SBUF1).
The single SBUF1 location provides access to both transmit and receive registers. Reading SBUF1
accesses the buffered Receive register; writing SBUF1 accesses the Transmit register.
With UART1 interrupts enabled, an interrupt is generated each time a transmit is completed (TI1 is set in
SCON1), or a data byte has been received (RI1 is set in SCON1). The UART1 interrupt flags are not
cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine. They must be cleared manually
by software, allowing software to determine the cause of the UART1 interrupt (transmit complete or receive
complete).
Figure 23.1. UART1 Block Diagram
SFR Bus
Write to
SBUF1
TB81
SBUF1
(TX Shift)
SET
D
Q
TX1
CLR
Crossbar
Zero Detector
Stop Bit
Shift
Start
Data
Tx Control
Tx Clock
Tx IRQ
TI1
MCE1
REN1
TB81
RB81
TI1
RI1
S1MODE
SCON1
UART1 Baud
Rate Generator
Send
RI1
Serial
Port
Interrupt
Port I/O
Rx IRQ
Rx Clock
Rx Control
Start
Shift
0x1FF
RB81
Load
SBUF1
Input Shift Register
(9 bits)
Load SBUF1
SBUF1
(RX Latch)
Read
SBUF1
SFR Bus
Rev. 1.2
RX1
Crossbar
277
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
23.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation
The UART1 baud rate is generated by Timer 1 in 8-bit auto-reload mode. The TX clock is generated by
TL1; the RX clock is generated by a copy of TL1 (shown as RX Timer in Figure 23.2), which is not useraccessible. Both TX and RX Timer overflows are divided by two to generate the TX and RX baud rates.
The RX Timer runs when Timer 1 is enabled, and uses the same reload value (TH1). However, an
RX Timer reload is forced when a START condition is detected on the RX pin. This allows a receive to
begin any time a START is detected, independent of the TX Timer state.
Figure 23.2. UART1 Baud Rate Logic
Timer 1
TL1
UART1
Overflow
2
TX Clock
Overflow
2
RX Clock
TH1
Start
Detected
RX Timer
Timer 1 should be configured for Mode 2, 8-bit auto-reload (see Section “24.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/
Timer with Auto-Reload” on page 289). The Timer 1 reload value should be set so that overflows will occur
at two times the desired baud rate. Note that Timer 1 may be clocked by one of five sources: SYSCLK,
SYSCLK / 4, SYSCLK / 12, SYSCLK / 48, or the external oscillator clock / 8. For any given Timer 1 clock
source, the UART1 baud rate is determined by Equation 23.1.
Equation 23.1. UART1 Baud Rate
T1 CLK
1
UartBaudRate = ------------------------------- × --( 256 – T1H ) 2
Where T1CLK is the frequency of the clock supplied to Timer 1, and T1H is the high byte of Timer 1 (reload
value). Timer 1 clock frequency is selected as described in Section “24.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1” on
page 287. A quick reference for typical baud rates and system clock frequencies is given in Table 23.1
through Table 23.6. Note that the internal oscillator may still generate the system clock when the external
oscillator is driving Timer 1 (see Section “24.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1” on page 287 for more details).
278
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
23.2. Operational Modes
UART1 provides standard asynchronous, full duplex communication. The UART mode (8-bit or 9-bit) is
selected by the S1MODE bit (SCON1.7). Typical UART connection options are shown below.
Figure 23.3. UART Interconnect Diagram
TX
RS-232
LEVEL
XLTR
RS-232
RX
C8051Fxxx
OR
TX
TX
RX
RX
MCU
C8051Fxxx
23.2.1. 8-Bit UART
8-Bit UART mode uses a total of 10 bits per data byte: one start bit, eight data bits (LSB first), and one stop
bit. Data are transmitted LSB first from the TX1 pin and received at the RX1 pin. On receive, the eight data
bits are stored in SBUF1 and the stop bit goes into RB81 (SCON1.2).
Data transmission begins when software writes a data byte to the SBUF1 register. The TI1 Transmit Interrupt Flag (SCON1.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data reception can begin any time after the REN1 Receive Enable bit (SCON1.4) is set to logic 1. After the stop bit is
received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF1 receive register if the following conditions are met:
RI1 must be logic 0, and if MCE1 is logic 1, the stop bit must be logic 1. In the event of a receive data overrun, the first received 8 bits are latched into the SBUF1 receive register and the following overrun data bits
are lost.
If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data is stored in SBUF1, the stop bit is stored in RB81 and the
RI1 flag is set. If these conditions are not met, SBUF1 and RB81 will not be loaded and the RI1 flag will not
be set. An interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI1 or RI1 is set.
Figure 23.4. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram
MARK
SPACE
START
BIT
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
STOP
BIT
BIT TIMES
BIT SAMPLING
Rev. 1.2
279
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
23.2.2. 9-Bit UART
9-bit UART mode uses a total of eleven bits per data byte: a start bit, 8 data bits (LSB first), a programmable ninth data bit, and a stop bit. The state of the ninth transmit data bit is determined by the value in TB81
(SCON1.3), which is assigned by user software. It can be assigned the value of the parity flag (bit P in register PSW) for error detection, or used in multiprocessor communications. On receive, the ninth data bit
goes into RB81 (SCON1.2) and the stop bit is ignored.
Data transmission begins when an instruction writes a data byte to the SBUF1 register. The TI1 Transmit
Interrupt Flag (SCON1.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data
reception can begin any time after the REN1 Receive Enable bit (SCON1.4) is set to ‘1’. After the stop bit
is received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF1 receive register if the following conditions are met:
(1) RI1 must be logic 0, and (2) if MCE1 is logic 1, the 9th bit must be logic 1 (when MCE1 is logic 0, the
state of the ninth data bit is unimportant). If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data are stored in
SBUF1, the ninth bit is stored in RB81, and the RI1 flag is set to ‘1’. If the above conditions are not met,
SBUF1 and RB81 will not be loaded and the RI1 flag will not be set to ‘1’. A UART1 interrupt will occur if
enabled when either TI1 or RI1 is set to ‘1’.
Figure 23.5. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram
MARK
SPACE
START
BIT
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
BIT TIMES
BIT SAMPLING
280
Rev. 1.2
D5
D6
D7
D8
STOP
BIT
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
23.3. Multiprocessor Communications
9-Bit UART mode supports multiprocessor communication between a master processor and one or more
slave processors by special use of the ninth data bit. When a master processor wants to transmit to one or
more slaves, it first sends an address byte to select the target(s). An address byte differs from a data byte
in that its ninth bit is logic 1; in a data byte, the ninth bit is always set to logic 0.
Setting the MCE1 bit (SCON.5) of a slave processor configures its UART such that when a stop bit is
received, the UART will generate an interrupt only if the ninth bit is logic one (RB81 = 1) signifying an
address byte has been received. In the UART interrupt handler, software should compare the received
address with the slave's own assigned 8-bit address. If the addresses match, the slave should clear its
MCE1 bit to enable interrupts on the reception of the following data byte(s). Slaves that weren't addressed
leave their MCE1 bits set and do not generate interrupts on the reception of the following data bytes,
thereby ignoring the data. Once the entire message is received, the addressed slave should reset its
MCE1 bit to ignore all transmissions until it receives the next address byte.
Multiple addresses can be assigned to a single slave and/or a single address can be assigned to multiple
slaves, thereby enabling "broadcast" transmissions to more than one slave simultaneously. The master
processor can be configured to receive all transmissions or a protocol can be implemented such that the
master/slave role is temporarily reversed to enable half-duplex transmission between the original master
and slave(s).
Figure 23.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram
Master
Device
RX
TX
Slave
Device
RX
TX
Slave
Device
RX
Rev. 1.2
TX
Slave
Device
RX
+5V
TX
281
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 23.7. SCON1: Serial Port 1 Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
S1MODE
-
MCE1
REN1
TB81
RB81
TI1
RI1
01000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
282
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0x98
SFR Page: 1
Bit0
S1MODE: Serial Port 1 Operation Mode.
This bit selects the UART1 Operation Mode.
0: 8-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate.
1: 9-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate.
UNUSED. Read = 1b. Write = don’t care.
MCE1: Multiprocessor Communication Enable.
The function of this bit is dependent on the Serial Port 0 Operation Mode.
S1MODE = 0: Checks for valid stop bit.
0: Logic level of stop bit is ignored.
1: RI1 will only be activated if stop bit is logic level 1.
S1MODE = 1: Multiprocessor Communications Enable.
0: Logic level of ninth bit is ignored.
1: RI1 is set and an interrupt is generated only when the ninth bit is logic 1.
REN1: Receive Enable.
This bit enables/disables the UART receiver.
0: UART1 reception disabled.
1: UART1 reception enabled.
TB81: Ninth Transmission Bit.
The logic level of this bit will be assigned to the ninth transmission bit in 9-bit UART Mode. It
is not used in 8-bit UART Mode. Set or cleared by software as required.
RB81: Ninth Receive Bit.
RB81 is assigned the value of the STOP bit in Mode 0; it is assigned the value of the 9th
data bit in Mode 1.
TI1: Transmit Interrupt Flag.
Set by hardware when a byte of data has been transmitted by UART1 (after the 8th bit in 8bit UART Mode, or at the beginning of the STOP bit in 9-bit UART Mode). When the UART1
interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the UART1 interrupt service
routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software.
RI1: Receive Interrupt Flag.
Set to ‘1’ by hardware when a byte of data has been received by UART1 (set at the STOP bit
sampling time). When the UART1 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit to ‘1’ causes the CPU
to vector to the UART1 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 23.8. SBUF1: Serial (UART1) Port Data Buffer Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bits7-0:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x99
SFR Page: 1
SBUF1[7:0]: Serial Data Buffer Bits 7-0 (MSB-LSB).
This SFR accesses two registers; a transmit shift register and a receive latch register. When
data is written to SBUF1, it goes to the transmit shift register and is held for serial transmission. Writing a byte to SBUF1 is what initiates the transmission. A read of SBUF1 returns the
contents of the receive latch.
Rev. 1.2
283
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 23.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using the Internal Oscillator
Frequency: 24.5 MHz
SYSCLK from
Internal Osc.
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
230400
115200
57600
28800
14400
9600
2400
1200
Baud Rate
% Error
Oscilla- Timer Clock
tor Divide
Source
Factor
-0.32%
106
-0.32%
212
0.15%
426
-0.32%
848
0.15%
1704
-0.32%
2544
-0.32%
10176
0.15%
20448
X = Don’t care
†
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale
select)†
T1M†
XX
XX
XX
01
00
00
10
10
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK / 4
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK / 48
SYSCLK / 48
Timer 1
Reload
Value
(hex)
0xCB
0x96
0x2B
0x96
0xB9
0x96
0x96
0x2B
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Section 24.1.
Table 23.2. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator
SYSCLK from SYSCLK from
Internal Osc. External Osc.
Frequency: 25.0 MHz
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
Baud Rate
% Error
Oscillator Divide
Factor
Timer Clock
Source
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale
select)†
T1M†
230400
115200
57600
28800
14400
9600
2400
1200
57600
28800
14400
-0.47%
0.45%
-0.01%
0.45%
-0.01%
0.15%
0.45%
-0.01%
-0.47%
-0.47%
0.45%
108
218
434
872
1736
2608
10464
20832
432
864
1744
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK / 4
SYSCLK / 4
EXTCLK / 8
SYSCLK / 48
SYSCLK / 48
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
XX
XX
XX
01
01
11
10
10
11
11
11
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer 1
Reload
Value
(hex)
0xCA
0x93
0x27
0x93
0x27
0x5D
0x93
0x27
0xE5
0xCA
0x93
9600
0.15%
2608
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0x5D
X = Don’t care
†
284
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Section 24.1.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 23.3. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator
Frequency: 22.1184 MHz
SYSCLK from
Internal Osc.
SYSCLK from
External Osc.
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
230400
115200
57600
28800
14400
9600
2400
1200
230400
115200
57600
28800
14400
9600
Baud Rate
% Error
Oscilla- Timer Clock
tor Divide
Source
Factor
0.00%
96
0.00%
192
0.00%
384
0.00%
768
0.00%
1536
0.00%
2304
0.00%
9216
0.00%
18432
0.00%
96
0.00%
192
0.00%
384
0.00%
768
0.00%
1536
0.00%
2304
X = Don’t care
†
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale
select)†
T1M†
XX
XX
XX
00
00
00
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK / 48
SYSCLK / 48
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
Timer 1
Reload
Value
(hex)
0xD0
0xA0
0x40
0xE0
0xC0
0xA0
0xA0
0x40
0xFA
0xF4
0xE8
0xD0
0xA0
0x70
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Section 24.1.
Table 23.4. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator
Frequency: 18.432 MHz
SYSCLK from
Internal Osc.
SYSCLK from
External Osc.
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
230400
115200
57600
28800
14400
9600
2400
1200
230400
115200
57600
28800
14400
9600
Baud Rate
% Error
Oscillator Divide
Factor
0.00%
80
0.00%
160
0.00%
320
0.00%
640
0.00%
1280
0.00%
1920
0.00%
7680
0.00%
15360
0.00%
80
0.00%
160
0.00%
320
0.00%
640
0.00%
1280
0.00%
1920
X = Don’t care
†
Timer Clock
Source
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale
select)†
T1M†
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK / 4
SYSCLK / 4
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK / 48
SYSCLK / 48
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
XX
XX
XX
01
01
00
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer 1
Reload
Value
(hex)
0xD8
0xB0
0x60
0xB0
0x60
0xB0
0xB0
0x60
0xFB
0xF6
0xEC
0xD8
0xB0
0x88
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Section 24.1.
Rev. 1.2
285
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 23.5. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator
Frequency: 11.0592 MHz
SYSCLK from
Internal Osc.
SYSCLK from
External Osc.
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
230400
115200
57600
28800
14400
9600
2400
1200
230400
115200
57600
28800
14400
9600
Baud Rate
% Error
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
X = Don’t care
†
Oscillator Divide
Factor
Timer Clock
Source
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale
select)†
T1M†
48
96
192
384
768
1152
4608
9216
48
96
192
384
768
1152
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK / 48
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
XX
XX
XX
XX
00
00
00
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer 1
Reload
Value
(hex)
0xE8
0xD0
0xA0
0x40
0xE0
0xD0
0x40
0xA0
0xFD
0xFA
0xF4
0xE8
0xD0
0xB8
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Section 24.1.
Table 23.6. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator
Frequency: 3.6864 MHz
SYSCLK from
Internal Osc.
SYSCLK from
External Osc.
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
230400
115200
57600
28800
14400
9600
2400
1200
230400
115200
57600
28800
14400
9600
Baud Rate
% Error
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
X = Don’t care
†
286
Oscillator Divide
Factor
Timer Clock
Source
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale
select)†
T1M†
16
32
64
128
256
384
1536
3072
16
32
64
128
256
384
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK / 12
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
EXTCLK / 8
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
00
00
11
11
11
11
11
11
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Section 24.1.
Rev. 1.2
Timer 1
Reload
Value
(hex)
0xF8
0xF0
0xE0
0xC0
0x80
0x40
0xC0
0x80
0xFF
0xFE
0xFC
0xF8
0xF0
0xE8
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
24.
Timers
Each MCU includes 5 counter/timers: Timer 0 and Timer 1 are 16-bit counter/timers compatible with those
found in the standard 8051. Timer 2, Timer 3, and Timer 4 are 16-bit auto-reload and capture counter/timers for use with the ADC’s, DAC’s, square-wave generation, or for general-purpose use. These timers can
be used to measure time intervals, count external events and generate periodic interrupt requests. Timer 0
and Timer 1 are nearly identical and have four primary modes of operation. Timers 2, 3, and 4 are identical, and offer not only 16-bit auto-reload and capture, but have the ability to produce a 50% duty-cycle
square-wave (toggle output) at an external port pin.
Timer 0 and Timer 1 Modes:
13-bit counter/timer
16-bit counter/timer
8-bit counter/timer with auto-reload
Two 8-bit counter/timers (Timer 0 only)
Timer 2, 3, and 4 Modes:
16-bit counter/timer with auto-reload
16-bit counter/timer with capture
Toggle Output
Timers 0 and 1 may be clocked by one of five sources, determined by the Timer Mode Select bits (T1MT0M) and the Clock Scale bits (SCA1-SCA0). The Clock Scale bits define a pre-scaled clock by which
Timer 0 and/or Timer 1 may be clocked (See Figure 24.6 for pre-scaled clock selection). Timers 0 and 1
can be configured to use either the pre-scaled clock signal or the system clock directly. Timers 2, 3, and 4
may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source
divided by 8.
Timer 0 and Timer 1 may also be operated as counters. When functioning as a counter, a counter/timer
register is incremented on each high-to-low transition at the selected input pin. Events with a frequency of
up to one-fourth the system clock's frequency can be counted. The input signal need not be periodic, but it
should be held at a given logic level for at least two full system clock cycles to ensure the level is properly
sampled.
24.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1
Each timer is implemented as a 16-bit register accessed as two separate 8-bit SFRs: a low byte (TL0 or
TL1) and a high byte (TH0 or TH1). The Counter/Timer Control register (TCON) is used to enable Timer 0
and Timer 1 as well as indicate their status. Timer 0 interrupts can be enabled by setting the ET0 bit in the
IE register (Section “13.3.5. Interrupt Register Descriptions” on page 154); Timer 1 interrupts can be
enabled by setting the ET1 bit in the IE register (Section 13.3.5). Both counter/timers operate in one of four
primary modes selected by setting the Mode Select bits T1M1-T0M0 in the Counter/Timer Mode register
(TMOD). Both timers can be configured independently.
24.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer
Timer 0 and Timer 1 operate as 13-bit counter/timers in Mode 0. The following describes the configuration
and operation of Timer 0. However, both timers operate identically, and Timer 1 is configured in the same
manner as described for Timer 0.
The TH0 register holds the eight MSBs of the 13-bit counter/timer. TL0 holds the five LSBs in bit positions
TL0.4-TL0.0. The three upper bits of TL0 (TL0.7-TL0.5) are indeterminate and should be masked out or
ignored when reading the TL0 register. As the 13-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0x1FFF
(all ones) to 0x0000, the timer overflow flag TF0 (TCON.5) is set and an interrupt will occur if Timer 0 interrupts are enabled.
Rev. 1.2
287
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
The C/T0 bit (TMOD.2) selects the counter/timer's clock source. When C/T0 is set to logic 1, high-to-low
transitions at the selected Timer 0 input pin (T0) increment the timer register (Refer to Section
“18.1. Ports 0 through 3 and the Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 205 for information on selecting and
configuring external I/O pins). Clearing C/T selects the clock defined by the T0M bit (CKCON.3). When
T0M is set, Timer 0 is clocked by the system clock. When T0M is cleared, Timer 0 is clocked by the source
selected by the Clock Scale bits in CKCON (see Figure 24.6).
Setting the TR0 bit (TCON.4) enables the timer when either GATE0 (TMOD.3) is logic 0 or the input signal
/INT0 is logic-level 1. Setting GATE0 to ‘1’ allows the timer to be controlled by the external input signal /
INT0 (see Section “13.3.5. Interrupt Register Descriptions” on page 154), facilitating pulse width measurements.
TR0
GATE0
0
X
1
0
1
1
1
1
X = Don't Care
/INT0
X
X
0
1
Counter/Timer
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Setting TR0 does not force the timer to reset. The timer registers should be loaded with the desired initial
value before the timer is enabled.
TL1 and TH1 form the 13-bit register for Timer 1 in the same manner as described above for TL0 and TH0.
Timer 1 is configured and controlled using the relevant TCON and TMOD bits just as with Timer 0. The
input signal /INT1 is used with Timer 1.
Figure 24.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram
CKCON
TT
1 0
MM
Pre-scaled Clock
TMOD
SS
CC
AA
1 0
G
A
T
E
1
C
/
T
1
T TG
1 1 A
MM T
1 0 E
0
C
/
T
0
T T
0 0
MM
1 0
0
0
SYSCLK
1
1
TCLK
TR0
Crossbar
GATE0
/INT0
288
Rev. 1.2
TL0
(5 bits)
TH0
(8 bits)
TCON
T0
TF1
TR1
TF0
TR0
IE1
IT1
IE0
IT0
Interrupt
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
24.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer
Mode 1 operation is the same as Mode 0, except that the counter/timer registers use all 16 bits. The
counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 1 in the same manner as for Mode 0.
24.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload
Mode 2 configures Timer 0 or Timer 1 to operate as 8-bit counter/timers with automatic reload of the start
value. TL0 holds the count and TH0 holds the reload value. When the counter in TL0 overflows from 0xFF
to 0x00, the timer overflow flag TF0 (TCON.5) is set and the counter in TL0 is reloaded from TH0. If Timer
0 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will occur when the TF0 flag is set. The reload value in TH0 is not
changed. TL0 must be initialized to the desired value before enabling the timer for the first count to be correct. When in Mode 2, Timer 1 operates identically to Timer 0.
Both counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 2 in the same manner as Mode 0. Setting the
TR0 bit (TCON.4) enables the timer when either GATE0 (TMOD.3) is logic 0 or when the input signal /INT0
is low.
Figure 24.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram
CKCON
TT
1 0
MM
Pre-scaled Clock
TMOD
SS
CC
AA
1 0
G
A
T
E
1
C
/
T
1
T TG
1 1 A
MM T
1 0 E
0
C
/
T
0
T T
0 0
MM
1 0
0
0
SYSCLK
1
1
T0
TL0
(8 bits)
TCON
TCLK
TR0
Crossbar
GATE0
TH0
(8 bits)
TF1
TR1
TF0
TR0
IE1
IT1
IE0
IT0
Interrupt
Reload
/INT0
Rev. 1.2
289
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
24.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only)
In Mode 3, Timer 0 is configured as two separate 8-bit counter/timers held in TL0 and TH0. The counter/
timer in TL0 is controlled using the Timer 0 control/status bits in TCON and TMOD: TR0, C/T0, GATE0 and
TF0. TL0 can use either the system clock or an external input signal as its timebase. The TH0 register is
restricted to a timer function sourced by the system clock or prescaled clock. TH0 is enabled using the
Timer 1 run control bit TR1. TH0 sets the Timer 1 overflow flag TF1 on overflow and thus controls the
Timer 1 interrupt.
Timer 1 is inactive in Mode 3. When Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 can be operated in Modes 0,
1 or 2, but cannot be clocked by external signals nor set the TF1 flag and generate an interrupt. However,
the Timer 1 overflow can be used to generate baud rates for the SMBus and/or UART, and/or initiate ADC
conversions. While Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 run control is handled through its mode settings. To run Timer 1 while Timer 0 is in Mode 3, set the Timer 1 Mode as 0, 1, or 2. To disable Timer 1,
configure it for Mode 3.
Figure 24.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram
CKCON
T T
1 0
MM
Pre-scaled Clock
TMOD
SS
CC
AA
1 0
G
A
T
E
1
C
/
T
1
T T
1 1
MM
1 0
C
/
T
0
T T
0 0
MM
1 0
0
TR1
1
TH0
(8 bits)
0
TCON
SYSCLK
G
A
T
E
0
1
T0
TL0
(8 bits)
TR0
Crossbar
GATE0
/INT0
290
Rev. 1.2
TF1
TR1
TF0
TR0
IE1
IT1
IE0
IT0
Interrupt
Interrupt
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 24.4. TCON: Timer Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
TF1
TR1
TF0
TR0
IE1
IT1
IE0
IT0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: 0x88
SFR Page: 0
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
TF1: Timer 1 Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when Timer 1 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 1 interrupt service routine.
0: No Timer 1 overflow detected.
1: Timer 1 has overflowed.
TR1: Timer 1 Run Control.
0: Timer 1 disabled.
1: Timer 1 enabled.
TF0: Timer 0 Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when Timer 0 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 0 interrupt service routine.
0: No Timer 0 overflow detected.
1: Timer 0 has overflowed.
TR0: Timer 0 Run Control.
0: Timer 0 disabled.
1: Timer 0 enabled.
IE1: External Interrupt 1.
This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT1 is detected. It can be
cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External Interrupt 1 service routine if IT1 = 1. This flag is the inverse of the /INT1 signal.
IT1: Interrupt 1 Type Select.
This bit selects whether the configured /INT1 interrupt will be falling-edge sensitive or
active-low.
0: /INT1 is level triggered, active-low.
1: /INT1 is edge triggered, falling-edge.
IE0: External Interrupt 0.
This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT0 is detected. It can be
cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External Interrupt 0 service routine if IT0 = 1. This flag is the inverse of the /INT0 signal.
IT0: Interrupt 0 Type Select.
This bit selects whether the configured /INT0 interrupt will be falling-edge sensitive or
active-low.
0: /INT0 is level triggered, active logic-low.
1: /INT0 is edge triggered, falling-edge.
Rev. 1.2
291
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 24.5. TMOD: Timer Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
GATE1
C/T1
T1M1
T1M0
GATE0
C/T0
T0M1
T0M0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x89
SFR Page: 0
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bits5-4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bits1-0:
292
GATE1: Timer 1 Gate Control.
0: Timer 1 enabled when TR1 = 1 irrespective of /INT1 logic level.
1: Timer 1 enabled only when TR1 = 1 AND /INT1 = logic 1.
C/T1: Counter/Timer 1 Select.
0: Timer Function: Timer 1 incremented by clock defined by T1M bit (CKCON.4).
1: Counter Function: Timer 1 incremented by high-to-low transitions on external input pin
(T1).
T1M1-T1M0: Timer 1 Mode Select.
These bits select the Timer 1 operation mode.
T1M1
0
0
T1M0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Mode
Mode 0: 13-bit counter/timer
Mode 1: 16-bit counter/timer
Mode 2: 8-bit counter/timer with autoreload
Mode 3: Timer 1 inactive
GATE0: Timer 0 Gate Control.
0: Timer 0 enabled when TR0 = 1 irrespective of /INT0 logic level.
1: Timer 0 enabled only when TR0 = 1 AND /INT0 = logic 1.
C/T0: Counter/Timer Select.
0: Timer Function: Timer 0 incremented by clock defined by T0M bit (CKCON.3).
1: Counter Function: Timer 0 incremented by high-to-low transitions on external input pin
(T0).
T0M1-T0M0: Timer 0 Mode Select.
These bits select the Timer 0 operation mode.
T0M1
0
0
T0M0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Mode
Mode 0: 13-bit counter/timer
Mode 1: 16-bit counter/timer
Mode 2: 8-bit counter/timer with autoreload
Mode 3: Two 8-bit counter/timers
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 24.6. CKCON: Clock Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
-
-
-
T1M
T0M
-
SCA1
SCA0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address: 0x8E
SFR Page: 0
Bits7-5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bits1-0:
UNUSED. Read = 000b, Write = don’t care.
T1M: Timer 1 Clock Select.
This select the clock source supplied to Timer 1. T1M is ignored when C/T1 is set to logic 1.
0: Timer 1 uses the clock defined by the prescale bits, SCA1-SCA0.
1: Timer 1 uses the system clock.
T0M: Timer 0 Clock Select.
This bit selects the clock source supplied to Timer 0. T0M is ignored when C/T0 is set to
logic 1.
0: Counter/Timer 0 uses the clock defined by the prescale bits, SCA1-SCA0.
1: Counter/Timer 0 uses the system clock.
UNUSED. Read = 0b, Write = don’t care.
SCA1-SCA0: Timer 0/1 Prescale Bits
These bits control the division of the clock supplied to Timer 0 and/or Timer 1 if configured
to use prescaled clock inputs.
SCA1
0
0
1
1
†Note:
SCA0
0
1
0
1
Prescaled Clock
System clock divided by 12
System clock divided by 4
System clock divided by 48
External clock divided by 8†
External clock divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock, and external clock must
be less than or equal to the system clock frequency to operate the timer in this mode.
Rev. 1.2
293
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 24.7. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0x8A
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte.
The TL0 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 0
Figure 24.8. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0x8B
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte.
The TL1 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 1.
Figure 24.9. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0x8C
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: TH0: Timer 0 High Byte.
The TH0 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 0.
Figure 24.10. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
SFR Address: 0x8D
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: TH1: Timer 1 High Byte.
The TH1 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 1.
294
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
24.2. Timer 2, Timer 3, and Timer 4
Timers 2, 3, and 4 are 16-bit counter/timers, each formed by two 8-bit SFRs: TMRnL (low byte) and
TMRnH (high byte) where n = 2, 3, and 4 for timers 2, 3, and 4 respectively. These timers feature autoreload, capture, and toggle output modes with the ability to count up or down. Capture Mode and Autoreload mode are selected using bits in the Timer 2, 3, and 4 Control registers (TMRnCN). Toggle output
mode is selected using the Timer 2, 3, and 4 Configuration registers (TMRnCF). These timers may also be
used to generate a square-wave at an external pin. Timers 2, 3, and 4 can use either the system clock
(divided by one, two, or twelve), external clock (divided by eight) or transitions on an external input pin as
its clock source. Timer 2 and 3 can be used to start an ADC Data Conversion and Timers 2, 3, and 4 can
schedule DAC outputs. Timers 1, 2, 3, or 4 may be used to generate baud rates for UART 0. Only Timer 1
can be used to generate baud rates for UART 1.
The Counter/Timer Select bit C/Tn bit (TMRnCN.1) configures the peripheral as a counter or timer. Clearing C/Tn configures the Timer to be in a timer mode (i.e., the selected timer clock source as the input for
the timer). When C/Tn is set to 1, the timer is configured as a counter (i.e., high-to-low transitions at the Tn
input pin increment (or decrement) the counter/timer register. Refer to Section “18.1. Ports 0 through 3 and
the Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 205 for information on selecting and configuring external I/O pins
for digital peripherals, such as the Tn pin.
Timer 2, 3, and 4 can use either SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 2, SYSCLK divided by 12, an external clock
divided by 8, or high-to-low transitions on the Tn input pin as its clock source when operating in Counter/
Timer with Capture mode. Clearing the C/Tn bit (TnCON.1) selects the system clock/external clock as the
input for the timer. The Timer Clock Select bits TnM0 and TnM1 in TMRnCF can be used to select the system clock undivided, system clock divided by two, system clock divided by 12, or an external clock provided at the XTAL1/XTAL2 pins divided by 8 (see Figure 24.14). When C/Tn is set to logic 1, a high-to-low
transition at the Tn input pin increments the counter/timer register (i.e., configured as a counter).
24.2.1. Configuring Timer 2, 3, and 4 to Count Down
Timers 2, 3, and 4 have the ability to count down. When the timer’s respective Decrement Enable Bit
(DCENn) in the Timer Configuration Register (See Figure 24.14) is set to ‘1’, the timer can then count up or
down. When DCENn = 1, the direction of the timer’s count is controlled by the TnEX pin’s logic level. When
TnEX = 1, the counter/timer will count up; when TnEX = 0, the counter/timer will count down. To use this
feature, TnEX must be enabled in the digital crossbar and configured as a digital input.
Note: When DCENn = 1, other functions of the TnEX input (i.e., capture and auto-reload) are not
available. TnEX will only control the direction of the timer when DCENn = 1.
Rev. 1.2
295
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
24.2.2. Capture Mode
In Capture Mode, Timer 2, 3, and 4 will operate as a 16-bit counter/timer with capture facility. When the
Timer External Enable bit (found in the TMRnCN register) is set to ‘1’, a high-to-low transition on the TnEX
input pin causes the 16-bit value in the associated timer (THn, TLn) to be loaded into the capture registers
(RCAPnH, RCAPnL). If a capture is triggered in the counter/timer, the Timer External Flag (TMRnCN.6)
will be set to ‘1’ and an interrupt will occur if the interrupt is enabled. See Section “13.3. Interrupt Handler”
on page 151 for further information concerning the configuration of interrupt sources.
As the 16-bit timer register increments and overflows TMRnH:TMRnL, the TFn Timer Overflow/Underflow
Flag (TMRnCN.7) is set to ‘1’ and an interrupt will occur if the interrupt is enabled. The timer can be configured to count down by setting the Decrement Enable Bit (TMRnCF.0) to ‘1’. This will cause the timer to
decrement with every timer clock/count event and underflow when the timer transitions from 0x0000 to
0xFFFF. Just as in overflows, the Overflow/Underflow Flag (TFn) will be set to ‘1’, and an interrupt will
occur if enabled.
Counter/Timer with Capture mode is selected by setting the Capture/Reload Select bit CP/RLn
(TMRnCN.0) and the Timer 2, 3, and 4 Run Control bit TRn (TnCON.2) to logic 1. The Timer 2, 3, and 4
respective External Enable EXENn (TnCON.3) must also be set to logic 1 to enable a captures. If EXENn
is cleared, transitions on TnEX will be ignored.
Figure 24.11. T2, 3, and 4 Capture Mode Block Diagram
TMRnCF
TTTTD
n nOnC
MMG O E
1 0 nEN
Toggle Logic
2
12
External Clock
(XTAL1)
Tn
0xFF
TMRnL
TMRnH
RCAPnL
RCAPnH
0
8
OVF
1
TCLK
Crossbar
TRn
EXENn
TnEX
296
Tn
(Port Pin)
1
TMRnCN
SYSCLK
0xFF
0
Capture
Crossbar
Rev. 1.2
CP/RLn
C/Tn
TRn
EXENn
EXFn
TFn
Interrupt
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
24.2.3. Auto-Reload Mode
In Auto-Reload Mode, the counter/timer can be configured to count up or down and cause an interrupt/flag
to occur upon an overflow/underflow event. When counting up, the counter/timer will set its overflow/underflow flag (TFn) and cause an interrupt (if enabled) upon overflow/underflow, and the values in the Reload/
Capture Registers (RCAPnH and RCAPnL) are loaded into the timer and the timer is restarted. When the
Timer External Enable Bit (EXENn) bit is set to ‘1’ and the Decrement Enable Bit (DCENn) is ‘0’, a falling
edge (‘1’-to-‘0’ transition) on the TnEX pin (configured as an input in the digital crossbar) will cause a timer
reload (in addition to timer overflows causing auto-reloads). When DCENn is set to ‘1’, the state of the
TnEX pin controls whether the counter/timer counts up (increments) or down (decrements), and will not
cause an auto-reload or interrupt event. See Section 24.2.1 for information concerning configuration of a
timer to count down.
When counting down, the counter/timer will set its overflow/underflow flag (TFn) and cause an interrupt (if
enabled) when the value in the timer (TMRnH and TMRnL registers) matches the 16-bit value in the
Reload/Capture Registers (RCAPnH and RCAPnL). This is considered an underflow event, and will cause
the timer to load the value 0xFFFF. The timer is automatically restarted when an underflow occurs.
Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload mode is selected by clearing the CP/RLn bit. Setting TRn to logic 1
enables and starts the timer.
In Auto-Reload Mode, the External Flag (EXFn) toggles upon every overflow or underflow and does not
cause an interrupt. The EXFn flag can be thought of as the most significant bit (MSB) of a 17-bit counter.
.
Figure 24.12. T2, 3, and 4 Auto-reload Mode Block Diagram
TMRnCF
TTTTD
n nOnC
MMG O E
1 0 nEN
Toggle Logic
0
2
12
SYSCLK
External Clock
(XTAL1)
0xFF
TMRnL
TMRnH
RCAPnL
RCAPnH
0
8
1
TCLK
Crossbar
TRn
EXENn
Reload
TnEX
Tn
(Port Pin)
1
Crossbar
OVF
TMRnCN
Tn
0xFF
CP/RLn
C/Tn
TRn
EXENn
EXFn
TFn
Interrupt
SMBus
(Timer 4 Only)
Rev. 1.2
297
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
24.2.4. Toggle Output Mode
Timer 2, 3, and 4 have the capability to toggle the state of their respective output port pins (T2, T3, or T4)
to produce a 50% duty cycle waveform output. The port pin state will change upon the overflow or underflow of the respective timer (depending on whether the timer is counting up or down). The toggle frequency
is determined by the clock source of the timer and the values loaded into RCAPnH and RCAPnL. When
counting DOWN, the auto-reload value for the timer is 0xFFFF, and underflow will occur when the value in
the timer matches the value stored in RCAPnH:RCAPnL. When counting UP, the auto-reload value for the
timer is RCAPnH:RCAPnL, and overflow will occur when the value in the timer transitions from 0xFFFF to
the reload value.
To output a square wave, the timer is placed in reload mode (the Capture/Reload Select Bit in TMRnCN
and the Timer/Counter Select Bit in TMRnCN are cleared to ‘0’). The timer output is enabled by setting the
Timer Output Enable Bit in TMRnCF to ‘1’. The timer should be configured via the timer clock source and
reload/underflow values such that the timer overflow/underflows at 1/2 the desired output frequency. The
port pin assigned by the crossbar as the timer’s output pin should be configured as a digital output (see
Section “18. Port Input/Output” on page 203). Setting the timer’s Run Bit (TRn) to ‘1’ will start the toggle of
the pin. A Read/Write of the Timer’s Toggle Output State Bit (TMRnCF.2) is used to read the state of the
toggle output, or to force a value of the output. This is useful when it is desired to start the toggle of a pin in
a known state, or to force the pin into a desired state when the toggle mode is halted.
Equation 24.1. Toggle Mode Square Wave Frequency
F TCLK
F sq = ---------------------------------------------------2 ⋅ ( 65536 – RCAPn )
298
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 24.13. TMRnCN: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Control Registers
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
TFn
EXFn
-
-
EXENn
TRn
C/Tn
CP/RLn
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit
Addressable
SFR Address: TMR2CN: 0xC8; TMR3CN: 0xC8; TMR4CN: 0xC8
SFR Page: TMR2CN: page 0; TMR3CN: page 1; TMR4CN: page 2
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5-4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
TFn: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Overflow/Underflow Flag.
Set by hardware when either the Timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, underflows from
the value placed in RCAPnH:RCAPnL to 0XFFFF (in Auto-reload Mode), or underflows from
0x0000 to 0xFFFF (in Capture Mode). When the Timer interrupt is enabled, setting this bit
causes the CPU to vector to the Timer interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically
cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
EXFn: Timer 2, 3, and 4 External Flag.
Set by hardware when either a capture or reload is caused by a high-to-low transition on the
TnEX input pin and EXENn is logic 1. When the Timer interrupt is enabled, setting this bit
causes the CPU to vector to the Timer Interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically
cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
Reserved.
EXENn: Timer 2, 3, and 4 External Enable.
Enables high-to-low transitions on TnEX to trigger captures, reloads, and control the direction of the timer/counter (up or down count). If DCENn = 1, TnEX will determine if the timer
counts up or down when in Auto-reload Mode. If EXENn = 1, TnEX should be configured as
a digital input.
0: Transitions on the TnEX pin are ignored.
1: Transitions on the TnEX pin cause capture, reload, or control the direction of timer count
(up or down) as follows:
Capture Mode: ‘1’-to-’0’ Transition on TnEX pin causes RCAPnH:RCAPnL to capture timer
value.
Auto-Reload Mode:
DCENn = 0: ‘1’-to-’0’ transition causes reload of timer and sets the EXFn Flag.
DCENn = 1: TnEX logic level controls direction of timer (up or down).
TRn: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Run Control.
This bit enables/disables the respective Timer.
0: Timer disabled.
1: Timer enabled and running/counting.
C/Tn: Counter/Timer Select.
0: Timer Function: Timer incremented by clock defined by TnM1:TnM0
(TMRnCF.4:TMRnCF.3).
1: Counter Function: Timer incremented by high-to-low transitions on external input pin.
CP/RLn: Capture/Reload Select.
This bit selects whether the Timer functions in capture or auto-reload mode.
0: Timer is in Auto-Reload Mode.
1: Timer is in Capture Mode.
Rev. 1.2
299
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 24.14. TMRnCF: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Configuration Registers
-
-
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
TnM1
TnM0
TOGn
TnOE
DCENn
00000000
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
SFR Address: TMR2CF: 0xC9; TMR3CF: 0xC9; TMR4CF: 0xC9
SFR Page TMR2CF: page 0; TMR3CF: page 1; TMR4CF: page 2
Bit7-5:
Bit4-3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
300
Reserved.
TnM1 and TnM0: Timer Clock Mode Select Bits.
Bits used to select the Timer clock source. The sources can be the System Clock
(SYSCLK), SYSCLK divided by 2 or 12, or an external clock signal routed to Tn (port pin)
divided by 8. Clock source is selected as follows:
00: SYSCLK/12
01: SYSCLK
10: EXTERNAL CLOCK/8
11: SYSCLK/2
TOGn: Toggle output state bit.
When timer is used to toggle a port pin, this bit can be used to read the state of the output, or
can be written to in order to force the state of the output.
TnOE: Timer output enable bit.
This bit enables the timer to output a 50% duty cycle output to the timer’s assigned external
port pin.
NOTE: A timer is configured for Square Wave Output as follows:
CP/RLn = 0
C/Tn = 0
TnOE = 1
Load RCAPnH:RCAPnL (See “Toggle Mode Square Wave Frequency” on page 298.)
Configure Port Pin to output squarewave (See Section “18. Port Input/Output” on page 203)
0: Output of toggle mode not available at Timers’s assigned port pin.
1: Output of toggle mode available at Timers’s assigned port pin.
DCENn: Decrement Enable Bit.
This bit enables the timer to count up or down as determined by the state of TnEX.
0: Timer will count up, regardless of the state of TnEX.
1: Timer will count up or down depending on the state of TnEX as follows:
if TnEX = 0, the timer counts DOWN
if TnEX = 1, the timer counts UP.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 24.15. RCAPnL: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Capture Register Low Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
SFR Address: RCAP2L: 0xCA; RCAP3L: 0xCA; RCAP4L: 0xCA
SFR Page: RCAP2L: page 0; RCAP3L: page 1; RCAP4L: page 2
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bits 7-0: RCAP2, 3, and 4L: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Capture Register Low Byte.
The RCAP2, 3, and 4L register captures the low byte of Timer 2, 3, and 4 when Timer 2, 3,
and 4 is configured in capture mode. When Timer 2, 3, and 4 is configured in auto-reload
mode, it holds the low byte of the reload value.
Figure 24.16. RCAPnH: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Capture Register High Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
SFR Address: RCAP2H: 0xCB; RCAP3H: 0xCB; RCAP4H: 0xCB
SFR Page: RCAP2H: page 0; RCAP3H: page 1; RCAP4H: page 2
Bits 7-0: RCAP2, 3, and 4H: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Capture Register High Byte.
The RCAP2, 3, and 4H register captures the high byte of Timer 2, 3, and 4 when Timer 2, 3,
and 4 is configured in capture mode. When Timer 2, 3, and 4 is configured in auto-reload
mode, it holds the high byte of the reload value.
Figure 24.17. TMRnL: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Low Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
SFR Address: TMR2L: 0xCC; TMR3L: 0xCC; TMR4L: 0xCC
SFR Page: TMR2L: page 0; TMR3L: page 1; TMR4L: page 2
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Reset Value
00000000
Bits 7-0: TL2, 3, and 4: Timer 2, 3, and 4 Low Byte.
The TL2, 3, and 4 register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 2, 3, and 4
Rev. 1.2
301
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 24.18. TMRnH: Timer 2, 3, and 4 High Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
SFR Address: TMR2H: 0xCD; TMR3H: 0xCD; TMR4H: 0xCD
SFR Page: TMR2H: page 0; TMR3H: page 1; TMR4H: page 2
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bits 7-0: TH2, 3, and 4: Timer 2, 3, and 4 High Byte.
The TH2, 3, and 4 register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 2, 3, and 4
302
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25.
Programmable Counter Array
The Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) provides enhanced timer functionality while requiring less CPU
intervention than the standard 8051 counter/timers. PCA0 consists of a dedicated 16-bit counter/timer and
six 16-bit capture/compare modules. Each capture/compare module has its own associated I/O line
(CEXn) which is routed through the Crossbar to Port I/O when enabled (See Section “18.1. Ports 0 through
3 and the Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 205). The counter/timer is driven by a programmable timebase that can select between six inputs as its source: system clock, system clock divided by four, system
clock divided by twelve, the external oscillator clock source divided by 8, Timer 0 overflow, or an external
clock signal on the ECI line. Each capture/compare module may be configured to operate independently in
one of six modes: Edge-Triggered Capture, Software Timer, High-Speed Output, Frequency Output, 8-Bit
PWM, or 16-Bit PWM (each is described in Section 25.2). The PCA is configured and controlled through
the system controller's Special Function Registers. The basic PCA block diagram is shown in Figure 25.1.
Figure 25.1. PCA Block Diagram
SYSCLK/12
SYSCLK/4
Timer 0 Overflow
ECI
SYSCLK
PCA
CLOCK
MUX
16-Bit Counter/Timer
External Clock/8
Capture/Compare
Module 0
Capture/Compare
Module 1
Capture/Compare
Module 2
Capture/Compare
Module 3
Capture/Compare
Module 4
Capture/Compare
Module 5
CEX5
CEX4
CEX3
CEX2
CEX1
CEX0
ECI
Crossbar
Port I/O
Rev. 1.2
303
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25.1. PCA Counter/Timer
The 16-bit PCA counter/timer consists of two 8-bit SFRs: PCA0L and PCA0H. PCA0H is the high byte
(MSB) of the 16-bit counter/timer and PCA0L is the low byte (LSB). Reading PCA0L automatically latches
the value of PCA0H into a “snapshot” register; the following PCA0H read accesses this “snapshot” register.
Reading the PCA0L Register first guarantees an accurate reading of the entire 16-bit PCA0 counter. Reading PCA0H or PCA0L does not disturb the counter operation. The CPS2-CPS0 bits in the PCA0MD register select the timebase for the counter/timer as shown in Table 25.1.
When the counter/timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the Counter Overflow Flag (CF) in PCA0MD is
set to logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CF interrupts are enabled. Setting the ECF bit in
PCA0MD to logic 1 enables the CF flag to generate an interrupt request. The CF bit is not automatically
cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by software (Note: PCA0 interrupts must be globally enabled before CF interrupts are recognized. PCA0 interrupts are globally enabled by setting the EA bit (IE.7) and the EPCA0 bit in EIE1 to logic 1). Clearing the
CIDL bit in the PCA0MD register allows the PCA to continue normal operation while the CPU is in Idle
mode.
CPS2
0
0
0
CPS1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
Table 25.1. PCA Timebase Input Options
CPS0
Timebase
0
System clock divided by 12
1
System clock divided by 4
0
Timer 0 overflow
High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock divided
1
by 4)
0
System clock
External oscillator source divided by 8 (synchronized with sys1
tem clock)
Figure 25.2. PCA Counter/Timer Block Diagram
IDLE
PCA0MD
CWW
I D D
D T L
L E C
K
C
P
S
2
C
P
S
1
CE
PC
SF
0
PCA0CN
CCC
FRC
F
5
C
C
F
4
C
C
F
3
C
C
F
2
C
C
F
1
C
C
F
0
To SFR Bus
PCA0L
read
Snapshot
Register
SYSCLK/12
SYSCLK/4
Timer 0 Overflow
ECI
SYSCLK
External Clock/8
304
000
001
010
0
011
1
PCA0H
PCA0L
Overflow
To PCA Interrupt System
CF
100
101
To PCA Modules
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25.2. Capture/Compare Modules
Each module can be configured to operate independently in one of six operation modes: Edge-triggered
Capture, Software Timer, High Speed Output, Frequency Output, 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator, or 16-Bit
Pulse Width Modulator. Each module has Special Function Registers (SFRs) associated with it in the CIP51 system controller. These registers are used to exchange data with a module and configure the module's
mode of operation.
Table 25.2 summarizes the bit settings in the PCA0CPMn registers used to select the PCA0 capture/compare module’s operating modes. Setting the ECCFn bit in a PCA0CPMn register enables the module's
CCFn interrupt. Note: PCA0 interrupts must be globally enabled before individual CCFn interrupts are recognized. PCA0 interrupts are globally enabled by setting the EA bit (IE.7) and the EPCA0 bit (EIE1.3) to
logic 1. See Figure 25.3 for details on the PCA interrupt configuration.
Table 25.2. PCA0CPM Register Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules
PWM16 ECOM CAPP CAPN
MAT
TOG
PWM ECCF
X
X
1
0
0
0
0
X
X
X
0
1
0
0
0
X
X
X
1
1
0
0
0
X
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
X
0
0
X
X
X
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
X = Don’t Care
Operation Mode
Capture triggered by positive edge on
CEXn
Capture triggered by negative edge on
CEXn
Capture triggered by transition on
CEXn
Software Timer
High Speed Output
Frequency Output
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator
Figure 25.3. PCA Interrupt Block Diagram
(for n = 0 to 5)
PCA0CPMn
P EC
WCA
MOP
1 MP
6 n n
n
CMT P E
A AOWC
P TGMC
N n n n F
n
n
PCA0CN
CCC
FRC
F
5
C
C
F
4
C
C
F
3
C
C
F
2
C
C
F
1
PCA0MD
C
C
F
0
C
I
D
L
C
P
S
2
C
P
S
1
CE
PC
S F
0
0
PCA Counter/
Timer Overflow
1
ECCF0
EPCA0
(EIE.3)
0
PCA Module 0
0
1
1
EA
(IE.7)
0
1
Interrupt
Priority
Decoder
ECCF1
0
PCA Module 1
1
ECCF2
0
PCA Module 2
1
ECCF3
0
PCA Module 3
1
ECCF4
0
PCA Module 4
1
ECCF5
PCA Module 5
0
1
Rev. 1.2
305
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25.2.1. Edge-triggered Capture Mode
In this mode, a valid transition on the CEXn pin causes PCA0 to capture the value of the PCA0 counter/
timer and load it into the corresponding module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPLn and
PCA0CPHn). The CAPPn and CAPNn bits in the PCA0CPMn register are used to select the type of transition that triggers the capture: low-to-high transition (positive edge), high-to-low transition (negative edge),
or either transition (positive or negative edge). When a capture occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn)
in PCA0CN is set to logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CCF interrupts are enabled. The CCFn
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and
must be cleared by software.
Figure 25.4. PCA Capture Mode Diagram
PCA Interrupt
PCA0CPMn
0
Port I/O
Crossbar
CEXn
PCA0CN
CCCCCCCC
FRCCCCCC
FFFFFF
5 4 3 2 1 0
(to CCFn)
P ECCMT P E
WC A A AOWC
MOPP TGMC
1 MP N n n n F
6 n n n
n
n
1
PCA0CPLn
PCA0CPHn
Capture
0
1
PCA
Timebase
PCA0L
PCA0H
Note: The signal at CEXn must be high or low for at least 2 system clock cycles in order to be valid.
306
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25.2.2. Software Timer (Compare) Mode
In Software Timer mode, the PCA0 counter/timer is compared to the module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn). When a match occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in PCA0CN
is set to logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CCF interrupts are enabled. The CCFn bit is not
automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be
cleared by software. Setting the ECOMn and MATn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables Software
Timer mode.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit
to ‘0’; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to ‘1’.
Figure 25.5. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram
Write to
PCA0CPLn
0
ENB
Reset
Write to
PCA0CPHn
PCA
Interrupt
ENB
1
PCA0CPMn
PCA0CN
P ECCMT P E
WC A A AOWC
MOPP TGMC
1 MP N n n n F
6 n n n
n
n
x
0 0
PCA0CPLn
CCCCCCCC
FRCCCCCC
FFFFFF
5 4 3 2 1 0
PCA0CPHn
0 0 x
Enable
16-bit Comparator
PCA
Timebase
PCA0L
Rev. 1.2
Match
0
1
PCA0H
307
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25.2.3. High Speed Output Mode
In High Speed Output mode, a module’s associated CEXn pin is toggled each time a match occurs
between the PCA Counter and the module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPHn and
PCA0CPLn) Setting the TOGn, MATn, and ECOMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables the HighSpeed Output mode.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit
to ‘0’; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to ‘1’.
Figure 25.6. PCA High Speed Output Mode Diagram
Write to
PCA0CPLn
0
ENB
Reset
Write to
PCA0CPHn
PCA0CPMn
P ECCMT P E
WC A A A OWC
MOPP TGMC
1 MP N n n n F
6 n n n
n
n
ENB
1
x
0 0
PCA
Interrupt
0 x
PCA0CN
PCA0CPLn
Enable
CCCCCCCC
FRCCCCCC
FFFFFF
5 4 3 2 1 0
PCA0CPHn
Match
16-bit Comparator
1
Toggle
PCA
Timebase
308
0
TOGn
0 CEXn
1
PCA0L
PCA0H
Rev. 1.2
Crossbar
Port I/O
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25.2.4. Frequency Output Mode
Frequency Output Mode produces a programmable-frequency square wave on the module’s associated
CEXn pin. The capture/compare module high byte holds the number of PCA clocks to count before the output is toggled. The frequency of the square wave is then defined by Equation 25.1.
Equation 25.1. Square Wave Frequency Output
F PCA
F sqr = ---------------------------------------2 × PCA0CPHn
Note: A value of 0x00 in the PCA0CPHn register is equal to 256 for this equation.
Where FPCA is the frequency of the clock selected by the CPS2-0 bits in the PCA mode register, PCA0MD.
The lower byte of the capture/compare module is compared to the PCA0 counter low byte; on a match,
CEXn is toggled and the offset held in the high byte is added to the matched value in PCA0CPLn. Frequency Output Mode is enabled by setting the ECOMn, TOGn, and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit
to ‘0’; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to ‘1’.
Figure 25.7. PCA Frequency Output Mode
PCA0CPMn
P ECCMT P E
WC A A AOWC
MOPP TGMC
1 MP N n n n F
6 n n n
n
n
0
0 0 0 1
PCA0CPLn
8-bit Adder
Adder
Enable
Toggle
0
Enable
PCA Timebase
8-bit
Comparator
match
PCA0CPHn
TOGn
0 CEXn
1
Crossbar
Port I/O
PCA0L
Rev. 1.2
309
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25.2.5. 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode
Each module can be used independently to generate pulse width modulated (PWM) outputs on its associated CEXn pin. The frequency of the output is dependent on the timebase for the PCA0 counter/timer. The
duty cycle of the PWM output signal is varied using the module's PCA0CPLn capture/compare register.
When the value in the low byte of the PCA0 counter/timer (PCA0L) is equal to the value in PCA0CPLn, the
output on the CEXn pin will be high. When the count value in PCA0L overflows, the CEXn output will be
low (see Figure 25.8). Also, when the counter/timer low byte (PCA0L) overflows from 0xFF to 0x00,
PCA0CPLn is reloaded automatically with the value stored in the counter/timer's high byte (PCA0H) without software intervention. Setting the ECOMn and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables 8-Bit
Pulse Width Modulator mode. The duty cycle for 8-Bit PWM Mode is given by Equation 25.2.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit
to ‘0’; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to ‘1’.
Equation 25.2. 8-Bit PWM Duty Cycle
256 – PCA0CPHn -)
DutyCycle = (-------------------------------------------------256
Figure 25.8. PCA 8-Bit PWM Mode Diagram
PCA0CPHn
PCA0CPMn
P ECCMT P E
WC A A AOWC
MOPP TGMC
1 MP N n n n F
6 n n n
n
n
0
0 0 0 0
PCA0CPLn
0
Enable
8-bit
Comparator
match
S
R
PCA Timebase
310
PCA0L
SET
CLR
Overflow
Rev. 1.2
Q
Q
CEXn
Crossbar
Port I/O
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25.2.6. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode
Each PCA0 module may also be operated in 16-Bit PWM mode. In this mode, the 16-bit capture/compare
module defines the number of PCA0 clocks for the low time of the PWM signal. When the PCA0 counter
matches the module contents, the output on CEXn is asserted high; when the counter overflows, CEXn is
asserted low. To output a varying duty cycle, new value writes should be synchronized with PCA0 CCFn
match interrupts. 16-Bit PWM Mode is enabled by setting the ECOMn, PWMn, and PWM16n bits in the
PCA0CPMn register. For a varying duty cycle, CCFn should also be set to logic 1 to enable match interrupts. The duty cycle for 16-Bit PWM Mode is given by Equation 25.3.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit
to ‘0’; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to ‘1’.
Equation 25.3. 16-Bit PWM Duty Cycle
65536 – PCA0CPn )DutyCycle = (---------------------------------------------------65536
Figure 25.9. PCA 16-Bit PWM Mode
PCA0CPMn
P ECCMT P E
WC A A AOWC
MOPP TGMC
1 MP N n n n F
6 n n n
n
n
1
0 0 0 0
PCA0CPHn
PCA0CPLn
0
Enable
match
16-bit Comparator
S
R
PCA Timebase
PCA0H
PCA0L
SET
CLR
Q
CEXn
Crossbar
Port I/O
Q
Overflow
Rev. 1.2
311
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
25.3. Register Descriptions for PCA0
Following are detailed descriptions of the special function registers related to the operation of PCA0.
Figure 25.10. PCA0CN: PCA Control Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
CF
CR
CCF5
CCF4
CCF3
CCF2
CCF1
CCF0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
312
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD8
SFR Page: 0
CF: PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when the PCA0 Counter/Timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When
the Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the CF interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and
must be cleared by software.
CR: PCA0 Counter/Timer Run Control.
This bit enables/disables the PCA0 Counter/Timer.
0: PCA0 Counter/Timer disabled.
1: PCA0 Counter/Timer enabled.
CCF5: PCA0 Module 5 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the CCF interrupt service routine. This
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
CCF4: PCA0 Module 4 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the CCF interrupt service routine. This
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
CCF3: PCA0 Module 3 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the CCF interrupt service routine. This
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
CCF2: PCA0 Module 2 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the CCF interrupt service routine. This
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
CCF1: PCA0 Module 1 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the CCF interrupt service routine. This
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
CCF0: PCA0 Module 0 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the CCF interrupt service routine. This
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 25.11. PCA0MD: PCA0 Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
CIDL
-
-
-
CPS2
CPS1
CPS0
ECF
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit7:
Bits6-4:
Bits3-1:
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xD9
SFR Page: 0
CIDL: PCA0 Counter/Timer Idle Control.
Specifies PCA0 behavior when CPU is in Idle Mode.
0: PCA0 continues to function normally while the system controller is in Idle Mode.
1: PCA0 operation is suspended while the system controller is in Idle Mode.
UNUSED. Read = 000b, Write = don't care.
CPS2-CPS0: PCA0 Counter/Timer Pulse Select.
These bits select the timebase source for the PCA0 counter
CPS2
0
0
0
CPS1
0
0
1
CPS0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Timebase
System clock divided by 12
System clock divided by 4
Timer 0 overflow
High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock
divided by 4)
System clock
External clock divided by 8†
Reserved
Reserved
Bit0:
ECF: PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable.
This bit sets the masking of the PCA0 Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt.
0: Disable the CF interrupt.
1: Enable a PCA0 Counter/Timer Overflow interrupt request when CF (PCA0CN.7) is set.
†Note:
External clock divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock, and external clock must
be less than or equal to the system clock frequency to operate in this mode.
Rev. 1.2
313
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 25.12. PCA0CPMn: PCA0 Capture/Compare Mode Registers
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
PWM16n
ECOMn
CAPPn
CAPNn
MATn
TOGn
PWMn
ECCFn
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
PCA0CPM0: 0xDA, PCA0CPM1: 0xDB, PCA0CPM2: 0xDC, PCA0CPM3: 0xDD, PCA0CPM4: 0xDE, PCA0CPM5:
SFR Address:
0xDF
PCA0CPM0: page 0, PCA0CPM1: page 0, PCA0CPM2: page 0, PCA0CPM3: 0, PCA0CPM4: page 0, PCA0CPM5:
SFR Page:
page 0
Bit7:
Bit6:
Bit5:
Bit4:
Bit3:
Bit2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
314
PWM16n: 16-bit Pulse Width Modulation Enable.
This bit selects 16-bit mode when Pulse Width Modulation mode is enabled (PWMn = 1).
0: 8-bit PWM selected.
1: 16-bit PWM selected.
ECOMn: Comparator Function Enable.
This bit enables/disables the comparator function for PCA0 module n.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
CAPPn: Capture Positive Function Enable.
This bit enables/disables the positive edge capture for PCA0 module n.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
CAPNn: Capture Negative Function Enable.
This bit enables/disables the negative edge capture for PCA0 module n.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
MATn: Match Function Enable.
This bit enables/disables the match function for PCA0 module n. When enabled, matches of
the PCA0 counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the CCFn bit in PCA0MD
register to be set to logic 1.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
TOGn: Toggle Function Enable.
This bit enables/disables the toggle function for PCA0 module n. When enabled, matches of
the PCA0 counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the logic level on the
CEXn pin to toggle. If the PWMn bit is also set to logic 1, the module operates in Frequency
Output Mode.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
PWMn: Pulse Width Modulation Mode Enable.
This bit enables/disables the PWM function for PCA0 module n. When enabled, a pulse
width modulated signal is output on the CEXn pin. 8-bit PWM is used if PWM16n is logic 0;
16-bit mode is used if PWM16n logic 1. If the TOGn bit is also set, the module operates in
Frequency Output Mode.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
ECCFn: Capture/Compare Flag Interrupt Enable.
This bit sets the masking of the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) interrupt.
0: Disable CCFn interrupts.
1: Enable a Capture/Compare Flag interrupt request when CCFn is set.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 25.13. PCA0L: PCA0 Counter/Timer Low Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xF9
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: PCA0L: PCA0 Counter/Timer Low Byte.
The PCA0L register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit PCA0 Counter/Timer.
Figure 25.14. PCA0H: PCA0 Counter/Timer High Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit0
SFR Address: 0xFA
SFR Page: 0
Bits 7-0: PCA0H: PCA0 Counter/Timer High Byte.
The PCA0H register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit PCA0 Counter/Timer.
Rev. 1.2
315
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 25.15. PCA0CPLn: PCA0 Capture Module Low Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
PCA0CPL0: 0xFB, PCA0CPL1: 0xFD, PCA0CPL2: 0xE9, PCA0CPL3: 0xEB, PCA0CPL4: 0xED, PCA0CPL5:
SFR Address:
0xE1
PCA0CPL0: page 0, PCA0CPL1: page 0, PCA0CPL2: page 0, PCA0CPL3: page 0, PCA0CPL4: page 0,
SFR Page:
PCA0CPL5: page 0
\
Bits7-0:
PCA0CPLn: PCA0 Capture Module Low Byte.
The PCA0CPLn register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit capture module n.
Figure 25.16. PCA0CPHn: PCA0 Capture Module High Byte
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
PCA0CPH0: 0xFC, PCA0CPH1: 0xFD, PCA0CPH2: 0xEA, PCA0CPH3: 0xEC, PCA0CPH4: 0xEE, PCA0CPH5:
SFR Address:
0xE2
PCA0CPH0: page 0, PCA0CPH1: page 0, PCA0CPH2: page 0, PCA0CPH3: page 0, PCA0CPH4: page 0,
SFR Page:
PCA0CPH5: page 0
Bits7-0:
316
PCA0CPHn: PCA0 Capture Module High Byte.
The PCA0CPHn register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit capture module n.
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
26.
JTAG (IEEE 1149.1)
Each MCU has an on-chip JTAG interface and logic to support boundary scan for production and in-system testing, Flash read/write operations, and non-intrusive in-circuit debug. The JTAG interface is fully
compliant with the IEEE 1149.1 specification. Refer to this specification for detailed descriptions of the Test
Interface and Boundary-Scan Architecture. Access of the JTAG Instruction Register (IR) and Data Registers (DR) are as described in the Test Access Port and Operation of the IEEE 1149.1 specification.
The JTAG interface is accessed via four dedicated pins on the MCU: TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO.
Through the 16-bit JTAG Instruction Register (IR), any of the eight instructions shown in Figure 26.1 can
be commanded. There are three DR’s associated with JTAG Boundary-Scan, and four associated with
Flash read/write operations on the MCU.
Figure 26.1. IR: JTAG Instruction Register
Reset Value
0x0000
Bit15
IR Value
Bit0
Instruction
Description
Selects the Boundary Data Register for control and observability of all
0x0000
EXTEST
device pins
SAMPLE/
Selects the Boundary Data Register for observability and presetting the
0x0002
PRELOAD
scan-path latches
0x0004
IDCODE
Selects device ID Register
0xFFFF
BYPASS
Selects Bypass Data Register
Selects FLASHCON Register to control how the interface logic responds
0x0082 Flash Control
to reads and writes to the FLASHDAT Register
0x0083
Flash Data
Selects FLASHDAT Register for reads and writes to the Flash memory
Selects FLASHADR Register which holds the address of all Flash read,
0x0084 Flash Address
write, and erase operations
Selects FLASHSCL Register which controls the Flash one-shot timer and
0x0085
Flash Scale
read-always enable
Rev. 1.2
317
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
26.1. Boundary Scan
The DR in the Boundary Scan path is a 126-bit shift register for the C8051F060/2/4/6 and a 118-bit shift
register for the C8051F061/3/5/7. The Boundary DR provides control and observability of all the device
pins as well as the SFR bus and Weak Pullup feature via the EXTEST and SAMPLE commands.
Table 26.1. Boundary Data Register Bit Definitions (C8051F060/2/4/6)
EXTEST provides access to both capture and update actions, while Sample only performs a capture.
Bit
Action Target
0
Capture Reset Enable from MCU
Update Reset Enable to /RST pin
1
Capture Reset Input from /RST pin
Update Not used
2
Capture CAN RX Output Enable to pin
Update CAN RX Output Enable to pin
3
Capture CAN RX Input from pin
Update CAN RX Output to pin
4
Capture CAN TX Output Enable to pin
Update CAN TX Output Enable to pin
5
Capture CAN TX Input from pin
Update CAN TX Output to pin
6
Capture External Clock from XTAL1 pin
Update Not used
7
Capture Weak Pullup Enable from MCU
Update Weak Pullup Enable to Port Pins
8, 10, 12, 14, 16, Capture P0.n output enable from MCU (e.g. Bit 8 = P0.0, Bit 10 = P0.1, etc.)
18, 20, 22
Update P0.n output enable to pin (e.g. Bit 8 = P0.0oe, Bit 10 = P0.1oe, etc.)
9, 11, 13, 15, 17, Capture P0.n input from pin (e.g. Bit 9 = P0.0, Bit 11 = P0.1, etc.)
19, 21, 23
Update P0.n output to pin (e.g. Bit 9 = P0.0, Bit 11 = P0.1, etc.)
24, 26, 28, 30, 32, Capture P1.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
34, 36, 38
Update P1.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
25, 27, 29, 31, 33, Capture P1.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
35, 37, 39
Update P1.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
40, 42, 44, 46, 48, Capture P2.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
50, 52, 54
Update P2.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
41, 43, 45, 47, 49, Capture P2.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
51, 53, 55
Update P2.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
56, 58, 60, 62, 64, Capture P3.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
66, 68, 70
Update P3.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
57, 59, 61, 63, 65, Capture P3.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
67, 69, 71
Update P3.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
72, 74, 76
Capture P4.5, P4.6, P4.7 (respectively) output enable from MCU
Update P4.5, P4.6, P4.7 (respectively) output enable to pin
73, 75, 77
Capture P4.5, P4.6, P4.7 (respectively) input from pin
Update P4.5, P4.6, P4.7 (respectively) output to pin
78, 80, 82, 84, 86, Capture P5.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
88, 90, 92
Update P5.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
318
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 26.1. Boundary Data Register Bit Definitions (C8051F060/2/4/6) (Continued)
EXTEST provides access to both capture and update actions, while Sample only performs a capture.
Bit
Action Target
79, 81, 83, 85, 87, Capture P5.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
89, 91, 93
Update P5.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
94, 96, 98, 100, Capture P6.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
102, 104, 106, 108 Update P6.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
95, 97, 99, 101, Capture P6.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
103, 105, 107, 109 Update P6.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
110, 112, 114, 116, Capture P7.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
118, 120, 122, 124 Update P7.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
111, 113, 115, 117, Capture P7.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
119, 121, 123, 125 Update P7.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
Rev. 1.2
319
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 26.2. Boundary Data Register Bit Definitions (C8051F061/3/5/7)
EXTEST provides access to both capture and update actions, while Sample only performs a capture.
Bit
Action Target
0
Capture Not used
Update Not used
1
Capture Not used
Update Not used
2
Capture CAN RX Output Enable to pin
Update CAN RX Output Enable to pin
3
Capture CAN RX Input from pin
Update CAN RX Output to pin
4
Capture CAN TX Output Enable to pin
Update CAN TX Output Enable to pin
5
Capture CAN TX Input from pin
Update CAN TX Output to pin
6
Capture External Clock from XTAL1 pin
Update Not used
7
Capture Weak Pullup Enable from MCU
Update Weak Pullup Enable to Port Pins
8, 10, 12, 14, 16, Capture P0.n output enable from MCU (e.g. Bit 8 = P0.0, Bit 10 = P0.1, etc.)
18, 20, 22
Update P0.n output enable to pin (e.g. Bit 8 = P0.0oe, Bit 10 = P0.1oe, etc.)
9, 11, 13, 15, 17, Capture P0.n input from pin (e.g. Bit 9 = P0.0, Bit 11 = P0.1, etc.)
19, 21, 23
Update P0.n output to pin (e.g. Bit 9 = P0.0, Bit 11 = P0.1, etc.)
24, 26, 28, 30, 32, Capture P1.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
34, 36, 38
Update P1.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
25, 27, 29, 31, 33, Capture P1.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
35, 37, 39
Update P1.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
40, 42, 44, 46, 48, Capture P2.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
50, 52, 54
Update P2.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
41, 43, 45, 47, 49, Capture P2.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
51, 53, 55
Update P2.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
56, 58, 60, 62, 64, Capture P3.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
66, 68, 70
Update P3.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
57, 59, 61, 63, 65, Capture P3.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
67, 69, 71
Update P3.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)
72
Capture Reset Enable from MCU
Update Reset Enable to /RST pin
73
Capture Reset Input from /RST pin
Update Not used
74, 76, 78, 80, 82, Capture P5.0, P5.1, P5.2, P5.3, P5.5, P5.7 (respectively) output enable from
84
MCU†
Update P5.0, P5.1, P5.2, P5.3, P5.5, P5.7 (respectively) output enable to pin†
75, 77, 79, 81, 83, Capture P5.0, P5.1, P5.2, P5.3, P5.5, P5.7 (respectively) input from pin†
85
Update P5.0, P5.1, P5.2, P5.3, P5.5, P5.7 (respectively) output to pin†
86, 88, 90, 92, 94, Capture P6.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)†
96, 98, 100
Update P6.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)†
320
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Table 26.2. Boundary Data Register Bit Definitions (C8051F061/3/5/7) (Continued)
EXTEST provides access to both capture and update actions, while Sample only performs a capture.
Bit
Action Target
87, 89, 91, 93, 95, Capture P6.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)†
97, 99, 101
Update P6.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)†
102, 104, 106,
Capture P7.n output enable from MCU (follows P0.n numbering scheme)†
108, 110, 112, 114, Update P7.n output enable to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)†
116
103, 105, 107,
Capture P7.n input from pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)†
109, 111, 113, 115, Update P7.n output to pin (follows P0.n numbering scheme)†
117
† Not connected to pins in this device package.
26.1.1. EXTEST Instruction
The EXTEST instruction is accessed via the IR. The Boundary DR provides control and observability of all
the device pins as well as the Weak Pullup feature. All inputs to on-chip logic are set to logic 1.
26.1.2. SAMPLE Instruction
The SAMPLE instruction is accessed via the IR. The Boundary DR provides observability and presetting of
the scan-path latches.
26.1.3. BYPASS Instruction
The BYPASS instruction is accessed via the IR. It provides access to the standard JTAG Bypass data register.
26.1.4. IDCODE Instruction
The IDCODE instruction is accessed via the IR. It provides access to the 32-bit Device ID register.
Figure 26.2. DEVICEID: JTAG Device ID Register
Reset Value
Version
Bit31
Part Number
Bit28 Bit27
Manufacturer ID
Bit12 Bit11
1
Bit1
0xn0006243
Bit0
Version = 0000b
Part Number = 0000 0000 0000 0110b (C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7)
Manufacturer ID = 0010 0100 001b (Silicon Labs)
Rev. 1.2
321
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
26.2. Flash Programming Commands
The Flash memory can be programmed directly over the JTAG interface using the Flash Control, Flash
Data, Flash Address, and Flash Scale registers. These Indirect Data Registers are accessed via the JTAG
Instruction Register. Read and write operations on indirect data registers are performed by first setting the
appropriate DR address in the IR register. Each read or write is then initiated by writing the appropriate
Indirect Operation Code (IndOpCode) to the selected data register. Incoming commands to this register
have the following format:
19:18
17:0
IndOpCode
WriteData
IndOpCode: These bit set the operation to perform according to the following table:
IndOpCode
0x
10
11
Operation
Poll
Read
Write
The Poll operation is used to check the Busy bit as described below. Although a Capture-DR is performed,
no Update-DR is allowed for the Poll operation. Since updates are disabled, polling can be accomplished
by shifting in/out a single bit.
The Read operation initiates a read from the register addressed by the DRAddress. Reads can be initiated
by shifting only 2 bits into the indirect register. After the read operation is initiated, polling of the Busy bit
must be performed to determine when the operation is complete.
The write operation initiates a write of WriteData to the register addressed by DRAddress. Registers of any
width up to 18 bits can be written. If the register to be written contains fewer than 18 bits, the data in WriteData should be left-justified, i.e. its MSB should occupy bit 17 above. This allows shorter registers to be
written in fewer JTAG clock cycles. For example, an 8-bit register could be written by shifting only 10 bits.
After a Write is initiated, the Busy bit should be polled to determine when the next operation can be initiated. The contents of the Instruction Register should not be altered while either a read or write operation is
busy.
Outgoing data from the indirect Data Register has the following format:
19
18:1
0
0
ReadData
Busy
The Busy bit indicates that the current operation is not complete. It goes high when an operation is initiated
and returns low when complete. Read and Write commands are ignored while Busy is high. In fact, if polling for Busy to be low will be followed by another read or write operation, JTAG writes of the next operation
can be made while checking for Busy to be low. They will be ignored until Busy is read low, at which time
the new operation will initiate. This bit is placed at bit 0 to allow polling by single-bit shifts. When waiting for
a Read to complete and Busy is 0, the following 18 bits can be shifted out to obtain the resulting data.
ReadData is always right-justified. This allows registers shorter than 18 bits to be read using a reduced
number of shifts. For example, the results from a byte-read requires 9 bit shifts (Busy + 8 bits).
322
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 26.3. FLASHCON: JTAG Flash Control Register
Reset Value
SFLE
WRMD2
WRMD1
WRMD0
RDMD3
RDMD2
RDMD1
RDMD0
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
00000000
This register determines how the Flash interface logic will respond to reads and writes to the
FLASHDAT Register.
Bit7:
Bits6-4:
Bits3-0:
SFLE: Scratchpad Flash Memory Access Enable
When this bit is set, Flash reads and writes through the JTAG port are directed to the 128byte Scratchpad Flash sector. When SFLE is set to logic 1, Flash accesses out of the
address range 0x00-0x7F should not be attempted. Reads/Writes out of this range will yield
undefined results.
0: Flash access from JTAG directed to the Program/Data Flash sector.
1: Flash access from JTAG directed to the Scratchpad sector.
WRMD2-0: Write Mode Select Bits.
The Write Mode Select Bits control how the interface logic responds to writes to the FLASHDAT Register per the following values:
000:
A FLASHDAT write replaces the data in the FLASHDAT register, but is otherwise
ignored.
001:
A FLASHDAT write initiates a write of FLASHDAT into the memory address by the
FLASHADR register. FLASHADR is incremented by one when complete.
010:
A FLASHDAT write initiates an erasure (sets all bytes to 0xFF) of the Flash page
containing the address in FLASHADR. The data written must be 0xA5 for the erase to occur.
FLASHADR is not affected. If FLASHADR = 0x7BFE - 0x7BFF, the entire user space will be
erased (i.e. entire Flash memory except for Reserved area 0x7C00 - 0x7FFF).
(All other values for WRMD2-0 are reserved.)
RDMD3-0: Read Mode Select Bits.
The Read Mode Select Bits control how the interface logic responds to reads to the FLASHDAT Register per the following values:
0000: A FLASHDAT read provides the data in the FLASHDAT register, but is otherwise
ignored.
0001: A FLASHDAT read initiates a read of the byte addressed by the FLASHADR register
if no operation is currently active. This mode is used for block reads.
0010: A FLASHDAT read initiates a read of the byte addressed by FLASHADR only if no
operation is active and any data from a previous read has already been read from FLASHDAT. This mode allows single bytes to be read (or the last byte of a block) without initiating
an extra read.
(All other values for RDMD3-0 are reserved.)
Rev. 1.2
323
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Figure 26.5. FLASHADR: JTAG Flash Address Register
Reset Value
0x0000
Bit15
Bit0
This register holds the address for all JTAG Flash read, write, and erase operations. This register autoincrements
after each read or write, regardless of whether the operation succeeded or failed.
Bits15-0: Flash Operation 16-bit Address.
Figure 26.4. FLASHDAT: JTAG Flash Data Register
Reset Value
0000000000
Bit9
Bit0
This register is used to read or write data to the Flash memory across the JTAG interface.
Bits9-2:
Bit1:
Bit0:
324
DATA7-0: Flash Data Byte.
FAIL: Flash Fail Bit.
0: Previous Flash memory operation was successful.
1: Previous Flash memory operation failed. Usually indicates the associated memory location was locked.
BUSY: Flash Busy Bit.
0: Flash interface logic is not busy.
1: Flash interface logic is processing a request. Reads or writes while BUSY = 1 will not initiate another operation
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
26.3. Debug Support
Each MCU has on-chip JTAG and debug logic that provides non-intrusive, full speed, in-circuit debug support using the production part installed in the end application, via the four pin JTAG I/F. Silicon Labs' debug
system supports inspection and modification of memory and registers, breakpoints, and single stepping.
No additional target RAM, program memory, or communications channels are required. All the digital and
analog peripherals are functional and work correctly (remain synchronized) while debugging. The Watchdog Timer (WDT) is disabled when the MCU is halted during single stepping or at a breakpoint.
The C8051F060DK is a development kit with all the hardware and software necessary to develop application code and perform in-circuit debug with each MCU in the C8051F06x family. Each kit includes development software for the PC, a Serial Adapter (for connection to JTAG) and a target application board with a
C8051F060 installed. Serial cables and wall-mount power supply are also included.
Rev. 1.2
325
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
326
Rev. 1.2
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Document Change List
Revision 1.1 to Revision 1.2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Added four part numbers: C8051F064, C8051F065, C8051F066, and C8051F067.
Modified all sections to describe functionality of the four new parts.
Revised and expanded Flash Chapter with clearer descriptions of Flash security features.
UART0 Chapter, Section 22.3: “FE0 in register SCON0” changed to “FE0 in register SSTA0”.
UART0 Chapter: Updated and clarified baud rate equations.
Port I/O Chapter, Section 18.2: Added a note in text body that Port 4-7 registers are all on SFR Page F.
Comparators Chapter: Updated Table 12.1 “Comparator Electrical Characteristics”.
CIP51 Chapter: Section 13.4.1: Added note regarding IDLE mode operation.
ADC2 Chapter: AD2LJST bit removed from ADC2CF register description (AD2LJST is in the ADC2CN
register).
ADC2 Chapter: Updated Table 7.1 “ADC2 Electrical Characteristics” and Figure 7.2 “Temperature Sensor Transfer Function” with temperature sensor information.
ADC0/ADC1 Chapter: Tracking/Conversion timing when ADnTM = 1 is shown in Figure 5.4 and Table
5.1. References to “18” or “16” SAR clocks of tracking were removed.
DACs Chapter, Table 8.1 “DAC Electrical Characteristics”: Changed “Gain Error” to “Full-Scale Error”.
SMBus Chapter, Figure 20.9 SMB0CR: Changed “1.125” to “1.125 * 10^6”.
PCA Chapter, Figure 25.12 PCA0CPMn: Bit 0 name changed to “ECCFn” (from incorrect “EECFn”).
JTAG Chapter, Figure 26.3 FLASHCON: Bit 7 description corrected. Bit 7 is SFLE, allowing access to
the Scratchpad memory area.
CAN Chapter: Added text “The CAN controller’s clock (fsys, or CAN_CLK in the C_CAN User’s Guide)
is equal to the CIP-51 MCU’s clock (SYSCLK).”
Table 4.1 “Pin Descriptions”, MONEN: Added text “Recommended configuration is to connect directly
to VDD.”
Timers Chapter: All references to “DCEN” and “DECEN” corrected to “DCENn”.
Timers Chapter, Equation 24.1: Equation was corrected to “Fsq = Ftclk / (2*(65536-RCAPn))”. This
equation is valid for a timer counting up or down.
Timers Chapter, Figure 24.14 TMRnCF: Corrected Bit 1 description. For square-wave output, CP/RLn
= 0, C/Tn = 0, TnOE = 1.
VREF Chapters: Added VREF Power Supply Current to VREF Electrical Characteristics Tables.
PCA Chapter: Added Note about writing PCA0CPLn and PCA0CPHn to sections for SW Timer Mode,
High-Speed Output Mode, Frequency Output Mode, 8-bit PWM Mode, and 16-bit PWM Mode.
Oscillators Chapter, Table 15.1 “Internal Oscillator Electrical Characteristics”: Updated typical supply
current.
Table 3.1 “Global DC Electrical Characteristics”, Updated supply current numbers with additional characterization data.
ADC0/ADC1 Chapter: Table 5.2 “ADC0 and ADC1 Electrical Characteristics”, Updated supply current
numbers with additional characterization data.
ADC0/ADC1 Chapter: Table 5.3 “Voltage Reference 0 and 1 Electrical Characteristics”, Updated Output Voltage numbers with characterization data.
Figure 4.3 “TQFP-100 Package Drawing”, Added “L” Dimension.
Figure 4.6 “TQFP-64 Package Drawing”, Added “L” Dimension.
Rev. 1.2
327
C8051F060/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Contact Information
Silicon Laboratories Inc.
4635 Boston Lane
Austin, TX 78735
Tel: 1+(512) 416-8500
Fax: 1+(512) 416-9669
Toll Free: 1+(877) 444-3032
Email: [email protected]
Internet: www.silabs.com
The information in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects at the time of publication but is subject to change without
notice. Silicon Laboratories assumes no responsibility for errors and omissions, and disclaims responsibility for any consequences
resulting from the use of information included herein. Additionally, Silicon Laboratories assumes no responsibility for the functioning of undescribed features or parameters. Silicon Laboratories reserves the right to make changes without further notice. Silicon
Laboratories makes no warranty, representation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose,
nor does Silicon Laboratories assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit, and specifically
disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental damages. Silicon Laboratories products are
not designed, intended, or authorized for use in applications intended to support or sustain life, or for any other application in which
the failure of the Silicon Laboratories product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur. Should Buyer
purchase or use Silicon Laboratories products for any such unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall indemnify and
hold Silicon Laboratories harmless against all claims and damages.
Silicon Laboratories and Silicon Labs are trademarks of Silicon Laboratories Inc.
Other products or brandnames mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders
328
Rev. 1.2